Category Archives: House

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Sydney Myofascial Release Centre

At the Sydney Myofascial Release Centre we use Core Body Therapy, a complete system of bodywork that treats musculoskeletal pain and dysfunction with myofascial release, deep tissue massage, stretching techniques, craniosacral therapy, trigger point therapy and PEMF Therapy. It is a grounded, scientific, structural approach to the body that also encompasses emotional and spiritual aspects.

Book an appointment now

Health fund rebates available.

Crows Nest Clinic

Chris is at our Crows Nest clinic on Tuesdays, Thursdays, Fridays & Saturdays.

Suite 101, 7-11 Clarke Street
Crows Nest NSW 2065

Chris was one of my teachers during my Diploma of Remedial Massage study in 2004. In the first lesson, Chris started explaining that myofascial work can impact not only the physical, but the emotional and spiritual realms. I was the sceptic up the back, only just out of a university course that was based on hard science, and now, here was a system that claimed to work on the body as a whole (not just the ‘physical’ system).
By the end of the lesson, I had a huge physical and emotional release by working on one muscle alone, and. quite simply. I was hooked. Chris opened my eyes from the onset of the possibilities of this work, how profound it can be. This start, all the way back in my first lesson, has fueled an exciting journey for me that I still explore today as a Physiotherapist.
As a Physio, I still refer clients to Chris, and continue to drop in for my own treatments. He has a great understanding of the body, mechanical and otherwise and is so open to learning/exploring and the possibility of change that all sorts of results can be achieved. It takes a very gifted person to bridge both worlds of practitioner and teacher so effortlessly.

Liz Noad, Physiotherapist

I have known Chris O’Brien for 12 years, I have completed 102 hours of training with Chris. I owe my success as a Professional Body Worker to Chris’s methods of teaching. The proof is the number of clients who have walked through my door over the past 12 years. I would have to say he is my mentor. Chris conducts his classes with integrity, clarity, patience and in a professional manner. His knowledge and skills are demonstrated for all to comprehend. I would not hesitate to recommend his training methods to new recruits in the massage industry.

The massage training courses offered by Chris O’Brien at Core Body Therapy provide extensive training in myofascial release. Working directly with muscles, joints, and the fascia (the body’s connective tissue), myofascial release is the foundation of an advanced bodywork practice that creates fundamental change within the human body, with minimal physical impact on the practitioner and maximum positive effect on the client.

COURSES COMING UP

Module 1 – Core Myofascial Release

Core Myofascial Release is the foundation training in this advanced system of bodywork. The principle being to directly work with the fascia (the bodys connective tissue), muscles and joints to create fundamental change.

Learn the fundamental elements and philosophy of Myofascial Release through this hands-on introductory course.

The focus of this training is to effectively assess & treat musculoskeletal pain using powerful techniques for the shoulder girdle/neck, lower back & pelvis that produce immediate positive results for your clients.

8 Month Hands-On Massage Therapy Training

As Massage Therapy continues to grow in popularity, qualified massage therapists are in demand now more than ever before – which makes it an exciting time for you to build a bright future in this rewarding, healing profession!

Become a Qualified Massage Therapist

The Massage Therapy Training Program is ideal for individuals ready to launch fulfilling, flexible careers as massage therapists.

As an NHI student you’ll gain real-world experience treating the public in our on-campus massage training clinics. You’ll also be personally mentored by a dedicated team of experienced massage professionals. Having direct client experience and personalized support in our program will fully prepare you to make a smooth transition from student to massage professional.

NHI recognizes everyone learns differently. Our programs employ multiple methods of teaching including Audio, Visual and Kinesthetic, to support you in learning the material you need to be a successful massage therapist.

Skills include the following Western massage modalities:

  • Swedish
  • Deep Tissue
  • Lymphatic Massage
  • Sports Massage
  • Prenatal Massage
  • Aromatherapy & Spa Life
  • Hot Stone Massage

As well as Eastern modalities:

  • Shiatsu
  • Traditional Chinese Medicine
  • Hand & Foot Reflexology
  • Acupressure
  • Energy Work
  • Rocking & Shaking
  • Thai Massage

In addition to comprehensive massage therapy training, as an NHI student you’ll also receive practical business training to help turn your passion for massage into a successful, lasting career. Learn to build your client base, manage your time and even be your own boss.

Click on any class name in the graphic or list below to learn more.

Hot Stone Massage

Aromatherapy & Spa Life

Deep Tissue Massage

Hand & Foot Reflexology

Traditional Chinese Medicine

Ethics & Practitioner Issues

Convenient Morning, Afternoon & Evening Schedules

This program is designed to fit the needs of busy adult learners. We understand the lives our students lead, and how important it is to have balance. Many students are working, taking care of family and/or juggling other commitments while they attend school. Choose the schedule that best fits your lifestyle.

  • The full-time program can be completed in 8 months
  • The part-time program can be completed in 10 months or 12 months

Get Ongoing Career Support

You will have access to a Student Life and Career Counselor to support you each step of the way, from the first day of class and throughout your career (even long after you graduate).

As a leader in massage therapy education for over 40 years we have a large network of employers, many of whom are NHI graduates, and other contacts that we use to help you thrive as a massage therapy professional.

I compared my experiences with NHI with my esthetician school. There was no comparison – the NHI Program – the whole ‘mentor’, ‘senior’, ‘juniors’, intergroup competitions, group identity and pride, the whole experience, was designed beautifully. Not to mention the amazingly passionate, well-informed and interested educators on staff. As a result, my former group mates are still some of my closest friends.

Sarah Donnelly, NHI Graduate with Honors

Career Opportunities

NHI graduates enter the field with confidence, knowing they have the skills it takes to build the career they want. You will learn skills that allow you to run your own practice. You may choose to work full or part-time in a variety of exciting professional settings, such as:

  • Athletic Teams
  • Marathons & Sporting Events
  • Health Clubs & Fitness Centers
  • Wellness Centers
  • Natural Food & Health Stores
  • Rehabilitation Centers
  • Massage Clinics

Professional

  • Corporate
  • Hospitals
  • Medical Offices
  • Chiropractic
  • Physical Therapy

Luxury Lifestyle

  • Spas
  • Resorts
  • Cruise Lines
  • Upscale & Boutique Hotels

Entrepreneurial

  • Own Your Own Business as a sole practitioner
  • Provide on-site Chair Massage at offices, airports, retail locations, public and private events

We wholeheartedly believe that being a well-trained massage therapist gives you the ability to improve your life, career and community in ways that will make you and the people around you happier and more fulfilled.

Do What You Love!

Is a Rewarding Career in Massage Therapy Right for You?
Get More Info…

If you’re interested in learning more about careers in Massage Therapy and exploring whether NHI is right for you, fill out the form on this page and receive more information.

For immediate questions, please call 800.315.3552.

Do You Have Previous Massage or Healthcare Experience?

If you have prior massage training or healthcare experience in fields such as physical therapy, chiropractic, nursing, athletic training or other related fields. Check out the Advanced Neuromuscular Therapy Program.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

The Institute for Therapeutic Massage prepares students for success in the workplace

History of ITM: Innovators in Therapeutic Massage Education

The Institute for Therapeutic Massage was established in Pompton Lakes in 1994 by Lisa Helbig, LMT (Licensed Massage Therapist), and was quickly approved by the New Jersey Department of Education. Classes began in 1995; in April of 2001, the school became accredited by the Commission on Massage Therapy Accreditation (COMTA) – the only specialized accreditor recognized by the United States Department of Education (DOE) with a primary focus on massage education, and helping students become massage therapists.

Our Tinton Falls, New Jersey, Monmouth County location, was added in 1999, and our first hospital-based training program was started in 2000 at the University of Medicine and Dentistry of New Jersey (UMDNJ-Newark, Essex County). We have since opened 2 more hospital-based programs, with our Morristown Memorial Hospital location opening in 2002, Morris County and Community Medical Center, in Toms River, Ocean County, an affiliate of the Saint Barnabus Health Care System, starting in March of 2006.

In 2008, the Pompton Lakes campus moved to Haskell / Wanaque, New Jersey, Passaic County, in which we have classroom, clinic, and personal training space spread across 2 floors of the building for those who are interested in learning to become a massage therapist, personal trainer, or shiatsu practitioner. We also began offering classes at New Vista Rehabilitation Center in Newark, New Jersey, Essex County. As of 2011, those classes are being held in Newark Extended Care (NEC), which is our most recent massage school location.

With our core program in place, we then went on to develop a hospital-based Medical Massage Program with both the University of Medicine & Dentistry of New Jersey – Newark, and Morristown Memorial Hospital. This is an advanced program for massage therapists to master the art and science of medically-based massage while working with doctors and nurses in an active teaching hospital. Participants in this program will gain valuable hands-on experience, and learn to provide massage therapy to actual patients. Students were now able to learn massage in a true medical setting – one of the fastest-growing and most important aspects of massage therapy.

Type of Programs

Along with our core Massage and Bodywork Program, ITM also offers a Massage Therapy and Personal Training Program, an East-West Massage Program, the Oncology Massage Certification Program (OMCP), a Clinical Massage Therapy Program, a hospital-based Orthopedic Massage program, and over 35 different continuing education classes, where therapists have the opportunity to earn CEU’s.

While the Massage and Bodywork Program helps students learn Swedish, medical, and other hands on massage forms, the Massage Therapy and Personal Training Program adds another dimension by developing cross-trained health and wellness professionals. The East-West MassageProgram is designed to advance the knowledge and skill-sets previously learned in the Massage and Bodywork Program and place emphasis on eastern massage philosophies and Shiatsu techniques.

Who Studies at ITM

The Institute for Therapeutic Massage is proud to see that students come to our massage school from virtually all walks of life to learn massage therapy. Students range in age from 18 to retirement, male and female, on job hiatus or with a full-time career. The atmosphere at the school is conducive to study, and the staff is very much focused on providing a well-rounded, supportive and gratifying learning experience for those motivated to achieve the highest standards of performance within the massage, spa, health & wellness profession.

ITM Today

As massage therapists, we know about the many rewards and potential challenges in being a part of the health and wellness industry, and strive to pass this experience along to our students. We want to prepare them for their lives as bodywork professionals through lecture, hands-on, and real world applications. To do this, ITM maintains a low student-to-faculty ratio in the hands-on and didactic / live-lecture classes to give our students the maximum instructional effectiveness and individual attention and support that they deserve. While it is a trend in the industry to offer online learning to help lower costs, we feel that the live interaction, and ability to get questions answered immediately is part of what helps set us apart, or what we refer to as ‘The ITM Difference’.

We are also fully committed to developing advanced course-work and continuing education offerings so as to provide our students with the most current practical, theoretical, scientific, and ethical foundations of massage-based healthcare.

Massage Therapy Video

Spring Semester 2022 Information Sessions

Please click the following link to view the digital Information Session PowerPoint (.pptx).
In-person information sessions will be held on the following dates:
  • Thursday, February 3rd at 12:30p in Union Hall 145
  • Wednesday, March 2nd at 5:30p in Union Hall 145
  • Thursday, March 31st at 12:30p in Union Hall 145
  • Wednesday, April 27th at 5:30p in Union Hall 145
RSVP to Program Coordinator Tiffany Dowling at [email protected] with date and time you plan to attend, or reach out with any questions about the program or to start your application process.

In September 1997, the Massage Therapy Program (Certificate Program) began at Columbus State Community College. In August 1999, the Ohio Board of Regents approved an Associates of Applied Science in Massage Therapy. The first class of graduates from the Associates of Applied Science degree program consisted of four students in September 2000.

Successful completion of the Massage Therapy Program meets all requirements for graduates to sit for the Massage & Bodywork Licensing Examination (MBLEx) for massage therapy given by the Federation of State Massage Therapy Boards (FSMTB). A passing score on the MBLEx allows the graduate to apply for a license to practice massage therapy in Ohio via the State Medical Board of Ohio (SMBO). In Ohio, licensure from the SMBO is required for massage therapy employment.

Since January 2012 when Ohio adopted the MBLEx as its licensure exam, 95.3% of Columbus State Community College – Massage Therapy Program graduates that have taken the exam, have passed on their first attempt. The pass-rate currently for the State of Ohio is 81.1% and the national pass-rate is 73.1%.

The program prepares students for careers in the massage therapy field including health and fitness environments, salon and day spas, medical offices, private practices, and many other areas of opportunity. The Massage Therapy Program is part of Allied Health Professions under the direction of Tywan Banks in the Health & Human Services Division.

Program Accreditation & Licensure

The State Medical Board of Ohio approves the core curriculum taught at Columbus State Community College. Massage Therapists in Ohio are required to be licensed by the State Medical Board of Ohio (SMBO) as a practitioner of a Limited Branch of Medicine.

According to various sections of the Ohio Revised Code and requirements for certifying and licensing boards, persons convicted of a felony or misdemeanor may not be eligible for licensure OR may have restrictions placed on their ability to practice massage therapy. Successful completion of any of the massage therapy programs at Columbus State Community College does NOT guarantee licensure by the SMBO or any other licensing or certifying body. In Ohio, each case is handled on an individual basis by the State Medical Board of Ohio after a candidate applies for licensure.

Programs and Certificates

Job Placement

Columbus State Community College does not guarantee job placement for graduates. For assistance with resume writing, job searching, and other career related services, please check out the Columbus State Career Services page.

Course saved!

You can compare up to courses.

You can compare more courses.

Compare limit reached!

To save more courses you will need to unsave some courses in your dashboard.

Quick facts

Student type:

Quick facts

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Entry score

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Duration

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Location

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Next intake

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Entry score

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Duration

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Location

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Next intake

Sorry, this program is not available for local students.

Please contact us for more information.

Sorry, this program is not available for international students intending to study on a student visa.

If you hold a different visa type, you may be eligible. Please contact us for more information.

Overview

Your career as a myotherapist

This advanced diploma is tailored to provide specific knowledge and practical skills to train you to become an industry-accredited myotherapist.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Why study myotherapy at RMIT?

Extend your skills as a massage therapist when you deepen your assessment of the musculoskeletal system and inherent movement patterns, and earn advanced treatment techniques like myofascial dry needling.

Global and industry experience

RMIT’s strong industry connections allow students to work with elite athletes and performers, such as the National Institute of Circus Arts and the Australian Ballet.

Learn through our teaching clinic

This course is taught out of the RMIT Student Massage and Myotherapy clinics, offering treatments to RMIT staff, students and the public. Through this and other work placements, you will receive supervised training, making you work-ready at graduation.

Professionally recognised training

Your advanced diploma is recognised by more than 10 professional organisations, including Myotherapy Association Australia, Massage and Myotherapy Australia, and Association of Massage Therapists. On graduating, you will be able to register with private health insurers and WorkCover.

What you will study

You’ll develop advanced techniques to treat myofascial pain, joint pain, and neuropathic pain from the nervous system.

You’ll deepen your understanding of the musculoskeletal system and inherent movement patterns.

You’ll apply clinical reasoning to uncover the underlying causes of pain, develop palpation skills, and perform refined movement assessments, functional movement analysis, and neurodynamic testing.

Core competencies include:

  • myofascial dry needling, functional movement and corrective exercises
  • advanced hands-on techniques for treatment of a range of conditions
  • clinical knowledge in assessment procedures, protocols and planning
  • how to implement current research in your everyday practice

How you will learn

The RMIT myotherapy teaching clinic gives you the opportunity to experience a simulated work environment, observing and practicing under the supervision of qualified staff.

Assessment consists of successful completion of all assessment activities as well as classroom, project and industry participation. It may also take place in a simulated work situation.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

RMIT’s industry focus and emphasis on practical skills put me ahead. More than just reaching me the theory behind myotherapy, the hands-on experience allows me to become good at what I do.

Adam Rose, Advanced Diploma of Remedial Massage (Myotherapy)

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Industry-focused education

RMIT is renowned for its focus on industry-based, practical learning. This approach is exemplified in our complementary medicine programs.

Strong relationships with industry leaders ensure that our programs and facilities are relevant to contemporary workplaces.

These industry links also enable us to provide students with experiences that make them highly sought after by employers, including work placements, industry projects, mentoring, and opportunities to work with partner organisations overseas.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Details

This program may change for 2022 due to the revision of the National Training Package.

Through this course you’ll develop advanced techniques to treat myofascial, joint and neuropathic pain from the nervous system.

You’ll increase your skills with treatment methods, including deep tissue modalities, myofascial techniques, trigger-point therapy, dynamic cupping, dry needling, neurodynamic mobilisation, prescriptive and rehabilitation exercises, joint mobilisation, and pain management techniques.

With a focus on practical applications, you will enhance your client consultation practices, develop preventive management plans, and use evidence-based treatment protocols.

At RMIT’s teaching clinic, you’ll be able to apply your practical skills and learn advanced business techniques needed to manage staff and run your own practice.

You will also have the opportunity to undertake a placement with one of RMIT’s industry partners.

Your first appointment with our team includes an assessment, at no additional cost, to discuss your needs and your goals for massage. It’s also an opportunity to discuss any concerns regarding training, recurring problems, recovery acceleration, conditioning or performance, to make sure we can deliver targeted, effective therapy.

Dressing down will be familiar if you have had Sports Massage before. If you feel uncomfortable with this, we would recommend you bring in your shorts or gym top to change into, or we can provide you with a full-length gown if you’d prefer. Just talk to our experienced team.

Sports Massage is delivered by our Physiotherapy and Osteopathy Team and those with advanced qualifications in Sports Massage.

Romain Mallett

Romain competed at a high level in both Volleyball and Football and has excellent knowledge of sport, training and rehab and applies his deep understanding to a variety of sports to Elite Level .

With his Masters Degree in Sports and Teaching, Romain has amassed considerable experience and delivers Sports Massage with a focus. Romain is presently furthering his skills and knowledge studying for his Master Degree in Osteopathy so can provide his patients with comprehensive care at all levels of their ability and performance.

Giulia Schinzari

Giulia is another one of our Sports Massage therapy team and joins us on Monday mornings and Thursday afternoons and evenings. She has an exceptional understanding of sports-specific massages for swimming, diving, athletics, basketball, handball and Circuit Training.

Giulia is also a Fitness Instructor and Personal Trainer so besides her excellent massage skills can help a wide variety of issues encountered in training, conditioning, sports, injury recovery, and competition.

Please contact us directly if you have any queries or need to discuss specific requirements.

Only those who have requested inclusion are shown.

  • Covid-19 Update
  • Find a Therapist

Only those who have requested inclusion are shown.

MTAS Registered Massage Therapists all have a foundational knowledge in soft tissue assessment and treatment. This enables our therapists to provide relief for many common conditions including:

Find a Member Therapist

Search Results

Rose Melnychuk

Clinics

Crossroads Chiropractic and Massage

  • 15 – 5875 Rochdale Blvd., Regina, SK
  • http://www.crossroadschiro.ca
  • 306-205-7777

Rose Melnychuk RMT

  • 170 Markwell Drive, Regina, SK
  • http://www.crossroadschiro.ca
  • 306-529-8143

Advanced Education In

Massage for People Living with Cancer

Colleen Bodnarchuk

Clinics

Colleen Bodnarchuk Massage Therapy

  • 403-928-6103

Kristi Ens

Clinics

Movement Chiropractic

  • 306-244-6121

Advanced Education In

Other Services

Direct bill to 3rd party insurer (may be limited), LGBTQIA safe space, Pregnancy massage table available, SGI clients accepted, Veterans Affairs Canada clients accepted, WCB clients accepted, Wheelchair accessible

Kyla Haubrich

Clinics

Sahara Spa

  • 341 Stadacona Street East, Moose Jaw, SK
  • http://www.saharaspa.ca
  • 306-692-1012

Dayle Haye

Clinics

Victoria East Chiropractic Clinic

  • 306-525-6977

Advanced Education In

Cupping Massage, Cupping – Myofascial, Deep Tissue Therapy, Functional Fascial Taping, Hot Stone Therapy Introductory, Migraine and Headache Treatment, MFR – Introduction, Pre and Post Natal Massage, Swedish massage

Other Services

Direct bill to 3rd party insurer (may be limited), Pregnancy massage table available, SGI clients accepted, WCB clients accepted

Anthony Schmalz

Clinics

TheraTech Massage & Laser Therapy

  • 3232 Essex Crescent, Regina, SK
  • http://www.theratechmassageandlaser.ca
  • 306-570-2879

Christina Patricia Myron

Clinics

Pat’s Pathway to Health

  • 306-536-7281

Advanced Education In

Champissage (Indian Head Massage), Infant Massage Instructor Training Certification, Hot Stone Therapy Introductory, MFR – Fascial-Pelvis, MFR – Shoulder, Myofascial Mobilization, Thai Massage – Level 1

Other Services

Cancer patients treated, SGI clients accepted, WCB clients accepted

Karen Surtees

Clinics

Karen Surtees, RMT

  • 306-531-4349

Advanced Education In

LAST – Lower Body and Extremities, Migraine and Headache Treatment, TMJ Master Class

Krista Brooker-Mills

Clinics

Aligned Collective

  • 2334 Cornwall Street, Regina, SK
  • www.alignedyqr.com
  • 306-559-0928

Cynthia Martin

Clinics

Riverview Health Professionals

  • 3223 E Quance St., Regina, SK
  • http://www.goodlifemassagetherapy.com
  • 306-545-2225
  • 306-545-2235

Advanced Education In

Kinesio Taping 1, Kinesio Taping 2, Lymph Drainage Therapy Basic , Muscle Energy Technique – Upper Thoracic , Onsen Technique Therapist Certification, Scar Tissue Treatment and Management

Other Services

Direct bill to 3rd party insurer (may be limited), Geriatric massage, LGBTQIA safe space, MS patients treated, SGI clients accepted, Veterans Affairs Canada clients accepted, WCB clients accepted, Wheelchair accessible

  • 1
  • 2
  • 3
  • 4
  • 66
  • 67
  • 68
  • #22 – 1738 Quebec Avenue
    Saskatoon, SK S7K 1V9
  • (306) 384-7077
  • (306) 384-7175
  • Facebook
  • Instagram
  • YouTube

Main Office Email

Jayne L. Little – Member Services Manager
[email protected]

Executive Director Email

Lori Green – Executive Director
[email protected]

Office Hours

Monday to Thursday
8am – 4pm

We are closed between
Noon – 1pm
and all statutory holidays

© 2022 Massage Therapist Association of Saskatchewan

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

As a massage therapist, you’ll provide beneficial services to your clients, not only inducing relaxation and reducing stress, but addressing issues regarding muscle pain, illness, and other concerns.

Because of the proven effects of massage and the widely held belief that it’s an important form of healthcare, most states impose regulations in order to work as a massage therapist to ensure the safety of your patients.

Only five states—California, Kansas, Minnesota, Vermont, and Wyoming—have no widespread regulations, though certain cities and counties within those states have their own rules regarding the legal practice of massage.

Becoming board certified in a modality beyond basic massage can expand your job opportunities and increase your earning potential.

In the states that do impose these laws, there are minimum education requirements and other criteria you must meet before you can begin your career. For example, some states require graduating from an accredited school that’s approved by an organization such as the Commission on Massage Therapy Accreditation (COMTA), an agency recognized by the U.S. Department of Education.

Most states also require that you pass a licensing exam, such as the Massage and Bodywork Licensing Examination (MBLEx) or the National Certification Board for Therapeutic Massage and Bodywork (NCBTMB) Exam. Some states have tests specific to the state and sometimes offer test options such as the Certification Exam for Structural Integration (CESI) or the National Certification Commission for Acupuncture and Oriental Medicine (NCCAOM).

Beyond licensing, many massage therapists choose to pursue voluntary board certification through the NCBTMB to demonstrate their dedication and expertise. The organization also offers specialty certificates for members who want to tailor their careers with additional education in particular areas. Though not necessary, specializing in a modality beyond basic massage can expand your job opportunities, increase your earning potential, and give clients and employers the confidence that you’re committed to the field.

Before choosing an educational program for massage therapy and paying the costs of admission, make sure you understand the licensing requirements in your state and how to prepare for board certification or specialization should you choose to pursue that route.

Massage Therapy State Board Licensing Requirements

Hover over your state below to learn what it takes to earn a license and how to maintain it once you do. Click on your state to go to its massage therapy licensing board.

Clock Hours: 625
Completion Time: 25 weeks
Prerequisite: High School Diploma

Tuition Cost: $5000 for Weekday Classes (7-month course) or $5300 for Weekend Classes (9-month course)
Instructors: Kristina Balish, Patty Backus, Dave Maggard

525 contact hours of instruction / 100 hours of clinical lab at school = 625 hours

The class schedule will be determined at orientation. The student will be expected to spend 4 hours of clinical lab time per week; this time can be scheduled around the student’s availability.

Upon completion of the program, the student will receive a 625-hour certification and be eligible to apply for Licensure in the State of Michigan with training in:

  • Basic Swedish Application
  • Chair Massage
  • Pre-Natal and Infant Massage
  • Trigger Point Therapy
  • Integrated Neuro-muscular Ischmeic Technique
  • Myofascial Release Techniques
  • Sports Massage
  • Reflexology
  • Shiatsu
  • Polarity
  • Business and Ethics
  • SOAP Documentation

500 contact hours/completion in 5 (five) 16-week semesters=80 weeks
Prerequisite: Basic Massage Therapy and Advanced Medical Massage

Tuition Cost: $500

The student will receive in-class training in the instruction of the Core Curriculum of the Massage Therapy Program, which will include:

  • 80 hours in Swedish Massage application including Anatomy and Physiology
  • 15 hours of Chair Massage
  • 15 hours of Prenatal Massage
  • 35 hours of Trigger Point Therapy
  • 75 hours of INIT
  • 35 hours of Myofascial Release Techniques
  • 35 hours of Sports Massage
  • 35 hours of Reflexology
  • 35 hours of Shiatsu
  • 35 hours of Polarity
  • 35 hours of Business and Ethics
  • 35 hours of Muscle Energy Techniques
  • 35 hours of Course Documentation

150-hour course completion in 14 weeks
Prerequisite: Basic Massage Therapy II

100 contact hours of instruction / 30 clinic hours/20 hours of menu design
and treatment planning

Tuition Cost: $1,750 (kit included)
Instructor:
Kristina Balish

In this class, the student will learn the following spa treatments:

  • Body Wrap Massage techniques
  • Salt Glows
  • Sugar Scrubs
  • Dry Brush Massage
  • Aromatherapy
  • Paraffin Dips
  • Face-lift Massage
  • Hot Stone Massage
  • Case Studies

Clock Hours: 150
Completion Time: 16 weeks
Prerequisite: Basic Massage Therapy Course/Michigan Massage Therapy License

96 Hours Clinical Reasoning/54 hours Supervised Case Study

Tuition Cost: $2,000
Cost of Books: $100
Instructors: Patty Backus

In the Advanced/Medical Massage program students will receive instruction in the following:

  • Orthopedic Assessment and Massage
  • Myofascial Osseous Integration Techniques
  • Pharmacology
  • Pathology
  • Medical Terminology

Massage Therapy is effective in controlling chronic and acute pain, reducing stress, and creating a sense of relaxation and well being. It is proven to provide relief for a variety of problems & conditions, including pregnancy, muscle pain, Joint pain, tendonitis, sprains, strains, carpal tunnel syndrome, jaw pain, migraines, tension headaches, Arthritis, Plantar fasciitis, Whiplash, and neck and shoulder tension.

Our Registered Massage Therapists are trained in the latest techniques to provide you with a treatment plan tailored to suit your needs. Techniques such as Deep Tissue Massage, Cupping, Hydrotherapy, Pregnancy Massage (Pre- and Post-Natal), Remedial Massage, Sports Massage, Therapeutic Massage, TMJ Massage, Trigger Point Therapy, Cervical Massage, Muscle Energy Technique, Myofascial Release, Active Isolated Stretching, Rib and Thoracic Massage, and Abdominal treatments.

During massage treatments it is important that you communicate your level of comfort with your therapist at all times. Please advise your therapist if you would like more or less pressure at any point during your treatment. It is common to experience an increased tenderness; pain and/or bruising with massage treatments.

With massage therapy you can receive relief from muscular pain and tension, obtain an increased range of motion of affected joints, and increased well-being. Massage Therapy is a natural healing process that can deliver both physical and emotional benefits.

Massage Treatment time includes: Assessment, Massage Treatment, Discussion of Home Care (i.e.: Hydrotherapy, Stretches etc.), Follow-Up and Treatment Plan.

Advanced Pregnancy Massage

We offer Advanced Massage Therapy treatments for all stages of pregnancy. Whether you are in your 1st, 2nd, 3rd Trimester, during labor, or post partum, we can provide you with safe, comfortable, relaxation and/or therapeutic treatments. We treat many pregnancy associated conditions such as thoracic outlet syndrome (TOS), sinus congestion, calf cramping relief, pubic symphysis separation, swelling, low back strain & pain, hip pain, rib pain, trouble breathing, and neck & shoulder pain/numbness.

Massage during pregnancy:

  • Helps alleviate sore muscles, decrease pain and discomfort
  • Promotes a decrease in the effects of both mental & physical stress of pregnancy
  • Increases circulation for mom & baby, reduces swelling
  • Decreases obstetrical complications
  • Lets you enjoy this special time more

Massage after labor:

  • Reduces tightness, pain & stress in upper back, and neck & arms from caring for a newborn & nursing a newborn
  • Helps to encourage pre-pregnancy pelvic alignment
  • Therapists can provide information on nursing posture, strengthening those tummy muscles & core
  • Allows mom to rest & relax for a 1 hour treatment

TMJ: Neck, Head & Jaw Master Training

This course has given Shalla Riemer, RMT advanced training in evaluating and treating patients with an assortment of Jaw problems:

  • TMD
  • Jaw Pain
  • Decreased Jaw range of motion
  • Clenching
  • Grinding
  • Clicking
  • Popping
  • Mechanics and Pathomechanics of the TMJ “Temporomandibular Joint” (AKA: JAW)
  • Elevator Muscle Evaluation and Treatment
  • Restoring Normal Head and Neck Alignment
  • Categories of TMJ Dysfunction
  • Treatment Planning and Referral

Treatment is done externally, to neck (Anterior & Posterior muscles), face, and jaw. Then intra-Oral treatment is offered, with the use of gloves, where the therapist treats muscles from inside the mouth.

If you have any questions or would like to try this treatment for your jaw problems or receive these treatments in conjunction with your Dentist’s treatment, please contact us.

***Massage Therapy is covered by most health insurance / extended health benefits. Some plans cover the treatment cost to a maximum set amount, while others will cover a percentage of each visit. Some plans require a Doctors Note (prescription) to be able to claim your massage receipts. To know if your treatments will be covered under your health plan, please contact your insurance provider, prior to your first treatment. All of our massage therapists are Registered Massage Therapists (RMT) with the Massage Therapist Association of Saskatchewan (MTAS) or the Natural Health Practitioners of Canada (NHCP).***

Welcome to Rub Me the Right Way Massage Therapy Center. Since 2004, our licensed massage therapists (LMTs) have offered relaxing massage services, with a focus on providing relief for individuals suffering from pain and medical conditions. In addition to our massage sessions and membership packages, our therapists also conduct LMT continuing education courses. In Lubbock, TX, our massage center stands out as the preferred destination for people who need a therapeutic massage or who would like to obtain their massage license.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

We will be closed for the entire month of MAY – please check back with us as we are going through a business remodel

About Our Massage Therapy Techniques

At our center, we offer Swedish and deep tissue massages. You can enjoy these services in 30, 60, or 90-minute sessions. Additionally, we perform massages for repetitive stress relief, reflexology, expectant mothers, and couples, and we also offer hot stone, sports, chair, and facial massages. Ask us about our combo massages and our mobile chair massage service. Our therapists are dedicated to providing relief and promoting your overall wellbeing.

Schedule Your Healing Massage Today

We have worked hard to establish our reputation as a leading provider of massages and massage therapist education. If you would like to enjoy the health and mood-enhancing benefits of a massage or start a career as an LMT, we want to hear from you. Our compassionate and experienced professionals are here to demonstrate the commitment to excellence that sets us apart. Massage is a highly effective way to relieve pain, relax, and de-stress. Our center is a full-service facility that helps members and guests achieve just that. We look forward to hearing from you.

UNDERSTAND YOUR BODY, TRANSFORM YOUR WELLBEING

PAIN RELIEF. VITALITY. RENEWAL.

AT ANY AGE

Medical Massage
PAIN RELIEF NOW

If you’re suffering from pain or loss of mobility and need immediate relief, then schedule a medical massage. We specialize in identifying and resolving root causes of chronic and hard-to-fix neck, back, shoulder and hip pains that haven’t been resolved by other therapies

Restorative Exercise
MOVE PAIN FREE

Most chronic pain and joint degeneration are an unnecessary result of how you sit, stand, walk and move. This easy-to-learn program will teach you how to align and move so you can eliminate pain and preserve joint health without the need for endless therapy

Fitness Training
BUILD A BODY YOU CAN RELY ON FOR LIFE

Zach and Marni created the High Performance Aging Fitness Program, a unique physical training method to help Baby Boomers and mature adults get in shape, heal pain and injuries, and build a lifestyle of sustainable health and fitness

The Most Awarded Medical Massage & Fitness Team in WNC
Voted Best of WNC Massage Therapy 2012-2018, 2020-21 and Physical Trainer 2020-21

Zach Comer

Stephanie Wright

Zach has been helping people overcome physical pain and rejuvenate their health since 2004. He is a pain relief, fitness and nutrition expert who specializes in helping clients improve mobility, get stronger and stay active as they age.

Zach is the co-author of the book High Performance Aging: The Over 50 Exercise Guide to Less Pain, More Energy and A Body You Can Rely On for Life . He is the only massage therapist to be voted Best of WNC for Massage Therapy eight different times (2012-2018, 2020).

His unique skills and experience include advanced certifications as a Medical Massage Practitioner, Postural Alignment Specialist (Egoscue Method), Personal Trainer (NASM), Functional Aging Specialist (FAI), and Exercise Nutrition Coach (Precision Nutrition).

Stephanie began her career in the wellness industry in 2006 as an office manager for a busy chiropractic clinic. She is a graduate of the WNC School of Massage and is also a Certified Neuromuscular Therapist . Her advanced training provides her with the ability to problem solve soft tissues restrictions in order to reduce pain, ease muscle tension and calm the nervous system.

Clients rave about Stephanie’s ability to combine Deep Tissue, Trigger Point Therapy, Swedish Massage, Sports Massage and CranioSacral Work with an intuitive, healing touch that produces long-lasting therapeutic results.

She is currently studying with Zach to deepen her knowledge and expertise in medical massage therapy.

Meet Our Therapists

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Kirsten Longmeier, LMT and Owner

MASSAGE TRAINING ::

The Sunshine Network for Traditional Thai Yoga Massage in Thailand was my introduction to bodywork in 2006. I later graduated from Oregon School of Massage in 2010. I’ve been in the Advanced Myofascial Trainings program with Til Luchau since 2015.

CURRENT BODYWORK STUDIES ::

I’m focusing on finishing up a certification, Advanced Myofascial Techniques. Currently in the midst of taking all of Carol Gray’s CranioSacral Trainings in Portland, Oregon. I have completed her Advanced Clinical CranioSacral trainings and Somato Emotional Release course. Infant CranioSacral training coming up in June!

Liz Koch’s 5-Week Psoas Course was a wonderful online training I just completed as well!

FAVORITE MUSCLE?

Hmm. they’re all so interesting in their own respect. I’ve been doing a lot of intra-oral TMJ work and although this is a joint (not a muscle) there are a lot of adjoining muscles in this area that can also be addressed. And of course, the Psoas. There’s not enough space here to describe how cool this sensory organ/muscle is!

FAVORITE THING TO DO IN SANDPOINT?

Trail runs on Syringa or the Bay View trail, lunch at City Beach Organics, swimming in the lake, and running into friends virtually every place I go- I love how small Sandpoint is!

BEST SELF-CARE ADVICE ::

Find time to be STILL every day, even just for a minute to take in your breath, your environment, your inner world. And,

Gratitude, gratitude, gratitude.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

ABOUT DAMEION
Dameion began studying therapeutic massage therapy in 1999 at the Massage Therapy Institute of Colorado (MTIC), Under the tutelage of Mark Manton. Dameion has completed a combined 1360 hours and 3 years of training in massage/ Bodywork along with an advanced “Year II extra training” study in traditional 10 series Structural Integration, created originally by Dr. Ida P Rolf, Advance Joint Mobilizations and Myofascial Release. He had also completed the NCETMB National Certification Examination for Therapeutic Massage & Bodywork in July 2011.

​Dameion uses his knowledge and experience from massage therapy school to incorporates things like T-bars and unique muscle tools into his practice. These tools are mandatory in the removal of the most established and stubborn adhesions and scar tissue. Plantar fasciitis, fibromyalgia, migraines, neck pain, and back pain are often all a result common adhesions, metabolize waste or scar tissue creating poor soft tissue hygiene and can result in tension, dysfunction, and pain.

Structural Integration is a regimented 10 series of Myofascial Release hands-on physical manipulation sessions sometimes called “the recipe”. This type of work will comb through 7 layers of muscle tissue from superficial to deep tissue and fascia to realign unbalanced tissue around a center gravity line, maximizing the length of the core to recreate the most functional designed body. My techniques are applied through the clothes and without lotion to manipulate muscle tissue directly and restore balance with the removal of hundreds of knots per session.

(10 Session Structural Integration therapy is created by Dr. Ida P Rolf, the founder of Rolfing®. ( Disclaimer: I am NOT a certified Rolfer, and I am NOT affiliated or endorsed as a member of the Rolf Institute and the terms Rolfing and Rolfer are trademarked and exclusive to ONLY graduates and members in good standing with the Rolf Institute. )

Dameion, at Heavy Elbow BodyWork, uses expert techniques and specially sourced muscle tools to remove long-standing issues, repair new injuries or accidents, even if it’s decades old. He refers to himself as a “Soft Tissue Hygienist” because he believes and has been successful at removing what feels like muscle tartar using a myriad of focused massage tools, including his elbow work. With over 22 years of practice and repetition to move hard scar tissue, and adhesions from muscle fibers and facia, organs, tendons, and ligaments. The scar tissue adhesions are manually dismantled and patiently dissolved into the bloodstream to re-create and restore a full range of motion, perfect posture, and promote health through full-body soft tissue cleanliness and truly the ultimate in healthcare.

Old age is view as micro failures and scar tissue adhesions found in the Myofascial connective tissue network. This Micro scarring will fill up the bodies freedom by filling up the negative space over time. I normalize tissue and remove all the dysfunction and adhesions with specialized techniques and customized bodywork tools for soft tissue.

Dameion has a simple philosophy; balance breeds balance. Your body once had its original design, and things have become shifted out of alignment and proper function. His work will move you back towards the direction of correction, allowing ease of movement, balance, and a better functional design posture. ​

What is massage?

Massage is a manual technique used to promote healing and reduce muscle tension. It is often used in conjunction with trigger point therapy. There are many different forms of massage but the common type of massage used in physiotherapy is deep friction massage. This treatment involves applying pressure deep into the muscle to relieve tension and promote healing.

How does massage help?

Deep friction massage works to release tension in deep muscles either after injury or after high load activity. After injury or high loading, the muscles are damaged and contract to allow for repair and protection of further damage. Scar tissue is also formed as part of the healing process which can reduce the flexibility of the muscle. Deep friction massage breaks down scar tissue allowing increased movement of the muscle. It also helps to relax the muscle which actually promotes the healing process and a quicker recovery is made. Pain will be experienced at the time and up to a few days following the massage; however improvements should be felt after this.

Who benefits from massage?

Massage can benefit several problems including:

  • Muscular injuries
  • Muscle tightness
  • Osteoarthritis
  • Scar tissue
  • Contractures

If you feel massage may be a beneficial treatment for you, contact physio.co.uk today on 0330 088 7800. Alternatively, you can make your appointments online today!

We have immediate appointments available today. Contact us to make an appointment.

Our clinics are open:
Mon – Fri: 8am – 8pm
Saturday: 9am – 5pm
Sunday: 9am – 4pm

Many people hold a misconception about ‘Sports Massage’: that it is for those who participate in sporting activities at a serious or professional level. This is just not true. Our team of sports massage therapists are trained in sports and remedial massage, and work with clients from all walks of life.

Whether you are suffering from a recent (or long term) injury associated with a specific hobby or activity, or have been experiencing long term back pain as a result of your posture or occupation, most ‘musculoskeletal’ issues arise as a result of one of the following:

  • postural compensations (we don’t like the words ‘poor posture’!)
  • an imbalance in body mechanics
  • stressful or challenging lifestyle and work patterns
  • loss of strength and flexibility

Each of these factors alone may have a major impact on your soft tissue (that’ll be muscles, ligaments, tendons and fascia!), but may also affect the way your body functions when you move. It is not uncommon for an injury to arise as a result of one of the issues above, and that injury can provide the clues to trace back and identify a contributing cause. It is then possible for the therapist to help you to manage or resolve the issue, so that not only will your injury heal quickly, but the chances of it reoccurring are greatly reduced.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Benefits to your body

Sports massage practitioners who hold a level 5 qualification in sports and remedial massage (all of ours do) will use a variety of assessments, treatments and rehabilitation skills to work with you to address each of these issues and to enable and promote healthy functioning throughout your whole musculoskeletal system. Although sport can be a common factor with many clients, this is not always the primary issue to address. The advanced knowledge of anatomy and physiology ensures that these practitioners are likely to give you homework – good after care guidance in the form of exercises and lifestyle advice. This isn’t just for fun or to show off their knowledge. It is to enable you to take an active role in your recovery and to prevent future problems from re-occurring.

Your First Appointment

We do offer the option of an initial 90 minute sports & remedial massage which includes a full postural and physical assessment. We highly recommend this initial appointment type if you are suffering with an injury or long term issue which may benefit from a whole body perspective.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage Ireland
Scotland
Northern Ireland
North West
North East
East Midlands
West Midlands
Wales
South West
South East
National
International

Ireland

Deirdre Murray Holistic Sligo
Indian Head Massage Certificate (Head,Neck and Shoulder Massage)
Thai Foot Massage Certificate

deirdremurrayholistic.ie

Golden Egg Holistic
Sound Healing Practitioner Diploma
Reflexology for Babies and Children
Baby Reflexology Instructor Training

www.goldeneggholistic.com

The European College of Reflexology and Massage
Cupping
Energy Management
Hot Stone Massage
Thermal Auricular Therapy
Indian Head Massage

www.ecrm.ie

Scotland

Holistic Ecosse
The Dragonfly Process
[email protected]

Rosslyn Alternatives
Stone Therapy Workshop
www.rosslynalternatives.co.uk

Shiatsu and Thai Massage Training Scotland
Onsite Seated Acupressure Massage Certificate
Thai Foot Massage Certificate

www.stmts.co.uk

The Glasgow School of Massage
Facial Massage
Hawaiian Lomi Lomi Massage
Hot Stone Massage
Indian Head Massage
Thai Herbal Poultice Massage
Warm Bamboo Massage
Oncology Massage
Thai Yoga Stretches Diploma
Diploma in Abdominal and Deep Colon Massage
Diploma in Pregnancy Massage (Including Abdominal Massage)
Baby Massage Instructors Diploma

www.theglasgowschoolofmassage.com

Northern Ireland

Body and Sole School of Complementary Therapies
Swiss Reflexology Treatment
Hot Stone Massage
Hopi Ear Candling

www.bodyandsoleschool.co.uk

Elaine Curry Wellness Academy with Calm Confident Kids
Calm Soles (Children’s Reflexology Instructor)
Thermal Auricular Therapy
Baby Massage & Yoga
Fertility Reflexology

www.calmconfidentkids.co.uk
www.elainecurry.com

Dorothy Kelly Academy of Reflexology

Reflexology to Support the Maternity Client

Our Massage Therapists have advanced training in Pain Management Massage, Lymphatic Drainage, Medical Massage, Deep Tissue Therapy, Gentle Relaxation Classic Massage for Stress Prevention, Hot Stone Massage, Sports Massage, Pregnancy Massage, Traditional Thai Massage, Ashiatsu Oriental Bar Therapy, Chair Massage, Couples Massage, Couples Massage Training Classes.

An expert Massage Therapist is on our team for body and facial treatments such as Microdermabrasion, Synergie Body and Face Sculpting, Hot Stone Facial Massage, Classic Facial Massage, Infrared LED Light Therapy,

We have other therapists who specialize in Reiki, Acupuncture, Hypnosis and Zero Gravity Therapy..

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Francoise “Franci” Knight

Franci is a Certified Medical Support and Pain Management Hypnotherapist with over 600 hours of training. She is also trained or certified in several advanced areas including birth hypnosis and NLP.

Hypnotherapy changes behavior by helping you change your thought process. Franci has had a passion for this field of study since first discovering it while obtaining her Bachelor of Science degree, with concentrations in Psychology and Education, in 1993.

Franci graduated from Connecticut Center for Massage Therapy in 1997 and started A Healing Trail Wellness Center as a one-therapist office on Main Street in Torrington. The office has since grown to 20+ therapists with over 21,000 clients.

Her Massage Therapy work focuses on chronic neck, back and TMJ issues. Franci’s background includes work in OSHA training, worker’s compensation injuries, on-site worker’s safety, ergonomics and EMS, along with years of working in a hospital setting.

Franci lives in Harwinton with her two dogs, Venus and Cooper.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Realign. Reset. Rejuevenate.

Apple Core Therapy is a complete wellness center located in Portland, Maine. It is our deepest intention that clients of our practice receive exactly what they need with our abundant offering of services.

Our practitioners are highly experienced and bring deep wisdom to their craft and thoughtful services to their clients. We are currently accepting new clients, and look forward to working with you.

With all of our holistic therapies, we are dedicated to bringing you back to your self, so that you may be of complete service to your life. Please feel free to look at all our wellness services, and then easily schedule your appointment with us.

Andrea C. Spencer

Andrea Spencer is a Licensed Massage Therapist (LMT) and the founder of Apple Core Therapy in Portland, Maine. Andrea specializes in Myofascial Release/Structural Integration, Deep Tissue, and Cupping with sensitive knowledge of how a healthy diaphragm and pelvis help to maintain realignment. She also has experience in Craniosacral Therapy. She is a Certified Doula and received a Bachelor of Fine Arts from the University of Georgia. Andrea is excited to empower people who value their health to stay healthy. She believes the body should be treated as a whole, and that massage is an excellent preventative care alternative.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Samson Fowler

Samson is a Licensed Massage Therapist (LMT) in the State of Maine, specializing in deep tissue and myofascial release. In his work, he places a high priority on strong communication between client and practitioner in order to achieve deep relaxation and deep release, increasing range of motion and relieving stiffness and pain in the body. He earned a Bachelor’s degree in Environmental Science from Clark University in Massachusetts. Samsons’ other passions include brewing cider, dancing, hiking, and camping on the islands of casco bay. He is very excited to be part of the Apple Core Therapy Team.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Tara Rook

Tara is a Licensed Massage Therapist in the State of Maine, certified in Thai massage, and a 200 hour certified yoga instructor. She joyfully offers Thai massage sessions, guided meditation, reflexology and private yoga sessions at Apple Core Therapy.

Tara pays special attention to the needs of each client and is passionate about a person’s overall well being of the mind, body and spirit. She addresses both physical and energetic issues, working intuitively to move the body towards balance, awareness, relaxation and deep releases. Her sessions are centered in empowering clients to grow awareness, compassion, respect and love with their body and mind. Through this connection she helps guide clients to positive states of existing. Through creating a safe and warm environment, her client’s feel at peace, supported and rejuvenated.

Outside of Apple Core Therapy, Tara is an illustrator and an electronic music producer. She loves drinking tea, exploring the beautiful nature of Maine, traveling, eating yummy food and spending time with her family.

Susan McCadam Hoffman

Susan McCadam Hoffman, M.S., ERYT, YACEP, believes that an artful yoga practice can empower students to reanimate their lives. She began her teacher training in mindful movement techniques with over 200 hours of study in the Pilates Method between 2002-2004. As an equally dedicated yoga practitioner, Susan followed this with a course of study to become a registered yoga teacher and that passionate learning curve has not stopped. In working one-on-one or in small groups with individuals looking to restore fluidity and ease in movement, sessions begin with an assessment of goals. The hour is then tailored using a combination of Breathing Exercises, Yin and Yang Yoga Poses, Restorative Yoga Postures, Thai Yoga Technique, and if there is interest, a brief Guided Mediation Practice. Clients leave with a detailed plan for continued self-care at home. Susan is pleased to be a part of the Apple Core team.

Lynda Vladimiroff

In the early 2000’s, Lynda received a healing session by a reiki master in California that set her on course to learning and understanding more about healing modalities and energy work. She became certified in Reiki I, II, and Mastership levels through the University of Southern Maine, completed both basic and intermediate Therapeutic Touch training sessions and obtained her Holistic Health minor. Earlier in 2019, she acquired her Holy Fire II Karuna Reiki Master certificate, which is proven to be a more powerful form of Reiki. Lynda served as a volunteer in the Reiki Program at Maine Medical Center and was present during the birth of her great niece, administering reiki treatments to both mother and daughter. She approaches each of her clients with love, respect, and compassion, and firmly believes that Reiki can both calm and facilitate healing and well-being.

Lynda is a world-renowned musician and songwriter, originally hailing from Detroit, Michigan. When not nurturing others, Lynda loves to write songs, study art, strength train, travel, and spend time with her husband, friends, and cats.

Program Information

Looking for a profession that’s literally hands-on? Are you passionate about helping people overcome injury, relieve stress, and generally live healthier lives? If so, San Jacinto College can prepare you for a career as a massage therapist in as few as two semesters. You will be introduced to a variety of massage modalities and discover what type of professional practice is right for you!

The San Jacinto College Massage Therapy program:

  • Is a state-approved program that provides foundational training in the art and science of therapeutic massage. The 24-credit (640 contact-hour) program meets and exceeds the minimum educational requirements necessary for licensure in the state of Texas;
  • Offers full-time students the possibility of completing the program in two (2) semesters, so graduates can be licensed and working in less than one year; and
  • Places emphasis on a variety of massage therapy techniques, anatomy and physiology, kinesiology, pathology, healthy lifestyles, hygiene and sanitation, successful business practices, professional ethics, hydrotherapy, and spa modalities. Students also complete a hands-on clinical internship prior to graduating as required by the state of Texas.

Career Opportunities

Licensed massage therapists seek employment in:

  • Massage therapy establishments,
  • Wellness centers,
  • Spas,
  • Cruise lines,
  • Medical settings, and
  • Private practices.

A large majority of licensed massage therapists are self-employed.

For more information, students may contact Department Chair Mary Lindsay, 281-998-6150, x3587.

Campus

Information

The Massage Therapy Certificate of Technology is a course of study designed to meet the needs of those students desiring to enter the massage therapy profession. The program prepares students with the technical knowledge, lab skills, and hands-on-training to complete national licensing exams successfully and to gain licensure for the state of Texas as a licensed massage therapist. Full-time students can earn the Certificate of Technology in two (2) semesters. All key aspects of the massage therapy profession are addressed. Applicants must agree to be screened for criminal history as required by the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation.

Students enrolling into San Jacinto College programs with external learning experiences (i.e., clinical, practicum, externship, cooperative, etc.) will be required to comply with the immunization requirements and policies of the clinical/external learning sites to engage in all clinical/external learning experiences. Vaccination requirements at clinical/external learning sites are implemented pursuant to the independent authority of such facilities and are not mandated by San Jacinto College. Failure to meet the immunization requirements mandated by clinical/external learning sites may limit a student’s ability to complete the program and/or may delay the student’s graduation date. San Jacinto College does not process exemptions, and students should address potential vaccination exemptions directly with the clinical/external learning site.

Admission

Required to pass a background check to receive massage therapy license.

In accordance with Texas House Bill 1508, the College informs all students in this program who may have a criminal background that a criminal history could keep graduates from being licensed by the state of Texas. Students with any questions about their background and licensure may speak with the Department Chair.

Specifically, certain circumstances prohibit people from becoming licensed massage therapists in the state of Texas. Students should review the following reasons for ineligibility for massage licensure as taken directly from the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR) website.

Sec. 455.152 Ineligibility for Licensure

(a) A person is not eligible for a license as a massage establishment, massage school, massage therapist, or massage therapy instructor if the person has been convicted of, entered a plea of nolo contendere or guilty to, or received a deferred adjudication for an offense involving trafficking of persons, an offense involving prostitution, or another sexual offense.

(b) A person convicted of a violation of this chapter is ineligible for a license as a massage establishment, massage school, massage therapist, or massage therapy instructor until the fifth anniversary of the date of conviction.

Plan of Study

South Campus
4MASG-THRP

Plan of Study Grid

First Term Credits
MSSG 1105 Hydrotherapy 1
MSSG 1109 Health and Hygiene 1
MSSG 1411 Massage Therapy Fundamentals I 4
MSSG 1413 Anatomy and Physiology for Massage 4
MSSG 1207 Business Practices and Professional Ethics 2
Credits 12
Second Term
MSSG 2311 Massage Therapy Fundamentals II 3
MSSG 2314 Pathology for Massage 3
MSSG 2413 Kinesiology for Massage 4
MSSG 2286 Internship-Massage Therapy/Therapeutic Massage 2
Credits 12
Total Credits 24

Prerequisite statement: Completion of all Level 1 courses in the Massage program or Department Chair approval.

Capstone Experience: MSSG 2286 Internship-Massage Therapy/Therapeutic Massage . Verification of Workplace Competencies–Eligible for the Credentialing Exam.

Your feet are your foundation for upright posture: Invest in massage therapy for your feet and ankles!

Very often someone will ask me: if I could only have one area of my own body worked on, which one would I choose? And more or less always, I respond that I would choose massage therapy for feet and ankles.

Surprised? So are most of the people who ask! But I can’t think of any part of my body that has worked harder than my feet and ankles. Stints in pointe shoes and training for marathons immediately come to mind as the biggest demands I’ve placed on them. But still, they support me as I walk at least 10,000 steps every day up and down the New York City streets.

But even if I’d never danced or run competitively, or walked as much as I do, my feet and ankles are still the foundation for the entire weight of my body. They absorb information from the ground so that the nervous system can create standing posture all the way up the skull. And if something is less optimal with your feet and ankles, your posture will change to compensate. Just imagine what would happen if there were a problem or weakness in the foundation of a building. Similarly, issues in the feet and ankles can lead to a cascade of dysfunctions throughout the body. Massage therapy for feet and ankles can create profound improvements in our posture and movement.

Feet and ankles are the linchpin of every step we take

As we strike our heel to the ground and roll weight forward onto our toes, our arch is supposed to collapse to absorb energy. Then, when our toe pushes into the ground to propel ourselves forward, the foot and ankle are designed to go rigid and spring back up. This helps transmit force from the ground back through the sole of the foot. And ready the foot to repeat the process all over again. This is what needs to happen for us to take a single step. Every joint in the human body is supposed to move to create shock absorption. Massage therapy for feet and ankles can help your body get back to this core movement.

Did you know that your feet have 33 joints and your ankles have three?!

Unfortunately, most of us swing our legs too far forward to take a step with our weight sitting behind the ankle. And end up striking very hard with our heel. This forces your front leg muscles to overwork to pull the rest of your body along with it. And creates excessive pressure on your heel, tension in your hamstrings, and tension in calf. It also reduces range of motion in the joints of your toes and metatarsals (long foot bones).

In order to roll your weight forward into the toes properly, your upper body should initiate a step by “falling” slightly forward. Then your front leg won’t have to work so hard to swing forward in response. And the weight of your body can load effectively over the entire foot instead of just the heel. As a result, the foot and ankle are able to roll through each joint, even the very small ones in the toes. Your foot will act as the spring it is designed to be 🙂

Since the foot and ankle play such a big role during gait, mobility in them is essential.

How is my foot and ankle mobility?

This is a question I ask myself every day. Unfortunately, my foot and ankle mobility take a daily hit since I need to be wearing shoes whenever I’m outside. We are designed to walk barefoot…but on grass, not on a city sidewalk made out of concrete. Shoes are essential to preventing injuries but they also limit the way our feet and ankles move. Dress shoes even more so.

More than 23,000 people per DAY in the United States, including athletes and nonathletes, require medical care for ankle sprains.

The trauma and resulting inflammation from a sprain leaves scar tissue around the foot and ankle that restricts movement. As someone who spent years chronically spraining my ankles, I try to be mindful of the effects those injuries still have on my movements now.

These are some of the specific issues I look for to let me know when I might need some massage therapy for feet and ankles to address what’s going on:

  • I can’t squat to parallel
  • I can’t keep my back straight when I deadlift
  • My knees collapse inward toward the midline during any leg exercise
  • I notice my feet and ankles collapse toward their outer edges when I put weight on them
  • My feet turn out when I’m walking, running, squatting, or practicing yoga/Pilates
  • I’m feeling stiff anywhere along the back side of my body — even all the way up to my neck! — when I bend forward to touch my toes
  • My toes either lift up or grip the ground during any time I need balance
  • I’m having a hard time with balance — either on one leg or both

If you are dealing with any of these issues, massage therapy for feet and ankles is an essential step in finding long term relief. The pain may show up in your back on neck, and it will certainly help to get massage therapy in those areas. However, if you want the relief to stick around for the long term, consider letting your massage therapist spend a whole session on your feet and ankles!

Feeling better from the ground up: Massage Therapy for feet and ankles is a game changer!

A skilled massage therapist like at Bodyworks DW can help mobilize the feet and ankles. They can also address adhesions of scar tissue. And relieve muscular tension in hard-working muscles like the ones in the calves that control foot and ankle movement. This can do wonders for quality of movement, performance, and overall well-being. If you’re interested in unlocking your full potential, schedule a massage therapy for feet and ankles session at either or our medical massage New York locations!

Overview

Massage can complement medical treatment for many conditions. It can reduce your pain, lower your stress, increase your flexibility and more. Vanderbilt University Medical Center offers medical massage by expert therapists to relieve a range of symptoms.

Massage therapy at the Dayani Center is available by referral.

Rates

  • 30-minute session: $50
  • 60-minute session: $85
  • 90-minute session: $115

Payment is due at time of service. We accept most forms of payment: cash, credit/debit cards and personal checks.

Cancellation, late and no-show policy

Please notify the center at least 24 hours in advance if you cannot attend an appointment. Late arrival will result in a shorter appointment.

Conditions We Address

Meet Our Therapist

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Tina Crownover LMT, CLT

Why Choose Massage Therapy at Dayani

Our team includes licensed massage therapists and certified lymphedema therapists. They have extensive experience treating people with various medical conditions, which translates into expert care for you.

We tailor your treatment plan to meet your unique needs and health goals. We help you navigate your treatment options to ensure you receive the best possible care.

We work together to ensure that you receive the comprehensive care you need. Our team members collaborate with each other, as well as with experts in other medical disciplines, to provide you with individual care that addresses your unique needs.

Tests, Treatments and Services

Location

Related Programs

Related Treatments

For Referring Clinicians

To refer a patient for massage therapy at the Dayani Center, call (615) 322-4751.

Research and Training Links

Patient & Visitor Information

  • Patient & Visitor Information
  • Accepted Insurance Plans
  • My Health at Vanderbilt
  • Medical Record Information
  • Financial Assistance
  • Guest Services
  • Patient & Family Engagement
  • Notice of Privacy Practices
  • Digital Privacy Policy
  • Integrity Line
  • Standard Charges
  • Health Library

Take Action

  • Find a Doctor
  • Find a Location
  • Find Same-Day Care
  • Find a Clinical Trial
  • Pay a Bill
  • Make a Gift
  • Volunteer
  • Refer a Patient
  • Join Our Team

About Vanderbilt Health

  • About Vanderbilt University Medical Center
  • Quality and Patient Safety
  • Community Health Improvement
  • Research and Training Resources
  • Clinical Trials
  • Hospital-Based Clinics
  • Vanderbilt Wilson County Hospital
  • Vanderbilt Bedford Hospital
  • Vanderbilt Tullahoma-Harton Hospital

News and Communication

  • News from VUMC
  • News Media Inquiries
  • My Southern Health
  • Discover

Making Health Care Personal
Our Vision: The world leader in advancing personalized health
Our Mission: Personalizing the patient experience through our caring spirit and distinctive capabilities

Vanderbilt University Medical Center is committed to principles of equal opportunity and affirmative action. EOE/AA/Women/Minority/Vets/Disabled

Some clinics are designated as hospital-based. Learn more >

Many people assume that a sports massage is only for professional sports-people, it’s not. The main aim of a sports massage is to help alleviate the stress and tension that builds up in your body’s soft tissues during physical activity. Whether you’re an athlete, a once-a-week jogger or just physically active, a sports massage helps drain away fatigue, reduce muscle tension, promote flexibility and overall prepare you for peak performance. It can also help prevent those trivial injuries that get in the way of your performance.

What happens during a sports massage?

During your first appointment, our massage therapist will have a brief consultation with you to discuss your current health, lifestyle and relevant medical history. Our therapist generally focuses in on your problem area, for example, a frozen shoulder or pulled hamstrings, rather than give you a full-body massage.

An effective sports massage incorporates a combination of basic and advanced deep tissue massage techniques, stimulating the circulation of blood and lymph fluids. Trigger point therapy is also used to break down adhesions or knots in the muscles, allowing an increased range of motion. Combining these techniques helps increase blood flow to the tired muscles, speeding up recovery. It also helps the flow of blood back to the heart and the interstitial and lymph fluids around the body, essential for maintaining a healthy body.

When should you get a sports massage?

Ideally, athletes should get a sports massage three days to a week before a race or a big event. This gives your body enough time to flush out the byproducts that massage has released and for any residual soreness to go away.

Following your workout, it helps to schedule your next massage two or three days after. Ideally, you want your muscles to be relatively relaxed and not in a very fatigued state. If nothing is injured, this is the perfect time for a deep tissue massage and myofascial release.

Who can benefit from it?

You don’t have to be a sportsperson to reap the many benefits of a sports massage. Muscle tension, stress and fatigue can affect all of us, whether we are competitive or recreational athletes, busy housewives or stressed executives. Many of our clients report feeling those knots being “ironed out” post-massage.

Table of Contents

Still to this day, most people have very little idea how much hard work and talent is involved in becoming a massage therapist. Massage therapists must demonstrate a high degree of functionality in many areas, including:

  • physical stamina and fine motor coordination
  • clinical knowledge and judgment
  • good communication and interpersonal skills
  • trustworthiness and professionalism

Problems in any of these areas may prevent an individual from becoming registered as a massage therapist or maintaining a successful practice. The type of person who chooses to become a massage therapist is someone who combines an interest in people and health, a commitment to community service and people-centred alternatives, and an entrepreneurial spirit. Many of Sutherland-Chan’s students are making career changes, having found that they prefer to have more control over their work and more opportunities to help affect meaningful change in people’s lives.

Ontario’s Regulatory Body: the CMTO

The profession of massage therapy in Ontario is governed under the Regulated Health Professions Act and the Massage Therapy Act. This legislation mandates a regulatory body, called the College of Massage Therapists of Ontario (CMTO), to oversee the practice of massage therapy in our province. It is made up of six professional members elected by all of the active registered massage therapists (RMTs) in Ontario, and five public members appointed by the provincial government.

One way the CMTO regulates massage therapy is by mandating a set of core competencies for schools to utilize as a framework and on which the provincial certification exams are based. The competencies document establishes clear expectations for what Ontario massage therapy graduates will have learned while still allowing massage schools:

  • to design their own program and delivery methods
  • to pursue their own particular areas of excellence

For example, Sutherland-Chan offers elective courses and an extensive on-site and off-site specialty program which exceed core competency expectations.

The CMTO’s primary mandate is to protect the public. It does so by conducting entry-to-practice examinations for massage therapy school graduates and offshore applicants who wish to become registered to practice massage therapy in Ontario. Once you have completed your schooling, passing these certification examinations is the final step before becoming registered. The CMTO also conducts regular evaluations of massage therapy practitioners via its quality assurance program, and disciplines massage therapists if necessary. You can visit their website at CMTO.

The RMTAO: Our Professional Organization in Ontario

The Registered Massage Therapists Association of Ontario (RMTAO) is a professional organization whose mandate is to represent and advocate for its members and the massage therapy profession, for example by:

  • maintaining a referral list of RMTAO members for general public inquiries
  • providing insurance for practising massage therapists
  • conducting conferences and educationals
  • producing a journal and a newsletter
  • representing member interests in interactions with the CMTO, government bodies, the insurance industry, and so on.

The RMTAO offers a free student membership, and provides various types of advice and practical support for new practitioners as they become practicing RMTs. You can visit the RMTAO’s web site at RMTAO.

The Portability and Flexibility of Your Massage Therapy Education

You may be wondering about the portability of massage therapy, in other words, how easy it is to move and set up practice in other jurisdictions. Massage therapy is a wonderful profession in that it can meet the needs of the person who wants to settle into a stable practice as well as those who want to travel the world on a cruise ship or with a sports team.

In North America, massage therapy is typically regulated by province or state, and each one has its own set of requirements. Ontario graduates, who have completed one of the most extensive programs in North America, generally find that the requirements of other jurisdictions are easily met. Portability within Canada is usually a simple process of presenting one’s Ontario credentials, but there may be some minor additional steps to complete in some of the provinces.

Massage therapy educational programs in the United States range between 100-1500 hours. In some cases Ontario graduates can get immediate reciprocity; in others straightforward examinations must be passed. The United States also has a licencing examination called the MBLEx, that is administered by the Federation of State Massage Therapy Boards in 42 states. For more information, you can visit their website at FSMTB.

Massage therapy is a growing profession with an exciting future. In addition to our traditional arenas of employment (private and group practices, fitness and health clubs, hotels and spas, chiropractic and naturopathic offices, athletic venues) we are seeing expansion of work opportunities into direct medical care environments such as hospitals, rehabilitation centres, chronic care facilities, and medical practices.

In this Article

  • How Does Physical Therapy Treat Pain?
  • What Else Might I Do?
  • Will It Hurt?

Physical therapy is often one of the best choices you can make when you have long-term pain (also called chronic pain) or an injury. It can make you stronger and help you move and feel better.

Ask your doctor to recommend a physical therapist. You’ll probably need a series of visits, and you should practice some of the exercises at home for the best results.

Physical therapists have a lot of training. Still, it’s a good idea to ask them about their experience in working with people who’ve had conditions like yours. You can also ask them how many sessions you’ll need.

How Does Physical Therapy Treat Pain?

Physical therapists are experts not only in treating pain, but also its source. Yours will look for areas of weakness or stiffness that may be adding stress to the places that hurt. And they will treat those areas with certain exercises to ease pain and help you move better.

In a physical therapy session, you may do a mix of:

Low-impact aerobic training. These workouts will rev up your heart rate and still take it easy on your joints. For instance, you might walk fast or use a stationary bike to warm up, instead of running, before you do your strengthening exercises.

Strengthening exercises. You might use machines at your physical therapist’s office, resistance bands, or your own body weight (think lunges, squats, and pushups). You may work on your core muscles (belly, glutes, and back), as well as other parts of your body.

Pain relief exercises. These moves target areas where you have pain, so you’re stronger and more flexible — which should make it easier to live your life.

Stretching. This will be gentle, and your therapist will make sure that you’re warmed up and you don’t stretch too far.

Your physical therapist may prescribe exercises for you to do at home.

What Else Might I Do?

During your sessions, your therapist may also use:

Heat and ice packs. Ice calms inflammation. Heat warms up your muscles so they move better. Both can help with pain.

Massage. Keep in mind that a massage on areas that are injured, sore, or hurt may not feel relaxing. But your therapist will take great care to make sure it’s safe and helpful for you. If you get one by someone other than them, tell that professional about your pain before your session starts.

TENS and ultrasound. Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation, or TENS, uses a device to send a low-voltage electric current to the skin over the area where you have pain. Ultrasound sends sound waves to the areas that hurt. Both may offer relief by blocking the pain messages that go to your brain.

Will It Hurt?

Physical therapy shouldn’t hurt, and it will be safe. But because you’ll use parts of your body that are injured or have chronic pain, physical therapy can be challenging, even hard. For example, you may feel sore after stretching or deep tissue massage.

But there’s a reason for that. Your therapist has a specific plan in mind based on your particular needs. Sometimes to get stronger, you have to do some tough training. It will push you, but it shouldn’t be too much.

Each person may respond differently to therapy. Your body type, daily activities, alignment, and habits all affect your plan. Stick with it, and you’ll get the benefits.

Show Sources

International Spine Intervention Society.

Teens Health from Nemours: “Physical Therapy.”

Arthritis Foundation: “Fight Arthritis Pain Without Pills.”

Massage guns (a.k.a. the grown-up cousin of the foam roller) have taken the wellness scene by storm, with brands like Therabody (previously Theragun) seen in the hands of elite athletes and celeb gym bunnies.

Granted, they sit at the pricier end of the spectrum for fitness equipment, but the demand for said muscle guns isn’t slowing down, and from the more premium brands to the cheaper alternatives, the massage gun market is getting busier by the minute. Don’t believe us? Therabody celebrated its five-year anniversary this year, proving that the tech is much more than a passing fad. So without further ado, here’s everything you need to know about massage guns, including why you (genuinely) need one in your life.

What is the best massage gun?

The Women’s Health Lab has put some of the top massage guns in the shops to the test to bring you its favourites for banishing post-workout pains. The Women’s Health editors have also chipped in, sharing their pick of the 10 massage guns that help them soothe sore muscles.

Women’s Health Lab Approved:

  • Best massage gun:HoMedics Pro Physio Massage Gun
  • Runner-up massage gun:MuscleGun Carbon
  • Best value for money massage gun:RENPHO Massage Gun
  • Best massage gun for travel:Theragun Mini Massage Gun
  • Best massage gun for bigger muscles:Hyperice Hypervolt Plus
  • Best massage gun for back pain:Theragun PRO Massage Gun
  • Best small but mighty massage gun:Pulseroll Mini Massage Gun
  • Best massage gun for heavy leg days:Theragun Elite
  • Best budget massage gun:Snailax Massage Gun
  • Best massage gun for tight muscles:Pulseroll Massage Gun

Women’s Health Editors’ Picks:

  • Best massage gun on sale:Power Plate Pulse Massage Gun
  • Best cheap massage gun:Addsfit Portable Mini Massage Gun
  • Best compact massage gun:MyoLite
  • Best massage gun for hard users:OPOVE Massage Gun M3 Pro
  • Best cheap mini-massage gun:RENPHO Portable Mini Massage Gun
  • Best ergonomic massage gun:Theragun G4 Prime
  • Best mini massage gun:RecovaPro Lite
  • Best mid-range Theragun:Theragun LIV
  • Best massage gun for athletes:MyoPro

Do massage guns work?

Much like going for a massage, a muscle gun helps to reduce inflammation by flushing out your muscle tissues of the fluids built up by exercise and daily bodily stress. They use percussive therapy – repeated strikes to help relax muscle tension and alleviate soreness, which, if you suffer from regular DOMs (delayed onset muscle soreness) can be a real lifesaver. And whether they work? Our expert has put this to the test!

How to use a massage gun

Use in a similar way that you would a foam roller; either before exercise to activate muscles and increase blood flow, or after to release tension and prevent DOMS – muscle guns are the piece of kit your body will thank you for.

Or, simply when you feel your shoulders creeping up towards your ears and tension setting in.

Try to keep the head straight onto the body as you work, the face of the muscle gun head or attachment should be in contact with the muscle you’re trying to massage.

Can a massage gun replace a foam roller?

Muscle guns and foam rollers are both ways of performing massage on yourself at home. Which one you use depends on which part of the body you are trying to target, as well as your specific needs. Massage guns are best for use on larger areas such as lower back, glutes and hamstrings.

They also work better on targeted muscle groups where you are experiencing soreness, as you can adjust the settings to cater for your individual needs. Foam rollers can be effective for pre and post workout recovery but cannot be adjusted in the same way.

Are cheap massage guns any good?

Cheap massage guns are a bit of a mixed bag, but you can save serious coin and get a similar result – if you manage to find an affordable muscle gun that doesn’t skimp on tech or design.

Most cheap massage guns tend to have harder attachment heads (which make for a more uncomfortable experience), a shorter battery life or are less durable. If there’s the choice between a cheap muscle gun and a more expensive massage gun that’s on sale, we’d always suggest going with the one that looks like it’ll last the longest and is the most specced out. If it comes with a warranty, even better.

Women’s Health Lab Approved massage guns

The muscle guns below with our Women’s Health Lab Approved logo have been put to the test in the Women’s Health Lab. Our expert tester has trialled them over a three week period, using them around their hectic exercise schedule — made up of weightlifting, running, HIIT, yoga and more — to see how well each one helped muscles to recover.

These massage guns were judged on overall effectiveness, as well as how well they could glide over muscles, how easy they were to control, the practicality of their design, and their strength. Bonus points were also on offer for any innovative features or smart additions like carry cases.

All other entries have been personally selected by our editors.

It’s not a miracle cure, but it can help you recover faster, research suggests.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

  • A new review of research on sports massage shows that it may not provide some of the benefits that athletes expect.
  • In the short term, measures of performance like sprinting, jumping, and strength were not improved by sports massage. Researchers also concluded that sports massage doesn’t reduce muscle fatigue.
  • For runners who get massage, some of the main benefits include identifying problem areas in your muscles and helping with recovery after hard workouts.

Everyone agrees that a good sports massage feels great. But does it really help your running in any measurable way?

That’s what a recent review of research on the topic, published in BMJ Open Sport and Exercise Medicine, set out to answer. Researchers at the University of Sheffield in the United Kingdom compiled the results of studies on sports massage and various aspects of athletic performance, including strength, sprint and endurance performance, flexibility, and muscle soreness.

The reviewers looked only at studies that met their criteria for sports massage, which they defined as “manual manipulation of muscles and soft tissue by a qualified professional, with the purpose of improving performance in or recovery from sport.” (A previous research review on the topic included non-manual therapies such as vibration and water-jet massage). In all, they pooled the results of 29 studies, comprising more than 1,000 subjects.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

On the face of it, the findings don’t strongly support sports massage. The researchers concluded that, in the short term, sports massage doesn’t improve measures of performance (sprint, jump, strength, and performance). They also concluded that sports massage doesn’t reduce muscle fatigue (a decline in force and velocity that’s reversible by rest, according to the researchers).

The researchers did conclude that sports massage increases short-term flexibility and significantly reduces subjective ratings of muscle pain and soreness. But, they note, the flexibility findings were in comparison to doing nothing, rather than stretching, light exercise, and other common practices done with the hope of increasing flexibility.

But Here’s the Rub

The researchers’ conclusions might seem to undercut much of the rationale for sports massage. But Julia Kirtland, owner of Core 3 Sports Massage in Portland, Maine, and the 1997 U.S. marathon champion, mostly agrees with the review’s findings.

“Massage helps athletes maintain overall muscle health by identifying areas of tension and addressing them before an injury occurs,” she said. “Massage increases tissue flexibility and muscle relaxation, improves range of motion, relieves trigger points, as well as reduces adhesions. Combined, these benefits of massage help the athlete remain active, optimize his or her training, and maximize performance.”

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

It’s important to understand the limitations of the studies that have been done on sport massage and performance. They have been extremely short-term, and usually comparing a hard effort when subjects have and haven’t had a sports massage. For example, in one of the few studies on sports massage and endurance, 18 male cyclists did two 5K time trials 20 minutes apart. Between the two hard rides, they either cycled at an easy effort, lied down, or received a massage. Performances on the second time trial were best by those who cycled easily before it.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

That’s not how most people approach sport massage. Many elite runners get regular bodywork in the same way that you might frequently check your car’s oil level and tire pressure—a preventative approach that to seeks to keep the machinery running as smoothly as possible. The review’s finding that sports massage reduces feelings of muscle soreness should mean that treatments will leave you more able and eager to train at the level you want.

This more nuanced view of sport massage puts it in the category of other health-supporting practices, such as getting enough sleep and eating a varied, nutrient-dense diet. These practices allow your body to better withstand the demands of training and increase your chances of remaining injury-free, so that you can achieve the consistency that leads to true improvements in performance. “I think it’s through keeping muscles healthy that massage helps performance,” Kirtland said.

Similarly, sports massage is best viewed not as a one-time cure for long-term problems.

“Some issues—recent, but not severe—can be can be helped by just one, or a few, massages,” Kirtland said. “However, the issues that are chronic, often the type that runners deal with, tend to take time to ‘fix.’ Athletes have to be invested in maintaining muscle health long-term (through self-care as well as massage), not just waiting until they get hurt and can’t participate in their sport.”

If you use sports massage as one way to maintain your muscles’ health, then it makes sense to time them for when your muscles might most benefit. It’s better to get a massage later in the day rather than immediately after you’ve done a long run or hard workout. Another good time is the day after your longest and hardest runs, to potentially speed recovery for your next ambitious outing.

Most sports massage therapists had to stop working in the initial phase of the coronavirus pandemic. According to information compiled by the American Massage Therapy Association, massage is again allowed in all but eight states and the District of Columbia; some states have allowed massage therapy to resume in some areas while continuing to disallow it in areas with higher case loads. You can check your area’s status here.

ASPEN

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

WILLITS

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

The best Aspen workout

In 1989, world renowned trainer Jean-Robert Barbette had a vision to create a state-of-the-art gym that inspired and fostered a desire for improved health and lifestyles. Beginning from a humble 400 square foot facility, Jean-Robert’s Gym has steadily grown to over 15,000 square feet offering the best in cutting edge equipment, personal training and becoming an integral part of supporting the active community of Aspen, Colorado.В

Jean-Robert’s mission is to provide members and guests a strong foundation to help them achieve their fitness goals. This beautiful facility offers everything you would desire in a conventional gym environment and more. Offering swimming, personal training, spin classes, strength training for skiing and numerous customized programs, you can easily find what you are looking for. You can even relax in the spa or enjoy a therapeutic massage in our beautiful and peaceful massage center after a hard workout.

The Ultimate Exercise Equipment

From the state-of-the-art equipment, certified personal trainers and the beautiful 360 degree mountain views, you will quickly find yourself achieving more than you ever thought possible. Careful attention has been given to ensure all members and guests find the equipment and surroundings comfortable. From a large array of free weights to the most technologically advanced machines, Jean-Robert has handpicked the over 200 plus different pieces of workout equipment in the gym. In addition, the lap pool offers great aerobic workout regardless of the outdoor conditions.

Our Goal is Your Goal

Our goal is to provide you everything you need to start, maintain and live a healthy lifestyle. Our team is dedicated to training, teaching and supporting our members to become more than what they envision. In fact, after spending time at Jean-Robert’s Gym you’ll be able to better enjoy all that the Roaring Fork Valley has to offer. Your improved fitness will allow you to get after any outdoor adventures you have always wanted to experience. Your foundation of fitness starts here. Get fit and stay fit at Jean-Robert’s Gym!

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Discover Your Inner Athlete

Jean-Robert’s whole health approach has allowed us to create a perfect atmosphere that is open, inviting and safe for all users. Body and strength builders, professional skiers, moms, and business professionals all find the open environment beneficial to achieving their particular goals. Regardless if your interests are biking, hiking or just sightseeing, having a strong fitness foundation will allow you to enjoy everything beautiful Aspen has to offer. If you’ve never done any of these things but have always wanted to, we will help you find your inner athlete. Each of us has the ability to achieve fantastic results when motivated and properly coached. Every machine, program, instructor, trainer and class here is designed to help you succeed.

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Looking for the Best Massage in Downtown Aspen?

If you are looking for a great massage, you haveВ come to the right place. We offer a variety of massage services from our highly skilled therapists who have been professionally trained in the United States and abroad. All of our therapists are licensed and certified in the state of Colorado.

We are so dedicated to having the best therapists on staff that we even formed a massage school in 2011. The Aspen Massage institute is approved and regulated by the Division of Private Occupational School Board and is a source of inspiration for our therapists. Having an environment of continual learning sets us apart and allows us to offer multiple pricing levels. We pride ourselves on being able to say, “massage for everyone!”

Member Amenities in Aspen

Whirlpool

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

After a great workout there is nothing better than rewarding your body with a soak in our whirlpool. The therapeutic jets and bubbles will help you relax and alleviate the soreness in your muscles from lactic acid buildup. We have everything you need for yourВ Aspen Spa treatment, without all the fuss.В

Steam Room

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

A perfect time to use our steam room is after aВ massage. During a massage the toxins in your muscles are released and the warm therapy helps your body feel rejuvenated and restored. Locals know there is nothing better than a workout followed by a steam and a hot tub.

Lap Pool

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

Our lap pool offers a great way to round out your workout with some low impact exercise. Whether you are an extreme skier recovering from an injury or an older warrior that is looking to work on keeping strong, swimming in the lap pool is often just what the doctor ordered.

30 years of Dreaming

3 years in the making

This 7,000 square foot gym has an open layout that is comfortable, welcoming and inspiring. A gym designed for athletes, everything has been customized from the equipment to the sound system to the ventilation system.

Highlights include:

Modern Design and Spacious Layout – We want you to be inspired so we custom built an environment that is conducive to getting the best workout possible!

Constantly filtered Fresh Air! Via our amazing air filtration that is not recycled air. In fact, it is even better for your lungs than exercising outside as the advanced fresh air filtration removes allergens and dust!‍

Men’s and women’s locker rooms, that are elegantly designed, comfortable and spacious.‍

ADA compliant throughout with large elevator and 2 stories designed specifically for the Jean-Robert’s Gym in Willits.  ‍

Amazing sound system – to motivate you while you workout! (Does not overpower your own music if you wear earbuds.)

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

In the heart of Willits Town Center

Jean-Robert’s Gym in Willits
160 Robinson St, Basalt, CO

How to do a hard core advanced therapeutic massage

The Best Workout Equipment!

Outfitted with the latest high tech fitness equipment from these top brands:

  • Cybex – great for small muscle groups and core.
  • Freemotion – the best treadmill in the world – low impact.
  • Hoist – easier on joints as it mimics natural motions. “Rock it line” – your body moves with it.
  • Atlantis – patented and hard to get from Canada.
  • Technogym – great stretching equipment!

Welcome To Momentum Physical Therapy!

Momentum Physical Therapy provides the most comprehensive physical therapy San Antonio has to offer. We have multiple convenient locations to provide physical therapy to San Antonio and the surrounding communities including Helotes, Boerne, Bandera, Stone Oak, Medical Center, Live Oak, Brooks City Base, Westover Hills, Floresville, La Vernia, USAA and Dominion Crossing. We are proud to treat professional athletes from the NBA, NFL, MLB, PGA, MLS and NHL, but we don’t stop there. Our patients are of all ages, activity levels and from all walks of life. From little league champions to high school athletes, collegiate athletes and American Olympians, our therapy and sports rehabilitation services are trusted and proven to be successful. Whether you’re competing in front of millions or are a dedicated weekend warrior, the team at Momentum Physical Therapy can get you back on track.

San Antonio Physical Therapy Services

Welcome to Momentum Physical Therapy! Whether you’ve come for advanced manual therapy, sports rehab, neck pain, back pain or a workplace health program, we’re ready to get you out of pain and back to doing the things you love . Our team of experienced physical therapists is dedicated to delivering customized treatments with the most advanced techniques available in our field for meaningful results. With our hands-on care, you can get back to doing the things you love. We promise to work as hard as you do for a safe and fast recovery.

  • Sports Rehabilitation
  • Customized Hands-On Therapy
  • Massage Therapy
  • Orthopedic Rehabilitation
  • Advanced Manual Therapy
  • Suspension Training
  • Balance Rehabilitation
  • PT for Headache Pain
  • PT for Neck Pain
  • PT for Back Pain
  • PT for Shoulder Pain
  • PT for Knee Pain
  • PT for Foot Pain
  • PT for Hand Pain

Customized Hands-On Therapy

Momentum Physical Therapy patients receive adequate one-on-one time with their physical therapist, evidence-based manual therapy techniques and individualized treatment plans.

State-Of-The-Art Care

Our highly trained physical therapists are dedicated to incorporating the newest ideas and most up-to-date techniques in each patient’s individualized treatment plan.

Patient-First Care

From your first visit with Momentum Physical Therapy, you’ll find people who are dedicated to your health, well-being, and to making your care as pleasant as possible.

Write a Review

CORE “Coral” Ultra-Smooth (Set of 5) SYNERGY STONE Hot Stone Massage Tools

Description

The CORE Synergy Stone Massage Tool Set is a collection of (5) revolutionary SYNERGY STONE Massage tools. This Set of the five larger Stones enables massage practitioners to perform the New SYNERGY STONE Massage as well as enhance any other style of massage with the Synergy Stone Add-On. The Smooth surface of each specially shaped and contoured Stone provide a relaxing yet therapeutic sensation for the client. This Set include 1 Heat-Wave, 2 Serene and 2 Blissful SYNERGY STONE’S.

SYNERGY STONES are larger and stay warm longer than common Hot Stones. Each stone is the equivalent of 2-6 smaller basalt stones. This Set can be heated between (2) 14″ x 27″ electric heating pads or in a water filled stone heater. Patent Pending SYNERGY STONE Massage Tools are the result of over 5 years of testing hundreds of innovative designs to create the warmest, most controllable and versatile Massage Tools available.

SYNERGY STONE’s contoured shapes give far better results than common stones and are able to perform advanced HEAT-WAVE techniques that blend the warmth of Hot Stones with custom relaxing and therapeutic massage. Hand made of solid natural Stoneware near Seattle, WA., and developed by Scott Wynn, a massage professional with over 25 years experience, these revolutionary Massage tools blend the deeply relaxing warmth of traditional hot stones with the health benefits of deeper therapeutic massage.

Perform HEAT

WAVE techniques such as Soothe, Knead and Sculpt that make giving massage easier by doing the work of your fingers and thumbs for you. The Ultra-Smooth Sets also enables practitioners to enhance regular clothed massage styles with HEAT

WAVE techniques. Revitalize your current massage menu, earn more per/massage and propel your Studio or Spa ahead of the competition by adding SYNERGY STONES to your Studio or Spa.

This Tool Set can be HEATED with or WITHOUT WATER. For convenience or when you are not close to running water, heat this Set of Stones between our Water-Free System of one electric 14″ x 27″ TheraTherm heating pad, sold separately. This method of heating eliminates the need for water in the massage room. This also makes exchanging the stones during massage very fast. Setup and cleanup between massages are also very easy and quick. You can also purchase the Complete Water-Free System that includes everything you need to SYNERGIZE your Studio or Spa.

SYNERGY STONES blend Soothing HEAT, Custom PRESSURE and Advanced Massage TECHNIQUES into an Ultra-Relaxing Massage experience. It’s the Experience of being massaged with Soothing Warmth in gentle to deeper waves of stress relieving Massage Motion that clients love. Massage Therapists, athletes, couples, professionals and everyday people around the world are discovering why SYNERGY STONEs are the most advanced massage tools available. Learn more and watch the on-line demo videos at SynergyStone.com.

SYNERGY STONE’s are hand craf ted of durable solid ceramic stoneware near Seattle, WA. Each tool is made with pride to be cherished for years to come. Enjoy discovering how the tools Scott designed to save his own hands and career can enhance your massage and extend your career as well.

Which Color and Texture is Right for You? There are many colors but only two textures. Ultra-Smooth and Original Black. Ultra-Smooth Colors are Glossy and can be used with oils etc., on skin and dry over clothes. Original Black is the ONLY “Matte” textured color made for extra grip when using slippery oils, etc.. Choosing which Texture/Color comes down to personal preference. If you Only do massage with oils, etc., you can use either type but will have more grip with the Original Black. If you Only do Clothed Table or Chair massage, definitely go with the Ultra-Smooth Colors. If you do both, either get Both Textures, half and half, or go with Ultra-Smooth because Ultra-Smooth works with both oil and over clothes.

  • Both Original Black and the Ultra-Smooth Colors can be used against the skin with any lubricant such as massage oil, lotion, cream or gel.
  • Original Black is the only color with a matte surface over the whole stone. It is designed for use against the skin only and for the best grip when using with any lubricant.
  • Ultra-Smooth colors can be used against the skin with any lubricant AND over clothes such as for chair or clothed table massage. They are glossy smooth over the whole stone and have red “grip-spots” for extra grip when using massage oils, etc. If you find them too slippery exchanges are allowed within 30 days.

The CORE Tool Set Includes the following SYNERGY STONE Massage tools:

WAVE – SYNERGY STONE

  • 2 SERENE – SYNERGY STONES
  • 2 BLISSFUL – SYNERGY STONES
  • How to get started editing and writing on wikihow

    ACTIVITY

    You will identify a current wikiHow article that needs some substantial improvement in format, accuracy, and/or style, and you will revise the article to bring it up to wikiHow’s standards.

    To find a suitable article to revise, browse the list of articles that have been marked for clean up and follow the How to Copyedit instructions. For other editing ideas, see Steps 2 through 9 on the How to Contribute to wikiHow page.

    When you find an article, make a digital copy of the current version of the article, before you revise it. After you’re finished revising the article, make a new digital copy, to preserve the appearance of the article at the moment you stopped editing it.

    You will then write a rhetorical analysis that describes what revisions you made and how you know those revisions have substantially improved the article in terms of its readability, usefulness, and adherence to the wikiHow community standards. You will post this analysis, along with a link to the article you edited, to your blog.

    MAKING DIGITAL COPIES

    To submit your revision, you will include a digital copy of the article before you started working on it, a digital copy of the article taken the moment you stopped working on it, and a rhetorical analysis that explains the reasons for your changes. You will post these materials, along with a link to the article, to your blog.

    By “digital copy” of the article, I’m referring to a PDF, which is like a digital photocopy. For instructions on how to save a document as a PDF, see: HOW TO – “Print” to PDF (make a digital copy)

    If you didn’t get a digital copy of the article you revised before you started revising it, go to the article and click on the View History tab. You’ll see a list of the article’s revision history.

    Locate the revision you first made and then click on the link to the article below that revision. The version of the article as it appeared at that time should load.

    “Print” that version to a PDF file. Use a file name format like: Lastname-wikihow-before-edits.pdf

    Then load the current version of the article (as it appeared after you last edited it). “Print” that version to a PDF file. Use a file name format like: Lastname-wikihow-after-edits.pdf

    WRITE AN ANALYSIS OF YOUR REVISIONS

    Write an analysis of the article you revised that describes what you saw as the rhetorical weaknesses in the original version. Start by briefly describing the article itself, giving the title and original author’s name (or username) as well as a brief overview of the topic. Then explain what about the article made it a good candidate for revision. Did it fail to meet the needs of its target audience? Did it fail to meet wikiHow’s standards? Was it marked by the community as being in need of cleanup, and if so, for what reason? Explain your answers.

    Also describe and analyze the nature and scope of the revisions you made. What about the article did you decide to change and why? How can you tell that your revisions have made the article more reader-friendly or more well-suited to the standards and customs of wikiHow? This is your chance to persuade me to see the significance of the revisions you made, which will help me determine a grade.

    POST YOUR ANALYSIS AND DIGITAL COPIES

    Follow these steps to post the “before” and “after” versions of the article as well as your analysis of the revisions you made:

    (1) Create a new entry on your blog and use this subject line: Analysis of Revisions to wikiHow Article. (Instead of “wikiHow Article,” you could put the title of the article you revised.)

    (2) In the Categories box along the right side of the page, check the box for this Category: Portfolio (or whatever category you used for the rhetorical analysis, above).

    (3) In the editing box, type or paste the content of your revision analysis, as described above. The first time you mention the title of the article you revised, make it a hyperlink to the article’s URL.

    To create a hyperlink, highlight the title, click the link icon in the toolbar, paste the article’s URL into the Insert Link box, and click the OK button. See: How do I insert a link into a blog entry? .)

    (4) Attach the two PDFs you made, one of article “before” you revised it and one of the article “after” your revisions.

    To attach a file to a blog entry, click one of the “Add Media” buttons above the toolbar (it doesn’t really matter which one). Click the button to select files from your computer, locate both the first PDF file, and select it. After WordPress uploads it, it will show you a window where you can add or change information about the file. You can leave everything as is and just click the “Insert Into Post” button. Then repeat the process to attach the second PDF.

    (5) To see a preview of what your blog entry will look like when it’s published, click the Preview button near the upper right corner of the post editing page. A preview will load in a new window.

    (6) Check the preview to see if everything looks OK. Then close the preview window and return to the editing page. Make any additional revisions, if needed. Then click the blue Update or Publish button to submit the entry to your blog.

    You might want to then view the front page of your blog to see how the new post appears. If you can see it there, we can see it too. (You can view the front page of your blog by clicking on the name of your blog in the upper left corner of the Dashboard page.)

    Welcome!

    WHAT IS THIS SITE? See the About tab in the top menu.

    UNDER PERPETUAL REVISION: All materials on this site are subject to ongoing revision and improvement!

    Please wait while we verify that you’re a real person. Your content will appear shortly. If you continue to see this message, please email to let us know you’re having trouble.

    Veuillez patienter pendant que nous vérifions que vous êtes une personne réelle. Votre contenu s’affichera bientôt. Si vous continuez à voir ce message, contactez-nous à l’adresse pour nous faire part du problème.

    Bitte warten Sie, während wir überprüfen, dass Sie wirklich ein Mensch sind. Ihr Inhalt wird in Kürze angezeigt. Wenn Sie weiterhin diese Meldung erhalten, informieren Sie uns darüber bitte per E-Mail an .

    Even geduld a.u.b. terwijl we verifiëren of u een persoon bent. Uw content wordt binnenkort weergegeven. Als u dit bericht blijft zien, stuur dan een e-mail naar om ons te informeren over uw problemen.

    Espera mientras verificamos que eres una persona real. Tu contenido se mostrará en breve. Si continúas recibiendo este mensaje, infórmanos del problema enviando un correo electrónico a .

    Espera mientras verificamos que eres una persona real. Tu contenido aparecerá en breve. Si continúas viendo este mensaje, envía un correo electrónico a para informarnos que tienes problemas.

    Aguarde enquanto confirmamos que você é uma pessoa de verdade. Seu conteúdo será exibido em breve. Caso continue recebendo esta mensagem, envie um e-mail para para nos informar sobre o problema.

    Attendi mentre verifichiamo che sei una persona reale. Il tuo contenuto verrà visualizzato a breve. Se continui a visualizzare questo messaggio, invia un’email all’indirizzo per informarci del problema.

    The so-called ‘hybrid’ company looks like a nonprofit, makes money like a business, and serves the community like a government.

    How to get started editing and writing on wikihow

    WikiHow is like Wikipedia, except it’s for-profit and focused on offering instructions. Tens of thousands of people around the world write and edit step-by-step articles on how to do just about everything–open a locked car, make a 3D paper snowflake, get rid of fruit flies, and even sneak your cat to work (yes, there are instructions for letting the cat out of the bag). The website gets more than 40 million unique visitors every month, which is more worldwide traffic than Urban Dictionary, The Los Angeles Times and The Washington Post each garner.

    WikiHow founder Jack Herrick has taken a decidedly different tack when it comes to building his business. WikiHow’s 14 employees work out of a house in downtown Palo Alto, Calif., and the company is intentionally self-funded. On top of that, it’s a media company where everyone owns its content.

    A Hybrid Approach

    WikiHow calls itself a “hybrid organization.” The website explains that like a non-profit, it wants to benefit people; like a government, it is creating something for the public good; and like a business, it makes money.

    It’s an interesting concept and one that seems to work–wikiHow has been profitable for several years, Herrick says.

    Wikia is another example. Created by Wikipedia founder Jimmy Wales, the for-profit collaborative content platform was listed by Nielsen last year as one of the top 10 social networks in the U.S.–it gets more than 50 million unique visitors per month and has more than 250,000 communities and more than 20 million pages.

    Both Wikia and wikiHow make their money from ads.

    Small and Self-Funded

    Why a work in a house? Herrick says people can be more relaxed–and hence, creative–in a home environment as opposed to a cube farm. You’d also think it helps cut costs, considering Silicon Valley office space is some of the most expensive real estate on the planet.

    As for funding, wikiHow refused several financing offers between 2005 and 2008, a time when Herrick says content companies were hot targets for VCs (now, not so much).

    “In Silicon Valley I am a huge outlier in the fact that we’re one of very few companies that has the ability to take venture financing and has refused it,” Herrick says. “Bootstrapping. really forces you to invent your way out of problems rather than spend your way out of problems [and ] invent ways to grow rather than spend on ways to grow.”

    Herrick says a “large public Internet company” even offered to buy wikiHow, but he turned it down.

    “Accepting the offer would have made me a lot of money, but money isn’t everything. We get a lot of joy in continuously improving our ability to offer free how-to instructions to the world,” he says.

    Owned by Everyone

    Another twist: Because wikiHow content is Creative Commons licensed it is “owned by everyone.” Plus, anyone can download the software holding everything together because it’s open-source and freely licensed under the General Public License.

    The wikiHow site even proclaims:

    Jack owns the servers, the domain name, trademarks, and some office supplies and furniture. That said. anyone has the right to “fork” wikiHow and move all the content and software to new servers and domain, so in some sense Jack owns almost nothing. Basically, Jack is the steward of the wikiHow community–as long as the community believes he is the best steward possible and acts in the interest of the community and the wikiHow mission.

    Herrick’s hope, of course, is that no one does it, and he believes they won’t. In a Web 2.0 Expo interview, Herrick explained his philosophy:

    People contribute to wikiHow because they are inspired by the mission of making the world’s how-to manual. Yet every user knows that the web companies change business models frequently and occasionally trash community projects as a result. Giving users the right to fork creates the trust that all the hard work people put into wikiHow will always be owned in some form by the community.

    Of course, user-generated content can be messy. Just look at the problems Amazon and Yelp have had with bogus reviews. Unlike Yahoo Answers, About.com, and eHow (which Herrick sold to Demand Media in 2006), wikiHow lets anybody edit articles, but uses multiple layers of quality assurance to try to make sure the changes are good ones.

    So far, the model is working–give or take a few well-documented examples of inaccurate wikiHow pages. While it’s bound to happen, Herrick says more often than not the company’s transparency leads to high quality work.

    Learning to code is intimidating, so set yourself up for success with a tool built for you. Visual Studio Code is a free coding editor that helps you start coding quickly. Use it to code in any programming language, without switching editors. Visual Studio Code has support for many languages, including Python, Java, C++, JavaScript, and more. Ready to get started? Check out these introductory videos or check out our coding packs for Java, Python, and .NET.

    Why VS Code?

    How to get started editing and writing on wikihow

    Collaborate and code remotely

    Work together remotely with your teachers or classmates using the free LiveShare extension. Edit and debug your code in real-time, and use the chat and call features to ask questions or discuss ideas together. Whether you’re working on a group assignment or teaching a lesson, you can invite multiple people to join your session and code together. Check out this tutorial on how start using LiveShare.

    Code to learn

    New to coding? Visual Studio Code highlights keywords in your code in different colors to help you easily identify coding patterns and learn faster. You can also take advantage of features like IntelliSense and Peek Definition, which help you understand how functions can be used, and how they relate to one another.

    Fix errors as you code

    As you code, Visual Studio Code gives you suggestions to complete lines of code and quick fixes for common mistakes. You can also use the debugger in VS Code to step through each line of code and understand what is happening. Check out guides on how to use the debugger if you’re coding in Python, Java, and JavaScript/TypeScript/Node.js.

    Make it yours with custom themes and colors

    You can change the look and feel of VS Code by picking your favorite fonts and icons and choosing from hundreds of color themes. Check out this video on personalizing VS Code.

    Compare changes in your code

    Use the built-in source control to save your work over time so you don’t lose progress. See a graphical side-by-side view to compare versions of your code from different points in time. Check out this quick video on how to get a side-by-side “diff”.

    Code inside Notebooks

    If you want to try a project in data science or data visualization, you can use Jupyter notebooks inside VS Code. Run your code step-by-step, and visualize and interact with your data, variables, graphs, and plots. Check out this tutorial on how to work with Jupyter Notebooks inside VS Code.

    Example 1: “Oh dude, some nasty language in that edit, I’m gonna roll back changes to the last good edit.”

    Example 2: “I see a ton of spelling/grammar/punctuation/sentence structure mistakes in this article, im going to go ahead and press the edit button on this article now to enlighten them, then perhaps it will even have the chance at becoming a featured article! Horray!”

    Example 3: “Did you see my wikiHow about How to be a Goth?” “No, but you should read my article on How to be Preppy instead.”

    wikiHow is one of the only sites on the Internet where anyone can learn how to do LITERALLY ANYTHING. It’s considered the world’s largest how-to manual, and since it’s a wiki website (like Wikipedia), anyone can edit articles. Their community members are sometimes called “knowledge philanthropists” because their goal is to help people learn on every possible subject, and when someone makes an edit, they have people in the community come together to make sure the edits are quality. They also get the experts to review the articles and make sure they’re actually helpful. Because there’s so much information, it can be easy to fall into a rabbit hole. If you’re looking for something that they don’t have, you can put in a request for it to be written.

    You can also ask Alexa or Google how to do things, and they’ll usually give you a wikiHow article.

    “I have no idea how to change this flat tire.”
    “How do I lose 10 pounds in time for summer?”
    “When can I tell if this pasta is totally cooked?”
    “How do I know if I’m registered to vote?”

    Referencing the site directly
    Person 1: Does anyone know how to get a wine stain out of carpet?
    Person 2: Look it up on wikiHow!

    “Figure it out yourself”
    Person 1: I need help.
    Person 2: wikiHow it.

    Passive Aggressive way to make a comment
    Person 1: I can’t believe that person is still mad at me!
    Person 2: wikiHow to get over it.

    Typical WikiHow article: How to visit Google Search engine.

    1. Open your internet browser.
    *Click the Start button.
    *Click All Programs.
    *Select the menu item associated with your internet browser.
    2. Type the Google url into your address bar (located at the top of the browser’s window).
    *Press G on your keyboard.
    *Press O on your keyboard.
    *Press O on your keyboard.
    *Press G on your keyboard.
    *Press L on your keyboard.
    *Press E on your keyboard.
    *Press the period button on your keyboard.
    *Press C on your keyboard.
    *Press O on your keyboard.
    *Press M on your keyboard.
    3. Load Google.
    *Press Enter on your keyboard.

    New to programming? Python is free and easy to learn if you know where to start! This guide will help you to get started quickly.

    New to Python?

    Read BeginnersGuide/Overview for a short explanation of what Python is.

    Getting Python

    Next, install the Python 3 interpreter on your computer. This is the program that reads Python programs and carries out their instructions; you need it before you can do any Python programming. Mac and Linux distributions may include an outdated version of Python (Python 2), but you should install an updated one (Python 3). See BeginnersGuide/Download for instructions to download the correct version of Python.

    There are also Python interpreter and IDE bundles available, such as Thonny. Other options can be found at IntegratedDevelopmentEnvironments.

    At some stage, you’ll want to edit and save your program code. Take a look at HowToEditPythonCode for some advice and recommendations.

    Learning Python

    Next, read a tutorial and try some simple experiments with your new Python interpreter.

    If you have never programmed before, see BeginnersGuide/NonProgrammers for a list of suitable tutorials.

    If you have previous programming experience, consult BeginnersGuide/Programmers, which lists more advanced tutorials.

    If English isn’t your first language, you might be more comfortable with a tutorial that’s been translated into your language. Consult python.org’s list of Non-English resources.

    Most tutorials assume that you know how to run a program on your computer. If you are using Windows and need help with this, see How do I Run a Program Under Windows.

    Some sites offer in-browser coding for those who want to learn Python:

    please keep this list alphabetized

    Dataquest for Python for data science.

    HackInScience free and open source platform.

    Print a cheat sheet of the most important Python features and post it to your office wall until you know the basics well.

    Once you have read a tutorial, you can browse through Python’s online documentation. It includes a tutorial that might come in handy, a Library Reference that lists all of the modules that come standard with Python, and the Language Reference for a complete (if rather dry) explanation of Python’s syntax.

    When you are ready to write your first program, you will need a text editor or an IDE. If you don’t want to use Thonny or something more advanced, then you can use IDLE, which is bundled with Python and supports extensions.

    This Python wiki also contains a page about Python One-Liners — an obscure but interesting subculture in Python.

    Need Help?

    Need help with any of this? Read BeginnersGuide/Help for mailing lists and newsgroups.

    Most Python books will include an introduction to the language; see IntroductoryBooks for suggested titles.

    Consult BeginnersGuide/Examples for small programs and little snippets of code that can help you learn.

    Or, if you prefer to learn Python through listening to a lecture, you can attend a training course or even hire a trainer to come to your company. Consult the PythonEvents page to see if any training courses are scheduled in your area and the PythonTraining page for a list of trainers.

    Teachers can join the EDU-SIG, a mailing list for discussion of Python’s use in teaching at any level ranging from K-12 up to university.

    How to get started editing and writing on wikihow

    Kendra Cherry, MS, is an author and educational consultant focused on helping students learn about psychology.

    How to get started editing and writing on wikihow

    Amy Morin, LCSW, is the Editor-in-Chief of Verywell Mind. She’s also a psychotherapist, the author of the bestselling book “13 Things Mentally Strong People Don’t Do,” and the host of The Verywell Mind Podcast.

    Resilience refers to how well you can deal with and bounce back from the difficulties of life. It can mean the difference between handling pressure and losing your cool. Resilient people tend to maintain a more positive outlook and cope with stress more effectively.

    Research has shown that while some people seem to come by resilience naturally, these behaviors can also be learned. Whether you’re going through a tough time now or you want to be prepared for the next one, here are 10 techniques you can focus on in order to foster your own resilience.

    Find a Sense of Purpose

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Rawpixel / Getty Images

    After her 13-year-old daughter was killed by a drunk driver, Candace Lightner founded Mother’s Against Drunk Driving (MADD). Lightner focussed her energy on creating awareness of the dangers of drunk driving. “I promised myself on the day of Cari’s death that I would fight to make this needless homicide count for something positive in the years ahead,” she later explained.

    In the face of crisis or tragedy, finding a sense of purpose can play an important role in your recovery. This might mean becoming involved in your community, cultivating your spirituality, or participating in activities that are meaningful to you.

    Believe in Your Abilities

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    JGI / Jamie Grill / Getty Images

    Having confidence in your own ability to cope with the stresses of life can play an important part in resilience. Becoming more confident in your own abilities, including your ability to respond to and deal with a crisis, is a great way to build resilience for the future.

    Listen for negative comments in your head. When you hear them, practice immediately replacing them with positive ones, such as, “I can do this,” “I’m a great friend/mother/partner,” or “I’m good at my job.”

    Research has demonstrated that your self-esteem plays an important role in coping with stress and recovering from difficult events. Remind yourself of your strengths and accomplishments.

    Estudiantes auxiliares: 006 – Geopolítica, relaciones internacionales y conflictos fronterizos entre Colombia y los países Centroamericanos con Costas en el Caribe. 1886 1946

    Fecha de Cierre: 30 / mar / 22

    Estudiantes auxiliares: 005 – FORTALECIMIENTO DE LA SEGURIDAD EN EL CARIBE INSULAR COLOMBIANO. EL DESPLIEGUE DEL ESTADO

    Fecha de Cierre: 01 / abr / 22

    Estudiantes auxiliares: 004 – Proyecto de investigación: Resistencias Ecofeministas desde las Narrativas de Mujeres Afro Caribeñas ante los Extractivismos

    Fecha de Cierre: 29 / mar / 22

    Calendario Académico

    COMITÉ ACADÉMICO ADMINISTRATIVO ACUERDO NÚMERO 040 DE 2021 (Acta No. 009 del 2 de julio de 2021)
    Por el cual se modifica parcialmente el Acuerdo 038 de 2020 “Por el cual se fija el CALENDARIO ACADÉMICO del año 2021 para los programas de pregrado, actividades académicas y administrativas en la Sede de la Sede Caribe”. [Leer más]

    Estudiantes auxiliares: 006 – Geopolítica, relaciones internacionales y conflictos fronterizos entre Colombia y los países Centroamericanos con Costas en el Caribe. 1886 1946

    Fecha de Cierre: 30 / mar / 22

    Estudiantes auxiliares: 005 – FORTALECIMIENTO DE LA SEGURIDAD EN EL CARIBE INSULAR COLOMBIANO. EL DESPLIEGUE DEL ESTADO

    Fecha de Cierre: 01 / abr / 22

    Estudiantes auxiliares: 004 – Proyecto de investigación: Resistencias Ecofeministas desde las Narrativas de Mujeres Afro Caribeñas ante los Extractivismos

    How do you start writing wikiHow?

    Get out a pen and a piece of paper or open a new document on your computer. Set a timer for 15 minutes and start writing! Write about anything that comes to mind and do not censor or correct yourself. Even if your mind is blank, write, “My mind is blank” over and over again until you think of something else to write.

    Do wikiHow writers get paid?

    Does wikiHow pay its contributors or writers? No, all contributors are volunteers.

    How do you write well wikiHow?

    1. Avoid using archaic vocabulary and writing conventions.
    2. Give your story to someone; to read and make sure that there’re no spelling mistakes.
    3. After writing your first draft, spend a bit of time away from your story.
    4. Memorize technical terms.
    5. Don’t be afraid to write out of order.
    6. Find a comfortable place to write.

    How can I improve my writing skills wikiHow?

    Write down and practice new words.

    1. If you write words on flashcards, include a sentence using the word. Having context will help you better remember it.
    2. Don’t just learn the word in isolation – learn different forms of the word as well.
    3. Incorporate words you like into your working vocabulary.

    How do you develop good writing skills?

    9 Simple Ways on How to Improve Your Writing Skills

    1. Write Every Day. One of the best writing tips I can give you is to write every day.
    2. Create an Outline.
    3. Read What You Want to Write About.
    4. Choose Simple Words.
    5. Convey Your Message Easily.
    6. Avoid Filler Words.
    7. Keep Sentences and Paragraphs Short.
    8. Invest in an Editing Tool.

    What’s bad writing?

    Bad writing usually involves endless exposition dumps within dialogue — characters that are either saying what they already know for the benefit of the audience or reader alone or telling us stories of actions that have happened off screen or away from the story being told. Readers and the audience are smart.

    Is Google Docs good for writing?

    Google Docs is a great choice as a word processor. It has everything you need to write your novel, and integrates with other aspects of Google to help you plan things out. But if you’re not a Google Docs fan, or if you just want to consider other options, there are plenty to help you write your novel.

    What is Google Docs written in?

    How can I write in Google?

    Go to http://posts.google.com/author.

    1. Click the Publish on Google text box.
    2. Choose your post type, and follow the onscreen instructions.
    3. To see how your post will appear on Search, click Preview at the top of the box.
    4. To target your posts to specific regions or languages, at the top of the box, click Target.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    How much wallpaper do I need? That’s a great question! And it isn’t hard to figure out.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    One solid search on the internet for “wallpaper calculator” will turn up a bunch of results for automated engines that will crunch the numbers for you. How handy! But I’ll admit that I don’t trust someone else’s code when I’m trying to figure out how much wallpaper I need for a project. PARTICULARLY when that wallpaper has a repeat pattern, which is most of the time. I really prefer pencil, paper and a calculator.

    For most installations, calculating the amount of wallpaper needed is straight forward and easy!

    Below, is how I measure for wallpaper. I will walk you through the steps for estimating how much wallpaper you need. Make sure to read through the whole article for additional information and tips.

    Measure in inches, ignore trim, windows and doors – this will give you a little room for mistakes and waste

    Measurements you will need:

    • Height of each wall in inches
    • Width of each wall in inches
    • Vertical wallpaper repeat in inches (found in product listing)
    • Width of wallpaper in inches (found in product listing)

    Calculations:

    1. Divide the height of each wall by the height of the wallpaper repeat.Round fractions up. This will tell you the number of repeats needed for the height of the wall.
    2. Multiply the result of step 1 by the height of the wallpaper repeat. This will give you the length of each strip of wallpaper required to paper from floor to ceiling with enough room to match your repeat.
    3. Divide the result of step 2 by 12. Round fractions up. This will give you the length of each strip of wallpaper in feet.
    4. Divide the width of each wall by the width of the wallpaper.Round fractions up. This will give you the number of strips needed to paper each wall.
    5. Add up the number of strips needed for each wall in order to know how many total strips will be needed to paper the whole room.
    6. Multiply the length of each strip needed by the number of strips needed. This will give you the total wallpaper needed in feet.
    7. If you are ordering wallpaper by the yard, divide the result from step 5 by 3.Round fractions up. This will give you the total wallpaper needed in yards.

    See below for an example of how to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed for a room.

    Take into account how much extra wallpaper you should have on hand. At minimum, we recommend adding 10% for touch ups and mistakes. Consider buying an additional roll or yardage if one of your walls is a wet wall or has other factors which may require access in the future.

    If your walls are different heights or you are papering staircases or vaulted ceilings, consult a professional paper hanger to review the location for your installation. Provide them with the sizes of wallpaper rolls available and the pattern repeat for the paper you will be using. This will allow them to estimate the number of rolls required for your job and determine which roll length will reduce the amount of waste and keep your costs down. Find a paperhanger in your area through the The Wallcovering Installers Association. You are also welcome to contact us. We are happy to help you work through your measurements.

    Pearl and Maude wallpaper is made to order. It is important to order enough material for your installation from a single dye lot. We recommend confirming your measurements with a professional paperhanger before ordering.

    Example:

    For this example, we will measure how much Bunsen Blue White Standard Wallpaper we will need to paper a 20’ x 15’ room with 9’ ceilings.

    Use this handy calculator to measure how many rolls of wallpaper you’ll need to complete your home improvement project.

    To estimate the amount of standard American wallpaper you’ll need, first add up the lengths of all walls to get the distance around the room and enter this figure as the perimeter of the room. Round off to the nearest foot. Next, enter the number of single doors (about 20 square feet), the number of double doors (about 40 square feet), small windows (10 square feet) and large windows (25 square feet). Also enter the square footage of any other openings or areas not to be wallpapered — such as a fireplace.

    View debt consolidation loan rates

    Next enter the size of the roll of the paper you’re using in square feet, and click on “calculate.” The calculator will tell you how many rolls of that size are needed. A standard American roll of wallpaper gives you about 35 square feet, but waste and pattern matching usually takes this down to about 27 usable square feet per roll.

    Allow for 5% more material for waste. This is an estimate only.

    Two wallpapering tips:

    • Always buy paper that carries the same lot, run or batch number. And buy more of it than you need. In addition to a pattern number, wallpaper usually is labeled with the lot, batch or run number, which indicates all the colors in that batch will be consistent. The same color in a different run or lot may be noticeably different. Buy more than you need so you’ll have matching colors if you need to repaper or make repairs in the future.
    • Some waste is created when the paper must be dropped down to match the pattern on the panel just installed. To minimize this problem use two rolls at a time and alternate.

    Calculate how many rolls of wallpaper you need for your project by entering your room’s dimensions and coverage per roll below. Estimate the cost by adding the price per roll.

    Wallpaper Estimate:

    On this page:

    • Wallpaper Calculator
    • How to Estimate How Much Wallpaper You Need
    • Step One: Find the Square Footage of the Room
    • Step Two: Find the Wallpaper Coverage
    • Step Three: Calculate Wallpaper Rolls Needed

    How to Estimate How Much Wallpaper You Need

    To calculate how much wallpaper you need, follow a few simple steps. First, find the square footage of the surfaces to be wallpapered, determine the usable wallpaper per roll, then calculate how many rolls of wallpaper will be needed to cover the room’s square footage.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Step One: Find the Square Footage of the Room

    The first step in estimating wallpaper is to find the square footage of the room. Square footage is the measurement of a space in feet. You can find a wall’s square footage by measuring the length and height, and then multiplying them together.

    Make sure length, width, and height measurements are in feet before you multiply to find the square footage, it may be easiest to round your measurements to avoid working with inch fractions and decimals.

    For example, let’s find the square footage of a wall that is 12 ft wide by 9 ft high wall.

    sq ft = width × height
    sq ft = 12 ft × 9 ft
    sq ft = 108 sq ft

    If your walls are not simple rectangles or are complex, then you can split up the wall into smaller chunks and find the square footage of each part separately, then add the square footage measurements together.

    For example, if your wall is not a simple rectangle, break it into different sections and measure the square footage of each section and add the different sections together.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper neededIllustration showing how to break up a complex wall shape into smaller pieces to measure.

    Once you know the square footage of each wall, add all of them together to find the total project square footage.

    Here’s a tip: try using our square footage calculator to easily find the square footage of your room.

    Step Two: Find the Wallpaper Coverage

    The next step is to find the usable coverage for your chosen wallpaper in square feet. Different wallpaper patterns have different amounts of usable square footage, which is determined by the drop pattern.

    When you drop the next section of wallpaper to align the pattern with the previous section, there will be waste that needs to be cut to make the pattern line up. This waste reduces the usable square footage of the roll.

    The following are estimates of the coverage of different drop patterns.

    Usable wallpaper per roll for various drop patterns. A standard US wallpaper roll with no pattern will cover 36 square feet, a standard European roll will cover 29 square feet

    Drop Pattern Wallpaper Coverage
    no drop pattern 29 – 36 sq ft
    0″ – 6″ drop pattern 25 sq ft
    7″ – 12″ inch drop pattern 22 sq ft
    13″ – 18″ inch drop pattern 20 sq ft
    19″ – 23″ inch drop pattern 15 sq ft

    Step Three: Calculate Wallpaper Rolls Needed

    The final step in estimating wallpaper is to use the total square feet and coverage per roll to find the number of rolls you need. Find the number of rolls needed by dividing the total square footage by the usable square footage per roll.

    For example, find the number of rolls needed to cover a room with 350 sq ft of walls using rolls that have 25 usable square feet.

    rolls = wall sq. ft. ÷ usable sq. ft.
    rolls = 350 sq. ft. ÷ 25 sq. ft.
    rolls = 14

    We recommend ordering about 10% to 20% extra to allow for cuts and waste material. If you are fairly close to an even roll, then it may be a good idea to order an extra roll to ensure you are not short on material.

    It might even be worth ordering some extra to allow for future patches and repairs, if needed.

    If you’re also doing some painting in this space, you might be interested in estimating how many gallons of paint you’ll need.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    How do I calculate how much wallpaper I will need for my room?

    You will need to work out how much wallpaper you need before you buy. Make sure you’re not left short when installing, and you don’t want to over spend and buy too much.

    Use our wallpaper calculator

    Measure your room wall by wall. Enter your measurements below to estimate appropriately

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    See something you like? Available through dvd Interior Design.

    How Much Wallpaper Do I Need Formula:

    Wall area, – 20 square feet per door, – 15 square feet per window, and all of this divided by the usable number of square feet per roll (average).

    For American rolls this is:

    0″-6″: 32 square feet

    7″-12″: 30 square feet

    13″-18″: 27 square feet

    19″-23″: 25 square feet

    Our wallpaper calculator requires you to input some data first. It includes the following values:

    Room dimensions: you need to type in the length, width, and height of the room. If your room has a different shape that a rectangular cuboid, you can also input the surface area directly. We recommend that you measure the height of your room anyhow if you want to include pattern repeat into the calculations.

    Doors: you can leave the default dimensions of doors or customize them. Once you will type the number of doors in, the wallpaper calculator will find their area automatically.

    Windows: again, you can choose the default dimensions or type in custom ones. If you have windows of different sizes in your room, you can also calculate the total area manually and input this value into the appropriate box.

    Wallpaper specifications: these includes values such as the cost of one wallpaper roll, its length, width, and the paper repeat (measured vertically). All of these values can be found on the wallpaper packaging.

    Once you type in all of these values, our wallpaper calculator will find the following for you:

    Adjusted height: this is the actual length of wallpaper you will need to use per stripe to account for the pattern repeat.

    Adjusted room area: takes into consideration both the pattern repeat and openings.

    Number of rolls: the total number of wallpaper rolls you need to buy. This number is always rounded up.

    Total cost: the total amount of money you need to pay for your wallpaper.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    It’s Back!

    Yes, wallpaper for your home is back and it’s back in a big way!.

    Despite all those tiring memories of scraping that old yellow wallpaper from the past (1970?) off of many walls to clean them up with a fresh application of paint, I am excited to add paper as an instant update to any room, interior design with wallpaper can be fun. The options available today have me forgetting those painful memories and wanting more. It’s looking great in the entry, the bathroom and on the ceiling. It is a welcomed trend shift for an update.

    So here are the latest prints and designs of wallpaper designs for your walls, ceilings and bookcases. Take a look at some of the best interior design wallpaper, everything from florals, to wood textures, murals and more.

    ( click here to see Part 1 of our selections) Timeless and Classic, Funky and Fun

    ( click here to see Part 2 of our Selections ) Motifs and Murals , Custom NY Printers and more.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    image via designer Ghislaine Vinas with Flavor Paper, photo via Garret Rowland.

    Flavor Paper

    And as always, make sure you’re registered to receive dvd Interior Design blog updates directly in your inbox.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Serena & Lily

    Thank you For stopping by. I hope you were inspired, or found what you were looking for.

    Here’s another Wallpaper Calculator for simple calculations

    UPDATES: This week is going to be a crazy week with market approaching and a few new project prospects to meet, but i wanted to share with you a few exciting developments occurring this Fall.

    BLISSDOM CONFERENCE has returned!

    Anticipation is in the air, as I am super excited to announce that I will be a COMMUNITY LEADER for the return of the BLISSDOM CONFERENCE in Nashville, TN this November.

    Yes, it has been 10 years since the last conference, and I can’t tell you how important those connections that I have made many years ago have been for me as I evolve my online experience. Blissdom is all about the power of community, wisdom, and that rising tides lift all boats. We are a community of women that works to improve our lives and businesses because we know that true success depends on both.

    As a Community Leader, I will help to ensure the Blissdom vision is a reality, and serve as an official ambassador of Blissdom, by helping to share the culture and any updates about Blissdom on social media leading up to the event.

    While at Blissdom, make sure to visit the WORKSHOPS where I will help to welcome fellow attendees and answer questions as they arise. Additionally, I will facilitate discussions during the Q&A time at the end of the workshops.

    DM me on Instagram if you will be attending. This is going to be another amazing year!
    I HOPE TO SEEYOU THERE.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    How much wallpaper will you need:

    A single roll of wallpaper is 27 inches wide by 5 yards long (68.58 cm x 4.57 meters) and covers 30 square feet (waste and pattern matching usually takes this down to about 27 usable square feet per roll). It’s important you order the amount of paper you need in one order to ensure you get all your wallpaper from the same dye lot, as a different dye lot may have slight color variations.

    Measure the length of the wall area you plan on covering and multiply it by the height of the walls to determine the square footage.

    For example, if you have 9 ft ceilings and will be covering 40 ft in length, you would multiply 40 x 9 and arrive at 360 square feet. Divide the total square feet of wall space by 27 to determine the number of rolls required.

    The formula is: Square footage ÷ by 27 = Number of rolls.

    At this point, you could subtract 21 square feet for any doors and 15 square feet for each window. But, to be on the safe side, we advise not subtracting for doors and windows; the extra paper might be needed for matching the pattern, or making repairs in the future. In the example above, you would require 14 rolls: 360 ÷ 27 = 13.3.

    This formula is an approximate guide only, and we advise that you consult your decorator or installer prior to purchasing wallpaper.

    Wherever possible, we print and ship in double and triple rolls to minimize waste for installation. We recommend professional installation for your wallpaper. If you would like to find a paperhanger in your area, we recommend the National Guild of Professional Paperhangers.

    If you need help calculating quantities required please contact us with your wall dimentions and we will be happy to help.

    Grab a calculator

    Many online wallpaper calculators do not factor in repeat patterns and half drops. We highly recommend you follow the following calculation to work out how much wallpaper you require:

    First things first

    Eyvi wallpapers are 52cm wide and 1005cm (10.05m) long. You will also need to know the following for your chosen design:

    • The vertical pattern repeat in cm
    • Whether the design repeat is straight or a half drop

    This information is available on each product page.

    Step 1. Measure the Wall

    Measure the width and the height in cm. If the walls have the same heights you can add the widths together. If not, work out one wall at a time.

    Example wall: 400cm wide x 240cm high

    Step 2. Work out the drops

    Divide your wall width in cm by 52cm. Then round up to the nearest whole number.

    Example: wall width 400cm divided by 52cm = 7.69

    Rounded up = 8 drops

    Step 3. Multiply drops x wall height

    Example: 8 drops x 240cm = 1920cm

    Step 4. Add the pattern repeat

    Add a pattern repeat length for each drop, apart from the first one.

    Example (imaging the pattern repeat is 70cm):

    7 drops x 70cm = 490cm

    Step 5. Factor in for a half drop

    If the wallpaper is a half drop design, then you need to add half of your total pattern repeat again. (If it is straight drop you do not need to add anything else).

    For example: 490cm divided by 2 = 245cm

    Step 6. Add up and round up

    Drops x wall height : 1920cm

    70cm repeat: 490cm

    Half drop: 245cm

    Round up to the nearest 1000CM = 3000cm

    = 3 x 1005cm/10.05m rolls required

    Step 7. Measure twice – order once!

    Yes! Repeat the above measuring and calculating to be absolutely sure of your calculations.

    Each batch of wallpaper ordered may differ ever so slightly, so it is important to order the correct amount up front.

    If you need help to calculate your requirements please get in touch. Whilst we provide this information in good faith, Eyvi cannot be held responsible for miscalculations.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    • Post author:Alastair Carey
    • Post published: December 13, 2019
    • Post category:Tools

    Wallpaper is a great way to deck your walls up. However, if you’re not an interior decorator or a professional, you really can’t tell how much of paper you will actually need.

    Cost also might prove to be a dampener. Not to worry though! A wallpaper calculator will let you know how many rolls you require, and how much that is likely to cost you.

    • For starters, measure the walls or the ceiling that you want to cover. Enter the length, height, and width
    • Enter the number of doors and windows leaving default dimensions as they are. If there are different sizes, calculate the total area and enter the figure
    • Also, enter the length and width of the wallpaper roll, paper repeat, and cost of one roll.

    All these values will be mentioned on the packaging itself.

    Once you get all these figures into the calculator, it will tell you how many square feet of wallpaper you need, the number of rolls and how much you’re likely to spend.

    It’s a good idea to not minus the door and window space while calculating the amount of ‘usable’ wallpaper you’ll need. Having a little extra wallpaper won’t set you back a lot.

    Wallpapers are the easiest way to decorating your interior walls with different types of texture, colors, and patterns available in the vast varieties to choose from.

    Let’s discover basic things…

    Wallpapers are charged on per square feet basis, but there is a minimum amount which you has to pay for the roll.

    Here, roll means a single bundle of the design which you choose to have on your wall. This roll comes in specific size which is 56 square feet approx and it covers 47-48 square feet with plain design and 40-42 square feet with pattern design (e.g flower) of your wall area including wastages.

    A company doesn’t give the wallpaper in a cut piece like for 20-25 square feet of application, you have to buy at lease single roll of wallpaper.

    The single roll cost you around Rs.5500/- (with material & installation charges) and goes up to Rs.10-15k depends on the type of wallpaper and design you choose.

    Let’s say your wall area is 70 square feet and you chose a plain design for your wall where single roll covers only 48 square feet, then you will not get 22 square feet another cut piece of that wallpaper, you have to buy another roll.

    Means, If one roll cost you Rs.5500/- then you will have to pay another 5500 for the second roll.

    There are no major requirements to install wallpaper on your desired interior wall.

    Make sure your wall ready with a smooth surface is done with lambi, putty and oil primer. There are two types of primer which are oil primer and water primer, water primer will not work for sticking wallpapers because it will peel off after some time.

    Even if you want to install wallpaper on your plywood partition then it will also require applying oil primer.

    Oil primer is the must!

    That’s it, and you are ready to install wallpaper.

    This is the point where most of the homeowners make a mistake.

    During the renovation, don’t be in hurry to install wallpaper, it is a finishing item and should only be installed after all the work done at your sites like furniture and painting etc. Because if you install wallpaper during renovation then there is a chance of scratches or spreading paint drops on the surface of wallpaper and edges. And it will be difficult to remove stains and rearrange new wallpaper with the same pattern.

    Yes, you can order totally customized design for wallpaper you’re required.

    But you have to give the design or photo in high-resolution (HD) form with an appropriate file extension. It takes a week time for delivery and 85% advance payment to proceed the order.

    Very quick,
    For 100 square feet wall, wallpaper installation just takes 2-3 hours.

    Decorating or renovating? We know how difficult and stressful that can be. That’s why we created the wall square footage calculator to help you with these tasks – no matter what wall covering you decide on 🖌️

    Follow our article below to discover how to find square feet of a wall – you’ll also learn some tips & suggestions on how to improve your walls’ design.

    How to calculate square footage of a wall? The wall square footage calculator

    Figuring out square feet has never been easier – follow closely the instructions below to learn how to find square feet of a wall!

    1. Choose your room’s shape:
    • Rectangle – input the lengths of two walls that touch the same corner;
    • Square – input the length of one wall; and
    • Other – enter the total measured length of all the walls.

    💡 If you are painting or wallpapering, you can also calculate the wall square footage needed for walls of any shape using our area calculator.

    1. Enter your ceiling’s height:

    If you plan to have a dropped ceiling, remember to consider it. It may be important when figuring out square feet.

    1. Estimate the number of doors in your room:
    • Our standard door is 21 ft² (1.95 m²).
    • For double doors, multiply the number of doors by 2 .
    1. Estimate the number of windows in your room:
    • Our standard window is 12 ft² (1.11 m²).
    • If you don’t have any windows in your room, type 0 .
    1. Your wall footage is here! Now that you know how to calculate square footage of a wall, what’s your next step?
    • Are you planning to buy wallpaper? 🌺
    • Or are you more keen on vinyl wall panels? 🌸

    How to figure square footage of a wall?

    It doesn’t matter whether you’re thinking how to calculate wall square footage for paint or for wallpaper – it’s the same. Use these pieces of advise to improve your ability to figure out the square feet of your wall:

    Precise measurement is the key 🔑 – no matter if you’re using the wall sq ft calculator or computing everything yourself:

    Start with drawing a plan of your room/house – it’ll make it easier to measure and store data;

    Alway use the proper equipment – a steel tape measure or a yardstick;

    Measure the length of your walls, including both doors and windows; and

    Determine the height of your walls – measure them from the floor to ceiling. Exclude the length of a dropped ceiling or moulding (coving).

    It’s math time! Let’s find out how to calculate the square feet of a wall.

    So how do we calculate the square feet of a wall? The equation is simple:

    walls square footage = total length of the walls * ceiling height

    But how to calculate sq ft of a wall with doors and windows? 🤔

    corrected wall square footage = wall square footage – windows area * number of windows – door area * number of doors

    Now it’s time to figure out the square feet of windows and doors – take a look at the standard sizes, presented in the table below:

    Windows 3 x 4 ft 12 ft²
    Doors 3 x 7 ft 21 ft²

    That’s how to calculate square feet of a wall. Are you still at the beginning of your journey, not yet sure about the number of planned doors and windows? Try our basic construction calculators:

    • Find out how to deal with wood & steel framing;
    • Estimate the amount of drywall you’ll need;
    • Dreaming big? Try the concrete block wall calculator or the brick calculator 🧱

    DIY walls design

    After learning how to find the square feet of a wall, why not to go wild? When planning wall decorations, we usually think in the box. It’s time to let it go!

    1. Tape

    Tape allows you to do any kind of geometrical design you could possibly think of. Wall split in half? You got it. Complex geometrical, colorful shapes? Hold my beer.

    The most crucial part about tape decoration is to buy good tape. Trust us – it’s better to spend a few bucks more on tape than to have all your hard work destroyed in the blink of an eye.

    1. Frames 🖼️

    Vast, empty frames glued to a wall/wardrobe, painted with the very same color. These details can truly add to a feeling of prestige to the interior of a house.

    1. Your walls don’t have to be identical

    Play with different colors, textures, wallpapers, and materials. If you know how to figure the square footage of a wall, the world is yours!

    1. Moulding (no, we’re not talking about the typical ceiling one.)

    Moulding can create simple, yet elegant and exciting details on your walls – not to mention it’s extremely easy to apply!

    Note: This is only an estimate. Please contact a professional wallcovering installer before placing your order.
    Check out the Wallpaper Estimator For Rolls

    Contact Us

    Call or Text: 212-722-6449
    Monday – Friday: 9 AM – 8 PM EST

    For Press Inquiries, Contact:

    Company
    • About Us
    • Blog
    • Press
    Account
    • Login/Register
    • Wishlist
    • Rewards
    • Refer a Friend
    Customer Care
    • Contact Us
    • FAQS
    • Missing Samples
    • Returns
    • Shipping & Delivery
    • Terms & Conditions
    • Website Accessibility Statement
    Helpful Links
    • Fabric & Wallpaper Quiz
    • Wallpaper Estimator For Rolls
    • Wallpaper Estimator For Yards
    • Wallpaper Glossary of Terms
    • Eco-Friendly Fabric Guide
    • Fabric Glossary of Terms
    • Upholstery Measurements Guide
    • Find A Professional

    *Save 10% Off all SELECT BRANDS* for orders of $200 or more excluding applicable tax and shipping cost by using our sale code. Brands not participating in the sale include Phillip Jeffries, Schumacher and Zoffany Brands. This coupon code cannot be combined with other coupon codes and is not available for members of the DecoratorsBest Trade program.

    Free shipping promotion applies to all orders of $100 and more within the contiguous United States and excludes international orders and expedited orders. Free shipping is not applicable for members of the DecoratorsBest Trade Program.

    Before you begin painting your home’s interior walls, ceilings, woodwork, doors, or windows, you need to estimate the amount of paint you’ll use. Estimates require specific calculations for each surface you want to paint.

    To estimate the amount of paint you need in order to cover the walls of a room, add together the length of all the walls and then multiply the number by the height of the room, from floor to ceiling. The number you get is the room’s square footage. Is that math class coming back to you now?

    How to determine square footage

    Now you have to determine how much of that square footage is paintable surface area. Because you use a different paint on the doors and windows, subtract those areas from the room total. No sweat, just subtract 20 square feet for each door and 15 square feet for each average-sized window in the room. You end up with a number that is close to the actual wall area you have to cover with paint.

    In general, you can expect 1 gallon of paint to cover about 350 square feet. You need slightly more than a gallon if the walls are unpainted drywall, which absorbs more of the paint. You also need to consider whether to paint more than one coat. If you’re painting walls that are unfinished, heavily patched, or dark in color, plan on applying two coats of paint.

    When painting a dark color, pros often add a color tint to the white primer. Tints for both latex or alkyd paints are available at most paint stores. For best results, choose a tint shade that’s closest to the top coat color.

    Now for the clincher of the math problem. Divide the paintable wall area by 350 (the square-foot coverage in each gallon can) to find the number of gallons of paint you need for the walls. You can round uneven numbers; if the remainder is less than .5, order a couple of quarts of wall paint to go with the gallons; if the remainder is more than .5, order an extra gallon. Of course, buying in bulk is usually more economical, so you may discover that 3 quarts of paint cost as much as a gallon.

    Examples of calculations

    The following examples walk you through the calculations for determining how much paint you need for a 14-x-20-foot room that’s 8 feet tall and has two doors and two windows.

    Ceiling paint estimator

    Use the following formula to estimate the amount of ceiling paint you need. Double the result if the ceiling requires two coats.

    1. Multiply the length of the ceiling times its width to find its area.

    14 Г— 20 = 280 square feet

    2. Divide that number by 350 (the estimated square feet covered per gallon) to figure out how many gallons of paint you need.

    For this example, you want to buy 1 gallon of ceiling paint for a single coat.

    Wall paint estimator

    Use the following formula to estimate the amount of wall paint you need. Double the result if the walls require two coats.

    1. Add together the length of each wall.

    14 + 20 + 14 + 20 = 68 feet

    2. Multiply the sum by the wall height, to find the total wall area.

    68 Г— 8 = 544 square feet

    3. Subtract 20 square feet for each door (20 Г— 2 = 40) and 15 square feet for each window (15 Г— 2 = 30) to find the actual amount of wall area you’re painting.

    544 – 70 = 474 square feet

    4. Divide this figure by the paint coverage (350 square feet per gallon), and the result is the number of gallons to purchase.

    For this example, you want to buy 1 gallon and 2 quarts of paint for a single coat.

    Woodwork paint estimator

    Measure the length of the trim in feet, and multiply that number by 1/2 foot (.5), as a rough size for the width of the trim. Include all the trim around doors and windows, at baseboards, along the ceiling, and for any built-in furniture.

    As an example, imagine that you have ceiling molding running around a room that is 14 feet wide and 20 feet long.

    1. Determine the total length of molding around the room by adding together the length of all the walls that the molding covers.

    Round the numbers off to the nearest foot.

    14 + 20 + 14 + 20 = 68 feet

    2. Multiply the sum by .5 for an estimated width of the molding.

    68 Г— .5 = 34 square feet

    3. Divide this number by 350 to estimate the gallons of paint required to cover the molding.

    The result in this example is much less than a quart, but you may paint other woodwork in the room the same color, so buying a full quart may not be terribly wasteful.

    Door and window estimator

    Use the same figure for estimating door coverage as you use in your wall-area calculations — 20 square feet = one door. Multiply the number of doors by 20, doubling the answer if you plan to paint both sides. Wall paint estimates allow for 15 square feet for each window. Use about half that window area to figure trim and inside sash — the glass isn’t important to the calculation.

    For the room in this example:

    1. Multiply the number of doors by 20.

    2 Г— 20 = 40 square feet

    2. Multiply the number of windows by 7.5.

    2 Г— 7.5 = 15 square feet

    3. Add these numbers together.

    4. Divide the result by 350 (the estimated square feet covered per gallon).

    Often, you end up needing to buy only a quart of paint, which goes a long way on doors and window trim.

    International shipping is available through L.A. Design Concepts. To ship internationally, you need to have an account with a freight forwarding company here in the U.S.

    Many of our clients have had success with MyUS.com. MyUS.com will handle all necessary paperwork and calculate any duties or taxes that may be required for your shipment. You may also elect to use a freight forwarder of your choice.

    1. Place your item(s) in the cart and proceed to checkout.

    2. Under billing address enter your freight forwarders address.

    3. Continue filling out all contact information. (ship to a different address not required)

    4. Under payment options select (Wire Transfer). Your order is now pending payment. An LADC representative will confirm stock and email our wire transfer information to finalize your order.

    LADC does ship furniture & lighting internationally. Please contact office for details.

    We only accept wire transfers for merchandise shipping out of the country.

    Thank you for your interest in L.A. Design Concepts!

    Samples are available to purchase for $5.00 each to assure color accuracy. A PURCHASE SAMPLE button is located under each product image.

    Please allow 7 to 10 days to receive your samples directly from each manufacturer. Our team looks forward to helping you with your next order.

    Thank you for placing your sample re-order.

    Please allow 7 to 10 days to receive your samples directly from each manufacturer. Our team looks forward to helping you with your next order.

    We appreciate your patience.

    To re-order samples you have not received after 21 days, please check the box next to the samples you are missing and then click the SUBMIT RE-ORDER button.

    Your request for a refund has been received.

    You will be refunded the cost of sample and the item will be removed from your order.

    We appreciate your business.

    Your request to wait for your sample has been received.

    We appreciate your patience.

    Due to the high demand of samples.
    Only 1 sample allowed per colorway.

    Thank you for your understanding!

    Samples are not available by the manufacturer and are on back order.

    Stock is most likely available If you would like to place an order without a sample.

    L.A. Design Concepts has created the first platform of its kind featuring over 200,000 exclusive “trade only” items being made available to purchase.

    Our Premier Design Service is tailored for today’s consumer with discriminating taste who feels confident in making his or her own design decisions. Many interior designers and architects also elect to use our services for the convenience of expediting access to all trade lines. Our pricing structure is the same for consumers, designers and architects.

    Upon making your selection, our design staff will process your order to your exact specifications. We will coordinate freight and “White Glove” delivery to your residence or project site. If you require assistance specifying your finish options or sizing, please contact our design staff. (562) 439-5626

    L.A. Design Concepts has been bringing designer furnishings into homes since 1987.

    L.A. Design Concepts can provide you with our “Letter of Introduction” to shop your local design center. Our letter will provide you with a higher level of customer service when the showrooms recognize you are represented by an industry known firm.

    While visiting the designer showrooms you will have the advantage of seeing all of the furniture and textile lines up close and in person. You may also request “tear sheets” on items selected that displays a photo and all of the product specifications.

    Our story begins in 1987 when founder and designer Frank Keshishian launched L.A. Design Concepts a residential interior design firm.

    While Mr. Keshishian designed homes for his clients, he recognized a fast growing market of consumers who preferred to make their own design decisions. Understanding that desire, Frank created the first design service offering consumer access to designer “trade only” furnishings.

    In 1988, L.A. Design Concepts was nationally recognized as a groundbreaking company revolutionizing consumer access. The Pacific Design Center in Los Angeles was very intrigued with L. A. Design Concepts working model and approached Frank in 1990 to formulate a consumer service program within their design center. L.A. Design Concepts was now the first service within a design center providing consumer access to “trade only�? furnishings. Shortly thereafter, an increasing number of interior designers and architects recognized the value of streamlining their access through one single source. Our service allowed designers to focus on designing for their clients without having to maintain accounts with each individual manufacturer.

    We are happy to match a competitive price from another authorized retailer to guarantee you the best value. Unfortunately, we are not able to price match from companies located in the United Kingdom since pricing in the U.K. DO NOT include duties or taxes when shipping to the United States.

    Please email your lower price quote or link displaying a lower price to [email protected] Also include a contact phone number in case we have any questions.

    See what our clients are saying: REVIEWS

    Thank you for your interest in L.A. Design Concepts!

    We have the Most Advanced color search tool Search over 100k patterns in seconds

    Simple Calculation Guide for Number of Rolls Required

    Find The Surface Area Of A Wall

    1. Measure the width and height of the wall in your chosen unit of measurement. (We use metres in this tutorial.)

    2. Multiply wall width and height together = _ m² (Surface area of the wall.)

    3. Repeat the steps for each consecutive wall that you wish to apply wallpaper to.

    4. Add each figure together to get: ‘Total Wall Surface Area m²’

    How Many Rolls?

    1. Divide the ‘Total Wall Surface Area’ by 5.2 (5.2 = m² coverage of one roll)

    2. Round this number up the nearest whole number i.e: 3.6 gets rounded to 4 rolls of wallpaper.

    This is the minimum number of rolls you will need.

    We always recommended that you order an extra roll of wallpaper than you need. This is to be certain you have enough wallpaper for trimming allowance and to account for any unexpected difficulties when hanging.

    Many people store a roll of the wallpaper for potential future touch ups. Alternatively, any unused, unopened rolls of wallpaper may be returned.

    Pattern Repeat

    All of the wallpaper designs in the Surface House collection are a ‘straight match’. (See image below). Meaning the pattern matches at the same horizontal point on each strip of wallpaper; there is no ‘drop’ in the pattern.

    This makes planning and applying the wallpaper easier for you and means that there is less wallpaper wastage overall.

    If you need to measure a wall that has windows or doors, check out our other simple step by step tutorial:

    ‘How To Calculate Wallpaper’

    We hope this simple tutorial was useful to you. If you need any assistance or advice please get in touch and we will be more than happy to assist you.

    To use our wallpaper calculator, please type in the length of your room, the width of your room and your ceiling height. You then need to fill in the number of doors and windows in the room. Our calculator will tell you the number of single rolls of wallpaper that you will need to wallpaper the room, and give you the number of spools of border that you will need. Note: This calculator is meant to estimate the amount of wallcoverings that you will need for your project. Interior Place will not be responsible for overage or shortages based on your measurements.

    Navigate
    • Be Inspired
    • INSTALLING BORDERS
    • INSTALLING WALLPAPER
    • Preparing The Surface
    • Removing Wallpaper
    • Return / Refund
    • Tools
    • How to calculate wallpaper
    • Blog
    • Contact Paper
    • Privacy Policy
    • The Savvy Decorator To The Trade Program
    • Shipping Options
    • Wallpaper calculator
    • Sitemap
    Categories
    • Wallpaper
    • Peel & Stick Wallpaper
    • Borders
    • Murals
    • Contact Paper
    • Wall art
    • Home Décor
    • Lighting
    Popular Brands
    • York Wallcoverings
    • Elk
    • Brewster
    • Wallquest
    • Chesapeake
    • Norwall
    • A-Street Prints
    • Kenneth James
    • Beacon House
    • Grace & Gardenia
    • View All
    Subscribe to our newsletter

    Get the latest updates on new products and upcoming sales

    © 2022 The Savvy Decorator

    Subscribe to our newsletter

    Get the latest updates on new products and upcoming sales

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Not ordering enough paint for your decorating project can be frustrating, but overordering will mean you’re left with materials you don’t need. That’s why we created our handy paint calculator, which is built into each of our paint product pages to help you get it right first time.

    Our online advice is designed to be a helpful starting point, but we strongly recommend that you check with your decorator or email [email protected] for more detailed advice before ordering.


    BEFORE YOU START

    Please note that we don’t take doors, windows or alcoves into consideration when making our calculations, and that the paint calculator is only suitable for calculating wall paint requirements.

    You should also think about the nature of your painting surface before you begin – porous walls are likely to require extra coats, as are walls undergoing dramatic colour transformations, although using the right Primer & Undercoat for your project can help to minimise the number of coats required.


    CALCULATING COVERAGE

    This table is a guide to the maximum coverage of our paint finishes. Coverage is dependent on thickness of application and the condition of the surface you’re painting, and all our figures are based on one coat. However, for best results, we recommend following the Farrow & Ball system of one coat of Primer & Undercoat followed by two coats of topcoat. For more information, see our in-depth guide to preparation and application.

    Finish

    Sizes

    Maximum coverage per coat*

    Recommended coats**

    Drying time***

    100ml, 2.5 litres, 5 litres

    70m 2 per 5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 2 hours

    2.5 litres, 5 litres

    60m 2 per 5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    750ml, 2.5 litres, 5 litres

    60m 2 per 5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    750ml, 2.5 litres, 5 litres

    60m 2 per 5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    750ml, 2.5 litres

    30m 2 per 2.5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    750ml, 2.5 litres, 5 litres

    60m 2 per 5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    40m 2 per 5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    750ml, 2.5 litres

    32m 2 per 2.5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    2.5 litres, 5 litres

    65m 2 per 5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    65m 2 per 5 litres

    Varies on conditions

    Dry in 3 hours / recoat 12 hours

    Exterior Wood Primer & Undercoat

    750ml, 2.5 litres

    32m 2 per 2.5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    Interior Wood Primer & Undercoat

    750ml, 2.5 litres, 5 litres

    60m 2 per 5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    Wall & Ceiling Primer & Undercoat

    2.5 litres, 5 litres

    60m 2 per 5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    Wood Knot & Resin Blocking Primer

    750ml, 2.5 litres

    32m 2 per 2.5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    Wood Floor Primer & Undercoat

    750ml, 2.5 litres

    32m 2 per 2.5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    Metal Primer & Undercoat

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    Masonry & Plaster Stabilising Primer

    100m 2 per 5 litres

    Dry in 2 hours / recoat 4 hours

    *Figures are based on one coat. However, we recommend following the Farrow & Ball system of one coat of Primer & Undercoat followed by two coats of your required paint finish.
    **Additional coats may be required depending on surface and topcoat colour.
    *** The drying and recoat times provided are based on applying paint in normal conditions. Drying times may be longer in cooler and/or higher humidity environments. Darker colours may take longer to dry.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Whether you plan to paint a bedroom, the entire interior, or the exterior of your home, you’ll need to calculate how much paint to buy. Buying too much paint is a waste of money, and buying too little paint is a total headache, so you’ll want to ensure your estimate is accurate.

    Here’s how to calculate how much paint to buy.

    Measuring the Paintable Surface Area

    The first thing you will need to do is calculate the surface area you plan to paint. This is a fairly simple calculation.

    First, measure the length of each wall, and add them together. This is the perimeter of the room. Then, measure the height of the wall. Multiply the perimeter and the height, and you’ve calculated the total surface area of the walls in your room.

    To illustrate, imagine the perimeter of the room 12m, and the height of the walls is 2m.

    12m x 2m = 24 metres squared

    The total surface area of your room is 24 metres squared.

    Now, consider the number of doors and windows. For each door, subtract 1.9 metres squared, and for each window, subtract 1.4 metres squared. Say this room has one door, and two windows. The total paintable surface can be calculated as follows:

    Door and window surface area = (1 x 1.9) + (2 x 1.4)
    = 4.7 metres squared

    Total paintable surface = 24 – 4.7
    = 19.3 metres squared

    How Much Paint to Buy

    As a general rule, 1 litre of paint will cover between 6 and 6.5 metres squared of wall.

    So, to calculate how many litres of paint you will need, divide the total paintable surface area by 6.5. Let’s return to the example above, and calculate how much paint is required.

    Paint required = paintable surface area / 6.5
    = 19.3 / 6.5
    = 2.97 litres

    For this example, you’ll need to purchase 3 litres of paint.

    Other Considerations

    There are a few things you’ll need to consider when calculating how much paint to buy.

    • Are you repainting a wall, or painting bare drywall? Drywall will absorb more paint, which means you’ll need to buy slightly more paint, even if you’ve coated it with a primer.
    • Are you painting in a light or dark colour? If you’re using a dark colour, you will probably require a tinted primer, too.
    • Don’t forget about future retouches. Always round the required amount of paint up, because you can use that paint in the future to touch up and remove stains and areas of wear and tear.

    Here’s a Short Cut

    Instead of making these calculations yourself, head over to the Dulux Paint Calculator. From there, simply type in your room’s dimension, the number of windows, and the number of doors and the calculator will do the work for you.

    Have Your Home Painted

    The easier option is to leave it all to us, the professional house painters Brisbane and Gold Coast locals trust. We can answer all of your questions, including how much paint to buy, how long does it take to paint a room, and more.

    Contact us for a quick and accurate quote. Give us a call on 07 3829 5735 or fill out the form on this page.

    Are wallpapers budget-friendly? How much does one roll cover? What are the wallpaper installation costs? We answer all your questions about wallpaper prices!
    (This is a chapter of a bigger guide on wallpapers.)

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    In our last post, we told you if it’s possible to paint over wallpapers or not.

    Haven’t read it yet? Head over here!

    But, today, we’re going to solve for and answer the other big question about wallpapers: How much do they cost and where can you find them?

    This is not a straightforward answer and we need to answer a few other questions first.

    So, you can either skip to the end or read through this blog post carefully to have a thorough understanding.

    So, here’s what this post will help you with:

    • What factors does the cost of wallpapers in India depend on?
    • How much does a wallpaper cost for one wall.
    • Wallpaper installation cost.
    • Wallpaper price in India by brand.
    • Mid-range wallpapers & where you can find them.
    • Wallpaper cost online and websites to get them from.
    • Are wallpapers budget-friendly?

    But before everything else, here’s some quick FYI for you:

    The size of a standard wallpaper roll is: 32.97 ft x 1.73 ft
    A standard wallpaper roll would cover: 57 sq ft
    The average ceiling height in India is: 9 ft-10 ft
    Once you deduct skirting and false ceiling,
    the ceiling height may come down to 8 ft. In that case,
    one roll will (depending on the design and possible
    wastage) cover close to:
    5 ft-6 ft wide wall

    Cool? Now that you have the basics sorted, you can always come back to this table for reference.

    This brings us to…

    What Factors Does the Cost of Wallpapers Depend On?

    • Complex designs and textures — these bring up the cost.
    • Materials — paper-backed and printed vinyl wallpapers (both self-adhesive) tend to be cheaper. Non-woven and non-woven fabric wallpapers are found in mid- to high-end range.
    • Designer collections and premium ranges by brands — these cost more than basic designs. For instance, Nilaya’s offers the Sabyasachi range at ₹8,000-₹17,500 but the same brand also offers wallpapers for ₹4,999.
    • In-house services of branded wallpapers — these will always cost more, but come with quality assurance. You can also find labour at competitive prices from local contractors, but the workmanship needs to be verified.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    And, thus, we finally come to: Wallpaper Prices & Availability

    How Much Does Wallpaper Cost For One Wall?

    This will depend on the design and the quality of the wallpaper chosen.

    How Much Does Wallpaper Installation Cost?

    The market rates for installation mostly fall between ₹8-₹15 per sq ft.

    Cost of Wallpapers in India (By Reputed Brands)

    If you don’t want to compromise on quality and finesse, branded offerings will assure you a well executed design.

    Wallpaper Brand / Store Wallpaper Price Per Roll USP Where to Find Them
    Nilaya by Asian Paints ₹4,999-17,500 Homegrown brand, inspired by Indian aesthetics; designer collection by Sabyasachi Across major cities, www.nilaya.asianpaints.com, www.pepperfry.com
    Marshall’s Wallcovering ₹2,200-8,500 Earliest brand in the country; diversity in designs (from classic to contemporary); designer collection by Krsna Mehta. In 19 cities, www.pepperfry.com, www.indiacircus.com
    D’decor ₹3,000 – 8,700 Reputed for its high-end designs. Across major cities, www.ddecor.com
    Elementto Shared on request International brands from US and Europe; premium one-of-its-kind designs. Mumbai and Delhi

    Cost of Wallpapers in India (Mid-Range) & Where to Find Them

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    • Local home decor retail stores are your best bet in finding mid-range wallpapers.
    • Major stores like @home, Home Centre and Homestop keep a catalogue of wallpapers that you can purchase from.
    • The choices, however, may not be as exhaustive as the branded offerings.

    Your next best source for economical wallpapers is the online marketplace.

    Cost of Wallpapers in India (Online) & Where to Find Them

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Website Lowest Price (per roll) USP
    www.amazon.in ₹279 You can go through the reviews for design accuracy.
    www.pepperfry.com ₹2,000 You can find branded wallpapers, including Nilaya’s and Marshall’s.
    www.wallpaperdirect.com/in ₹1,400 You can find international brands and designs.
    www.wallskin.in ₹98 (per sq ft) Customisation is available.
    www.printawallpaper.com ₹130 (per sq ft) Printed graphics and customised designs are available.
    International fashion sites like www.shein.in and www.romwe.co.in ₹209 Extremely limited collection. Mostly leftover stock (suitable for small applications).

    So, Are Wallpapers Budget-Friendly Then?

    More often than not, painting will always be a cheaper alternative to wallpapers.

    Having said that, wallpapers can still be a cost-effective way to spruce up your space — whether it is your home or your office.

    Because very rarely will one apply wallpaper on all four walls. Highlighting just one wall, a pillar or portion of a wall space (like below) is often enough to give you the desired ambience. And this is one of the factors that can affect your wallpaper budget.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper neededYou don’t have to use wallpaper on the entire wall. Using it on portions brings down the costs and still has a big impact.

    What’s Coming Up Next?

    Well, our next (and last) post as part of our guide on wallpapers in India is an all-encompassing piece that will cover types of wallpaper, how to wallpaper and everything else in between.

    Until then, you can check these posts out:

    • Wallpaper Vs Paint: Which One Should You Choose?
    • Painting Over Wallpaper & Vice-Versa: Is It Possible?

    Need to know how much paint to buy? A little math can save you a lot of time when it comes to interior painting.

    Share this story

    • Share this on Facebook
    • Share this on Twitter

    Share All sharing options for: How Much Paint Do I Need?

    • Pinterest
    • Email

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Anyone with their first interior home painting project has stood in the paint aisle wondering how many cans they need to bring home.

    To keep your colors matching and avoid return trips to the store, do some calculations ahead of time:

    How Much Paint Is Needed for Walls?

    • Start by adding up the length of all the walls to be painted, from end to end.
    • Then multiply that number (the perimeter) by the height of the walls, from floor to ceiling. That will give you the square footage of the room to be painted.
    • Finally, divide your total number by the approximate coverage of one gallon of paint (about 400 sq. ft. per gal.). This gives you how many gallons of paint you need for one coat of paint on the walls.

    Pro2Pro Tip: Don’t forget the second coat! The rule of thumb is to apply two coats of paint on walls and one on the ceiling, but individual situations vary.

    More tips on wall paint coverage:

    • Painting white paint over clean, new white paint? Or same color on top of same color? You might be able to get by with just 1 coat.
    • Porous surfaces like stucco or unpainted drywall absorb paint at a higher rate, so you’ll likely need more paint than the amount calculated.
    • Be prepared for future touch-ups with 1-2 quarts of paint. Get any custom paint at the same time to ensure evenly matched shades.

    How Much Paint Is Needed for Ceilings?

    As with the walls, to arrive at the ceiling’s square footage, multiply its length by its width. Then, to determine the gallons of paint needed, divide that number by 400.

    Excluding Windows and Doors:

    If you’re not painting your doors and windows trim, don’t buy paint you won’t need. You can calculate their square footage by multiplying each object’s length x width, then subtract that number from the wall paint total.

    Or estimate:

    Standard size doors are approximately 20 sq. ft. and windows 15 sq. ft. Add up how many of each are in your project space and subtract that square footage from your wall paint square footage. Divide the new final number by 400 to get your best estimate for how many gallons of paint you’ll need for one coat on the walls and ceiling (minus the doors and windows you’re not painting).

    How Much Paint Is Needed for Trim?

    A room’s baseboards, windows, doors, and crown molding are often painted in a different finish or color than the walls and ceiling, so you can calculate your trim paint needs separately.

    • Add up the length of all the trim to be painted, then add up the width of all the trim. (You may need to do this by trim type if they’re not all the same widths.)
    • Multiply length x width to get the square footage of trim to be painted.
    • Divide the total by 400 to get the number of gallons of paint you’ll need for one coat. You’ll likely need less than a gallon for a standard room, so consider buying trim paint in a quart or two.

    Pro2Pro Tip: If you’re painting the interior trim between windowpanes, they’re approximately 7.5 square feet of paintable space.

    How Much Primer Do I Need?

    Applying primer first helps the paint adhere properly to porous or unpainted surfaces like new drywall, allows for even paint application, and covers up stains. If you’re making a dramatic color switch, a tinted primer in a shade similar to your paint makes coverage easier. (Read more on picking the right primer for your project.)

    Primer only covers 200-300 sq. ft. per gallon, so you’ll need slightly more primer than paint. Take your earlier total area and divide that number by 300 to get the minimum gallons of primer you’ll need for one coat.

    Top Washington designers answer your most pressing questions.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Why is the powder room a good place to try it?

    It’s self-contained, so you don’t have to worry as much about a loud pattern clashing with other spaces. Plus, wallpaper can make this small room feel like an escape, says designer Alison Giese, who outfitted her own powder room with Thibaut’s “Luzon.” She says the vivid pops of aqua and coral remind her of her family’s previous home in Brazil. Not that adventurous? “I would go with a grasscloth or a textured, tone-on-tone pattern,” Giese suggests. “It feels a little more timeless than an in-your-face pattern.”

    Peel-and-stick or traditional?

    Wallpaper hanger Michael DiGuiseppe tells clients to order only traditional paper. Bubbles and creases are a constant plague when you’re trying to hang peel-and-stick, and you have to remove the entire strip to reposition it, he says. When you paint glue on a primed wall and apply dry paper, you can move it around and smooth it before it dries. Today’s papers are also easily strippable later on, DiGuiseppe adds.

    How much should I expect to spend?

    Wallpaper prices run the gamut. A roll from a big-box retailer such as Home Depot can cost less than $30, while made-to-order, hand-painted paper from companies such as Gracie or de Gournay can cost thousands. But generally, says designer Annie Elliott, “it is a bit of a splurge, which is one of the reasons so many people do it in powder rooms.” She recently outfitted one with Brunschwig & Fils’s “Battle of Valmy 1792.” The minimum two-roll order for that luxury brand tops $460, and a standard powder room requires about three double rolls. That’s before you pay a paper hanger—an additional cost of about $400 to $500, according to DiGuiseppe, who hangs paper for some of the area’s most prominent designers. Larger rooms can cost $900 to $1,200 or even more, depending on the paper and the intricacy of its pattern, he says.

    If you go cool and bold with wallpaper, you can get away with just needing a mirror.

    On the other hand, designer Erika Bonnell notes, wallpaper may actually save money: “If you dress your walls boldly in wallpaper, it removes other things that need investment, like art. In the powder room, if you go cool and bold with wallpaper, you really can get away with just needing a mirror.”

    Can I hang it myself?

    For an entire room, designers recommend hiring a professional to avoid costly mistakes, but the DIY approach works well for smaller jobs. Try it on the backs of bookcases or the back of a desk that floats in the middle of the room, suggests designer Pamela Harvey. Frame it as art or use it as a backsplash. If you buy paper on your own, make sure to confirm that all the rolls come from the same dye lot, says Elliott. If they don’t, the colors might vary from one strip to the next.

    “Poppy” by Cole & Son. Designer: Erika Bonnell for clients in Wesley Heights. Photograph by Stacy Zarin Goldberg.

    How do I find a contractor?

    Local paint and hardware stores that stock wallpaper sample books can offer referrals. (See below.) Neighborhood listservs such as NextDoor are also a good place to ask for referrals.

    Where can I shop locally and get more advice?

    Casart Coverings, by appointment (Alexandria), 888-960-5554.

    Color Wheel, 1374 Chain Bridge Rd., McLean; 703-356-8477.

    Monarch Paint & Design Centers, downtown DC, 202-289-1601; Georgetown, 202-625-2600; Chevy Chase DC, 202-686-5550; Alexandria, 703-768-1975.

    This article appears in the May 2019 issue of Washingtonian.

    Whether you’re stuck dealing with temporary, strippable, or vinyl wallpaper, we know the easiest methods to bring them down and bare your walls once again.

    By Kathleen Corlett | Updated Dec 16, 2021 1:40 PM

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Q. We’ve just moved into our new home, and the previous owners left behind some bathroom wallpaper that has got to go. Unfortunately, we have no idea how long it’s been in place, or what to expect when taking it down. What’s the best way to remove wallpaper?

    A: While scraping away the glued-on wallpaper of years past may seem daunting, it doesn’t have to be. The right tools and technique can greatly ease the amount of work you have to do. Of course, the exact tools and technique to use depends on what type of paper is up on your walls.

    Follow these tips to determine whether the wall covering you’re dealing with is removable, strippable, or vinyl wallpaper, and how to take off wallpaper of that type.

    Before you begin removing wallpaper of any kind, cover your floors.

    Protect your precious hardwood or plush carpeting with drop cloths (non-slip canvas works best) and cover the baseboards with wide painter’s tape.

    You’ll want to ensure that no peeled wallpaper strips or glue residue accidentally touches and sticks to these features as it comes down from the wall.

    For temporary wallpaper removal, simply start tugging.

    Removable wallpaper (also called temporary wallpaper) was designed to come down easily. Locate a corner of the paper, and give it a tug. If it pulls away from the wall easily, it is temporary wallpaper and will be fairly easy to remove.

    Assuming the wall beneath the paper was painted in an eggshell, satin, or semi-gloss with a slight sheen and properly prepped and cleaned before installation, the paper should release from the wall with a careful pull at any of its seams.

    Stand on a ladder and use a putty knife to unstick the top left corner of the wall (likely the first sheet of wallpaper to be installed). Once you have enough of the perimeter lifted to grasp, take the sheet between your fingers to continue removing it.

    Note: If you like the pattern enough to place the wallpaper elsewhere within the house, aim to pull the sheets directly down rather than out from the wall in order to prevent curling and bending them.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Hot water is the key to strippable wallpaper removal.

    Strippable paper is more permanent but permeable, meaning that water can seep through and soften the adhesive for easy removal.

    The easiest way to remove wallpaper of this kind is to fill a spray bottle or pump sprayer with hot water, and dampen the first panel thoroughly. After allowing it a few minutes to absorb, try peeling the panel back at its top left corner. If the paper lifts, great!

    Removing wallpaper that’s strippable is best done one section at a time. Wet the first panel to confirm whether you’re working on strippable wallpaper. (If the paper does not yield to hot water alone, it could be that you’re looking at water-resistant vinyl wallpaper. In that case, proceed to the method outlined below.)

    Proceed one panel at a time until the wall is bare.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    To remove wallpaper made of vinyl, you’ll need a scoring tool.

    Removing vinyl wallpaper is not a difficult task, but it is a little more labor intensive than taking down strippable or temporary wallpaper. You’ll also need liquid fabric detergent and a wallpaper remover or scoring tool. Here’s how to remove wallpaper made of vinyl:

    1. First, roll a wall paper remover scoring tool, such as the WP Chomp Wallpaper Scorer, over the wall. This is the best way to penetrate water-resistant vinyl and reach the glue itself. Hold the tool against the wall and roll it from corner to corner, and from floor to ceiling in a random pattern. This tool’s tiny teeth create small slits that allow the liquid to seep in and loosen the glue.
    2. Next, help dissolve the glue by mixing 1/4 cup liquid fabric softener per gallon of hot water in a spray bottle or pump sprayer. Heavily saturate one section of wall at a time starting at the top left and working your way down.
    3. Wait 10 to 15 minutes, and begin peeling back damp wallpaper where the wall meets the ceiling. Once the glue softens you should have luck removing large pieces, but it’s still a good idea to keep a wall scraper handy to shave away strips of paper that do not come off in one continuous strip.
    4. Continue spraying the hot fabric softener-and-water solution onto the wall as needed, and you’ll spend less effort scraping. When you do use the scraper, take care to hold the tool so its blade is nearly parallel to the wall when you work so that you have fewer gouges to repair when you’re all finished.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Once the wallpaper is lifted, scrub away residual glue.

    Wash the walls with warm water and a large non-cellulose sponge frequently as you go to remove residual wallpaper glue. Otherwise, any glue dries will require rewetting and a little extra elbow grease to remove later.

    Removable wallpapers leave minimal residue behind, but could still use a cleaning. To tackle most other glues, you’ll need a bucket of hot water, liquid dish soap, and a tablespoon of baking soda—as well as an extra cup of vinegar for every gallon of water on standby if the adhesive is particularly stubborn.

    1. Soak the sponge and wring out most of the water before rubbing the solution into the sticky leftovers.
    2. Once the adhesive softens enough to scrape it with your fingernails, wipe as much as you can away with a clean rag. Then, scrape up the tough stuff with a putty knife.
    3. Clear the adhesive until not a speck remains, because even one lump can mar the appearance of a fresh paint job. Finish with a quick and easy clean.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Final Thoughts

    Removing old wallpaper is not a difficult task for DIYers to complete, but spraying the walls and peeling off strips of paper can get a little messy. Covering your floors with a drop cloth makes cleanup a lot easier—simply collect all of the discarded wallpaper strips on the cloth, and then dump them into a trash bag. You’re well on your way to giving your walls a new look!

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Deane Biermeier is an expert contractor with nearly 30 years of experience in all types of home repair, maintenance, and remodeling. He is a certified lead carpenter and also holds a certification from the EPA. Deane is a member of The Spruce’s Home Improvement Review Board.

    • Pin
    • Share
    • Email

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    asbe / Getty Images

    Wallpaper can be difficult to apply because you need a smooth surface for sliding these large sheet goods into position. And wallpaper is almost always difficult to remove since it has a tendency to grab onto the wall and not let go.

    But there is a product that is simple to apply and that helps with both wallpaper application and removal: wallpaper primer. Wallpaper primer helps you hit that sweet spot where the wallpaper sticks well to the wall but not so firmly that removal will damage the surface.

    What Is Wallpaper Primer?

    Wallpaper primer, sometimes called wallpaper sizing, is a liquid acrylic–based barrier that is applied under wallpaper to assist with installing the wallpaper and with removing the wallpaper at any later time.

    What Wallpaper Primer Does

    Wallpaper Installation

    Wallpaper primer fills pores in absorbent surfaces, creating a smoother surface for sliding the wallpaper into position. Flat, matte, or uncoated walls—and even eggshell gloss paints—can create a drag that makes it harder to slide wallpaper and position it.

    Wallpaper primer allows more of the wallpaper glue to do its job, rather than being immediately absorbed by the wall’s pores.

    Wallpaper Removal

    By providing a shield between the wallpaper glue and the wall, wallpaper primer makes removal easier. Wallpaper glue tightly bonds with its substrate. The more pores available, the greater the bond. Wallpaper primer fills those pores.

    Wallpaper primer will not make wallpaper removal completely effortless nor will it ensure that the lower surface remains in pristine condition. But wallpaper primer does make a difference between taking down wallpaper or taking down wallpaper along with lots of paper facing and gypsum core.

    How to Know If You Need Wallpaper Primer

    Water absorption is one of the key factors in determining whether you should use wallpaper primer. So, it helps to test out the wall with a small amount of water to gauge the rate of absorption.

    With clean, clear water in a bowl, flick a few drops of water onto the wall and rub in some of the drops. If the wall turns dark, that means that the surface is quickly absorbing water and likely requires wallpaper primer.

    Other factors influence the decision, including paint gloss, age and condition of the paint, and the presence of primer or dust.

    Flat or Matte Paint Gloss

    Flat or matte paints always need wallpaper primer. Glossy and semi-gloss paints in good condition do not absorb moisture well, so they may not need wallpaper primer.

    Paint glosses in the mid-range may or may not need primer. Satin and eggshell glosses have enough sheen to shed some water for a limited time. With these glosses, it’s safest to use wallpaper primer.

    Old or Poor Condition Paint

    Even glossy surfaces that are older can benefit from the application of wallpaper primer because they may have lost some of their gloss. Over time, paint breaks down, especially when subjected to UV rays, even indoors.

    Uncoated Walls

    Use wallpaper primer on any bare, uncoated surface, especially unprimed, unpainted drywall.

    Primed Walls

    Walls that have only paint primer should be primed with wallpaper primer. Paint primer is flat, so it will readily soak up the wallpaper glue.

    Dusty Walls

    Walls that are dusty with drywall or plaster dust can benefit from wallpaper primer. While you should always try to clean off as much dust as possible before applying wallpaper, the wallpaper primer can help absorb and neutralize the dust and help the wallpaper glue stick better.

    Assists with removal

    Helps preserve walls and paint

    May be unnecessary with glossy walls

    Can be difficult to find

    Applying Wallpaper Primer

    To apply wallpaper primer, you’ll need many of the same tools you’d use to apply wallpaper: sandpaper, a paint tray and liners, a paint roller with covers, a paintbrush, a putty knife, a screwdriver, and clean rags. You’ll also need wallpaper primer and drywall compound or spackle.

    Remove Obstructions

    Unscrew all wall plates, outlet covers, lights, and any other obstruction on the wall.

    Sand Bumps and Fill Gaps

    Rub your hand on the wall to feel for bumps or use a straight edge. Lightly sand down bumps with fine grit sandpaper. Fill gaps with drywall compound or spackle.

    Clean Surface

    Wipe down the walls with a damp cloth. The cloth should be wrung out as much as possible. Afterward, open windows or turn on a fan to dry the walls.

    Cut in Corners

    Open the can and soak the end of the brush in the wallpaper primer. With the brush, cut in the corners with the wallpaper primer.

    Roll on Wallpaper Primer

    Pour wallpaper primer into a lined paint tray. Soak the roller cover in the product, then roll it out on the paint tray before applying to the wall. Apply one thin coat to the wall, making sure to meet up with all cut-in sections and not leaving any gaps.

    Wait Before Wallpapering

    Wallpaper primer dries to the touch in 30 minutes, but allow a full 24 hours of curing time before applying the wallpaper.

    What is Area?

    In geometry, the area can be defined as the space occupied by a flat shape or the surface of an object. The area of a figure is the number of unit squares that cover the surface of a closed figure. The area is measured in square units such as square centimeters, square feet, square inches, etc.

    The area of the squares below, with unit squares of sides 1 centimeter each, will be measured in square centimeters (cm²).

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Here, the area of the shapes below will be measured in square meters (m²) and square inches (in²).

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    The origin of the word area is from ‘area’ in Latin, meaning a vacant piece of level ground. The origin further led to an irregular derivation of area as ‘a particular amount of space contained within a set of boundaries’.

    We often find the area of the room floor to determine the size of the carpet to be bought. Covering the floor with tiles, covering the wall with paint or wallpaper or building a swimming pool are other examples, where in the area is computed. Common simple shapes and polygons have their own formulae for calculating area. Here’s how area of common 2-D or Two-dimensional shapes is computed:

    Two-Dimensional Geometric Shapes:
    Name of the shape: Picture of shape: Area Formula:
    Circle Area = πr², where r is the radius.
    Triangle Area = bh, where b is base, And h is height.
    Square Area =l × l, where l is the length of each side.
    Rectangle Area = l × w, where l is lengthand w is width.
    Parallelogram Area = b × h, where b is base,and h is perpendicular height.
    Trapezium Area= (a +b)h , where a and b are lengths of the parallel sides, and h is perpendicular height.

    In real life, not every plane figure can be clearly classified as a rectangle, square or a triangle. To find the area of a composite figure which consists of more than one shape, we need to find the sum of the area of both or all the shapes forming the composite figure.

    The area of the outside surface of a solid or three-dimensional shape is called Surface Area. For instance, a rectangular prism has 6 rectangular bases and lateral faces. So, the total surface area is the sum of the areas of all the 6 rectangles.

    Fun Facts
    – Among all the shapes with the same perimeter, a circle has the largest area.

    Let’s sing!

    To plant vegetables in the garden backside,Find the area of the field – the whole of inside.Multiply its length with how much it is wide,And, that’s the area formula, you have applied!

    Let’s do it!

    Instead of handing out math worksheets on the area to your children, involve them in home improvement projects. Inform them about the room that you are considering to paint. Ask them to calculate the total surface area of the walls, in order to find how much paint is required. Discuss how all walls of the room may be different and thus, taking overall measurements and then subtracting the area of the door, windows or book shelves, will help in estimating the amount of paint needed. You can also ask to consider finding the total surface area of a present that they wrapping in order to find the amount of wrapping paper required.

    Average Cost

    The U.S. Department of Education requires each institution that participates in federal financial aid programs to determine the annual nine-month cost of attendance at that particular institution. These figures are used to calculate eligibility for financial aid programs and are based on average costs incurred by students attending that particular institution. The categories used to calculate the cost of attendance are outlined in federal regulation.

    For the 2022-2023 academic year (Fall 2022 and Spring 2023 semesters), the average cost of attendance for a full-time student paying the in-state tuition rate is:

    Undergraduate Graduate
    Tuition and Fees*: $12,208 $11,044
    Books and Supplies: $1,150 $900
    Housing and Meals**: $11,392 $11,996
    Transportation: $3,280 $3,280
    Personal/Miscellaneous: $1,926 $2,022
    Total $29,956 $29,242

    *Tuition and fees for Accelerated Online programs vary by program.

    **This figure is for students living on or off campus but not with parent(s) or other relative(s). For undergraduate students living with parent(s) or relative(s), the annual housing and meals allowance is $4,984.

    To determine the average amount of tuition and fees for students paying full-time non-resident tuition and fees, undergraduate students should add approximately $15,286 to the tuition and fees listed above. Graduate students paying the full-time non-resident tuition and fee rate should add approximately $12,442 to the tuition and fees listed above.

    These figures are to be used for planning purposes only and are not reflective of actual tuition and fees incurred by an individual student. The figures may also be used in the self-certification process for private student loans.

    CALCULATING YOUR FINANCIAL NEED

    The information you report on your FAFSA is used to calculate your Expected Family Contribution (EFC). Your EFC is calculated according to a formula established by law and is not the amount of money your family will have to pay for college, nor is it the amount of aid you will receive. It is a number used by the Office of Financial Aid to calculate how much aid you are eligible to receive.

    The amount of financial need you have determines which financial aid programs you are eligible for. Your financial need is calculated using the formula below:

    Cost of Attendance (COA) – Expected Family Contribution (EFC)= Financial Need

    Watch the video below to learn more about how financial aid offices calculate financial need.

    Q: Isn’t it easier to paint a room than to wallpaper it?

    A: Although both wallpaper and paint liven up dull rooms, wallpaper has special advantages. It can camouflage flawed or damaged walls, soften rough or irregular architectural features, and unite awkward angles. Wallpaper also offers combinations of colors, patterns, and textures that would be nearly impossible for the do-it-yourselfer to duplicate with paint.

    Q: Isn’t wallpaper more expensive than paint?

    A. Yes. One roll of wallpaper, which covers about 30 square feet, might cost around $35. For the same amount, you could buy a gallon or more of premium-quality paint, which would cover approximately 400 square feet. Consider wallpapering just one wall as an accent to keep costs low.

    Q. What are my options?

    A. The most popular choices for do-it-yourselfers are vinyl and vinyl-coated wallpapers. They tend to be the least expensive, the most durable, and the easiest to apply and remove. There are other types of coatings — such as foil, grass cloth, flocked, and embossed — but these are more expensive and trickier to hang. In a high-traffic area, consider the “cleanability” of the paper. Washable papers can be wiped only occasionally with a damp sponge. A scrubbable paper can take more frequent and vigorous cleaning. Check the label and instructions for your paper.

    Q. Should I get prepasted or unpasted wallpaper?

    A. As its name suggests, prepasted paper has paste already applied to its back. To activate the paste, soak the paper in water. With unpasted wallpaper, you apply the adhesive yourself.

    Q. How do I know how much wallpaper to buy?

    A. Calculate the room’s square footage by measuring the length of all the walls, adding those together, and multiplying by room height (excluding baseboards and moldings.) Round up measurements and do not deduct for doors, windows, or other openings. This will allow leeway for pattern matching and trimming. Divide the room’s square footage by the coverage of a single roll (normally 27-30 square feet, but check the figure for the paper you select). This will tell you how many rolls you need to buy; round up to the nearest roll.

    Q. What is a repeat?

    A. It’s the distance from the center of one pattern to the center of the next. It could be an inch, a foot, or more. The size of the repeat affects how much wallpaper you’ll need to buy so you can match patterns throughout a room. A large repeat (6 or more inches) may require extra paper, especially if you make some mistakes.

    Wallpaper: Getting Started

    Q. Are some rooms easier to wallpaper than others?

    A. Yes. If you’ve never wallpapered, start with a long hall or a square room with few breaks in the walls. Kitchens or bathrooms, though smaller, tend to have more twists and turns to paper around, making them more difficult. A bedroom is a good choice for a beginner.

    Q. Can I paper over any wall?

    A. Just about. Wallpaper will adhere to drywall, new and old plaster, concrete, masonry, and paneling. You can even wallpaper over slick, nonporous surfaces, such as tile, concrete block, or synthetic laminate paneling. On many of these surfaces, you’ll first need to apply lining paper, which is a blank wall covering that provides a smooth surface for regular wallpaper. No matter what the surface, the key to success in wallpapering is proper preparation of the walls.

    Q. How do I prepare the walls?

    A. The wall surface should be clean, dry, and free of mildew, grease, stains, and loose paint. Close your eyes and run your hands along the wall. Any bumps you feel will show up after you paper, so sand them down. Repair small holes, cracks, and other blemishes with surfacing compound, then sand and wipe clean. If you face a lot of repairs, consider using lining paper. You’ll also want to apply a wall covering primer/sealer — preferably tinted to match the background color of the new wallpaper — which will hide tiny gaps.

    The primer protects the wall, helps the wallpaper bond to the surface, and makes it easier to move the paper into position. And if the day comes when you want to remove the paper, the job will be easier if you’ve used a primer. This is particularly true for new drywall that has been given only a thin coat of paint. If you don’t prime properly, the wallpaper adhesive will bond with the drywall paper. Later, when you remove the wallpaper, you may pull away the drywall paper, too. Be sure to buy a primer specifically designed for wall coverings, not a paint primer.

    In determining the age of wallpaper, the most reliable clues are the signs of the technology used to make it. Distinguishing handmade paper from machine-made, and traditional block printing from machine printing can help determine the date a paper was made. Information about the age of a wallpaper can, in some cases, help to establish the date of a wall or of architectural changes within a building.

    Wallpaper manufactured before ca. 1835 consisted of small sheets of paper, pasted together to form the length long enough to extend from floor to ceiling. The special class of paper known as “hanging paper” was described in the 18th century as “made from the coarsest and cheapest rags and woolen stuff.” It was rarely bleached white, but by modern standards it was of high quality and strong. The size of handmade paper was limited by the size of the mold. The mold was made up of two parts, a deckle and a frame, and was limited to a size that could be easily handled (figure 1).

    Figure 1: Making Paper—An English engraving printed for F.C. and J. Rivington in 1821 shows a papermaker plunging his mold into a vat filled with pulp made from old rags, water and other ingredients. He is about to scoop a small quantity of pulp and water onto the wire surface of the bottom half of the mold known as the “frame.” The “deckle” or top half of the mold will then hold the pulp mixture in place while the water drains out and the pulp has dried. The product will then be further dried, pressed, and flattened in the press seen at the left, and finished as paper. In this process, the mold could be no larger than the papermaker could handle and that, in turn, restricted the finished size of a sheet of paper. (Author’s Collection)

    The individual sheet that made up a “piece” or a roll of wallpaper were not uniform in size, but usually were smaller than 22 by 32 inches. Early in the 18th century, most paper “stainers” printed sheets which were then pasted individually to a wall. But by mid-century, the sheets were usually pasted together to form rolls before any coloring was applied. The standard length of a “piece” of joined wallpaper, formed from the individual sheets, was established by English excise officials at 12 yards and most were 23 inches wide.

    Horizontal seams in a length of wallpaper are good evidence of handmade paper (as described above) and likely suggests that it predates ca. 1835. Such seams are the first item to look for, and this can be done by shining a strong beam of light, held close to the wall, horizontally across the surface. Under this raking light almost any irregularity on the wall should become apparent in the resulting shadows. Indications of seams between the sheets and between the lengths of wallpaper could appear, even under a coat of paint. However, if subsequent layers of paper have been applied over a handmade paper, evidence of seams could be hidden by the smoother surfaces.

    If an edge of the paper can be uncovered, evidence of the handmade process might be indicated by the slightly ruffled or “deckle edge” caused by the uneven drainage of the water from the top half of the mold (called the deckle). Although for stationery and other fine papers, deckle edges are sometimes imitated on machinemade products, there is no evidence that this was ever done on hanging papers.

    If only small fragments of paper are found, examination under magnification will distinguish between the multidirectional patterns of the fibers characteristic of the handmade process, or the regular vertical alignment of machine-made paper. The paper should also be examined over a strong light for the imprint of the wires that made up the surface of the frame on which the pulp was pressed under the deckle to form the sheet. Other characteristics of handmade paper which might appear include watermarks, sometimes visible in areas where opaque coloring has not been thickly applied to the paper, and tax stamps. A royal insignia would indicate that the paper had been printed in England previous to the repeal of the tax laws there in 1832 (figure 13).

    Figure 2: Stenciling with Block Printing—An early 18th-century French pattern printed in black with stenciled washes of red, green, yellow and blue, is shown here in a piece 14 inches wide and 20-3/4 inches high. (Courtesy of the Cooper-Hewitt Museum, New York)
    Figure 2A: Detail of early 18th-century French wallpaper shown in 2, which shows the thin-bodied, poorly registered stenciled coloring. (Courtesy of the Cooper-Hewitt Museum, New York)

    Machines for producing “endless” paper were the important innovation of the early 19th century that made possible the industrialization of wallpaper making. Developments in England included the Fourdrinier machine of 1799 that used a cylinder to form paper. In 1817, the first machine-made paper was produced in America by Thomas Gilpin in Delaware. Though wallpaper manufacturers would have been the logical early users of the new endless paper, they do not seem to have adopted it in France until 1820, in England until 1830, and in this country not generally until 1835. The widths of machine-made paper varied from country to country. By the 1850’s the standard width of French paper was 18 inches, of English paper 21 inches (20 inches when hung) and of American paper 20 inches. Despite standardization, papers from all these have been found in widths varying from 18 to 40 inches.

    Early handmade papers were composed of textile fibers and were generally heavier and more durable than later machine-made papers. The introduction of wood pulp for making paper was first commercially successful in England in the 1850’s, and was introduced to America in 1855. By the 1880’s, the bulk of commercial hanging paper stock had been greatly cheapened by the introduction of wood pulp, straw, and other less expensive ingredients. Such paper is now characteristically brittle, and browned from the acids present in the wood pulp. Superficial examination usually serves to distinguish cheap, machine-made papers from the handmade, that is; machine-made paper will tear in a neat line and the browning and brittleness are often all too apparent. But further microscopic examination may be required to determine if a fragment of higher quality paper with a high rag content is machine-made or hand-made.

    A few wallpapers, generally the more expensive ones, including Chinese papers, have been hand painted through all of wallpaper history (figure 17). The brush strokes were executed in water base colors. Stylistic analysis, rather than a knowledge of technology, will be of the greatest help in dating painted papers. Chemical analysis of the pigments used in the paints might serve to pinpoint datable pigments (some of which are discussed in the following section on block printing).

    Quality paints, speciality finishes and premium wallpapers for over 35 years.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Paints

    Explore our paints, speciality finishes, undercoats and sealers

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Colours

    Start daydreaming when you explore our beautifully crafted colours

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Wallpapers

    Stunning wallpaper designs from Australian and international designers

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Colour Advice

    Need some professional advice on choosing colour?

    Discover the Porter’s Difference

    At Porter’s Paints we pride ourselves on crafting paint that is beautiful and performs to the highest standards of quality.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Shop Porter’s Online

    Everything you need has been thought of – sampling, wall paint, trim paint, painting accessories and undercoats, with expert colour recommendations. Free shipping on orders over $200! Use code FREESHIPPING.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Our Range of Premium Quality Paints

    Our traditional and modern paint finishes are water-based, durable, easy to apply. Made by hand from the finest raw materials.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Unique luxury wallpapers

    We sell the world’s most iconic wallpaper brands, including our own locally designed Porter’s Collection.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Visit a Showroom

    Addresses, maps and opening hours for your nearest Porter’s store or stockist.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Project Gallery

    Explore inspiring, beautiful and innovative projects featuring Porter’s products.

    Shop Online

    Buy Porter’s products securely online, delivered throughout Australia.

    Sign up for our e-newsletter

    Porter’s Paints is a division of DuluxGroup (Australia) Pty Limited (ACN 000 049 427) (“Porter’s Paints”). The terms “we”, “us”, “our” refer to the company and any of our affiliated companies.

    Your privacy is important to us: Porter’s Paints collects, uses and discloses the information you submit to process your subscription to Porter’s Paints EDM’s. Porter’s Paints (and its marketing and communications agencies on its behalf) may also use your name and contact details to send you information for these purposes. Porter’s Paints may disclose the information to contractors, market research organisations, marketing and communications agencies and related bodies corporate for this purpose. If you do not provide the personal information requested, we will not be able to fulfil your request. We may also exchange your personal information with other related companies and our service providers, such as delivery companies and technology providers.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Maybe your child has outgrown the baby-colored wallpaper in the nursery. Maybe you bought a house that hasn’t been updated since geese wallpaper was in vogue. Whatever the reason, when you just can’t stand a certain wallpaper, it’s time to remove it. Learn how to remove wallpaper safely, and how to paint the wall underneath.

    Step 1: Prepare the Space

    This is an obvious step, but you’d be surprised by how many people want to skip it. Taking the time to get your space ready before you begin will ensure you won’t ruin other areas of your home — or be forced to pause in the middle of your wallpaper removing groove. Remove curtains, outlet covers, switchplates, and artwork. Lay a drop cloth down on the area where you’re going to be working.

    Step 2: Test the Wallpaper’s Adhesion

    Starting at a corner or seam, peel the wallpaper away from the surface. If it comes up easily and doesn’t tear the underlying drywall paper, you may be able to simply pull the wallpaper away from the entire wall.

    Step 3: Make the Solution

    If Step 2 doesn’t work, fill a pump sprayer halfway with hot water from your sink and the other half with boiling water. You can also add fabric softener if your wallpaper becomes difficult to remove. A 1:1 mixture of water to softener should work.

    Step 4: Spray the Walls

    Using your pump sprayer, saturate the wallpaper, spraying the walls evenly. Once the wallpaper begins to bubble, you can begin removing the wallpaper. (You can also rent a steamer and use it to soften wallpaper adhesive.)

    Step 5: Remove the Wallpaper

    With a wide putty knife, scrape the wallpaper. Start at the seams and bubbling sections. Be careful not to gouge the wall surface. If you have stubborn wallpaper, you may have to repeat the above process several times. Repeat until you’ve finished the room.

    Step 6: Clean up the Leftovers

    You’ll likely have to deal with residue. Make a mixture of very hot water and a small amount of tri-sodium phosphate (TSP). Use the mixture with a large sponge, and wipe down the walls. Spray or wipe your walls with clean water one final time. Let the walls sit for a few days to completely dry.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    All that hard work removing the old wallpaper likely left scarring and pitting on your walls. Before you can paint the wall, you’ll need to bring your wall back to smoothness.

    Step 1: Sand the Walls

    If you have any rough spots, lightly sand the areas until they’re smooth.

    Step 2: Patch the Walls

    Check for any damaged areas, including holes and cracks. Using drywall mud and a putty knife, fill in those holes. Wait until they dry, and then sand those areas for a smooth surface.

    Step 3: Prime the Walls

    Once the surface is smooth, apply a coat of high-quality latex primer with a roller or paintbrush. This will give you a smooth surface for your paint.

    Step 4: Paint

    New Life Painting

    If any part of the DIY aspect of removing wallpaper and painting seems a bit much, New Life Painting can help at any step of the way. We specialize in wallpaper removal, as well as interior painting. Once you receive a free consultation and sign a contract, you’ll also get complimentary color consultation from a color analyst to ensure you love your space. Give us a call at (805) 937-9836, or contact us online.

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Related Articles

    • How to Paint Over Wallpaper Backing
    • How to Make Walls Black Without Paint
    • Wall Sheeting Made of Recycled Paper
    • What Is the Easiest Way to Remove Old Paint From Plaster Walls?
    • How to Create a Wall Frieze

    Sizing is a substance which you can apply to walls as part of your preparation before hanging wallpaper. Depending upon what kind of walls you have and what preparations you’ve already made, applying sizing is a largely optional step. However, sizing offers many benefits, and there are many situations in which adding sizing could greatly benefit you.

    Benefits of Sizing

    Applying sizing changes the quality of your walls to make wallpaper application easier. Sizing creates a slippery, slightly glossy surface on your wall. This texture will make it easier for you to move the pieces of wallpaper around as you install them, since they slide into place more readily. Sizing can also help the wallpaper grip the wall better, and additionally make it easier to peel off wallpaper later should you decide to remove it. Sizing is applied like paint, using a paint roller.

    Paint Sheen

    You shouldn’t apply wallpaper to bare drywall, and so you’ll be applying wallpaper to walls that are either primed or painted. If there is a coat of paint on the walls before you wallpaper, then the sheen of the paint determines how easy it is to install the wallpaper: High-gloss sheens allow paper to slide more easily than flat or matte sheens. If your wall has a flat or matte coat of paint, then sizing makes the wall more amenable to wallpaper. Walls with glossy paint will already be very smooth. However, the slick surface created by sizing is better and easier to work with than relying on the smooth surface of glossy paint, and so you may want to use sizing anyway. If you do, lightly sand the walls to help the sizing stick better.

    Applying Primer

    One of your options for preparation is applying a primer to the wall prior to wallpapering. Primers seal the wall and protect it against moisture; excessive moisture can cause the wall to deteriorate and can cause paint beneath the wallpaper to become too soft. They can also prevent the wallpaper adhesive from soaking into the wall, thus making it difficult or impossible to remove the wallpaper later. If you use a primer, you don’t need sizing, but it helps to use sizing over primer anyway, since you still gain the benefits of easier positioning and easier removal later. Some primers are a combination primer and sizer.

    Plaster Walls

    If your walls are plaster instead of drywall, then it’s not necessary to use paint or primer to protect the walls from the wallpaper. Plaster walls lack the paper facing that drywall has, and so won’t absorb as much water or deteriorate with excessive moisture. However, plaster walls do require sizing. In the case of a plaster wall, sizing not only helps with moving and adjusting the paper more easily, but it prevents the wall from soaking up too much water from the paper too quickly. On plaster, sizing has the additional effect of sealing in stains.

    • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Pinterest” aria-label=”Share on Pinterest”>
    • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Reddit” aria-label=”Share on Reddit”>
    • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Flipboard” aria-label=”Share on Flipboard”>

    How to estimate the amount of wallpaper needed

    Related

    • How to Change Your Monitor’s Resolution When it Is Too High to Display
    • What Size Image Fits the Wallpaper Screen on an iOS 7 iPad Mini?
    • How to Align the Windows in Two Monitors
    • How to Fix an Oversized Screen on a Computer
    • How to Get Two Wallpapers on Two Monitors

    Using dual monitors makes it convenient for the small business owner to work within multiple programs or windows at the same time. Unfortunately, Windows 7 doesn’t handle dual-monitor wallpaper very well, with no default option to fit a single wallpaper across two screens. With a bit of simple customization, you can manually set the wallpaper to display across two monitors.

    Determine the Resolution

    Before setting up your wallpaper, you need to know the resolution of your dual-screens. Right-click an open space on your desktop and select “Screen Resolution.” Write down the resolution of display 1, then click display 2 and write that resolution down. Since you’re stretching one wallpaper over both monitors, add the horizontal resolutions together, but not the vertical resolution. The horizontal resolution is the larger number listed first. For example, if one monitor’s resolution is 1360-by-768 and the other screen’s resolution is 1280-by-768, add 1360 and 1280 for a final resolution of 2640-by-768.

    Find Wallpaper

    Now that you have the total resolutions of your monitors as one, you can find wallpaper made specifically for that resolution. Open a Web browser and search your favorite search engine for “2640 x 768 wallpaper,” replacing the numbers with your own resolution. The advantage to this over resizing existing wallpaper is that the wallpaper you’ll find online was specifically created for your resolution, so you don’t need to resize the wallpaper to make it fit. Once found, save your desired wallpaper to an easily remembered place on your computer.

    Resize Existing Wallpaper

    If you already have an image you want to use as your dual-monitor wallpaper, you can alter its resolution instead of trying to find and download the right size online. Click the Windows Start orb and type “Paint” into the search bar, pressing “Enter” when Paint displays. Click the blue drop-down menu in Paint’s upper-left corner and select “Open,” then find and open your wallpaper. Click “Resize” under the Image section of the toolbar. Switch to “Pixels” at the top and remove the check next to “Maintain aspect ratio.” Type the sum of the two resolutions you added into the “Horizontal” and “Vertical” boxes, then click “OK.” Save the image and close Paint.

    Set the Wallpaper

    Right-click an open area on your desktop and select “Personalize.” Click “Desktop Background” near the bottom of the window. Select “Browse” and find the folder containing your wallpaper. Click the wallpaper to activate it, then choose “Tile” under “Picture position.” All of the other Picture Position options display the wallpaper twice, once on each monitor. If you downloaded or set the correct resolution, the image should fit perfectly across both screens. Click “Save changes” when you’re finished.

    Matt Koble has been writing professionally since 2008. He has been published on websites such as DoItYourself. Koble mostly writes about technology, electronics and computer topics.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    When do you put a bath bomb in the bath?

    Soaking with our eye-catching creations for the bath is a fun and luxurious way to get clean and a great way to relax your mind and lift your spirits.

    No matter which of our handmade treats you indulge in, you’ll emerge with soft, scented skin and a sense of balance. They’re all scented with the world’s finest essential oils, and their perfumes run the gamut from bright and uplifting to earthy and calming, so there’s something for everyone.

    Bath bombs

    We invented Bath Bombs in the late ‘80s as a gentle alternative to bubble bath, and they became instant classics thanks to a combination of cleansing baking soda, vibrant colors and therapeutic essential oils. We’re big fans of a bath and we love seeing the bath art creations you make. Show off how beautiful your bath bomb looks as it fizzes away by taking a picture and sharing it on social media with #bathart.

    How to use bath bombs

    • Fill your bathtub with warm water, then drop the bath bomb in and enjoy the show!
    • Jelly Bombs: These fizzers create a slick, skin-softening jelly in the water. Drop yours in the bath, then help it dissolve by holding it under running water, swirling it around in the tub or playing with it as it slowly fizzes.

    Get fun and fizzy with Floating Flower Bath Bomb.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Bubble bars, bubbleroons and reusable bubble bars

    Most bubble baths are sold in plastic bottles, but not these ones. Our solid Bubble Bars don’t have any packaging and they bubble up like crazy. So you can get that Hollywood-style bath and be kind to the environment.

    How to use bubble bars

    • Crumble your bubble bar under the tap as you’re filling your tub, then give the water a big swish to help all the bits dissolve.
    • Most bubble bars are good for one bath, but you can break up larger bubble bars like The Comforter and Blue Skies and Fluffy White Clouds for more bubbly baths.
    • Bubbleroons: These pastry-inspired treats look like macarons, their two halves sandwiched together with a thin layer of shea butter. Crumble a bubbleroon like Rose Jam, just like any of the other bubble bars.

    How to use reusable bubble bars

    • Hold your reusable bubble bar under the running tap, then splash the water around to get some bubbles going.
    • Put the reusable bubble bar aside in a draining dish and let it dry for next time.

    Bath oils

    These little confections nourish your skin with moisturizing butters and softening oils to counteract the drying effects of a hot bath. Every bath oil is lovingly handmade in Canada: there’s a happy Lush person behind every embedded vanilla bean, every dusting of luster and every hand-tied ribbon.

    How to use bath oils

    • Drop your bath oil into the water and let its oils and butters soften and moisturize your skin.
    • Be careful when you’re getting out of a bath with one of these, because they can make your tub a bit slippery.

    These multicolored, squidgy bars can do it all. Use a combination of colors to sculpt whatever shape you dream up, then use it to create a bubbly bath or gently cleanse your skin and hair.p>

    How to use Fun

    • As a bubble bath: Crumble a small piece under a running tap for silky bubbles.

    As a soap or shampoo: Take a small bit in your hand, hop in the tub and lather up.

    Check out all of these inventions at your local Lush shop, or call our friendly Customer Care team to learn more about our products.

    • Bath
    • Bath Bombs
    • Bubble Bars
    • Luxury bath melts
    • Fun
    • How to

    You don’t need to clean it off thoroughly as you’ll not receive all the benefits of the essential oils and salts in the bath bomb. Otherwise, drain the bathtub and have a shower there. If your bath bomb didn’t have any solids and your skin feels fresh, there’s no need to rinse your skin.

    Cut Bath Bombs and Bubble Bars in Half Make it last longer by cutting it in half or in thirds. Bath bombs, which are round, can also be cut in half. The effect will still be the same, and now you’ll get double the Instagram pictures (and fancy baths, duh) for your money.

    Contenus de la page

    How many bath bombs can you use at once?

    While bath bombs are meant for one bathing session, a lot of people find that half of one is still enough for an enjoyable experience. If you plan on splitting it up, go with a circular shaped product with a crease in the middle. Some bath bombs may crumble when you attempt to cut them in half.

    How long should you soak in Lush bath bombs?

    Can I use a year old Lush bath bomb?

    The fresher they are, the faster they’ll fizz, says Jack Constantine, head of product development at Lush. « We have fanatics who’ll keep theirs wrapped and in tupperware boxes underneath their bed, for years – which is extreme, » he says. « But you can do it, as it’s about the freshness.

    Does a bath bomb clean you?

    DO BATH BOMB CLEAN YOU? A bath bomb adds emollients and softeners to your bath’s water that moisturize and indulge your skin. … Yes, it’ll cleanse your skin, but the ingredients inside will also pamper and soothe it.

    How long can you keep Lush bath bombs?

    around six months

    Can you cut Lush bath bombs in half?

    Hate to see your bubble bar go, but love to watch it leave? Make it last longer by cutting it in half or in thirds. Bath bombs, which are round, can also be cut in half. The effect will still be the same, and now you’ll get double the Instagram pictures (and fancy baths, duh) for your money.

    Do you have to rinse off after using a Lush bath bomb?

    You do not have to rinse off after using a bath bomb, but if you used a colored bath bomb or one with glitter in it, you may consider doing so. Simply drain the bathtub, then take a shower and rinse the oils and butters off your skin. You may use a loofah and shower gel as well, if you wish. Clean the tub.

    Do you put bath bombs in before or after?

    Water, Then Bomb While it’s often debated which comes first, Vega says that dropping your bomb into a full tub is what lets it dissolve properly, unleashing all its lovely ingredients in the process. So wait for your tub to fill all the way up, then add your favorite bath bomb or oil.

    Are Lush bath bombs okay for eczema?

    Bathtime can be rather underwhelming for the eczema child. Most bubble baths and kiddy fragranced shower gels contain harsh ingredients which can aggravate and itch their delicate skin. … There are only 2 outcomes really – an itchy night ahead or a forlorn little face.

    What can you do with old bath bombs?

    – Car air freshener. This is great. …
    – Freshen up your clothes. For this, I simply put a few bath bombs in my closet, sock drawer, and underwear drawer for divine smelling clothing.
    – Instant aromatherapy for your house. This one requires a little more creativity. …
    – Foot bath. …
    – Shoe deodorizer. …
    – Air and fabric freshener. …
    – Shower Bomb!

    Do you use the whole bath bomb?

    Our bath bombs are designed for single use. To get the full benefits we do recommend using the entire bomb in your bath. If you choose to take it out of the water half way through and keep it for later it might still fizz the next time you use it, but it won’t be as effective.

    Can you reuse bath bombs?

    Bath bombs are meant for a single use. However, you can reuse your bath bombs at least twice if you remove them from water before they fizzle and dissolve completely. … If you plan to reuse your fizzies, keep them dry by storing them properly. Bath bombs are quite a delight to use in your bath.

    Are bath bombs OK for eczema?

    Let your skin be the guide on how to safely use a bath bomb “However, if people don’t have a history of atopic dermatitis (commonly called eczema) or a known history of sensitivity to fragrances or dyes — the occasional bath bomb is fine.

    N’oubliez pas de partager l’article !

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    The Definitive Guide

    Step by step guide to make the best Bath Bombs.

    If you want to make the best bath bombs on the planet, you’re in the right place.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Jeffrey Dorrian

    About The Author

    I’m Jeffrey Dorrian

    My first bath bombs were a complete disaster.

    Finally, after months of failing we hit the perfect note.

    In the last year, we have made almost two million bath bombs and would like to share our secrets with you.

    Ingredients

    Baking Soda

    Bath Bombs follow a pretty simple recipe. Below is a list of ingredients you will need to get started. Everything here will be available locally for most of you. Anything you can’t find locally will be in the list below.

    • Baking Soda
    • Citric Acid

    Super Secret Tip #1

    50% of your citric acid should be granular and 50% should be fine grade.

    • Carrier Oil (We like sweet almond or olive oil)
    • Water
    • Fragrance/Essential Oil
    • Colorant

    Super Secret Tip #2

    Our favorite color supplier is Bitter Creek.

    • Corn Starch
    • Herbs
    • Sea Salt

    Additional Resources for Materials

    Here are a few of our favorite suppliers for your essential bath bomb needs

    Equipment

    If you’re just starting out you most likely already have everything you need in your kitchen! The only thing you’re probably missing is a bath bomb mold. These can be found at online retailers like Amazon or EBay. Be sure to check your local craft store too. Michael’s, Hobby Lobby, and even Wal-Mart might have the molds in stock. You don’t need a scale if you have a nice assortment of measuring cups and spoons. Also a whisk is very helpful for mixing your dry ingredients.

    • Bath Bomb Mold
    • Mixing Bowls
    • Measuring Cups/Spoons
    • Whisk/Mixing Spoon

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Standard Measuring Cups

    Additional Resources for Equipment

    The great thing about bath bombs is you need very little to get started. Here are a few resources those looking to up their production. Keep in mind, if you’re just starting out it’s best to have as little overhead as possible. You don’t need any fancy machinary to start making bath bombs right now!

    The Process

    Bath Bomb Mixture

    Making Bath Bombs can be very tricky. They need to be just the right consistancy to come out perfect. If your mix is too wet, the bottom of the bath bomb will flatten. If your mix is too dry, they might crack or crumble when trying to separate the mold. There are a lot of varibles here and the only real way to tell what will work for you is through trial and error. Start with this recipe and see how it turns out. Make adjustments as you see fit.

    Mix the dry ingredients first.

    • 8oz – Baking Soda
    • 4oz – Citric Acid
    • 4oz – Epson Salt

    Super Secret Tip #3

    Mix dry ingredients thoroughly before adding the wet ingredients

    In a separate bowl, mix your wet ingredients.

    • 3/4 tsp. – Water
    • 2 tsp. Essential/Fragrance Oil
    • 1 tsp Carrier Oil (We like sweet almond or olive oil)
    • Colorant (start with a few drops, add until desired color is reached)

    After you have your dry and wet ingredients in two separate bowls and mixed well it’s time to combine them. Slowly added the wet ingredients to the dry ones while mixing simultaneously. This will help spread the wet ingredients out better so you don’t pre-activate your bath bombs. You want your mix to stick together. The consitancy should look similar to this photo. If the mix is having trouble sticking together, add teaspoons of water until you have the right consistancy.

    Super Secret Tip #4

    Leave the Bath Bombs in the molds overnight.

    More Info On The Bath Bomb Making Process

    There are a lot of great examples on the bath bomb making process. Here are some of our favorites.


    Fragrance Suppliers

    Fragrance is one of the most important parts of making a great bath bomb! So where can you find top notch fragrances? Natures Garden has a fantastic selection of fragrances and they ship orders really quickly. Bramble Berry is also has a great selection of essential and fragrance oils. Amazon also has plenty to choose from and you can buy in smaller quantities than most dedicated fragrance suppliers. Take a look at few different suppliers before buying and see what works for your price range.

    A little fragrance goes a long way. You don’t need much for it to have the desired effect.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Essnetial Oil and Fragrance Oil Both Work Great

    Storage and Drying

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    How we Dry our Bath Bombs

    After making bath bombs they will need to sit out overnight before packaging or using them. You can put a fan on them to speed up the process, but leaving them in a well ventalated area will be enough. There are a few ways you can go about this. Drying racks, similar to what bakers use work great for bath bombs. You want to try and avoid humidity if you can. Excess humidity can cause the bath bombs to “go off” and they will deform before you have a chance to use them.

    We use tables with a little padding underneath to try and lessen the flattening effect on the bottom of the bath bombs. It gives us a little more flexability in our batches. Egg cartons actually work great for small batches and will save your counter tops form any extra clean up. They take a lot of the pressure off the bottom of the bath bomb. They also look great as a display (we’ll get more into that later).

    Once the Bath Bombs are done drying you can stack them in conatiners or baskets. We recommend sealing them up if you’re going to be storing them for an extended period of time. If left out the color might start to fade. Also depending on your area the humidity could cause the bath bomb to be less effective. It’s usually best to package your bath bombs as soon as possible. If you put them in plastic bags or a container of some kind, then you won’t have to worry about extra store precausions.

    Cured Bath Bombs are quite sturdy. Don’t worry about dumping them all into a single container or stacking them. We actually have a “drop test” we use to make sure the batch turned out OK. After the bath bombs have dried, we take one and drop it on the floor from about chest height. If it lands on the hard surface without breaking, then we know we have a nice solid batch of bath bombs!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Bath bombs have really blown up (pun intended) in recent years. From unicorn bubble bath bombs for kids to senior citizens making their own bombs to create a relaxing aromatherapy experience, it’s hard to find a household thathasn’tused a bath bomb. Did you know though that some of those bombing beauties can cause real damage to your plumbing? Here’s what you need to know.

    The Problem with Salt in Bath Bombs

    Most bath bombs contain some mix of salts, oils, and scents, all designed to create a fragrant and often colorful bathing experience. Though Epsom salts usually dissolve in water, partially dissolved salt chunks can clog your drain when they catch on hair and other debris.

    Oily Bath Bombs Can Clog Drains

    The fragrant and soothing oils many bombs contain can, over time, build up in your pipes. And if they cool too fast, they can harden when traveling down the drain, creating an even bigger problem by plugging up the plumbing.

    Confetti, Flowers, and Glitter Can Cause Serious Plumbing Issues

    Bath bombs not only come in fun shapes and beautiful colors but can also sometimes contain glitter, confetti, and flower petals. They do look pretty, but these ingredients don’t completely dissolve, if at all. Bits of flowers, glitter, and confetti can also cause clogging, especially if they get stuck to those salt and oil chunks.

    Bath Bombs + Bath Jets = Disaster

    Bath bombs and hot tubs or jetted bathtubs do not mix! That’s because the additives in the bombs can quickly clog up the hoses and jets while oils and other ingredients can damage sensitive components. If you decide to go ahead and use bath bombs in your hot tub anyway, be sure to check the manufacturer’s manual or website to make sure you don’t void your warranty by doing so.

    Finally, many bath bombs might not be septic-friendly and frequent use can create even more issues when synthetic materials accumulate in the tank and clog the effluent filters. The result? Slow drains and/or sewage backups in toilets and other plumbing fixtures.

    How to Safely Use Bath Bombs

    There are several ways to enjoy bath bombs and protect your plumbing at the same time:

    • Put the bomb inside a nylon netting cover before dropping it in the bath.
    • Clean your drains every couple weeks with a mixture of water and white vinegar. Stay away from harsh store-bought drain cleaners.
    • Use a strainer to keep bath bomb debris and hair from going down the drain.

    Another good trick is to briefly turn on the hot water after each use and after cleaning with the water and vinegar solution. This will help dissolve any leftover ingredients before they become a problem.

    What to Do if You’ve Had a Bath Bomb Plumbing Disaster

    Bath bombs don’t always cause clogs but if you use them often be sure to watch and see if your tub is draining much slower than usual. You might already have a serious clog that is best dealt with by a professional. If you fear frequent bath bomb indulgence has taken a toll on your plumbing, give David Gray Plumbing a call today at (904) 724-7211 or contact us online. We’ll get your drains flowing smoothly in no time at all.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Bath bombs are great for both beginner and advanced crafters. The recipe is simple, but they do take some practice. Bath bombs are sensitive to moisture – they can crumble, fall apart, or fizz incorrectly. Below, we go over how to get perfect results every time.

    First, the basics. Bath bombs are made with 2 parts baking soda and 1 part citric acid. That causes the fizzing reaction when they’re dropped in water. They typically need witch hazel to hold together. From there, you can customize them with colors, fragrances, and additives. Find bath bomb making supplies here.

    Now, onto the questions!

    1. Why is my bath bomb crumbly/cracking?
    It’s probably too dry. You want the mixture to feel like wet sand and hold its shape when squeezed. Use one hand to spritz with witch hazel and one hand to mix until it’s the right consistency.

    If your bath bomb cracks after it’s out of the mold, it’s likely too wet. You can prevent that by using less witch hazel, or by using witch hazel instead of water. We don’t recommend water because it makes bath bombs fizz too early.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    2. Why is my bath bomb soft?
    There may be too much moisture. Try adding more baking soda or citric acid to balance it out. If you live in a really humid area, we recommend investing in a dehumidifer to keep things dry while you work. You can also add about 1 teaspoon of kaolin clay per cup of powder. It helps bath bombs harden and hold their shape.

    3. Why does my bath bomb have lumps, warts, or bumps on the surface?
    This is usually a result of clumps in the dry ingredients or not fully mixing in the fragrance oil. We recommend sifting all your dry ingredients so they’re nice and smooth. Then, add in your wet ingredients and mix with your hands for 1-2 minutes to ensure everything’s incorporated fully.

    4. Why is my bath bomb not fizzing very much?
    Try increasing the amount of citric acid so there’s a 2:1.5 ratio. You can also decrease the amount of oil/butter and store the bath bombs in a cool, dry place with a dehumidifier or a fan running. You may also want to remove cornstarch from your recipe – in our testing, we found it inhibits fizz.

    5. Why is my bath bomb expanding out of the mold?
    The mixture is so wet that it’s fizzing, which causes it to expand. Use witch hazel instead of water, and avoid any colors or fragrances with water. If you live in a really humid area, we recommend investing in a dehumidifer to keep things dry while you work.

    6. What colorants can I use?
    You can use micas, clays, or other natural bath bomb colorants. Just add them to the powders and stir well. We don’t recommend pigments because they tend to leave streaks of color.

    Powdered colorants are oil based, so they can pool on top of the water and get on your skin. To help, add polysorbate 80. It’s an emulsifier that mixes the colors into the water. Start with about 0.2 ounces per pound of bath bomb mixture. We often get asked about a natural alternative to polysorbate 80. We haven’t found one that works as well. You can leave it out if you like.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    7. How much colorant can I add?
    Start with about 1/8 teaspoon of powdered color per pound and go from there. Keep in mind, the more color you add, the more likely it will stain the tub. We recommend using no more than 2 teaspoons of mica per pound of bath bombs, and using polysorbate 80 to help the color distribute more evenly.

    8. What can I use in place of witch hazel?
    Oils are a great way to moisten bath bombs and add skin-loving properties. Start with about 0.5 ounces per pound. Some crafters use 99% isopropyl alcohol, but it can dry the bath bombs out so they’re more likely to crack. Try a combination of oil and alcohol to hold the mixture together. We don’t recommend water.

    9. How much fragrance/essential oil should I add?
    The Bramble Berry Fragrance Calculator makes it easy! Just select “Salts” from the drop-down menu.

    10. How much oil and butter can I add?
    Start with about 0.5 ounces per pound. If you’re working with a hard oil or butter, make sure it’s melted before it’s added to the powders. You may want to add polysorbate 80 to help the oil mix into the water, rather than pooling on top. That will also make the tub less slippery when you’re getting out.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    11. Can bath bombs discolor?
    Yes, they can if you use a fragrance with vanilla. It can take longer to appear, or it may never turn brown. You can add Vanilla Color Stabilizer, but it may not work. Use a fragrance that doesn’t discolor to be on the safe side.

    12. What molds are best for bath bombs?
    Plastic or stainless steel molds are a great option. You can use silicone molds as well, but make sure to use a recipe with less moisture and pack them it in tightly so the bath bombs don’t stick.

    14. Why are my bath bombs not sticking together in the stainless steel bath bomb mold?
    Try adding 5-10 drops of cyclomethicone in both sides of the bath bomb mold and swirling it around. Then, let the molds drain on a paper towel. That helps the bath bombs slide out easily. Having the correct texture helps too – make sure the mixture feels like wet sand and holds its shape when squeezed.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    13. How long should bath bombs stay in the mold?
    At least 4 hours or up to overnight. If you try to remove the bath bomb before it’s fully dry, it can crumble.

    15. How do I store bath bombs?
    We recommend wrapping them tightly with plastic wrap and storing them in a cool, dry place. You can use a dehumidifier or run a fan over them as they dry. Then you can package them any way you like.

    16. How long do bath bombs last?
    Use them in 3-6 months for the best results.

    We have plenty of inspiration to help you get started! Find bath bomb projects here.

    Say goodbye to your stressful day with these DIY Lemon Lime bath bombs. The duet of lemon and lime are perfect for relieving stress, improving moods, or just giving you that much needed release from daily hassles! You can make them easily at home using inexpensive ingredients.

    I love how these lemon lime bath bombs smell! They’ve become one of my favorite go-to items after a long day that has left me feeling drained.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    DIY Lemon Lime Bath Bombs

    I can’t get enough of the refreshing lemon and lime scent from these bath bombs. Every time I use one, it leaves me feeling energized and ready for whatever life throws at me next! You will thank me later- after you make and use one! Are you ready?

    Supplies:

    • 1 1/2 cup baking soda
    • 3/4 cup citric acid
    • 1 tbsp bentonite clay
    • 1 tbsp Epsom salts
    • 2 tbsp melted coconut oil
    • 1/2 tsp essential oil blend desired (we used lemon and key lime tart)
    • 1/2 tbsp polysorbate 80 (to keep the colorant from sticking to the bathtub)
    • 1 tsp yellow mica powder
    • 1/2 tsp green mica powder
    • 1/2 tsp alcohol
    • 1/2 tsp cornstarch
    • Bath bomb mold
    • 2 mixing bowls
    • measuring spoons
    • spatula

    Tips for Making Bath Bombs at Home

    If you are new to making bath bombs at home, make sure to swing over and read all of our tips and tricks for making bath bombs at home before you get started.

    Making bath bombs can seem like a big task, but it isn’t! Making your own is easy with these simple hacks.

    • When it comes to bath bomb molds, not all are made equal. Metal bath bomb molds tend to be the most popular, however, I personally prefer silicone molds. Silicone bath bomb molds are a whole lot easier to pop the bath bomb out of (especially if you are crunched for time and can’t let your bath bomb dry overnight). Plus silicone is super easy to clean and store.
    • If you choose to use a metal bath bomb mold, one thing to keep in mind while mashing your bath bomb into one is to mash the bath bomb together side by side. If you attempt to mash the bath bomb mold top to bottom instead of side to side it will make getting the bath bomb out in one piece a bit harder. Remembering this simple trick will be a sanity saver when it comes time to removing your bath bomb from the mold.
    • Mixing ingredients also matters. I used to be one to just throw everything in and mix it all at once…then struggle with crumbly bath bombs. To avoid this, mix the wet ingredients together really well first. Then add the citric acid. This way you aren’t scrambling to beat the fizz.
    • Also, keep some isopropyl alcohol close by for when you are adding your mixed ingredients into your bath bomb molds. You can use alcohol to dampen a mixture that is too dry without ruining the bath bombs.
    • It is always a good idea to let your bath bomb sit in the mold overnight to dry.
    • After you have made your bath bombs, protect them from humidity by storing them in an airtight container.

    If you like making BATH BOMBS, please check out our Homemade Lavender Bath Bombs. Perfect addition to your relaxing bath bomb collection.

    How to Make Homemade Lemon Lime Bath Bombs

    Let’s get crafting! Below is our written tutorial.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    So you just renovated your bathroom –congratulations! Whether you got a new bathtub or replaced your countertops , your new restroom is sure to look elegant. Why not enjoy your luxurious bathroom with something fun for the bathtub–like bath bombs?

    Bath bombs are a great way to relax in the bathtub and enjoy your new decor. Better yet, you can easily make your own bath bombs to suit your preferences and health requirements! Keep reading for a standard bath bomb recipe to get you started.

    DIY Bath Bomb Recipe

    The internet is full of bath bomb recipes, with a variety of different ingredients suited for different preferences and potential allergies. However, several of the core ingredients remain the same. Use this bath bomb recipe as a guide to understanding the proportions and general supplies required for the job. If you can’t use one of these ingredients, it’s easy to find a replacement. Remember, your own preferences and needs come first here.

    With that said, these are the ingredients you’ll generally need for a proper homemade bath bomb:

    • ½ cup citric acid
    • 1 cup arrowroot powder or baking soda
    • ½ cup salt of your choice (Himilayan pink salt is always a popular choice)
    • ¾ cup cornstarch
    • 2 tablespoons liquid oil of your choice
    • 2 tablespoons water
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract (if you’d rather skip this, add an extra tablespoon of water)

    These ingredients on their own will create an unscented, fizzy bath bomb. Anyone allergic to most fragrances or dyes will likely be content with this. If you’d like to add scents or colors, however, you’ll also need:

    • 30-40 drops skin-safe essential oils (check the label–many essential oils are specifically marked as not safe to put directly on skin)
    • Dried herbs or flower petals of your choice
    • Natural color dyes or food coloring (amount will vary depending on how strong the dye is)

    Bath Bomb Ingredients Explained

    Each ingredient in your bath bomb plays a role in giving you the most relaxing bath ever. Citric acid is, as its name suggests, a mild acid that causes the bath bomb to gently fizz when submerged in water. Baking soda, an alkaline, simply counters the acidity to keep your bath water at a neutral pH. A dash of salt helps relax your muscles and calm irritated skin. (Epsom salts are an especially good choice for this.) The oil, whether you use anything from coconut to olive oil, helps moisturize dry skin. Finally, the cornstarch makes your skin smooth and silky after your bath. All these ingredients combine for a truly lovely experience!

    Preparing Your Bath Bombs

    Before you start preparing your bath bombs, find a safe place to mix the ingredients. Do not make these bath bombs on top of your uncovered brand new countertops, especially if they are natural stone! Citric acid can cause mild damage if spilled. Cover the countertops or find a different work surface.

    Add the baking soda, citric acid, cornstarch, and salt to a large bowl and whisk with a fork until everything is thoroughly combined. In a small separate bowl, mix the oil, vanilla extract, and water, along with any essential oils you’re using for fragrance. If you’re adding any colors, mix a few drops into the liquid ingredients. Slowly pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients and stir thoroughly. Add any dried herbs you’re using at this stage. Once you’re done, the mixture should hold its shape and not crumble when squeezed. Add more water if the mixture is still too dry. Lastly, press the mixture into pre-prepared molds. You can use specially designed bath bomb molds or even greased muffin tins for this. Finally, leave the bath bombs to dry for at least 24 hours or until hard. Store your bath bombs in an airtight container and use them within about 14 days.

    Make Your Bathroom Even More Luxurious!

    Fun DIY projects can make for a great hobby. It’s even better if you can use that hobby in a brand new bathroom setting! Customize your bath experience with bath bombs designed to your exact preferences.

    Get in touch with us to start renovating your bathroom today!

    This is the most magical way to bathe.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Sure, you could just buy a bath bomb at the store, but that’s so boring! Bath fizzes are so fun to make, and this unicorn-inspired bomb is actually the bomb and will get you tons of likes on Instagram. Watch this video and follow the recipe below from Soap Chérie to learn how to DIY one for your next bath.

    Ingredients:

    • 1 cup citric acid
    • 2 cups baking soda
    • 2 ounces shea butter
    • 2 teaspoons essential oil of your choice
    • 1/2 teaspoon pink colorant
    • 1/2 teaspoon yellow colorant
    • 1/2 teaspoon blue colorant
    • Water
    • Iridescent Super Sparkle Glitter
    • 1 ounce glycerin melt and pour
    • 24k gold mica

    Materials: spray bottle, bath bomb mold; unicorn horn mold

    Instructions:

    1. Start with citric acid and baking soda. In a large bowl, add citric acid and baking soda, and mix thoroughly.

    2. Add oils. Using your hands, mix 1 ounce shea butter (to soothe and moisturize your skin) and the essential oil (to add a scent) into the citric acid-baking soda mixture.

    3. Divide and color. Split the mixture evenly into three bowls. In each bowl, add a different colorant. Mix thoroughly until the mixture is evenly colored.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    4. Spray water into the mix. Use a spray bottle to spritz your mixtures a little at a time. Continue to use your hands to mix it all together until it is at a consistency where it’s a little crumbly but can hold its shape when you tightly squeeze it.

    5. Pack the mixture into the mold. Sprinkle a little of each color into the mold until it’s full. Then use the palm of your hand to press it in tight.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    6. Let it dry. Tap the mold to release the bath bombs and set them aside somewhere warm and dry for a few hours to dry.

    7. Glitterfy your bomb. Once the bombs are dry, sprinkle the iridescent glitter on top.

    8. Form the horn. Melt 1 ounce shea butter and pour it into the horn mold. Let it harden before removing from the mold.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    9. Dip it in gold. Once hardened, dip each horn in mica to create a magical sheen.

    10. Attach the horn. Heat the glycerin in the microwave a few seconds at a time until melted. Dip the bottom of the horns in the glycerin and stick them to the top of the bombs to finish.

    11. Toss it in when your bath is ready and live your best unicorn life.

    Get non-boring fashion and beauty news directly in your feed. Follow Facebook.com/CosmoBeauty.

    Follow Brooke on Instagram.

    Fizzy luxurious bath bombs make for the best DIY gifts. Here’s a step-by-step guide on how to make them for as a thoughtful personalised gift or keep them for yourself.

    Before we start, it’s worth noting that you can customize your bath bombs to suit your favourite essential oils, fragrances, colours and toppings.

    Here’s what you’ll need:

    Ingredients:
    1 cup baking soda
    ½ cup citric acid
    ½ cup epsom salts
    1 tsp. water
    2 tsp. essential oil of your choice
    3 tsp. olive oil
    Optional:
    Food colouring of your choice
    Toppings of your choice (like dried lavender or rose petals)

    Utensils:

    Bath bomb mold (you can use a muffin or large ice cube tray)
    Two bowls
    A whisk

    Bath Bombs Away!

    Step 1.

    Mix all the dry ingredients together in a bowl.

    Step 2.

    Mix all the liquid ingredients in a separate bowl.

    Step 3.

    Slowly add the liquid mixture to the dry mixture one spoonful at a time and mix well.

    Step 4.

    Sprinkle your toppings at the bottom of the mold and them pack the bath bomb mixture in tightly over the top.

    Step 5.

    Take your bath bomb out of the mold and let it dry for 12-24 hours. It’s now ready to use.

    As long as it doesn’t get wet, it will last for a long time! Enjoy!

    Spread The Love With These Easy-To-Make Valentines

    This Valentine’s Day, you could give your kids a traditional box of tiny cards to pass out to their friends at school. Or you could work together in the kitchen to make the most creative valentines in the class: conversation heart bath bombs!

    Given the hefty price tag of store-bought versions, bath bombs may seem like complicated concoctions. Actually, they’re shockingly simple and affordable to make at home, and the activity provides the perfect opportunity to teach your kids about mixing colors, measuring ingredients and what happens when you combine citric acid, baking soda and water. (Hint: It fizzes!)

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    When you’re finished, you’ll have larger-than-life conversation hearts that look good enough to eat but are best enjoyed at bath time.

    Supplies
    For the bath bombs
    ❤ 1 cup baking soda, plus 4 extra spoonfuls
    ❤ ½ cup citric acid (available in the grocery store canning section)
    ❤ 10-15 drops cotton candy fragrance oil (optional)
    ❤ Water-based food coloring in four or more colors
    ❤ 2 teaspoons almond oil
    ❤ Witch hazel in small spray bottle
    ❤ 5 small mixing bowls
    ❤ Flour sifter
    ❤ Fork or whisk
    ❤ Spoon
    ❤ Heart baking mold

    For the lettering
    ❤ A pinch of pink mica (available online or some craft stores)
    ❤ A few drops of vodka or rubbing alcohol
    ❤ Thin paintbrush

    Instructions
    1. In a small bowl, mix baking soda and citric acid. Use a flour sifter to break up any clumps. For scented bath bombs, mix in the fragrance oil.

    2. In four separate bowls, add assorted food coloring to a spoonful of baking soda and mix with fork or whisk, breaking up clumps. Aim for bright, saturated color.

    How to split and store your bath bombs
    Note: Be sure the newly colored baking soda is dry before moving to the next step to prevent fizzing.

    3. Divide the baking soda and citric acid mixture from Step 1 evenly among the four bowls of colored baking soda. Mix each bowl thoroughly with fork or whisk.

    4. Add about 1/2 teaspoon of almond oil to each bowl and mix thoroughly. The texture should feel dry but resemble damp sand and hold its shape when squeezed.

    Too dry? Spritz with witch hazel and continue to mix. Spray a little at a time to avoid setting off the chemical reaction!

    Too wet? Add more dry ingredients at a ratio of 2 tablespoons of baking soda to 1 tablespoon of citric acid and mix.

    5. Spoon mixture into the heart baking mold, packing it down tightly. I recommend overfilling the mold and then pressing the mixture down with the back of a spoon, adding more as needed until flat.

    6. Flip mold over and gently bend and tap to release bath bombs onto a flat surface. Let them dry overnight,
    flat-side down.

    Note: If hearts crumble when released from mold, return mixture to a bowl, spritz with witch hazel, mix and repeat Step 5.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    7. When bath bombs have dried thoroughly and are hard to the touch, you can paint words on them. Mix a pinch of pink mica powder with a few drops of vodka or rubbing alcohol. (Alcohol evaporates more quickly than water, which will prevent bath bombs from activating early and fizzing up.)

    8. Write on surface of each bath bomb using mica mixture and a very thin paintbrush. Test a small dot first. If dot fizzes, your mixture has too much liquid. Add more mica powder or wait until a bit of the alcohol evaporates off.

    9. Let words dry for at least two hours before packaging bath bombs in airtight containers or bags.

    Please share pictures of your conversation heart bath bombs on social media with the hashtag #Frederickschildmag so we can see your creativity. Happy crafting, friends!

    This story originally appeared in the February 2020 issue of Washington FAMILY, a sister publication of Frederick’s Child published by Mid-Atlantic Media.

    News provided by

    Apr 26, 2022, 10:05 ET

    Share this article

    Share this article

    The Giveaway Kicks Off Lush’s Series of Events And Activities Taking Place To Promote The Wellness Benefits Of Taking A Bath

    VANCOUVER, BC , April 26 , 2022 /PRNewswire/ — Today, Lush Fresh Handmade Cosmetics announced the brand will be doing its biggest random-act-of-kindness ever by giving away 100,000 bath bombs to consumers globally in shops and via their online storefront. Lush staff will help in-store shoppers navigate their selection of bath bombs to find the one most suitable for their unique ‘me-moment’. The mass giveaway will coincide with Lush’s first-ever World Bath Bomb Day taking place in North America on April 27, 2022 starting at 4pm local time.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    “These last 2 years have taught us all a lot, and I think one of those lessons has been self-care and knowing when to give yourself a break,” says Jack Constantine , Lush Product Inventor and CDO. “Our bath bombs transform the humble bath tub into a portal to another world full of color and fragrance. Giving away bath bombs on the anniversary of Lush bath bomb creation is our way to thank those who have joined us in the bath and introduce new people to this wonderful escape.”

    Lucky Lushies visiting the Union Square Lush store in New York or the Queen Street West Lush store in Toronto during this giveaway event, will also have the chance to celebrate the day with a delicious realistic bath bomb cake created by reality TV stars and cake extraordinaires, Justin Ellen (NYC) and April Julian ( Toronto ). The two will be wowing local shoppers with delicious cake replicas of some of Lush’s most iconic bath bombs to celebrate the anniversary, as well as massive cakes to celebrate the history of Lush’s three-decade legacy.

    “As a Lush bath bomb lover, I’m so delighted to be involved with the celebrations, there’s nothing quite like relaxing in a bath after a long day,” said Justin Ellen . “I’ve always admired the creativity of Lush products, and am excited to be reimagining the bath bomb as a cake to celebrate this fun day.”

    “My daughter and I have been going bananas testing out all of Lush’s most beloved bath bombs and getting inspiration for these cakes,” said April Julian . “The massive Intergalactic bath bomb cake that we’re making for World Bath Bomb Day promises to be out of this world.”

    Ellen and Julian will be joined by fellow reality show contestant Jonny Manganello who will be creating his own vision of bath bombs in cake form and sharing his masterpiece online, via social.

    Lush is known for creating innovative cosmetics using ethically sourced, fresh fruits, plants and vegetables, so what better way to celebrate the important day than to team up with Cake Artists to make a mouthwatering – and picture perfect – bath bomb inspired Birthday Cake.

    To continue the festivities, Lush will be hosting complimentary bath bomb pressing events in all shops across North America from 11am to 3pm on April 30, 2022 (First-come first serve, while supplies last). These interactive events invite in-store shoppers to try making their own handmade bath bombs to take home, with Lush’s expert team guidance. To find your local Lush store to join in on the celebrations visit the Lush store locator page. For more images and a video of the World Bath Bomb Day Campaign see here.

    Conversations have the power to cleanse, transform and renew, much like soaking in a bath. For this reason, Lush will also be launching a brand-new podcast The Sound Bath: Conversations That Cleanse on May 5, 2022 , to give people another way to elevate their bath game. Listeners can tune into conversations between the surrealist blues poet Aja Monet and some of her favorite authors, artists, activists, and experts to unpack today’s biggest topics in mental, physical, social and environmental wellbeing.

    About World Bath Bomb Day
    Lush was first awarded the trademark for bath bombs on 27th April 1990 after being invented by Lush Co-founder and Product Inventor, Mo Constantine in her shed in 1989. Since then Lush has gone on to sell more than 400 different designs of bath bombs and over 312 Million bath bombs in total since 2005, encouraging millions of consumers across the world to disconnect and unwind in their bathtubs.

    Although previously unknown, the term ‘bath bomb’ is now so widely adopted it has been added to the Cambridge Dictionary, and the joy of escaping into a vortex of steaming color is more widespread than ever. It could be the color, fragrance, #bathart or sheer relaxation, this iconic Lush invention has taken on an identity of its own: bath bombs have earnt a place in the cultural zeitgeist.

    About Lush Fresh Handmade Cosmetics
    Lush Cosmetics is a purveyor of good, clean fun. The brand offers luxurious and ethical skincare, haircare and bath products, as well as unique gifts filled with fragrant and effective products. 2022 marks Lush’s 27th anniversary of creating innovative cosmetics using fresh fruits and vegetables, the finest essential oils and ingredients that are ethically and sustainably sourced. Never tested on animals, every single Lush product is vegetarian, 95% are vegan and 40% unpackaged. Lush campaigns on animal protection, human rights and environmental conservation because it’s the right thing to do. With over 900 shops worldwide, Lush is in a unique position to raise awareness on serious issues and bring about real change. In 2007, Lush launched a dedicated charitable givings program, where 100% of sales (minus the tax) of a luxurious hand and body lotion called Charity Pot is donated to small grassroots organizations that align with Lush’s ethics in the areas of human rights, animal protection and environmental justice. Since launching the Charity Pot program, Lush has donated more than $60 million to over 3,200 grassroots charities in 92 countries.

    Published: Mar 24, 2020 · Modified: Mar 24, 2020 · This post may contain affiliate links. · Leave a Comment

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    A simple bath bombs recipe to make your own relaxing bath & body products at home. Add your favorite essential oils. Great for stress relief.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    There is something about these bath and body products with their sweet smells that just makes me swoon. I love all of them, just not their price tag. I have really been leaning toward making more of my own products at home for several reasons including price, and knowing what is in them. This Simple Bath Bombs Recipe is a great place to get started making your own bath bombs. I love it because you can customize the scents, color, size and more to make them work for you! There is nothing more stress relieving than relaxing in a bath with your favorite bath bomb after a long day!

    Bath Bomb Supplies

    To make these Bath Bombs you are going to need a few supplies. The most important are the Bath Bomb molds. If you don’t care about the shape of your bath bomb you can make these in any ice cube tray or silicone mold.

    You will also need

    • Cornstarch
    • Citric Acid
    • Epsom Salt
    • Baking Soda
    • Essential Oils (of your choice)
    • Coconut Oil
    • Mica Dye (if desired)

    Everything in this list is found easily at your local store. The mica dye can be ordered online or picked up at a local craft store.

    How to Make Bath Bombs

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    In a bowl you are going to mix all of the dry ingredients. Give them a stir to make sure they are blended well. In another bowl mix together your wet ingredients.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    VERY SLOWLY add the wet ingredients to the dry ingredients. You want to limit fizzing as much as possible. You are looking for the mixture to resemble wet sand.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Immediately transfer the mixture to your bath bomb mold. You want to really pack it in there. Pressing and twisting until it closes, or if you are using another type of mold you want a densely packed fill. Allow the bombs to rest for at least 24 hours to dry.

    Tap the outside of your mold gently to release your bath bomb when dry. Store them in an airtight container until ready to use.

    Choosing Essential Oils

    When it comes to bath bombs there are no wrong essential oils. You can pick whichever scents you find pleasant. Here are some of my suggestions. Feel free to mix and match them as well. Make your own blends.

    • Lavender (Calming, Soothing, and Helps Relax)
    • Eucalyptus (Helps open up pores, and helps with breathing. Great for colds)
    • Orange (Sweet scent that helps rejuvenate. Gives a little burst of joy.)
    • Tea Tree (Helps soothe skin. Great for any skin irritations)

    Storing

    You should use your Bath bombs within about 6 months. Keep them stored in a moisture-free clear glass jar, or seal them in an air tight container

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    With our black bath bomb recipe you can take your love of activated charcoal to a whole new level. These unique little bath bombs contain detoxifying activated charcoal, nourishing castor oil and soothing epsom salts, leaving you feeling cleansed, nourished and relaxed.

    It is great for those who have oily or combination skin, acne and blemish prone skin, or those that love to have a bit of fun and try something a little bit different!

    While your bath water will turn black, it won’t stain. Just be sure to rinse your bath down as soon as you are done.

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups bi carb
    • 1/2 cup citric acid
    • 1/2 cup epsom salt
    • 1/2 cup cornstarch
    • 1 tablespoon activated charcoal
    • 2 tablespoon castor oil
    • 1 tablespoon water
    • 12 drops rosemary essential oil
    • 12 drops thyme essential oil
    • 12 drops lavender essential oil
    • 12 drops sage essential oil

    Method

    1. In a large glass bowl combine the bi carb, citric acid, epsom salt, cornstarch and activated charcoal. Mix with a wooden spoon and set aside.
    2. Add the castor oil and essential oils and mix together with your hands. Add the water and mix again quickly before it starts to fizz. Keep kneading until your mixture starts to feel smooth and holds together like damp sand.
    3. Split your mixture up into desired portions. Either pack tightly into a bath bomb mould, or hand roll them. Let it set for 1 hour. Remove from the mould and let them dry overnight.

    How To Use

    This recipe makes enough for approx. 2 large 250g black bath bombs.

    Drop a black bath bomb into your warm bath and watch it fizz. Be warned, your bath water will turn black! Soak for 20-30 minutes. The activated charcoal will stick to your skin and bath however it won’t stain. Rinse your body and your bath down well when done.

    Note: These bath bombs contain nourishing castor oil, so take care getting out of your bath as it may be slippery.

    Discover Biome’s Naked Beauty Bar TM

    Looking to simplify, reduce waste and know exactly what you are putting on your skin?

    At Biome’s Naked Beauty Bar TM , you will find all of the beautiful raw ingredients you need to make your own natural skin care and cleaning products. These ingredients are available in convenient reusable glass jars, and in bulk from our Indooroopilly and Balmoral stores.

    Find our stores here:

    · Brisbane City: 33 Adelaide Street, Brisbane City

    · Paddington: 2 Latrobe Terrace, Paddington

    · Balmoral: 216 Riding Road, Balmoral

    · Indooroopilly: Level 3, Indooroopilly Shopping Centre

    Share your Naked Beauty Bar TM DIY skin care and cleaning products with us by tagging your photos with #BiomeNakedBeauty on Facebook and Instagram.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    The ultimate relaxing craft project is here! Easily make your very own DIY Bath Bombs with a few ingredients like epsom salts, essentials oils and dried flowers. These make a great project to spoil yourself (highly recommend) or as a thoughtful homemade gift.

    Though I don’t do it nearly often enough, one of my favourite ways to unwind after a long day or week, is to pour a glass of tea or wine (depending how LONG the day was), light some candles, and hop into the bathtub. To make the experience even more special, I toss one of these DIY bath bombs into the water. The dried flower petals, fizzy bubbles, essentials oils, and such a welcomed treat! I was so surprised how easy this DIY was, and knew I had to share with you all asap – especially as we get closer to Mother’s Day!

    The steps are pretty simple and can actually be a relaxing and creative activity in itself! Plus, you can customize them with the scents you like best by simply flexing the essential oils!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    What is in a Bath Bomb?

    There are a few ways to make bath bombs. For these DIY Bath Bombs, we used:

    • Corn starch
    • Citric Acid
    • Epsom salt
    • Baking Soda
    • Coconut oil
    • Water
    • Essential Oils (optional)
    • Silicon mold or small muffin tin
    • Assorted dried flower petals

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    How to Dry Flower Petals for Bath Bombs

    For these Bath Bombs, I simply air dried my assorted flowers a couple days before I kew I wanted to make these! I removed petals carefully and discarded the leaves and stems. Then, I transferred them to a baking sheet lined with a dry towel. I let them sit like this, air drying for a couple days in a cooler/shadier spot in my home. Then, when ready to make these bath bombs, I made sure to push the dried flower petals into the molds FIRST, so that they are visible on the top of the bath bomb when they are removed from the mold.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    How to Make a Bath Bomb

    Making these felt like a fun science experiment! The trick is to mix all the dry ingredients and wet ingredients separately. Then VERY slowly add the wet to dry ingredients, so that the citric acid doesn’t react (that is how you get the fizzing affect!). Then all you do is mix to combine (it feels like wet sand), and fill in your molds. You can find bath bomb molds that are specifically designed for this purpose in stores or online. What was most accessible to us (and most of you) was using a small silicon ice cube tray and a muffin tin. Both worked really great!

    DIY Gifts for Mother’s Day

    This makes such a great gift for Mother’s Day! Add the bath bombs to a cute box or glass jar, wrap it with a bow and voilà! We also have some other DIY’s that are right on theme with self care like this Lavender Foot Scrub and Mommy Time Out Jar. And if you aren’t into DIY’s, the new jewelry launch with So Pretty is so stunning, your one-stop-shop if looking for something shiny for mom!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    DIY Bath Bombs

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    DIY Bath Bombs

    The ultimate relaxing DIY project is here! Easily make your very own Bath Bombs with a few ingredients like epson sats, essentials oils and dried flowers. These make a great project for yourself or as a thoughtful homemade gift.

    Servings 10 bath bombs

    Ingredients

    • 1/2 cup corn starch
    • 1/2 cup citric acid
    • 1/2 cup epsom salts
    • 1 cup baking soda
    • 1/4 cup melted coconut oil
    • 1 tablespoon water
    • 5-10 drops essential oils of choice (optional)
    • dried flower petals

    Instructions

    In a medium bowl combine all dry ingredients and combine. In a separate bowl, combine all wet ingredients.

    Slowly add the wet ingredients into the dry. Mix well until combines and the appearance is similar to wet sand.

    Add dried flower petals to the bottom of the mold/muffin tin (if using) then fill with mixture. Fill right to the top and push down firmly to ensure it is compact enough to set.

    Let the molds sit for 24 hours to try and combine. Then, flip molds ups-aide down and gently pop out the bath bombs!

    Store in a a dry place or within an airtight jar! Enjoy in your next bath tub.

    Bath bombs can be expensive to buy but they can be a fun activity and relatively inexpensive to make on your own! This bath bomb recipe for kids is also fun to turn into a bath time surprise activity by hiding little toys inside. Once the bath bomb dissolves you’ll get to see the surprise toy waiting inside!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Table of Contents

    Bath Bomb Recipe for Kids

    These bath bombs are colorful and fun for kids! We love that you can hide little toys and trinkets inside to make bath time extra special! Use shopkins, small dinosaurs or other little toys that will fit inside the molds.

    The best part about making your own bath bombs is you know where all of the ingredients come from. We like to select brands or products that state where the source of the ingredient comes from and we can support companies that ethically source ingredients.

    Bath bombs can also be expensive to purchase – so you can save money making your own!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Safety with Bath Bombs

    We love doing bath bombs in our house as a fun activity during bath time. We do it sparingly though – as the ingredients in bath bombs can irritate skin if used too frequently. I would recommend to not use a bath bomb more than once a week with kids.

    Since bath bombs contain baking soda and citric acid, we need to take some precaution when making them. I have included all of the safety tips you will find on any bath bomb making kit so please read and keep these in mind when making your own.

    A couple of notes of safety:

    • Adults only should make the bath bombs. Kids can help with measuring and stirring under adult supervision.
    • Keep away from eyes and mouth. Wash hands thoroughly after handling.
    • Do not use small toys with children under 3. This activity is recommended for ages 6+.
    • Do not put the bath bombs near your mouth or nose. We always wash hair and body first before placing the bath bomb in the water. Do not allow kids to put their head under the water once the bath bomb is in the bath. Do not allow kids to drink the bath water.
    • Rinse eyes immediately with water for several minutes if product comes in contact with them.
    • Do not use if you have any broken or irritated skin.
    • Do not put any small figurines in the drain of your tub. Take toys out before draining the tub.
    • Rinse the tub and body after use.
    • Bath bombs are not intended for cleansing the body. Avoid holding the bath bomb once it is placed in the water.
    • In case of adverse reaction, stop using and contact a physician.
    • Baking soda may cause an allergic reaction.
    • Do not use bath bombs every day. Use sparingly in a month and not more than once per week.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    You can customize these DIY bath bombs to be any color you’d like! You can include any kind of small toy inside or just make them plain too.

    Supplies Needed to Make Bath Bombs

    See the full recipe below for exact quantities needed for each recipe.

    Corn Starch (also called Cornflour)

    Fine Sea Salt (can be excluded, see tips below)

    Water

    Small toys – like shopkins or dinosaurs (optional)

    Salt Options for Bath Bombs

    Salt is not required to make a bath bomb. We have included fine sea salt as a replacement for Epsom salt you will see in a lot of recipes. If you would like to use Epsom salt instead, speak to your doctor before using for children.

    Do not replace the fine sea salt with regular table salt. If you do not have fine sea salt, you can exclude this from the recipe.

    Do the Bath Bombs Stain the Tub?

    Only use a few drops of food coloring and you shouldn’t have a problem with staining in your tub. Because your bath is filled with water the food coloring becomes very diluted when dissolved in the tub. Do test a small amount first. And if any coloring remains after the bath, use a paper towel to wipe it off right away, then rinse with water. Use only 1 bath bomb per bath.

    You can also use bath soap coloring dye which is water soluble and states it is stain free.

    Storage Tips for Bath Bombs

    Store inside a sealed plastic bag in a cool, dry place. If left out exposed to air, it will gradually lose some fizzing effect. Also avoid touching the bath bombs with wet hands.

    This week, our Jill of All Trades, Jill Washburn, shows us how to make luxurious bath bombs ourselves, and it’s way easier than you think!

    Below, you will find the basic bath bomb recipe that Jill used. It allows for lots of variations. Jill says that you can choose whatever essential oil combinations that work for you. While the recipe calls for 8-10 drops of oil, Jill found that wasn’t enough fragrance for her liking, so she added considerably more on her next batch. All of that, though, is up to you.

    You can also customize them, says Jill, by adding color to the mix. Basic liquid food colors will work really well. Paste food colors will also work, although they may make the mix appear a little blotchier, a look that Jill actually liked.

    Last, you can add herbs or dried flower petals to your mix. Just make sure, Jill cautions, that they are totally dried before you add them in. Otherwise, they will start to set off the fizzing effect and your bath bombs won’t want to hold together as they dry.

    Jill of All Trades: Make Your Own Bath Bombs

    This time our Jill of All Trades shows us how to make bath bombs.

    While you can use a bath bomb mold to make these, Jill says that you can use nearly any silicone kitchen/baking mold, or even a cupcake tin, to form your bath bombs. That said, Jill decided to just hand form hers, packing the mixture into round balls like a snowball or a large meatball. Once they were formed, she left them on parchment paper to dry for 24 hours.

    Store your bath bombs in a dry place, says Jill, away from moisture and humidity.

    Jill says that the bath bombs that she made were way fizzier and lasted much longer than most of the ones that she’s bought in stores.

    Below, you’ll also find the recipe for a therapeutic bath bomb. That one is good for achy muscles or easing cold or flu symptoms.

    Enjoy! You deserve a relaxing bath!

    PROJECT RATING: Easy

    To watch Jill take you through the process, just click on the video player above.

    BASIC BATH BOMB RECIPE

    This recipe makes 4 large, 6 medium or 8 small bath bombs.

    • 1 cup citric acid
    • 1 cup baking soda
    • ½ cup cornstarch
    • ½ cup Fractionated Coconut Oil
    • 8-10 drops favorite essential oil or blend
    • Silicone mold
    • In a bowl, place citric acid, baking soda, cornstarch, and oil.
    • Add 8-10 drops of the essential oil or essential oil blend of your choice.
    • Mix well with a spoon until a soft dough is formed. It should have the consistency of damp sand. If the mixture is too wet, try adding a little more baking soda and cornstarch until the consistency is correct.
    • At this point, you may add food coloring, dried herbs, or flower petals to the mixture.
    • Place mixture in silicone molds. Let sit 24 hours before removing from the mold.
    • To use, drop-in tub or shower and allow to dissolve.

    THERAPEUTIC BATH BOMB RECIPE

    • 1/2 cup Epsom salts
    • 2 Tbsp. organic, raw virgin coconut oil
    • 1 cup baking soda
    • 1/2 cup citric acid – can be found at your local grocery store in the canning section
    • 4 drops of Eucalyptus essential oil
    • 2 drops of Peppermint essential oil

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    • FACEBOOK
    • PINTEREST
    • EMAILSHARE

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    While a glass of wine, a good book, or a plethora of bubbles can be the perfect addition to a hot bath, a more colorful and exciting option can be a bath bomb. Often molded into a small sphere that fits in the palm of your hand (although you can find them in fun shapes, too!), a bath bomb will instantly begin to fizz and disintegrate once it hits the water, unleashing a pleasant aroma and filling your bath with a pop of color.

    Bath bombs can add a little zest and fun to a soothing self-care ritual, but they typically cost $5-$15 each, which can add up quickly. Fortunately, you don’t have to spend your hard-earned money on this delightful indulgence if you choose to make your own bath bombs at home. The process is pretty simple and can be a relaxing and creative activity, as you can customize them with the scents and colors you like best. With this basic recipe, creating bath bombs should be pretty easy, and you’ll be sudsing in a colorful, scented bath in no time.

    Ready to take your soak to the next level? Keep reading for a simple, customizable, affordable DIY bath bomb recipe.

    Transform a simple bath into an experience that will nourish your mind and body.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    There’s something so relaxing about taking a nice soak after a long week. If you’re like us and are looking for a way to elevate your tub time, finding the best bath bombs will certainly do the trick.

    These effervescent orbs force you to slow down, decompress, and finally take a meditative moment to be completely still. There’s nothing more satisfying than slipping the little block or sphere out of its package and into the tub, watching the fizzing (usual) combination of citric acid, baking soda, essential oils, and moisturizers colorfully feather out into the water.

    We all deserve to emerge from a bath smooth and relaxed, so if you’re worried about the cost, here are a few considerations: Think of them as a special treat rather than an everyday item, find one that’s comfortably in your price range, and remember you can always split the bomb in half (and add more if half doesn’t do the trick). We’re sharing an array of bombs, too. From derm-approved brands like Dr. Teal’s to cult-favorite brands like LUSH and OUIA, there’s something here for everyone. There’s even a gift set that has over 36,000 positive reviews on Amazon!

    They are the perfect, palm-sized capsules of luxury to detox with, and we found the best bath bomb gift sets, year-round options, and even soothing bombs for the kids to get in on the fun, too. Explore these tub toppers and treat yourself (or your loved ones—they make great stocking stuffers) to some relaxing, bubbling, me time.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    What began as a little online store has since flourished into one of the most exciting new bath bomb companies on the market, with this gift set ranking #1 on Amazon. Their bombs are made with 100% natural ingredients, are cruelty-free and handmade. What sets this gift box apart from others is that it has something for everyone. At $2.23 a bomb, you get a great deal on an expansive range of scents, each of which will soften the bathwater and your skin.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Despite its name, no expletives will be released when the fizzer is dropped into your tub. The brand’s simple formula is free of any unnecessary harsh ingredients (which makes it good for sensitive skin) and no staining of your tub, too. A hidden message is revealed once the fizzer dissolves—how fun!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Soak your skin in almond, jojoba, and sunflower oils for the ultimate moisturizing experience. Dr. Teal’s offers another well-priced “made in the USA” option for those looking to use bath bombs on a more regular basis ($1.20 a bomb). Lavender is shown to improve sleep and mental relaxation, and the additional Epsom salts help to ease muscle soreness. With this magical combination of scents and moisturizers, you can decompress after an entire week of work for next to nothing.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    As the bathwater breaks down this pretty pink fizzer, a small soap rose shakes loose and floats around your tub. The XXX name can be attributed to the slightly more sophisticated smell of three aphrodisiacs: jasmine, ylang-ylang, and clary sage oils. Soy flour will soften your whole body, whether or not you’re in a bath for two. LUSH is a Canadian company that’s been around for years and prides itself on cruelty-free products and zero-waste packaging so that you can feel good about your purchase.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Frida Baby may have a baby on the cover (and in the name), but honestly, these bombs could be for anyone with a stuffy nose. The three-pack is great to keep around the house for sick day comfort, and parents swear by it, as one Amazon reviewer wrote, “I will never not have these on hand again!” The eucalyptus and lavender essential oils create a vapor that will clear sinuses and calm the body. Plus, the smell is subtle enough for the most finicky child.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    We love this bomb for the perfect dual-action power of lavender and full-spectrum CBD. With fewer ingredients than some other bombs, it requires less tub cleanup and is easy to split in half for two uses. Even a 20-minute soak will leave you feeling less stressed and ease joint or muscle pain. If you want to take your at-home spa experience even further, check out their complete Decompression Set, which includes the lavender bomb and has over a week’s worth of relaxation goodies.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Snooze Bomb smells as pretty as it looks and can even make night owls a bit drowsy. Sink into violet waters as the smooth and sensuous scent of finely ground hibiscus fills your bathroom. The mix of bergamot, jojoba, and patchouli oils relaxes your mind, while salts and cocoa butter soften your skin. The subtle scents of the oils remain on your body for hours after use and continue to work their calming magic after you’ve tucked into bed.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    If you’re trying to get a bit

    with your bathing experience, you definitely want to check out these Chill Pills. Ouai has a cult following with their high-quality hair products, so the popularity of these little pills (yes, they are actually pill-shaped) is no surprise. “The smell is absolutely intoxicating,” says one reviewer of the relaxing jasmine and rose scents. These pills are packed with jojoba, safflower, and hemp seed oils to keep skin silky and hydrated. Pro tip since these are on the pricier side–the pill divot conveniently snaps cleanly in half to help you double your purchase.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    These little guys are slightly different from most of our other choices, hence bath “drop” rather than “bomb.” Unlike most other products, these drops don’t contain citric acid or sodium bicarbonate and therefore don’t fizz in the same way. Instead, a red seaweed-based bead containing a plethora of all-natural oils dissolves in your bathwater. The grape seed, lemon peel, and jojoba oils (to name just a few), along with Fur’s signature Fur Oil, disperse and offer a nourishing spa experience for the most sensitive skin types.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    One of Lush’s overall best-selling items, The Comforter proves that bubble baths are not just for kids. We picked this as our favorite bubble bar because it simply works really well. Think of the kinds of bubbles you’ve seen in movies but can never quite achieve at home: big, billowing, full-bodied bubbles that rise all around you. So, sink into a cloud of skin-softening, sweet-smelling bubbles and steam off a long day.

    Published by N-essentials Team on 27th Nov 2017

    Bath bombs offer a truly delightful experience with their enticing fragrance and colourful fizz. With their refreshing properties, they make the perfect balls of joy for a spa-like experience at home. However, are the high price tags keeping you away from enjoying a luxurious, fizzy bath with bath bombs?

    Well, we have a skin-friendly alternative for you!

    Bath bombs are not only expensive but may also contain artificial ingredients like dyes and perfumes. As such, you really need to be careful while choosing one for yourself. However, our homemade bath bombs are easy to make and allow you to pamper your body with the goodness of pure and natural ingredients in a bubbling bath. Moreover, you can customise the fragrance and colour based on your preference. Our simple homemade recipe gives you the opportunity to enjoy a one-of-a-kind bathing experience. And they also make a gorgeous gift!

    Eager to have an amazing experience with bath bombs?

    The fact that our bath bomb recipe includes only natural ingredients makes it a safe and interesting DIY project to take up with kids too. With the versatile ingredients, children get the opportunity to explore with colours and fragrances.

    Read on to make bath bombs in a few easy steps.

    Listed below are the ingredients that you will need to make your homemade bath bombs.

    Baking soda – The primary ingredient in this recipe is baking soda. It complements the acidic citric acid and the fizzy reaction.

    Citric Acid – This is a necessary ingredient and is required for the fizzing reaction that makes your bathing experience a fabulous one.

    Cornstarch – Arrowroot or cornstarch is essential and offers a silky smooth bathing experience. You can use the organic version of cornstarch too. Arrowroot is a good alternative but cornstarch makes better bath bombs.

    Oil, salt, liquid – You have a lot of options while picking up these ingredients. For the oil, you can either choose simple yet quality oils like coconut, olive, argan or apricot oil. For the salt, you can either use normal salt or elevate your experience with Epsom salt. This is entirely based on your preference. The same goes to choosing a suitable liquid as normal water such as distilled water can be conveniently used but if you are eager to take your experience up a notch, you can opt for organic witch hazel.

    Fragrance – There are endless options to explore. You can pick from your favourite essential oils collection , and fragrance oils. You can even include dried herbs! Based on your need, you can also go for a fragrance-free bath bomb.

    Colours – If you are eager to make it a colourful experience, you can add natural pigments too to add colours to your bath bombs. Our store comprises a multitude of colourants needed for this particular application. Again, it is your preference that only matters when making your own products. So, if you are fond of vibrant colours, you can use mica pigments that are naturally strong in colour. Alternatively, you can also add a sense of class and elegance to your bath bombs. Do this by using mica pearlescent pigments such as glitter gold, flash bronze, and sparkle pearl. Furthermore, only use colourants that are approved to use for cosmetic use. Food colouring materials are highly discouraged for use as colours for bath bombs.

    Other products – You can easily use a cup to measure the ingredients. However, for a more accurate measurement, you can use a digital scale. It ensures that you get the measurements precisely.

    Moulds – For simple bath bombs, you can use your hands to form shapes. However, if you wish to give away bath bombs as gifts, you can use metal moulds to get interesting shapes. Cupcake tins also make a good option.

    Ingredients:

    • Baking soda (8 ounces)
    • Citric Acid (½ cup)
    • Sea salt or Epsom salt (4 ounces)
    • Corn starch (4 ounces)
    • Oil- two tablespoon
    • Witch Hazel (2 teaspoon)
    • Vanilla extract (1 teaspoon)
    • Essential oils-30-40 drops or dried herbs

    Directions to make the bath bombs:

    1. Add the baking soda, citric acid, salt and cornstarch in a bowl and mix well.

    2. In a separate bowl, add the witch hazel, oil and vanilla extract. Stir the ingredients and add essentials oils based on your preference.

    3. Pour the liquid ingredients to the dry ingredients in drops. Combine well and add the dried herbs if you wish to use them.

    4. Make sure that the consistency of this mixture holds together and does not fall apart. Add witch hazel if required to achieve the desired consistency.

    A spray bottle can be used to make sure that the liquid is added evenly.

    5. The mixture should then be made into moulds or placed in a greased container. Make sure to press firmly and allow it to harden for at least 24 to 48 hours. There will be some amount of expansion and a metal mold may be used to make firmer and stronger bath bombs.

    6. After it is dry, it should be placed in a container and used within two weeks.

    Indeed, bath bombs offer an enriching experience and make the ideal remedy to enliven your mood. They are easy to make and give you the opportunity to immerse yourself in a pampering fizzy bath.

    Try out our easy-to-prepare bath bomb recipe today to get these colourful and delightful chunks and watch them explode in your bathtub into a colourful fizz.

    Eager to try our bath bomb recipe?

    If you are looking for pure and natural ingredients to make bath bombs at home, check out our online store.

    “These DIY Bath Bombs allow you to have a spa experience in your home anytime!”

    Bath Bombs can be very expensive in the store so why buy them when you can make your own for so cheap?

    You probably already have most of the ingredients at your home. Including a ton of essential oils, right? These bath bombs make the perfect gift for someone who is hard to shop for. Everyone loves a homemade gift and everyone loves a spa day. You can put these in cellophane gift bags and tie a pretty ribbon around the top with a cute tag. Make a few different batches so you have a variety to choose from then you can figure out which essential oils you like the best.

    Let’s get started! Don’t forget to pin the infographic below so you can keep this recipe forever and share it with your friends.

    DIY Bath Bombs made with Essential Oils

    What you’ll need:

    -1 cup of baking soda
    -3/4 cup of citric acid
    -3/4 cup of Epsom salts
    -4 tablespoons of fractionated coconut oil
    -Water in a spray bottle
    -10-12 drops of essential oil of your choice
    -3-4 drops food coloring of choice (optional)
    -Bath bomb molds

    Directions:

    1. Add Epsom salts, baking soda, and citric acid to a medium bowl and use a whisk or fork to blend well.

    2. In a separate small bowl, combine coconut oil and the essential oil of your choice.

    3. Add the coconut oil and essential oil mixture slowly to the dry ingredients using a spoon to mix as you go. Be sure to add the wet ingredients slowly so you don’t activate the “bomb” prematurely.

    4. If the mixture seems too dry, use the spray bottle, one squirt at a time until the mixture lets you press it together and it doesn’t fall apart. The mixture should resemble wet sand.

    5. Fill both sides of the mold and press together firmly. Be sure that both sides of the mold are closed. If they don’t close tightly, remove some of the mixture.

    6. Remove bath bomb from the mold and leave it out overnight to dry on a clean, dry towel.

    Author by Ann Kollegger on August 28, 2020 Updated on April 29, 2022

    • Share
    • Tweet
    • Pin
    • Flipboard
    • Email

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Homemade bath bombs are fun and easy to make! You can add options like dried flowers or herbs, essential oils, and colors to really customize your bath bombs.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Why this project is so fun

    This is a pretty easy project for young kids with some supervision. Spark their imagination by letting them help measure and mix, fill the molds, and decide on colors and fragrance.

    It’s a perfect project for tweens and teens to create on their own, or for adults to make as gifts for the holidays or birthdays!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Basically, you can add in whatever extra flair you’d like to these bath bombs. When they are done, add 1 (or 2 depending on the size of the bath bombs) to a warm bath and sit back and relax, or make a batch to give as gifts. Pair them with some Orange Bath Salts or Peppermint Bath Salts for an extra relaxing gift.

    Supplies You Will Need:

    Note: These ingredients make enough for 3-4 round bath bombs or 12-14 smaller squares.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Get full list of supplies and directions in the printable version at the end of this post.

    Craft Information

    • Age level: 5 and up
    • Mess factor: medium
    • Time to complete: 30 minutes plus dry time
    • Cost estimate: 50 cents each depending on size

    How to Make Bath Bombs

    These step by step photos and instructions are here to help you visualize how to make this project. Please scroll down to simply print out the instructions!

    1. Combine the baking soda, citric acid, Epsom salt, and cornstarch together in a medium-size bowl. Use a whisk or fork to stir together and remove any lumps. If adding dried flowers or herbs, add them in this step.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    1. In a small glass jar or bowl, stir together melted coconut oil and water.
    2. If coloring your bath bombs, add 1-2 drops of soap coloring to the wet ingredients and stir.
    3. If adding essential oils, add 8-15 drops during this step.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    1. Slowly (and I mean slowly!) pour the wet mixture in with the dry mixture, whisking as you go. If you see the mixture fizz or foam, you may be adding the liquid too quickly. Just slow down adding the wet mixture.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    1. Once the wet ingredients are combined with the dry, take a small amount in your hand and squeeze it together. It should stick together in maybe 1-2 pieces. If it’s still too powdery to hold together, just slowly add a tiny bit more water and try squeezing it again.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Molding With 2-Sided Molds

    Tightly pack each half of your two-sided mold with the mixture until it’s just overflowing a little. Press the mold pieces together, then gently remove one side of the mold. Place the bath bomb on a tray and allow to dry out before removing the other side (about an hour). The key here is be gentle in the un-molding process!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Molding with Silicone Ice Cube Tray

    Tightly pack the bomb mixture into the silicone ice cube tray slots, smooth and flatten the top. Let set for about 10 minutes and then carefully turn the tray over and un-mold the bath bombs onto a baking sheet with a gentle tap to the top of each shape. As mentioned above, the key is to be gentle in the un-molding process!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Once your bath bombs are un-molded and on a baking sheet, they should dry at least 8 hours or overnight.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Once the bath bombs are totally dry, store in a glass jar. These make great gifts!

    Craft Tips

    • For alternate bath bomb molds, you can use plastic fillable Easter eggs, a silicone ice cube tray, or take a look around your recycling bin! You want something that is a little flexible. Do not use plastic ice cube trays, as the bombs may break apart when removing.
    • To make a bath bomb with 2 different colored sides: after step 2, split the wet and dry ingredients in half so you have 2 evenly measured bowls of dry and 2 evenly measured jars of wet ingredients. Add 1-2 drops of 1 color to 1 wet mixture and 1-2 drops of a different color to the 2nd wet mixture. Following step 4-5 below and then Fill 1 side of 2 piece mold with one color, and the other side gets the filled with 2nd color and then follow step 6 forward.
    • In case a bath bomb cracks while removing it from a mold, go back to step 6 and start the molding process again. If needed, add a tiny bit of water to remix ingredients.
    • If your Epsom salts already have a fragrance, you can skip adding the essential oils.
    • If you are making as gifts, keep in mind that people may be sensitive or allergic to different ingredients.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    More DIY Gift Ideas

    • Lavender Sugar Scrub
    • Orange Bath Salts
    • Peppermint Bath Salts
    • DIY Dried Lavender Candles
    • Decorative Confetti Heart Soaps
    • Snowman Soaps
    • How To Make Herbal Sachets
    • How to Make Lavender Soap
    • Lavender Bath Bombs

    I love to create and share my projects with you! I know it’s hard to remember to come back and search, so I’ve made it easy for you with my weekly newsletter! You can subscribe for free and I’ll send you fun crafts and delicious recipes every week right to your email.

    When you’ve had a long, hard day of work, staying at home with the kids or even just existing, there’s nothing quite like a good turn in the bathtub—except, of course, a good turn in the bathtub with a great bath bomb. These handy little spheres (or cubes!) can turn an otherwise boring bath into an ultra-luxurious soak, enveloping you in calming essential oils, soothing salts and nourishing moisturizers—if you know which ones to look for. We’ve taken care to ferret out 10 of the best bath bombs on the market to help you really and truly unwind, plus five that your little ones will enjoy, too.

    What Do Bath Bombs Do?

    Bath bombs dissolve in the tub to create a multi-sensory experience full of color, fragrance, fizz and fun (not to mention leave your skin feeling soft and moisturized). More than that, however, a 2018 study published in the Evidence-Based Complementary and Alternative Medicine journal found that bathing was more beneficial for mental health than routine showering, offering marked improvement in its subjects’ scores for stress, fatigue and depression. Pair that with a few of the common ingredients found in many bath bombs, such as lavender, which has been shown to decrease blood pressure, heart rate and temperature, and epsom salt, which studies say may boost your mood and ease your back pain, and you’ve got an unbeatable recipe for relaxation.

    What to Look for in a Bath Bomb

    Ingredients: It’s a good idea to check the ingredient list of any bath bomb before you buy it—especially if you happen to have sensitive skin. That’s because the wrong bomb may cause adversary reactions, or even affect a woman’s vaginal pH balance, leading to nasty irritations or infections—and who wants to deal with that “down there?” Everything from essential oils and fragrances to dyes can cause issues, so it’s best to test your bath bomb on your skin before fully committing to it. To do so, rub it against the crook of your elbow, then wait 48 hours. If it causes a skin reaction, it’s best to avoid it. A few specific things to look out for can also be found below.

    Avoid

    • Glitter: Pretty though it may be, experts recommend avoiding glitter at all costs, as it may be abrasive to your sensitive areas, and the scratches it can cause may lead to a secondary infection—yikes!

  • Talcum powder: According to the American Cancer Society, while results have been mixed, talcum powder, or talc, has been shown in some studies to have reported a slightly increased risk of ovarian cancer should the powder come in contact with your ovaries.
  • Use with caution

    • Strong fragrances: While scent preference is personal, with different scents serving different purposes (fragrances like lavender, rose and jasmine, for instance can help you calm down and relax, whereas bergamot and peppermint can be great for energy), it’s also one of the main culprits behind skin irritation, so choose one that works for you.

    Look for

    • Natural, organic ingredients: Look for bath bombs with wholesome, organic ingredients, or soothing ones, like oatmeal or Epsom salts, which may be beneficial for achy or sore muscles.

  • Moisturizing additions: Some bath bombs contain moisturizers, like shea or cocoa butter, that can help combat dry skin.
  • Bubbles: Most bath bombs will fizz up the water, but if it’s a bubble bath you’re after, there are a few that will also bubble up.

    Color: There is always a risk of a bright bath bomb leaving behind some colorful residue, so read reviews or go for a light or colorless option if you don’t want to take any risks.

    How to Use Bath Bombs

    Bath bombs are designed to dissolve and work their magic (e.g. release their colors, scents and other goodies).when dropped into a full bathtub of warm water Since bath bombs can cause a number of problems for your skin, however, not to mention wreak havoc on your pipes, according to Terry’s Plumbing in Pennsylvania, there are a few precautions to follow when using them.

      Try them out first: As we mentioned above, many ingredients found in your bath bombs can cause skin irritation (or worse), so it’s best to do a patch test first. If you have no problems, you’re probably safe to try them out in your bath.

  • Clean out your drain: Terry’s Plumbing recommends doing a quick vinegar rinse (pour vinegar down the drain, leave it for a few minutes, then flush it out with water) post-bomb to keep your pipes free of debris.
  • Everyone loves a bath bomb! The fizzing is super satisfying to watch and the aroma makes your bath just so relaxing. Packed full of Epsom salts, bi-carb soda and oils, these bath bombs not only soothe your muscles but leave your skin feeling silky soft too.

    Bath bombs are incredibly simple to make – perhaps an entertaining holiday activity for the kids? Keep a stash for yourself or package them up as homemade, personalised gifts!

    HOW TO MAKE A BATH BOMB

    Ingredients:

    1 cup Bi-carb Soda
    1/2 cup citric acid
    1/2 cup Organic Arrowroot Powder
    1/2 cup Epsom Salt
    3 tbsp Organic Coconut Oil
    1 tsp Cold-pressed Almond Oil
    Your choice of Essential Oils
    Bath bomb mould (can be bought from your local craft store) or muffin tin

    1 tsp Activated Charcoal Powder
    Vegetable-based food colouring
    Organic dried flowers

    Method:

    1. In a large bowl, combine the dry ingredients and stir well.
    2. Melt the coconut oil in a cup. Add the almond oil and 5 – 10 drops of the essential oil of your choice.
    3. Pour the coconut oil mixture into the dry ingredients. Use your hands to mix it all together, breaking apart chunks as you go.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    4. Pack the mixture into your mould and along the sides of the mould. If using a ball mould, pack each side until overflowing, and squeeze both halves together to close.
    5. Freeze for 20 minutes.
    6. To remove the bath bomb from the mould, warm the sides of the mould with your hands (this will help melt the coconut oil) and squeeze either side until the bomb pops out.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    GOODNESS TIPS

    • You can add dried flower petal or herbs to your bath bombs – just remember to use organic dried flowers to avoid those that might have been grown with pesticides — you don’t want to soak in a bath with that!

    • To add colour to your bath bombs, mix the colour into the melted coconut oil before combining with the dry ingredients.

    • If you want to create two-tone bath bombs, separate your dry mixture into two bowls, adding colour to one and leaving the other plain. Layer the two different mixtures into your moulds to create a two-toned effect.

    Sharing is caring!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Homemade bath bombs are a fun, easy treat that you can enjoy yourself or make as a gift. Using common, budget-friendly ingredients, I’ll show you how to make this DIY Bath Bomb recipe at home. They’re a fun project to make with kids, too!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    As an Amazon affiliate, I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Bath bombs have become a hugely popular product to brighten at-home self care. They make bath time fun for kids and relaxing for adults. This DIY recipe allows you to enjoy the luxury at home without the expensive price tag.

    Most of the ingredients in bath bombs can be found in your kitchen already. If not, they are ingredients that you should stock up on because they can be used in MANY other recipes and applications around the house.

    Dry Ingredients

    Corn Starch : Corn starch is found in the baking aisle.

    Citric Acid : Citric acid is a natural ingredient made from citrus fruit. This, mixed with the baking soda, is what makes the bath bombs fizz.

    Epsom Salt : Epsom salt is the common name for magnesium sulfate. You can find it online or in the pharmacy section of your grocery store. It is wonderful as a soak for sore muscles.

    Baking Soda : Baking soda can be found in the baking section of your grocery store. I prefer to buy it in bulk because it has so many uses around the house from cleaning your garbage disposal, eliminating odors, and even in cleaning laundry. It also helps make the bath bombs nice and fizzy.

    Mica Powder : Mica powder is a natural soap colorant that is safe for use in bath bombs. We do want to use the least amount possible, though, to obtain the color you want in your bath bombs. It is also completely optional in this recipe. Also, feel free to use any color you like.

    Dried Orange Peel : To make dried orange peel, zest three oranges and allow the zest to dry, in a single layer, at room temperature for two days. You can also find it in the spice section of your grocery store.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Wet Ingredients

    Essential Oils : Essential oils are optional , but they add a lovely scent to your bath. Feel free to skip them if you are sensitive to fragrances or make sure that you use an oil that is safe for use on the skin. I have chosen to use Orange essential oil in this recipe, but you can use any oil you wish. Lavender or Tea Tree oil would be wonderful.

    Coconut Oil : Coconut Oil is the liquid that will hold the bath bombs together. Warm it so that it is a liquid. You can also use Almond oil.

    Water : Feel free to use regular tap water.

    Equipment

    • Large Bowl
    • Small Bowl
    • Measure cups and measuring spoons
    • Whisk
    • Rubber Scraper
    • Bath Bomb Molds

    How to Make Bath Bombs

    Measure out all of your ingredients. Choose what color mica powder (optional) you would like to add to your bath bombs, which essential oils you would like, and if you want to add any dried ingredients such as orange peel or dried lavender. If you’re sensitive to fragrances, you can leave out the essential oils and color all together.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Combine corn starch, citric acid, baking soda, epsom salt, and mica powder in a large bowl.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Whisk everything together well to completely combine.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Combine the melted coconut oil, essential oil and water into a small bowl, whisking well to incorporate.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Slowly (and I mean SLOWLY) pour the oil mixture into the dry mixture so it does not fizz too much. Stir and mash together until completely incorporated and the mixture looks like wet sand.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Press the mixture into the two mold halves, generously packing it in there. At this point, you can even include small toys for a fun surprise for kiddos.

    Twist the two halves together to close, and allow to dry for at least 24 hours.

    To remove your bath bombs from the molds, tap on the outside of the mold and twist to separate.

    Store in an airtight container for up to six months. You can also wrap them in plastic wrap. If you want to get really fancy, you can use shrink wrap sleeves to wrap your bath bombs. Heat them with a blow dryer or heat gun to shrink the wrap around your homemade bath bombs.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    When you’re ready to use the bath bomb, simply drop in water and let it fizz and dissolve. It should take about 30 seconds for it to dissolve completely.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    More DIY Projects

    • DIY Dry Shampoo
    • DIY Clove Mouthwash
    • Simple Loofah Soap Recipe
    • DIY Clarifying Shampoo
    • Homemade Lavender Soap

    The citric acid, baking soda and corn starch all react with water to provide the fizzing. Epsom salt provides a soothing soak to relieve muscle pain and even constipation. The essential oils provide a relaxing or invigorating scent depending on what you use, and oil moisturizes your skin. It’s like a full spa treatment in one bath bomb.

    You can absolutely make this recipe without essential oils or colorants. Just prepare the recipe and leave out those ingredients for a allergy-friendly bath bomb.

    The ingredients in this recipe are safe, even for sensitive skin. As with any bath product, you may want to do a patch test to make sure that your child’s skin does not become irritated. This recipe does include Epsom salt which is sometimes used as a soak to relieve constipation, however it is a very small amount in one bath bomb. For kids under 10, I recommend limiting the time in the bath to 20 minutes and do not use bath bombs with kids under 3.

    The baking soda and citric acid will react with the liquid when it is added. It is important to add the liquid mixture very slowly so that it doesn’t fizz all at once. Even if it does bubble and fizz, the liquid measurement in this recipe is so small that you will still have a fizzy bath bomb once dried.

    Once dried, store your bath bombs in an airtight container so that moisture doesn’t get in. Your bath bombs will last for at least 6 months.

    Make surprise bath bombs with toys inside for kids! Inspired by a homemade Lush bath bombs recipe, these relaxing bath bombs for kids use essential oils to help kids calm down before bedtime. They are simple and easy enough to make with your kids. Have fun!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    So how do you make surprise bath bombs with toys inside? I used a homemade Lush bath bombs recipe with just a couple of modifications.

    How to Make Surprise Bath Bombs with Toys Inside

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    • 1 cup baking soda
    • 1/2 cup citric acid – It’s much cheaper to buy citric acid on Amazon than to get it in the canning section of the grocery store! Plus you can buy in bulk and make a lot more of these fun bath bombs with toys inside.
    • 1/2 cup Epsom salts
    • 1/2 cup cornstarch
    • 1 tsp. water
    • 2 tsp. Young Living Essential Oil (use Stress Away, Lavender or Peace and Calming for relaxing bath bombs for kids)
    • 1.5 Tbsp oil (jojoba, olive, grapeseed, etc)
    • Food coloring
    • Small toys that won’t be ruined in water
    • Bath bomb mold – You can get two molds for $6.99 with Amazon Prime or one mold for .86 cents and .22 cents shipping through AliExpress. Allow a month of travel time from China and enjoy the exact same product while cutting out the middleman. That’s what I did since I wasn’t in a rush to make homemade bath bombs. AliExpress can be hit or miss, but the one I used in this post came through for me just fine. (All the junk I buy on AliExpress is a different post for a different day. Stay tuned!)
    1. Now that you have all your supplies gathered, it’s time to get started on these bath bombs for kids.
    2. Mix dry ingredients together in a medium bowl
    3. Mix wet ingredients (except food coloring) in a separate bowl
    4. Whisk wet ingredient mix into dry sloooooowly. I mean 1-2 drops at a time here. Otherwise your DIY essential oil bath bombs will fizz out before their time. When you’re done, the mixture should hold together when you squeeze it, much like damp sand.
    5. Divide mixture into 6 separate bowls for homemade rainbow bath bombs, tinting each one a different color. If you are making them one solid color, you can skip this step.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    6. Start tightly packing one half of your bath bomb mold. I put red, orange, and yellow in one half (in that order) then squished a toy inside. Then I overpacked it a little so it would squish nicely with the other side.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    7. Pack the other half of the mold with purple, blue, and green (in that order.) You’ll need to overpack this side a little bit too.

    8. Place both halves of the mold together and press tightly.

    9. Remove each side of the mold one at a time and you’ve got rocking homemade rainbow bath bombs with toys inside!

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    10. Allow to dry. If you are packing them to give away, allow to dry at least 48 hours before you package them. These are homemade bath bombs kids will want to use right away (especially if they helped you make them!) so it’s also fine to just to toss one in the tub before it’s dry. It will still fizz up nicely and deliver their toy.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    I was really surprised that this homemade Lush bath bombs recipe only yielded three bombs so double or triple the recipe if you need more. I had a tiny bit left over and used my little 45mm mold that I also got on AliExpress to make a mini bath bomb with all the leftovers. I think it looks a like sherbet and may try to do another easy homemade bath bombs post – ice cream style.

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Now you can make homemade bath bomb surprises for gifts or party favors too! Don’t feel like going to the trouble of making your own homemade bath bomb? There are some really cool options from sellers on Etsy.

    If you enjoy making bath bombs with kids, you’ll like soapmaking with kids too

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    When I first started making bath bombs, I got really frustrated! Some of my bath bombs expanded in the molds. Others cracked when I tried to remove them from the molds.

    Bath bombs will expand in the mold when the mixture is too wet. However, if a bath bomb mixture is too dry, the bath bombs will crumble or crack when they are removed from the molds. A bath bomb mixture that is the proper consistency can hold its form when squeezed in a ball shape.

    I’ve walked the road of hard knocks when it comes to learning how to make bath bombs. That’s why I can now tell you some shortcuts for how to make bath bombs the easy way.

    Signs That Your Mixture is Too Wet

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    I remember making volcanoes in the backyard as a child. We would shape a mountain out of clay and then dig a hole down the middle. We’d put some citric acid and backing soda in the hole and then pour in water.

    “Woah, Nelly!” All us neighborhood kids would scream in wild delight as we watched the explosion.

    If your bath bomb mixture is expanding in the mold, it’s likely because the mixture is too wet. When your mixture is too wet, the citric acid and baking soda will react just like a backyard volcano.

    The idea here is that you want your bath bomb to “explode” in the tub water and not before. However, you do need some amount of moisture to hold the bath bomb mixture together. So when adding liquid you need to go very, very slowly to ensure you don’t overdo it.

    Other signs that your bath bomb mixture is too wet are that your bath bombs may not fully harden and they might not fizz as much as you’d hoped.

    Signs That Your Mixture is Too Dry

    How to split and store your bath bombs

    Equally frustrating can be a bath bomb mixture that is too dry. It’s happened to me plenty of times. I thought I’d made the perfect bath bombs. I excitedly yet patiently waited for them to harden, only have them to crumble to bits when I tried to take them out of the molds.

    Or worse, my bath bombs were absolutely gorgeous–except for the giant crack that runs through each of them. Ugh!

    When a bath bomb mixture is too dry, it is almost impossible to get out of the mold. Bits of the bath bomb might even stick to the mold. Super annoying!

    Get Your Bath Bomb Mixture Just Right

    Remember Goldilocks? She comes across three bowls of porridge. One is too hot. One is too cold. And the third is just right. I always think about Goldilocks when I’m whisking my bath bomb ingredients.

    7 Tricks for Perfect DIY Bath Bombs

    To get the mixture just right, you’ve got to be sure it’s not too wet and not too dry. And you’ve got to make sure the chemical reaction doesn’t happen too soon.

    Here are some tricks for getting your mixture just right, so that you can finally experience bath bomb glory:

    1. Use powdered mica instead of liquid dye for the colorant. This makes a huge difference.
    2. Use the witch hazel sparingly, one spritz at a time. Mix well after each spritz to see if the mixture is perfect.
    3. Add the liquids at the very end of the recipe. This gives the wet ingredients less time to react with the dry ingredients before you pack the mixture into the molds.
    4. Do the snowball test with your bath bomb mixture. Make a ball of it just as you would make a snowball. Then drop the ball and be sure the mixture held its shape. If not, it’s still too dry, so you’ll want to add a spritz of witch hazel and test again.
    5. The longer you dry your bath bombs, the better the chance they’ll hold together when you remove them. Place bath bombs in a low-humidity location to dry and don’t peek early. Be patient!
    6. If you find that your mixture is expanding in the mold, wrap a rubber band and around the mold before you leave it to dry.
    7. Once your bath bombs have hardened, gently tap all around the outside of each mold with the back of a metal spoon. This will release the hardened bath bomb from the mold making it easier to remove.

    More Resources for DIY Bath Bombs

    If you struggle with crumbling bath bombs or expanding bath bombs, you may still be a bath bomb beginner. Take pride! We’ve all been there. You can accelerate your path to success by reading up. Read How to Make Bath Bombs for Beginners to learn how to make a perfect starter bath bomb and then 10 Best Essential Oils for Bath Bombs to discover how to add both essential and carrier oils for aromatherapeutic bliss in the tub!

    Shana Burg is a bath enthusiast, content strategist, and award-winning writer. She is the founder of bathtubber.com.

    Recent Posts

    A painful sunburn can cause you a whole ton of stress! Instead of limping off to the pharmacy for the latest wonder lotions and potions to apply to your skin, did you know that you have the best.

    Sconces are the first choice for bathroom lighting. These bathroom lighting fixtures have been popular for years. But, how do you choose your bathroom sconces? While there are so many designs, styles.

    About

    I’ve been choosing baths over showers for decades. Whether you want to purchase a new tub or glam up what you’ve got, I’m here to guide you every step of the way. The Bathtubber works with architectural designers, aromatherapists, and plumbers all dedicated to helping you maximize your ahh!

    LEGAL INFORMATION

    This site is a participant in the Amazon Services LLC Associates Program and ShareASale, affiliate advertising programs designed to provide a means for sites to earn advertising fees. We are compensated for referring traffic and business to Amazon and other companies linked to on this site.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    If you see ice on your indoor or outdoor unit, it is a clear sign that there is something wrong with your AC unit.

    The worst part is if you keep running the AC, you risk damaging the compressor— $1,495+ AC repair (more on that later).

    With that being said, follow these steps to unfreeze your AC unit quickly:

    1- Turn the thermostat from COOL to OFF

    2- Turn the fan setting to ON

    3 -Check your filter and replace it if needed. If the filter isn’t dirty, call a professional before turning the AC back on.

    Note: These instructions will simply help your AC to unthaw but won’t guarantee the prevention of further damage due to falling ice chunks, water on controls, water damage, etc.

    In this article, we will explain the rationale behind each of the steps above. We will also provide help tips that will prevent expensive water damage, or a busted AC unit.

    Your AC is freezing up for a reason, and simply thawing out the unit won’t fix the root problem. If you want to solve the problem at the core, we can help. Just contact us.

    Step 1: Turn the thermostat from COOL to OFF

    With ice being on the AC unit this means the refrigerant, the liquid that cools your home’s air, is much colder than it should be. If that cold refrigerant is sent to the outdoor unit, it could kill your compressor. The compressor should only receive refrigerant in the form of a superheated gas – NOT a cold liquid!

    Here’s the bottom line: Turning the thermostat from COOL to OFF stops your AC from continuously sending cold refrigerant to your outside unit (where your compressor is located).

    During a healthy operation, your compressor should only receive refrigerant in the form of a superheated gas—NOT a cold liquid.

    Do you want more in-depth information about why your AC is freezing up in the first place? Come check out our blog, “Why Is My Air Conditioner Refrigerant Line Covered in Ice?”.

    Step 2: Turn the fan setting to ON

    By turning the fan on it forces your AC’s indoor fan to blow warm air non-stop over your AC’s frozen coils. This will help the ice thaw faster.

    Tip: Do not turn your fan setting to AUTO. This setting only runs the blower motor during a cooling cycle. Furthermore, you just turned the thermostat from COOLING to OFF, so your AC won’t be going through any cooling cycles.

    Your AC blower motor pulls in warm air from inside your home, and blows it over the refrigerant coils that make up the evaporator.

    How long will it take for your AC unit to thaw?

    It can take up to an 1 hour or 24 hours to unfreeze your air conditioner. It all depends on the extent of the ice buildup.

    As you’re waiting for the unit to thaw, you should keep an eye out for:

    An overflowing drain pan. If you can access your indoor AC unit, you may want to put some towels on the floor surrounding the unit. This will help prevent water damage if the melting ice overflows the drain pan and leaks onto the floor.

    A clogged condensate drain. As the ice on your evaporator coil thaws, the water will drip into a condensate drain pan, and then flow outside via a condensate drain line (a white PVC pipe). Sometimes dirt picked up along the way can form a clog in that drain line and cause water to backup and overflow. If you think you have a clog, please follow these steps in this blog to clear the condensate drain line.

    Step 3: Check your air filter and replace it if needed

    The most common culprit behind a frozen AC is a dirty or clogged air filter, so check your air filter as you wait for the unit to thaw out.

    Pro tip: Check your filter as soon as you turn the thermostat to OFF. The longer you wait, the more likely the ice will melt onto your air filter and create a dirty puddle.

    If your air filter looks identical to the filter below, then change it out for a new filter immediately.

    Believe it or not a thin layer of dust or dirt on your air filter can cause major AC problems, so change it out even if the filter isn’t quite as clogged as the one above.

    A dirty air filter suffocates your air conditioner. Also when your air conditioner doesn’t get enough warm air flowing over your evaporator coil, the refrigerant inside will colder and colder. Remember: very cold refrigerant coils + moisture in the air = ice.

    Do you need help finding your air filter? If so check out our blog, “Where Is My Air Conditioner Filter?”.

    You replaced your dirty filter, so now what?

    Since you just replaced a dirty filter you will continue to wait until your AC has completely thawed out. Once your AC is unfrozen go ahead and turn the AC back on and run the air normally, but keep a close eye on the unit for the next couple of days.

    More than likely, the dirty filter was the problem, but to be sure that there isn’t another issue watch for any ice returning on the AC lines. If you notice any ice forming or notice other AC problems, call a professional to inspect and diagnose your unit.

    Step 4: Don’t have a dirty filter? Call a professional right away.

    A dirty air filter isn’t the only problem that can cause a frozen AC, but it’s the only problem that you can solve on your own!

    If you checked your air filter and it is completely clean, you have a more serious AC problem regarding:

    -A refrigerant leak

    -Dirt on the evaporator coil

    -A weak or bad blower motor

    -Stuck or closed expansion valve

    Any other number of AC problems you see ice on your indoor or outdoor unit, it’s a clear sign that something’s wrong with your AC unit.

    Please do not ignore this problem, or you’ll continuously deal with a frozen AC and you will end up paying over $3,000 for a damaged compressor.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Running your air conditioner with a frozen component can seriously damage your system, but that doesn’t mean you always have to wait for a technician to come and defrost your frozen A/C unit.

    Start with a Gentle Approach

    The safest way to defrost your air conditioner is to let nature take care of the ice. Turn off your system from the control panel, then shut off power to the system at the breaker in your home’s electrical panel. Then just wait and let the ice thaw. Don’t try to pry the ice off with your hands or a sharp object. You’ll risk damaging the components or worse, injuring yourself.Depending on how much ice there is, it could take up to 24 hours to melt. Periodically check for standing water that might have pooled under your indoor evaporator coil and mop up any you find. If there’s a lot of ice, put down some towels.

    Try a Little Heat

    If just a little ice has formed on your evaporator coil, you can defrost it faster using a hair dryer turned on to the lowest setting. Hold the hair dryer at least 12 inches from the coil. Too much heat can crack an evaporator coil, so use caution if you decide to go this route.After all the ice has melted, dry the system out by turning it on to “fan only” mode. This circulates air that will dry up any lingering moisture.Before you turn the system on again, though, take steps to correct the problem that caused your frozen A/C unit in the first place. That might mean replacing a dirty air filter, cleaning the evaporator coil or removing debris from the outdoor unit.If your air conditioner keeps freezing even though you’re sure the components are clean, the problem could be due to a more serious issue such as a refrigerant leak or mechanical malfunction. In this case, call a technician.If you could use some help defrosting your frozen A/C unit, contact us at Air Assurance anywhere around Broken Arrow.

    Our goal is to help educate our customers in the Tulsa and Broken Arrow, Oklahoma area about energy and home comfort issues (specific to HVAC systems). For more information about air conditioners and other HVAC topics, call us at 918-217-8273.

    We’re On Call 24/7 to react promptly to your ac, heating, and plumbing emergencies.

    Home » Frequently Asked Questions » How to Unfreeze an Air Conditioner

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Many homeowners in Southern Nevada and Arizona rely on air conditioners to cool their homes in the often-unforgiving summers. But if you see ice buildup on your AC, it’s a sign that your air conditioner has frozen over. AC freezing can occur to both indoor and outdoor units.

    If this goes unresolved for too long, the repair bill can be about as expensive as buying a new unit, with prices ranging from $1,500 to $3,000. You might feel anxious about fixing your AC as soon as possible by following our expert tips or speaking to a specialist for AC maintenance services .

    Thaw Out Your AC

    To thaw the ice out, first, you need to turn the AC’s thermostat off and turn the fan on. Leave the fan on for a few hours to allow the unit to fully defrost. In some cases, it may thaw out after an hour. In other, more extreme cases, you may need to leave the fan on for a full 24 hours.

    After you have done this, turn the AC’s thermostat back to “cool.” If the air coming out is cooler than room temperature, then it has been fixed. If not, you may want to consider calling a professional. Note that if the unit continues to freeze in the future, this may be an indication that something is wrong, and you’ll want someone to check it out.

    Call 888-628-5890 Today or Book Online for Heating and Cooling Service!

    Check the AC’s Air Filter

    If you haven’t cleaned the air filter in a while, a buildup can occur that will cause the unit to stop working as efficiently. It doesn’t take much for a filter to get clogged and this is actually one of the main reasons why an air conditioner freezes up in the first place. A thin layer of dirt is all that is necessary to prevent warm air from flowing through the unit.

    To get to the filter, take the cover off the AC. You’ll want to do this as soon as you adjust the thermostat because the longer you wait, the more thawed water you’ll have to deal with. Clean the filter by running it under water and then waiting until it is fully dry before putting it back inside the unit. You also simply buy a new filter from your local home improvement store.

    Look at the AC’s Condensate Pan

    Check to see if the condensate pan is draining properly. If not, you could end up with leaks that lead to water damage. You should be able to tell very quickly if the pan is draining properly. If there is a puddle on the floor under your air conditioner, then the pan is not draining, water is building up, and you are at risk for some serious water damage issues.

    If your pan is not leaking before you check it, put some towels on the floor under the unit in case water spills out. You may also want to add some specially formulated cleaning tablets to the pan to prevent future build-up and to eliminate any odors.

    Contact Us for HVAC Service in Las Vegas NV

    Inspect the AC’s Condensate Drain

    With all the moving parts of an air conditioner, another reason it may be freezing up may be due to a clogged condensate drain. As you thaw the ice, the water should drip into the condensate pan and then travel outside by way of a condensate drain, represented by a PVC pipe.

    If there’s dirt in the water, this can cause a clog, which then leads to overflow. Overflow leads to water damage, and excess water around the unit leads to freezing.

    Got HVAC or AC Problems? Call 888-628-5890 or Schedule Service Online!

    How to Tell if Your Air Conditioner Is Frozen

    Keeping a frozen air conditioner running could easily damage your compressor, which is extremely expensive and exhausting to repair. A few telltale signs of a frozen AC unit include:

    • Your AC system isn’t reaching the desired thermostat setting
    • The air blasting from the air registers feels warm
    • Your electric bill is higher than usual
    • Water leaking around the AC
    • Hissing or bubbling noise
    • Condensation and moisture around the air handler
    • AC coils are encased in ice
    • Ice is visible outside the AC unit

    To avoid this problem all together, and to not have to frequently inspect your air conditioning unit for signs of being frozen, you’ll want your AC serviced annually.

    How Long It Can Take for Your AC Unit to Defrost

    It’s common for individuals experiencing a frozen AC issue to wonder how long it takes for their unit to thaw. Well, the thawing process could take up to 24 hours depending on the size of your unit, the extent of the ice buildup, and the efficiency of your blower fan. If the freezing on your air conditioner was just starting, it could clear up faster in an hour or two.

    Call an Air Conditioning Repair Specialist at Ambient Edge Now

    Sometimes, to no avail, the problem goes unresolved. If you have cleaned your air conditioner’s filter, and your attempt to thaw the frozen unit out did not work, then it may be time to call the professionals at Ambient Edge . We offer a 100% satisfaction guarantee on all our work. Fill out our online contact form , or call us to get started.

    Here’s a problem you likely never anticipated: Ice on your HVAC in the middle of summer. It’s actually more common than you think!

    When we’re running our AC units more often and at colder temperatures, they’re more likely to freeze up. If you notice something wrong with your AC, especially visible ice crystals, it’s time to take action. We’re here to help you defrost and get back to normal cooling ASAP.

    How will I know if my AC is frozen?

    Other than visible ice on any part of your HVAC unit, the next most obvious sign of a frozen AC unit is a lack of cool air. If you put your hand in front of your supply vents and you sense warm air coming out, you probably have ice somewhere in the system.

    You may also notice a hissing sound coming from the unit. If that’s the case, take steps immediately to prevent further damage. Your wallet will thank you later.

    How to Defrost a Frozen AC Unit

    Your AC will take anywhere from an hour to more than a day to completely defrost. It’s important to catch it early to prevent further damage to your unit—and, of course, so you’re without cool air for the shortest amount of time possible.

    Here’s your step-by-step defrosting guide.

    Step 1: Turn OFF your AC.

    We know, we know: It’s hot. But frozen AC parts are bad news for the most expensive piece of your HVAC unit—the compressor. To avoid lasting damage and a hefty bill, turn your thermostat from COOL to OFF. This will start the defrosting process.

    Step 2: Switch the fan to ON.

    Turning the HVAC fan to ON will force it to blow warm air over any frozen coils—which will speed up the defrost process. Make sure it’s actually set to ON and not to AUTO. Automatic settings cause the fan to cycle—starting and stopping over and over again. You want continuous, non-stop airflow over the frozen areas.

    Step 3: Find the source.

    Now it’s time for some investigative work. What caused your AC to freeze up in the first place? There are a few common culprits:

    Dirty Air Filter

    Clogged-up air filters essentially suffocate your HVAC unit. When warm air is restricted from the coils in your unit, the coils get too cold and eventually ice over. Replace air filters at least once a month to prevent an icy surprise.

    Dirty Evaporator Coils

    If your coils are dirty, the same process occurs. Dirt and grime covering the evaporator coils causes air restriction the same way dust does in your filter.

    Leaking Refrigerant

    If you spot a leak anywhere, that’s probably the cause of your ice problem. Low refrigerant levels cause drops in pressure, allowing moisture in the air to freeze around your HVAC coils.

    Despite what many homeowners may think, refrigerant doesn’t simply get “used up.” It doesn’t decrease over time, and it doesn’t evaporate during AC use. So if you’re low on refrigerant, there’s no doubt you have a leak.

    Note: Refrigerant is a hazardous chemical that should only be handled by licensed pros. Give us a call if you think you have a leak.

    Problem Parts and Other Issues

    A collapsed duct, weak blower, or closed valves might be causing your HVAC to freeze. AC units are also complex machines with a lot of other pieces and parts. Our Columbia HVAC pros can help to diagnose these less obvious problems.

    Step 4: Monitor the situation.

    As your HVAC unit thaws out, you might encounter some collateral damage. Overflowing drain pans and clogged condensation drains are a risk when this much water is coming off your AC. Put down some towels around the unit and watch for additional leaks to prevent water damage.

    Once your HVAC is completely clear of ice and all parts are dry, you can turn your AC back on. Monitor the unit for continued problems over the next several hours to a few days.

    Step 5: Call us!

    If changing the air filter solved your ice problem, you’re in luck! Now it’s time to keep your unit in top shape throughout the summer. Getting regular preventative maintenance and inspections can help catch issues early and prevent your AC (and your wallet) from freezing up.

    Unfortunately replacing the air filter is the only thing you can do yourself. So if that didn’t work, it’s time to call us. All other issues are best diagnosed and treated by our team of Columbia HVAC professionals. We’re happy to help!

    It is not a pleasant feeling when you reach home after a long hot day to relax and find your air conditioning unit blasting out hot air. When the capacity of your air conditioner reduces, this problem may occur. Be sure to check if the air conditioning unit is frozen before troubleshooting it.

    If you find that your unit is frozen, then it could be the reason why you are not experiencing any cool air. You should immediately defrost the air conditioner so that there will be no further damage to the compressor unit of the system. If the compressor is damaged you should call for ac repair in Janesville, WI which will cost you time and money.

    Follow these steps to unfreeze your air conditioning unit yourself.

    • Turn the thermostat off!

    When your air conditioner is frozen, you will find that the refrigerant temperature is lower than usual. If the air conditioning unit is working properly without any problems, then it usually sends hot refrigerant gas to the compressor and not the refrigerant in a liquid state.

    By turning the power off while switching the circuit breaker settings off, you are restricting this flow of liquid to the compressor which will prevent severe damages to the AC unit. If the compressor goes bad, you might even need an ac replacement in Janesville, WI.

    Additionally, it is crucial to turn the power off before you work on the unit because you are dealing with water and electrical components which is never a good combination.

    • Turn on the fan and let the unit thaw

    Now you have to simply turn the fan in your room on and wait for the air conditioner unit to thaw. It usually takes from 12 – 24 hours based on the extent of the buildup, the efficiency of the fan, and the size of your air conditioning unit.

    When you are waiting for the air conditioner to thaw, it is vital to keep an eye on the condensate pan and drain pipe. As the air conditioner thaws, the water that is melted will now be collected in the drain pan and moved through the condensate pan to be discarded outdoors.

    Since this could mean a lot of water moving towards the drainpipe, it may not be able to handle the quantity of water and start overflowing. Have some towels around the pan to prevent the water from spilling in your room.

    However, if the pan still overflows, follow these steps to solve the problem.

    1. Get a wet/dry vacuum and find the main drain line that is outside of your home.
    2. Now connect the vacuum to the drain line securely.
    3. Finally, run the vacuum for 3 minutes to clear the blockages in the pipe.

    With regular ac tune-ups in Janesville, you can prevent the problem before it arises in the first place. To schedule a service, contact us at (608) 362-4090. We provide 24/7 emergency services.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    On a hot sunny afternoon when you want to relax in the cool environment of your home, you realize that your air conditioner won’t work. Why? Because it has frozen. What a bummer. Your only option now is to open the windows at home and pray like crazy that a cool breeze is blowing outside. Nine times out of ten, you won’t be that lucky. The next step would be to call your HVAC company and ask them to send somebody ASAP. The good news is that a frozen AC is not the end of the world. The bad news is that it will still take some time to resolve the problem. You can defrost a frozen AC unit, so take a deep breath and relax. Gather your patience because a frozen AC will take a little long to defrost.

    What Is A Frozen AC Unit?

    Don’t be confused by the term “frozen AC unit”. It does not mean that your air conditioner will become encased in a block of ice. When the flow of air is insufficient, it makes the temperature of the coils drop below freezing. The moisture present in the air then gathers on top of these coils and increases the ice buildup on your air conditioner. This is what is known as a frozen AC.

    What To Do When The AC Freezes

    1. Turn The Thermostat OFF – Ice formation on the air conditioner is an indication of the refrigerant being extremely cold. You need to stop the flow of this excessively cold refrigerant as it can kill your compressor. Why is that so? It is so because the AC compressor can only handle the refrigerant in the form of superheated gas. Normally, the thermostat is on the “COOL” setting. You need to turn it “OFF”. Turning it “OFF” will stop your AC from repeatedly sending cold refrigerant to the outdoor unit.

    2. Switch The Fan To ON Position – Do not make the mistake of turning the AC fan setting to AUTO. This is because in “AUTO” setting the blower motor runs only during a cooling cycle. Since you have turned the thermostat from COOLING to OFF, your air conditioner will not go through any cooling cycles. The fan setting should be ON so that it pulls warm air from inside the home and forces it to blow non-stop over the frozen coils of the AC. This helps the ice thaw faster.

    This two-step process will ensure that your frozen AC thaws or defrosts quickly and adequately. However, if you want to speed up the process a little more by lending a helping hand, you can use a hairdryer on low heat to blow additional warm air. Once the AC is completely free of ice, clean up the water puddles around the unit.

    Frozen AC – How Long Does It Take To Defrost?

    Depending on the extent of ice buildup on your AC, it can take anywhere between an hour to a day to defrost completely. While you are waiting for your AC to defrost, you need to pay attention to these two things –

    1. Drain Pan Overflowing – As the ice melts it may overflow in the drain pan and leak onto the floor causing puddles. Spreading towels on the floor around the AC unit will help keep your floor dry.

    2. Clogged Condensate Drain – When the ice on the evaporator coil thaws, it turns into water. This water drips into a condensate drain pan. From here the water flows outside through a condensate drain line. At times, the water picks up dirt along the way and clogs the drain line. A clogged drain pipe can cause the water to back up and overflow. You need to be on the lookout for such an occurrence and unclog the condensate drain to keep dripping water to a minimum.

    What Causes The AC to Freeze?

    The main reason behind a frozen AC is dirty air filters. In fact, there could be a number of other reasons as well, but this is the only one which you can deal with on your own. If changing the air filter does not solve the problem, you need to call the experts to take care of it.

    When the air filter is dirty, it smothers the air conditioner. As a result, the warm air cannot flow freely over the evaporator coil. In turn, the refrigerant becomes colder than usual, and so the coils also turn excessively cold. When the moisture present in the air comes in contact with the too cold coils, it transforms into ice. Therefore, you need to make sure that the air filters are clean and free of dirt.

    If you have changed the air filter and yet there is no respite, it means that the root of the problem is somewhere else. The most probable reasons could be a faulty blower motor, refrigerant leak, a stuck expansion valve, collapsed duct or something else altogether. These problems need expert handling, and so your best option is to contact your local HVAC company.

    Conclusion

    Now that you have read this post, you are well aware of how to safely defrost a frozen AC unit. When the AC is frozen, remember how long it will take to defrost will depend on the ice that has built up on the coils. You cannot rush the matter. All you can do is to ensure that the root of the problem is tackled. Ignoring your AC problems will not make them go away. In fact, that will just compound the issue. The best course of action is to address each issue as soon as it arises. There are many things that you can do yourself and yet there are many which are out of your scope. You need to be able to identify what you can do and what you can’t. If things seem overwhelming, you can always contact your local HVAC technician.

    Disclosure: We may get commissions for purchases made through links in this post.

    Your air conditioner may need to be defrosted if you are noticing that it is not working as efficiently as it should. This is something that you are able to do yourself, but if you have never done this before, you might be wondering how long the defrosting process will take.

    Air conditioners take between 2 and 24 hours to defrost. The exact amount of time cannot be predicted, but the following factors can give you a better idea of how long it will take:

    • Size of unit
    • The extent of ice buildup
    • Temperature outside

    If you have more questions regarding the time it takes for a central AC to defrost, don’t fret. In this guide, we’ll discuss more about these factors, how they affect the defrosting process, and what other safety considerations there are. Just keep reading!

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Factors That Affect Defrosting Time

    Unit Size

    The size of your unit will affect how long the defrosting process takes. A smaller unit may take 2 hours with minimal ice buildup. You may be able to simply turn your unit off and let it sit for a while. If this is the case, it can be ready to use again in 2-3 hours. If you have a bigger home and a more powerful AC unit, it may take as long as a day to completely thaw.

    Extent of Ice Buildup

    If your unit has a problem that you have not been able to catch right away, you will have more ice buildup in your air conditioning unit. If the buildup is severe, you can expect it to take longer to completely thaw out. However, if you have been lucky enough to catch the issue quickly, you will most likely have less ice buildup. This may result in a quicker defrosting time.

    Outside Temperature

    The temperature outside also affects the defrosting times. If it is hotter outside, the AC unit will defrost quicker. If the day is rainy and cool, it may take longer to defrost. A blow dryer on low heat may work on smaller units to help the process along.

    It is important to maintain your unit and keep an eye on potential problems so they can be taken care of before they get worse. While defrosting your unit is a good way to solve the problem of ice buildup, you may find that you have a more serious issue. You will need the help of a professional if you have ignored a problem that has been going on for a while.

    Common Questions

    If you have never had to defrost your unit before, you may have some questions as you go through the process. We’ve brought you the answers to some common questions that other homeowners have had regarding their AC units.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    What Causes A Central Air Conditioning Unit To Freeze Up?

    Your central air conditioning unit can freeze up for a variety of reasons. Some of the most common causes include:

    Poor Drainage

    When the drain system within the unit is faulty, it causes the water to pool inside. When this occurs, there is a greater chance that you will have ice buildup. It is a good idea to have someone check the unit if you notice this is occurring. While defrosting your unit will temporarily fix this issue, you will want to consult a professional if this keeps happening.

    Dirt And Pet Hair Buildup

    If you do not regularly clean your unit’s fan and air filter, you may have a buildup of pet hair and dirt. This can cause ice buildup and create future problems.

    Restriction Of Airflow

    The return air grille connects to the ductwork inside your home to allow airflow into the air conditioning system. If the return grill is blocked, it can cause the evaporator coil to freeze. The coil is meant to absorb heat from the air. If there is no airflow, it will cause ice buildup.

    Refrigerant Levels

    Your unit should always have the recommended amount of refrigerant. Not enough can cause your unit to blow hot air. Too much refrigerant can cause your unit to run too cold and result in a buildup of ice.

    AC Setting

    The ideal temperature for your AC unit is 78 degrees. This helps to keep your home and loved ones cool while also saving energy. Anything lower has the potential to cause issues with your central AC unit.

    Can You Pour Hot Water Onto A Frozen AC?

    The simple answer is: no! This is a piece of electrical equipment. Pouring water of any temperature onto it can cause shortages and even an electrical fire! Stay safe and do not attempt to do this. If you do not want to attempt to fix your frozen unit yourself, consult the help of a certified technician.

    How Do You Know If The Central Air Conditioner Is Frozen?

    Sometimes you may be able to hear the “crackling” of ice inside of the unit. To be certain, it is recommended to unplug the AC and disconnect the breaker that it is connected to. Look for ice on the outside of it and open the panel, as per instructions, to look inside for ice. If you do see ice, set the unit to “fan” for several hours. After that has occurred, reset it to the desired temperature and see if it blows cold air. If it is back to normal, the issue was freezing water.

    Is A Frozen AC Unit Dangerous?

    A frozen air conditioner can cause issues, for sure. You want to act immediately so that you do not lose the whole unit. First, either unplug it or set it to the “fan” setting. This way, it does not continue to freeze. At this point, you want to look for some of the issues listed above in this article. If you let it run without solving the problem, it will eventually break down completely.

    Summary

    As you have read, there are many factors that determine why a unit has ice buildup and how long it will take to defrost. Keep in mind that frequent ice buildup may indicate a more significant issue. While defrosting your unit is an acceptable temporary solution, it will not fix a more serious problem.

    Be sure to contact a professional if you suspect that your unit requires more skilled maintenance. It is recommended not to try and fix anything yourself. Call the HVAC experts and let them do their work!

    Before you go, be sure to check out these other articles that may be of interest:

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    This summer is extremely hot, but ironically that means it’s the time of year when your air conditioner coils are most likely to freeze. What do you do now?

    Don’t freeze up! Let us talk you through how to thaw everything out without incurring long-term problems for your air conditioner.

    How do I know if the coils are frozen?

    If your air conditioner isn’t running very well, you have no way of knowing without looking to see whether frozen coils are the problem. You’re no psychic! (Although, it would be nice to see every HVAC problem coming …) So, check for these key signs that your evaporator coils are frozen:

    First, go outside and check if you can see any ice around your coolant lines. If you’re wondering, “where are the coolant lines?” … the coolant lines, or refrigerant lines, are the copper tubes covered with rubber insulation that connect your outdoor air conditioning unit to the evaporator coils, which are inside. You should see these tubes at the back of your A/C unit.

    Then, go back inside and go into your closet or your attic – or wherever your air handler is located. (The air handler is the large metal box you’ll be looking at when you change your filter.) The evaporator coils are a triangular-shaped apparatus at the bottom of the air handler.

    What exactly does that mean for you? Well, if you see moisture/condensation at the bottom of the air handler, or anywhere on the outside of the air handler, that’s a major sign of frozen evaporator coils. You might even be able to hear water dripping from inside!

    Now what do I do?

    Whether you’ve confirmed for certain that you have frozen evaporator coils, or you just suspect it, you need to turn off your A/C. Then, your coils should be able to defrost, taking up to 24 hours to thaw out. You can also safely dry out the coils with a hair dryer. However, chances are you’re going to be running into this problem over and over again this summer, if you don’t understand why your evaporator coils are freezing!

    The coils are naturally supposed to be at an almost freezing temperature, so that they can successfully cool your air. But large amounts of ice aren’t supposed to form on them. If this is happening, the reason is usually a problem with your air flow.

    That’s why you should contact us today to investigate why your evaporator coils are freezing up. This way, you’ll be able to get your air conditioner repaired ASAP! We’re happy to serve anyone in the Bloomfield Hills, Michigan area who is experiencing problems with their air conditioner. Call us now at (248) 986-1506 or contact us online .

    Here’s a problem you likely never thought you would experience: Ice on your HVAC in the middle of the summer heat. Don’t worry though, it’s actually much more common than you think! Very cold refrigerant coils + moisture in the air = ice.

    When you’re running your AC unit more often and at colder temperatures, like you do in the middle of summer, they’re more likely to freeze up. If you notice something wrong with your AC, especially visible ice, it’s time to take action. We’re here to help you get the problem solved.

    Other than visible ice on any part of your HVAC unit, the next most obvious sign of a frozen AC unit is a lack of cool air. If you put your hand in front of your supply vents and you sense warm air coming out, you probably have ice somewhere in the system.

    You may also notice a hissing sound coming from the unit. If that’s the case, take steps immediately to prevent further damage. Your wallet will thank you later.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Your air conditioner might take anywhere from an hour to more than a day to completely defrost. It’s important to catch it early to prevent further damage to your unit—and, of course, so you’re without cool air for the shortest amount of time possible.

    Here’s your step-by-step defrosting guide.

    1st Step: Turn Your HVAC Unit Off.

    • Even if it’s sweltering outside, you still need to turn OFF your air conditioner! Running a frozen air conditioner will wear out parts much faster, and could overheat your unit. Worn parts are bad news for the most expensive piece of your HVAC unit—the compressor. To avoid lasting damage and a hefty bill, turn your air conditioner thermostat located inside from COOL to OFF. This will start the defrosting process.

    2nd Step: Switch Your Thermostat Fan to ON.

    • Turning the HVAC fan to ON will force it to blow warm air over any frozen coils—which will speed up the defrost process. Make sure it’s actually set to ON and not to AUTO. Automatic settings cause the fan to cycle—starting and stopping over and over again. You want continuous, non-stop airflow over the frozen areas. There is an option on your indoor thermostat to do this.

    3rd Step: Locate the Source of the Problem.

    Now it’s time for some investigative work. What caused your air conditioner to freeze up in the first place? There are a few common culprits:

    Dirty Air Filter

    • Clogged-up air filters will essentially suffocate your air conditioner unit. When warm air is restricted from the coils in your unit, the coils get too cold and eventually ice over. Replace air filters at least once a month to prevent an icy surprise.

    Dirty Evaporator Coils

    • If your coils are pretty dirty, the same process always occurs. Dirt, dust debris and grime covering the evaporator coils causes massive air restriction the same way dust will in your air filter.

    Leaking Refrigerant

    • If you spot a refrigerant leak anywhere, that’s probably going to be the main cause of your ice problem. Low refrigerant levels cause drops in pressure, allowing moisture in the air to freeze around your HVAC coils.
    • Despite what many homeowners may think, refrigerant doesn’t simply get “used up.” It doesn’t decrease over time, and it doesn’t evaporate during AC use. So if you’re low on refrigerant, there’s absolutely no doubt you have a leak.
    • Note: Refrigerant is an extremely hazardous chemical that should only be handled by licensed HVAC technicians. Give us a call if you think you have a leak.

    Problem Parts and Other Issues

    • A collapsed duct, weak blower, or closed valves might be causing your air conditioner to freeze. Air conditioner units are very complex machines with a lot of other pieces and parts. Our Northwest Arkansas, Fort Smith River Valley & Southwest Missouri HVAC pros can help to diagnose these less obvious problems.

    4th Step: Keep a Close Eye on Your Air Conditioner.

    • As your air conditioner unit thaws completely out, you might run into some additional damage. Drain pans that have overflowed and clogged condensation drains are a large risk when this much water is coming off your air conditioner. Place some towels around the unit and watch for any additional leaks to prevent water damage.

    Once your air conditioner unit is completely clear of all ice and all parts are dry, you can turn your A/C back on. Keep a close eye on the unit for any continued problems over the next several hours to a few days.

    One question we are often asked is: , “Can I pour hot water on frozen air conditioner”? The answer is “Yes”. Pouring hot water will melt the ice faster and in turn, thaw your AC faster. In fact, the water does not need to be extremely hot, even warm water or running water will work to thaw the ice.

    5th Step: Call us at Paschal Air, Plumbing, & Electric!

    • If changing the air filter solved your ice problem, you’re in luck! Now it’s time to keep your unit in top shape throughout the summer. Getting regular preventative maintenance and inspections can help catch issues early and prevent your air conditioner (and your wallet) from freezing up.

    Unfortunately however, replacing the air filter is the only thing you can do yourself. So if that didn’t work, it’s time to call Paschal. All other issues are best diagnosed and treated by our team of Northwest Arkansas, Fort Smith River Valley & Southwest Missouri HVAC professionals. We’re happy to help!

    Table of Contents

    The safest way to defrost your air conditioner is to let nature take care of the ice. Turn off your system from the control panel, then shut off power to the system at the breaker in your home’s electrical panel. Then just wait and let the ice thaw. Don’t try to pry the ice off with your hands or a sharp object.

    How long does it take to thaw a frozen air conditioner?

    How long will it take for your AC unit to thaw? It can take up to an 1 hour or 24 hours to unfreeze your air conditioner.

    What do you do when your air conditioner freezes up?

    The first thing you need to do is turn off the air conditioner and let it defrost. After it’s had sufficient time to thaw (1-3 hours), turn on just the fan for about an hour. Use this time to change your air filter. You can check out our article on how and when to change your AC filters.

    How do you unfreeze an outside AC unit?

    To thaw the ice out, first, you need to turn the AC’s thermostat off and turn the fan on. Leave the fan on for a few hours to allow the unit to fully defrost. In some cases, it may thaw out after an hour. In other, more extreme cases, you may need to leave the fan on for a full 24 hours.

    How do you melt ice in air conditioner?

    To de-ice your air conditioner: Turn off the air conditioner. Turn off power switches. Allow your air conditioner to thaw out. Check your unit to verify the coils have thawed thoroughly. Check to see if there is pooled water or condensation. Turn the power back on at the breaker. Turn the air conditioner back on.

    Can you pour hot water on a frozen AC unit?

    One question we are often asked is: , “Can I pour hot water on frozen air conditioner”? The answer is “Yes”. Pouring hot water will melt the ice faster and in turn, thaw your AC faster. In fact, the water does not need to be extremely hot, even warm water or running water will work to thaw the ice.

    Why is my AC not blowing out cold air?

    Leaking or Low Refrigerant If your central AC is not blowing cold air, the refrigerant may be the problem. The unit could be running low and need additional refrigerant added. The most likely cause of this is a leak. If you suspect a refrigerant leak, you should contact an HVAC professional right away.

    Can your AC freeze in the summer?

    Unfortunately, it’s possible for your air conditioner to become overworked, and actually restrict the airflow to your home. As toasty as it may be outside, your air conditioner can actually become frozen. If this has happened to your air conditioner, don’t panic.

    Can a dirty air filter cause AC to freeze?

    A Clogged Air Filter Can Cause AC Leakage As the refrigerant evaporates within the indoor condenser unit, the evaporator coil absorbs heat from the air blowing over that coil. However, if the air filter is too clogged up, warm air is restricted, which can actually cause the coil to freeze. This is a two-fold problem.

    Can I turn on heat to defrost AC?

    Turning the HVAC fan to ON will force it to blow warm air over any frozen coils—which will speed up the defrost process. Make sure it’s actually set to ON and not to AUTO. Automatic settings cause the fan to cycle—starting and stopping over and over again.

    How do you defrost air conditioner coils?

    Give the Frozen Evaporator Coils Time to Thaw For your first step, turn the air conditioning system off and give the frozen evaporator coils a chance to thaw out. You can do this by shutting the unit off at the circuit breaker. Left to its own devices, it could take up to 24 hours for the coils to thaw completely.

    Will frozen AC fix itself?

    Air conditioners freezing over is actually a common problem. Sometimes a frozen AC requires professional help, but you may be able to repair it yourself depending on the cause of the freeze.

    Can I use a hair dryer to defrost my AC?

    Try a Little Heat If just a little ice has formed on your evaporator coil, you can defrost it faster using a hair dryer turned on to the lowest setting. Hold the hair dryer at least 12 inches from the coil. Too much heat can crack an evaporator coil, so use caution if you decide to go this route.

    Can I spray my AC unit with water while running?

    Hose smaller debris off the unit – It is perfectly okay to spray your air conditioner down with water.

    How do I know if my AC is thawed?

    Is My Air Conditioner Frozen? Your AC system isn’t reaching the desired thermostat setting. The air blasting from the air registers feels warm. Your electric bill is higher than usual. Water leaking around the AC. Hissing or bubbling noise. Condensation and moisture around the air handler. AC coils are encased in ice.

    Why does my outside AC unit have ice on it?

    Ice can form on your air conditioner when the temperature in the condenser evaporator coil falls below freezing. This often happens because of low refrigerant, or a refrigerant leak. It can also happen due to dirty coils, a broken fan, faulty wiring, or clogged air filters.

    Should I turn AC off if not cooling?

    If your ac is still not cooling there is one more thing you need to do. This is very important. TURN IT OFF and call your HVAC service provider to assist you. We always tell our customers to turn off an ac that is not cooling properly.

    Why is my house still hot with AC on?

    Air leaks and poor insulation are a common cause for making your house feel hot, even when the AC is working, as they can allow the air your air conditioner has worked so hard to cool to escape, leaving your house hot. Humidity can interfere with your thermostat’s ability to track temperatures and also traps heat.

    What is a “defrost cycle?”

    In heating mode a heat pump extracts heat from outside air and transfers it to inside your home to warm it. When the ambient temperature outside gets very cold, the moisture in the air freezes on the outdoor unit’s heat exchanger as the fan blows the air across it. A defrost cycle is simply the system recognizing that ice has formed or begun to form and automatically fixes this.

    Why does my unit have to do a defrost cycle?

    Any ice that builds up on the outside heat exchanger reduces the airflow across it, which will affect the efficiency, sometimes reducing it dramatically. In extreme cases this can also cause damage to the outdoor unit.

    How do I tell if my unit is in the defrost cycle?

    Inside you will notice the unit will temporarily stop heating, the indoor fan will stop and depending on the model, there will usually be some form of visual indication on the unit, such as a light or a blinking “run” light. Outside, the outdoor fan will also have stopped and the compressor will be running.

    How often will my system go into defrost mode?

    There are a number of factors that influence how often a unit will go into the defrost mode, including:

    • The outdoor temperature and humidity
    • The amount of heating load the system is trying to deliver
    • The condition of the heat pump

    There are timers built into the computer control of the system that restrict how often defrosting can occur. Generally, a unit must run for a minimum of about 35 minutes after starting up before completing its first defrost. From there, defrosts should occur no more often than approximately every 40 minutes.

    How long does the defrosting take?

    Either of two factors can bring the unit out of a defrost cycle. Firstly, if the sensors on the outdoor section detect the heat exchanger’s temperature has risen enough, the unit will stop defrosting. Secondly, if the sensors do not stop the cycle beforehand, the maximum time a system will be in the defrost cycle is around 10 minutes. It is important not to stop the defrost cycle because the system will run inefficiently and could cause harm to the whole system.

    My unit is defrosting frequently and isn’t delivering enough heat–what could be wrong?

    Regular defrosting, or a lack of heat could be caused by a number of factors. A recently developed problem may be an indication of a fault and require maintenance. You can perform some basic maintenance yourself by cleaning the filters on your indoor unit and making sure the outdoor section is clear of foliage or debris, keeping the heat exchanger unblocked. If this doesn’t remedy the problem, your heat pump may need serviced.

    Is there any way I can help to reduce defrosting?

    There certainly is. Keep your system well maintained by having seasonal maintenance checks performed. Cleaning or changing your filters regularly is an easy, proactive measure you can take to keep your heater running smoothly.

    Have you noticed that your air conditioner isn’t pulling heavy-duty work the way it used to? The air blowing out of the vent isn’t as cold as it used to be? It can be highly frustrating to experience rising temperatures indoors in the middle of the summer, then go outside and discover a frozen air conditioning refrigerant line .

    Does this sound familiar? Read on to learn why an AC unit’s pipes may freeze, why you should take this problem seriously, and when it’s time for AC repair when you have a frozen air conditioner.

    Table of Contents:

    Catch Air Conditioner Problems Early

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Sometimes, we ignore possible HVAC problems until they become too serious to brush aside. Pay attention to red flags in your HVAC system’s function, and you might avoid more complex and costly issues later on.

    With ice buildup in the system, the first troubling sign is usually that the temperature inside your home doesn’t reach the thermostat setting. It may begin gradually and get worse over time.

    Often, you will notice first that the upstairs areas of your home are warmer than they used to be, no matter how you adjust the thermostat .

    If you suspect your air conditioner unit works less efficiently than before, try placing your hand over a supply register . Does the air that comes out feel warm? If so, the reason for the problem might relate to the evaporator.

    Turn off the air conditioner and check the manufacturer’s instruction manual for a diagram that will help you access the evaporator. Look for frozen coils or any parts with a layer of ice on them.

    If you notice any ice , it probably means that the cold liquid refrigerant flowing in your AC system is colder than 32 degrees F (or 0 degrees Celsius), which causes any moisture to freeze.

    Icy buildup accounts for many State College AC repairs. Ice initially appears on the indoor cooling coil. It can then work its way outside and generate frost on the refrigerant line. Ice can then move along the refrigerant line to the outdoor condenser unit where you might discover a frozen AC compressor. Frosty buildup can be caused by many different things, so pinpointing and treating the source of the problem can be challenging.

    Why Does Ice Collect on AC Units?

    Frozen compressors, icy coils, and frosty refrigerant lines are all a product of evaporator coils that are too cold. Nearby moisture in warm air condenses on the cooling coils and freezes. That can make the compressor run hot and burn out. The compressor could also freeze up. If it does, indoor air will feel warmer than it should. The compressor is the most expensive component of your air conditioner. It pays to schedule AC repairs promptly.

    What Can Cause a Frozen Compressor?

    • A clogged air filter that’s limiting the amount of air that’s moving over the cooling coil.
    • Insufficient refrigerant or too much refrigerant that are causing icy buildup while destroying your compressor.
    • A broken blower motor that’s not funneling warm air over the cooling coil.
    • A broken expansion valve that’s not properly controlling how much refrigerant enters the cooling coil.
    • A blocked condensate drain line that’s causing water to collect in one place where it can easily freeze.
    • A dirty evaporator coil that’s blocking the flow of air as it travels across the cooling coil.

    Icy air conditioners need prompt attention. Triangle Heating & Cooling is on the job 24/7 to assist you with emergency service. Call us at (814) 355-7653 for speedy AC repairs.

    You may be surprised that it’s not uncommon for your AC line to freeze in Florida, even in the hot summer. HVAC problems can occur for any number of reasons, but in most cases there are a few common reasons why your AC line is frozen.

    We’ll offer a few quick fixes in this article, but it’s important to get your AC system properly diagnosed by an HVAC technician. A frozen AC line is a symptom of a bigger problem. Left unsolved, it can lead to a more expensive HVAC repair down the road.

    If your AC line is frozen right now and you are looking for the fastest solution, then turn off your AC immediately and set the thermostat to FAN mode. Once you’ve done that, come back and learn some steps you can take to investigate the reason your AC system is freezing in the first place.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Schedule A Diagnosis From
    A Certified HVAC Technician

    Now that you’ve turned off your AC and have the fan running, let’s talk for a second about the cause of the problem.

    What Causes Your Air Unit To Be Frozen

    The main reason why your AC lines are freezing is because your evaporator coils are getting too cold.

    The evaporator coil is filled with refrigerant which cools the air in your HVAC system. When things are working properly the evaporator absorbs the heat from your air and provides a cooling effect.

    However, when there is a problem with your AC system, the heat exchange process can be restricted causing your evaporator coil to absorb less heat and produce ice on the coils. The ice can eventually accumulate on the refrigerant line.

    Some common reasons that cause your AC lines to freeze are:
    • Refrigerant leaks from evaporator coils
    • Accumulation of dirt over the coils
    • Blocked AC vents
    • Clogged air filters
    • Blower fan failure
    • Collapsed air ducts
    • Low refrigerant levels

    Simple and Quick Ways To Eliminate AC Freezing

    If your refrigerant lines are really frozen, it is time to wake up your inner mechanic and do a little troubleshooting yourself. Below are some solutions that you can try to fix your air conditioner.

    While these things can help resolve the issue temporarily, if ice continues to accumulate on your air conditioning system, then you need to contact a professional HVAC company to diagnose the root cause.

    1. Turn Off Your Air Conditioner and Switch To Fan Mode

    This will give your air conditioner time to cool off while having warm air from your home circulating through the system. You can restart your system after waiting for 3-4 hours. If your air conditioner freezes when you turn it back on, then turn it off immediately and contact Pro-Tech for air conditioning service.

    2. Check For A Dirty Air Filter

    Clogged air filters can do a lot of damage to your HVAC system and can cause air conditioner freezing. Check your filter and change it if it appears dirty. A clogged filter reduces airflow which could be the root of the problem.

    3. Check out for any blocked or closed return/supply vent

    Supply vents are the vents that distribute cool air inside your house. Any closed supply vent can restrict the air flowing through your air conditioner and causing problems in the heat exchange process. Therefore, it is better if you open all the vents even in the unused rooms to thaw the frozen coils. Doing the same with the return vents will increase the flow of warm air over evaporator coils.

    Serious Problems That Need Additional Investigation

    If the DIY solutions do not help you out you need to call a professional air conditioning company to service your system. There are likely additional problems that you won’t be able to resolve without the help of a professional.

    Refrigerant leak

    There may be a refrigerant leak present in your AC lines causing pressure levels to drop. Refrigerant is the liquid that extracts heat from your room and blows it out via the outdoor compressor. When the refrigerant levels are low, the pressure inside of your refrigerant lines gets out of whack, causing ice to accumulate. To know if there’s a refrigerant leak present in your air conditioning unit, look out for the following:

    • Warm air coming from the vents
    • Your unit making a hissing or bubbling sound
    • Higher electricity bills due to increased load on the air conditioner

    Blower Motor Not Working Properly

    If the blower motor is not working as it should, it will prevent the fan from drawing enough warm air inside the unit, causing the lines to accumulate ice. Check out for these to know if there’s a problem with the motor.

    • Blower fan spinning slower than usual
    • Having trouble while starting
    • Producing a humming sound
    • Blowing no warm air outside

    Torn or Collapsed Air Duct

    When the air duct is collapsed, the flow of warm air to your evaporator coil is interrupted. As a result, your air conditioner’s refrigerant lines freeze due to decreased temperature.

    If your air conditioner is frozen due to the above-mentioned reasons, your unit needs to be serviced by an expert. No matter what you do, do not allow your system to continue running with ice accumulating on the refrigerant coils. Try the tips in this article and call for help if the problem keeps occurring.

    Home » AC Frozen? Here’s How Long It’ll Take to Defrost

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    • grandeairsolutions
    • July 14, 2021

    Here’s a problem you likely never anticipated: Ice on your HVAC in the middle of summer. It’s actually more common than you think!

    When we’re running our AC units more often and at colder temperatures, they’re more likely to freeze up. If you notice something wrong with your AC, especially visible ice crystals, it’s time to take action. We’re here to help you defrost and get back to normal cooling ASAP.

    How will I know if my AC is frozen?

    Other than visible ice on any part of your HVAC unit, the next most obvious sign of a frozen AC unit is a lack of cool air. If you put your hand in front of your supply vents and you sense warm air coming out, you probably have ice somewhere in the system.

    You may also notice a hissing sound coming from the unit. If that’s the case, take steps immediately to prevent further damage. Your wallet will thank you later.

    How to Defrost a Frozen AC Unit

    Your AC will take anywhere from an hour to more than a day to completely defrost. It’s important to catch it early to prevent further damage to your unit—and, of course, so you’re without cool air for the shortest amount of time possible.

    Here’s your step-by-step defrosting guide:

    Step 1: Turn OFF your AC

    We know, we know: It’s hot. But frozen AC parts are bad news for the most expensive piece of your HVAC unit—the compressor. To avoid lasting damage and a hefty bill, turn your thermostat from COOL to OFF. This will start the defrosting process.

    Step 2: Switch the fan to ON

    Turning the HVAC fan to ON will force it to blow warm air over any frozen coils—which will speed up the defrost process. Make sure it’s actually set to ON and not to AUTO. Automatic settings cause the fan to cycle—starting and stopping over and over again. You want continuous, non-stop airflow over the frozen areas.

    Step 3: Find the source

    Now it’s time for some investigative work. What caused your AC to freeze up in the first place? There are a few common culprits:

    • Dirty Air Filter: Clogged-up air filters essentially suffocate your HVAC unit. When warm air is restricted from the coils in your unit, the coils get too cold and eventually ice over. Replace air filters at least once a month to prevent an icy surprise.
    • Dirty Evaporator Coils: If your coils are dirty, the same process occurs. Dirt and grime covering the evaporator coils cause air restriction the same way dust does in your filter.
    • Leaking Refrigerant: If you spot a leak anywhere, that’s probably the cause of your ice problem. Low refrigerant levels cause drops in pressure, allowing moisture in the air to freeze around your HVAC coils.
      Despite what many homeowners may think, refrigerant doesn’t simply get “used up.” It doesn’t decrease over time, and it doesn’t evaporate during AC use. So if you’re low on refrigerant, there’s no doubt you have a leak.
      Note: Refrigerant is a hazardous chemical that should only be handled by licensed pros. Give us a call if you think you have a leak.
    • Problem Parts and Other Issues: A collapsed duct, weak blower, or closed valves might be causing your HVAC to freeze. AC units are also complex machines with a lot of other pieces and parts. Our Austin HVAC pros can help to diagnose these less obvious problems.

    Step 4: Monitor the situation

    As your HVAC unit thaws out, you might encounter some collateral damage. Overflowing drain pans and clogged condensation drains are a risk when this much water is coming off your AC. Put down some towels around the unit and watch for additional leaks to prevent water damage.

    Once your HVAC is completely clear of ice and all parts are dry, you can turn your AC back on. Monitor the unit for continued problems over the next several hours to a few days.

    Step 5: Call us!

    If changing the air filter solved your ice problem, you’re in luck! Now it’s time to keep your unit in top shape throughout the summer. Getting regular preventative maintenance and inspections can help catch issues early and prevent your AC (and your wallet) from freezing up.

    Unfortunately replacing the air filter is the only thing you can do yourself. So if that didn’t work, it’s time to call us. All other issues are best diagnosed and treated by our team of Austin HVAC professionals. We’re happy to help!

    When the cold winter weather hits, it pays to have an energy-efficient heating system. One of the best options for those who live in mild environments is a heat pump. Instead of burning fuel to create heat, these systems simply transfer heat from the air or ground outside into your home.

    Why Does My Heat Pump Freeze Up?

    To understand why your heat pump freezes up, you first need to know how it runs. Your heat pump utilizes a substance known as refrigerant. This substance moves the heat from the air or ground outside into your home via the condenser coils. To do this, the refrigerant needs to be around 20 degrees colder than the air outside of your home.

    When the air outside starts to dip down around 20 to 40 degrees, it can cause the moisture on the exterior components of your heat pump to freeze. Increases in relative humidity also play a role in how quickly your heat pump freezes up.

    The Defrost Cycle

    All heat pumps are designed to have a defrost cycle. Whenever your system senses that it’s starting to freeze up, it will switch to the defrost cycle. During this cycle, the heat transferred from outside is essentially retransferred to the condenser coils in your outside unit.

    This works to melt the ice that has formed over the condenser coils. This process typically takes around 30 minutes. During this time, you’ll notice steam coming from your outdoor compressor unit. That’s completely normal as the ice has melted off.

    Tips For Defrosting Your Heat Pump

    Every now and then, your heat pump may not switch over to the defrost cycle. Or, it may experience another malfunction that causes unwanted ice buildup on your exterior HVAC unit. You can manually defrost your unit in just a few simple steps.

    To get started, you’ll want to turn off your heat pump at the circuit breaker. Next, use your garden house to spray the heat pump with water to melt the ice. Avoid attempting to chip or hammer the ice away, as you could cause damage to the unit. Once the ice has melted, turn your heat pump back on at the circuit breaker.

    If there is still some ice present on your unit, you’ll want to turn your unit to ‘Fan’ mode. Let it run in this mode until all the ice melts away. It’s always a good idea to assess why your system froze over in the first place. One common culprit that many homeowners find is an ineffective gutter that spills excess water onto the exterior heat pump unit. Fixing the faulty gutter can prevent this problem from happening again.

    Contact Us Today

    If you’re still experiencing problems with your heat pump, it’s best to call in our HVAC professional at Master Mechanical. They can assist in determining the root cause of why your heat pump keeps freezing up and why your defrost cycle isn’t working.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Wondering Why Your AC Coils are Frozen?

    AC coils can freeze any time of year—and that can be a major problem for your home’s heating and cooling system. Whether winter is fast-approaching or spring is finally here, it’s always a good time to check in on your AC. By spotting issues early—and by integrating preventative maintenance into your annual routine—you’ll keep your AC coils in good, working order, while ensuring your indoor spaces are always cool and comfortable.

    What Causes an AC Coil to Freeze?

    AC coils freeze for a variety of reasons—the most common, though, is lack of airflow. Dirty air filters or problems with your duct work can cause weak airflow, which hinders your equipment and its ability to keep coils warm and running properly. Temperatures drop and the AC coils freeze.

    Refrigerant leaks and a wide variety of mechanical issues can also result in frozen coils. The cooling process, for example, creates condensation that can pool on the coils and freeze if it isn’t drained properly. The ice insulates the coil and interrupts the heat transfer process.

    Signs of a Frozen AC Coil

    Regardless of how AC coils freeze, the end result is usually the same: your AC system can’t effectively cool your home. Plus, you’ll probably run up your utility bill desperately trying to achieve a comfortable indoor climate.
    Unsure if you have a frozen coil? Here are some signs to watch for

    AC unit runs but doesn’t emit cold air

    Ice is visible on the indoor or outdoor coils

    Visible extra moisture/condensation around your AC system or home

    Troubleshooting Frozen AC Coils

    1. Ensure the air filter is new and clean. Clogged air filters restrict airflow, causing the equipment cool and freeze.

    2. Turn off the thermostat setting and turn the fan on. This process pushes air over the indoor air coil, potentially unfreezing it. Check back in several hours.

    3. If your heating and cooling system has a heat pump, turn on defrost mode. Your AC unit may also have instructions for de-icing.

    How Do I Fix a Frozen AC Coil?

    If you’ve followed these DIY steps above and still aren’t feeling any cool, it’s time to call Choate’s HVAC. During your free inspection, we’ll assess your system and make a recommendation for repairs. Whether it’s a quick professional coil cleaning to remove dirt and grime, correcting refrigerant leaks, repairing ductwork or eliminating clogs in the drain pan and lines, we’ll get to the bottom of your coil freezing fast, and get your space cool and comfortable.

    If your AC unit isn’t emitting cool air or your system is due for annual maintenance, get in touch today to schedule a consultation. If you haven’t turned on your AC system in a while, it’s a good idea to start it up and test it before the summer heat hits.

    There are few things more disappointing than finally making it home after a long, hot day in the sun and discovering that your AC is on the fritz. One of the most common air conditioning malfunctions is for a unit to freeze up. Don’t let its name fool you, when your AC freezes, you and your home are left in the heat. You can either open up all of your windows and hope for a breeze, or follow these three steps to getting your air conditioner up and running again.

    1. Check your filter

    A dirty filter could be the underlying cause of this sweaty debacle you now find yourself in. Locate your return vent, unscrew the cover and check your filter. If it’s dirty, simply replace it. It’s an easy process and new filters can be found at almost any home improvement store.

    2. Thaw out your AC

    To thaw out your AC, you need to take two easy steps. First, switch your thermostat to OFF and your fan to ON. This will start defrosting your A-Coil, found inside your home. Give your unit a few hours to fully defrost. If you want to escape the heat for those few hours, head to your local movie theater. High temperatures and air-conditioned movie theaters are what gave birth to the summer blockbuster. You can take a page out of your great-great-grandparents’ book and escape the heat at the movies.

    The second step is to locate your air handler and the frozen coil. Due to all of the melting and dripping about to take place, it’s a smart idea to inspect your condensate pan. If it isn’t draining properly, you could wind up with a lot of water damage on your hands. If it is draining properly, you can treat your home to cool and fresh-smelling air by dropping a few condensate pan-cleaning tablets into your pan. This will help in preventing any build up over time and eliminate any odors.

    3. Start ‘er up!

    After allowing your AC reasonable thawing period, switch your thermostat back to COOL. If the air comes out cooler than room temperature, your AC is up and running again.

    It’s always smart, however, to call a local AC company, let them know what happened and have someone come out to inspect your unit. If the system is freezing (especially if it’s happening over and over), that’s usually a sign that something is wrong.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    When your air conditioner is working properly and efficiently, it should not produce any sound louder than a low hum. If you hear a strange, distracting buzz from your AC unit, that’s usually an indication that something is wrong.

    There are several issues that can lead to a buzzing sound from your AC unit. While some are simple, others may be quite serious, requiring an immediate call for professional air conditioning repair services.

    Check out these 5 common reasons why your AC is making a loud buzzing sound:

    1. Condenser fan motor issue

    When your AC unit is turned on, the condenser fan blows air from the outside unit. If the fan blades are not turning but the inside blower is working fine, the compressor motor may emit a loud buzzing noise. Loose parts, a malfunctioning fan, or debris inside the unit can all prevent the blade from turning. In this case, we suggest calling an HVAC professional to trace down the problem.

    2. Loose ac parts

    Your AC system is made up of many moving parts and occasionally, the components can vibrate so much that they come loose. Even tiny parts can sometimes affect the performance and efficiency of your AC, and can also lead to more expensive issues over time. Are you wondering how long you might have before this becomes a complete AC breakdown? A reputable HVAC technician can identify and correct the issue.

    3. Frozen ac unit

    An air conditioner that runs continuously for long periods of time can freeze up, creating a loud buzzing noise. If this happens with your unit, turn off the AC immediately and allow the unit time to thaw. Try again after a few hours of thaw time. Refrigerant leaks may also lead to frozen coils. If this happens again, don’t delay scheduling air conditioning repair services immediately.

    4. Damage to the isolation foot

    The AC compressor is almost always mounted on the base of the AC unit. It sits on a small rubber foot, also called isolation foot. Over time, the rubber on the isolation foot can crack or deteriorate. This results in the compressor being unbalanced–producing a buzzing noise when operating.

    5. Compressor malfunction

    Your air conditioning unit’s compressor works to pressurize and cool the refrigerant. A buzzing sound may indicate that the compressor is not working properly, or that there’s an electrical problem. Contact a reputable HVAC contractor for professional air conditioning repair services to have your system properly diagnosed and fixed.

    Now that temperatures are heating up, we are starting to see an increased number of calls from homeowners with air conditioner freezing as their problem. We usually get the call after the homeowner goes outside to see why their AC is not cooling and discovers that the outside unit of their air conditioner freezing up into a solid block of ice. Regardless of the type of air conditioner, most cases of air conditioner freezing can be attributed to a handful of causes.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Insufficient Air Flow

    If there is not enough air flowing through your air conditioning system, your evaporator coil will eventually freeze up and cause your AC unit to freeze up and stop working. The most common cause of this is a dirty air filter. Dirt can also collect on the evaporator coil itself causing it to become clogged. This typically happens if the AC system was allowed to run without a filter or if the filter used was extremely dirty, too small for the system, or of poor quality. Air flow problems can also be caused by a faulty fan or closed or blocked ducts and vents.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Low Refrigerant

    If you find yourself having to add refrigerant to your air conditioner once or twice a season, it is a safe bet that you have a leak somewhere within the system. Leaks can develop as parts vibrate or rub together over time or when joints or fittings become loose. A leak can cause the pressure within the evaporator coil to drop. Moisture then collects and freezes on the coil. The ice continues to build from the inside to the outside of your air conditioner until it can no longer function.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Air Temperature

    The outdoor air temperature needs to be within a certain range in order for an air conditioner to run effectively. Even an AC that is in perfect working order may not run well if the outside air temperature is too low. When the AC is allowed to run when outside temperature is too cool, the pressure inside the system can drop and cause home AC freezing up. This is a common problem here in Colorado, especially during late spring and early summer when daytime temperatures can be quite warm but the nights are still very cool.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Defective Blower Motor

    Your air conditioner may freeze up if the blower motor is not running along with the rest of the system. One sign that you may have a defective blower motor is that the outside portion of your air conditioner will run, but the indoor portion of the system does not work at all.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Stuck Contactor

    A small part on the outside portion of your air conditioner called a contactor can become stuck. This allows the outside unit to run continuously so that it will eventually freeze up. You can see if this is the problem by turning your air conditioner off at the thermostat. If the outside unit continues to run even when the thermostat is off, you most likely have a contactor that is stuck. The only way to turn off the system in this situation is to shut it off at the circuit breaker.

    Contact Us For AC Repair

    How To Prevent Your AC From Freezing

    Most causes of air conditioner freezes can be prevented with basic maintenance and regular tune-ups. We recommend that homeowners in Loveland, Fort Collins, Longmont and the surrounding areas change the filter in the air conditioner on a regular basis. Depending on the type of filter that you have, filters should be changed every one to three months. You may want to do this more frequently if you have had recent construction in your home or have pets since these can increase the amount of particulates in the air. You should also consider turning off your air conditioner and opening up your windows if the nighttime temperature is forecasted to drop below 60°F.

    At Swan, we also offer local residents an affordable AC tune-up package. Our technicians will clean, inspect, and test more than 20 of your air conditioner’s operating and safety features to ensure that your AC runs reliably and efficiently for years to come.

    What To Do If Your AC Freezes

    If your air conditioner keeps freezing up, you should turn it off immediately. Not only does continuing to run your AC not do any good, but it can cause substantial damage to the system. Other than checking for a dirty air filter, diagnosing and repairing the problem should be left to an HVAC professional. Trying to clean, replace, or repair any of the other components yourself can cause further damage and even void your manufacturer’s warranty.

    Dealing with a frozen AC also requires a certain amount of patience. Just like an iceberg, the ice that you see on the outside of your AC unit is just a part of the problem. If there is ice that you can see, then the inside of your air conditioner is a solid block of ice that can take several hours to melt even in the heat of summer. Once you are able to turn on your air conditioner, it can take several more hours for the inside of your home to reach a comfortable temperature.

    At Swan Heating & Air Conditioning, Inc., your family’s comfort is our number one priority. Call today to schedule your annual AC tune-up. Our professional and highly-trained HVAC technicians are also available 24 hours a day for all of your emergency air conditioning repair needs.

    About Swan Heating & Air Conditioning

    SWAN Heating & Air Conditioning, Inc. was founded over 10 years ago, with over 50,000 satisfied customers, and is proud to provide home-owners in Northern Colorado with a full range of residential HVAC repair services.

    Commonly HVAC Problems and Solutions Air conditioner or Heat Pump with ice on it in summer

    It is possible even common to see ice on your heat pump or air conditioner in the summer. Boer Brothers Heating and Cooling sees a hundred of them a summer. But it means something in your system isn’t well. We use the word system because that is really what we are dealing with. There is an outside unit, an inside unit, some copper tubing which connects them and a system of air delivery conduits called ducts (not ducks). Ice on your system is a symptom which could mean many things. Some of these issues homeowners can fix themselves and save some time and coin, and some that do require one of those smiling guys in the blue shirts.

    Step one is to turn off the system. “What? but it is 90 degrees in the house already.” Exactly, the system isn’t doing its job. The ice on the unit makes it impossible for the heat transfer to happen so it causes loss of cooling. One typical response is to turn the thermostat temperature down but usually this just exasperates the issues. Even in a working system we suggest leaving the thermostat at 70 or above. It reduces that chance of the unit sweating into the ductwork and freezing up the unit.

    If you are interested in doing a little initial detective work check these things before calling in a service provider.

    Is the thermostat set too low? (try turning off the unit for a few hours and then restart it after raising the thermostat to above 70 degrees)

    Even if there is an issue this will usually get you a few hours of cooling as the ice slowly builds back up.

    Do you have a dirty air filter

    It is easy to forget to change those suckers. Every 30 days they should be changed. More often during pollen season or if you have had some type of dirt creating event in your home, like construction or the grand kids visiting over the Easter Holiday. A dirty filter doesn’t allow enough air flow. Air flow is moved across the coils to transfer heat. No air flow no heat transfer. This creates ice.

    Closed Vents

    Same issue, no air no heat transfer.

    Running air conditioner with windows or doors open

    One of the great things about air conditioning is that it takes humidity our of the air. The 10-20 degrees of cooling is nice but the lower humidity is really the key to a livable space here in the south. Leaving the windows open introduces lots of humidity into the space. The cooler temperatures of the indoor space forces the moisture out of the air because warmer air can hold more moisture than cooler air.

    If you’ve defrosted your system, checked your air filter and turned the AC back on without improvements in your system’s operation, then you need to check with a professional. It may take some time for ice to form again, making it important to continue to monitor your coil for a few days. If you detect ice, you should make that call for professional diagnostics. Be sure to turn your system off again to avoid damage.

    Issues that require a pro

    Low refrigerant charge

    Without enough refrigerant that heat transfer doesn’t happen efficiently enough. This can cause the unit to ice up. The refrigerant circuit is closed, none should be escaping so if it is low, your system is either losing some gas or it never was properly charged. You will need to have your refrigerant level measured the piping system checked for leaks and repaired if necessary and then recharged to the proper levels.

    Refrigerant Restriction

    The same problem can happen if somewhere in your piping system there is a blockage. Again we will need to check for the restriction and replace the piping where it exists or the replace the capillary tube.

    Bad Fan Motor or Fan Relay

    If your fan is not working or the electronics that run the fan are not providing power to it than there is not airflow. The heat transfer doesn’t happen and again ice can build up. The fan or the relay or both may need to be replaced

    Thermostat Issues

    Issues with the defrost cycle which is controlled by the thermostat can lead to ice accumulation. The thermostat may need to be replaced.

    Dirty Indoor Coil

    A very dirty indoor coil can also create issues with heat transfer

    Nothing works harder to keep you cool during the warm months than your air conditioner. Sometimes, however, your air conditioner might get a little too cool, causing the system not to function properly. One of the most common components in an AC unit that freezes is the evaporator coil. But what is an evaporator coil, and why does it freeze? And is there anything you can do about it?

    What is an evaporator coil?

    The evaporator coil of your air conditioner is one of the primary components in the heat exchange process, which allows your system to heat and cool your home. As your AC unit pulls in the warm air from your home, it passes this air over the evaporator coils. The coils contain liquid refrigerant that turns into gas once it interacts with warm air particles. This process works to quickly cool the air, which the blower fan then sends throughout your home. In simpler terms, the coils hold the cold refrigerant and remove the heat from the air as it passes over them. For heating, the process is essentially reversed, creating heat from the air and pushing it into your home instead of removing it.

    6 Causes of a Frozen Evaporator Coil

    1. Lack of Airflow

    As stated above, the evaporator coils work by absorbing heat from the air. But if they don’t have enough heat to absorb, the condensation on the coils can freeze. Low airflow can be caused by dozens of problems within the AC system, such as a malfunctioning blower fan, dirty air filters, or even damaged ductwork.

    2. Dirty Air Filter

    A dirty air filter creates the same airflow problem mentioned above, preventing the evaporator coils from absorbing the necessary amount of heat from the air to function properly. Dirty air filters can also can spread dirt and clog up other parts of your system, including the coils themselves.

    3. Dirty Evaporator Coils

    If your evaporator coils collect too much dirt or debris, the heat exchange process can become obstructed. Dirty coils will be unable to properly absorb the heat from the air, causing the condensation to become too cold and freeze.

    4. Refrigerant Problems

    Ironic though it may seem, having low refrigerant in your system can actually lead to frozen evaporator coils. Low refrigerant causes the system to overwork, which can lead to the condensation on the coils freezing. AC units work on a closed system, meaning that refrigerant doesn’t simply run out. Therefore, if you have low refrigerant, the problem is either a refrigerant leak in your system or an insufficient charge.

    5. Outdoor Temperature Is Too Low

    Similar to how the coils freeze when there is restricted airflow, they can also freeze if the air temperature is too low that your system is trying to cool. Since the coils work by absorbing heat from the air, lack of such heat can lead to the condensation on the coils freezing over.

    6. Clogged Drainpipe

    Condensation forming on the evaporator coils is a natural part of how they function. However, if the drain pipe is clogged or otherwise hindered, too much condensation may develop on the coils, which can then freeze.

    How to Fix a Frozen Evaporator Coil

    While many evaporator coil problems will require professional inspection and repair, there are some things you can do on your own.

    Thaw the Coils

    The first thing you should do is to let the coils thaw by turning the AC system off. Depending on the particular situation, the coils could take up 24 hours to thaw on their own. You can also speed this process up by turning the system to “fan only.” This setting allows warm air to blow over the coils without the refrigerant cycle. If there is a significant amount of ice, you’ll want to have materials available to catch the water so that it doesn’t harm other parts of the system — or simply make a mess.

    Check the Air Filter

    If you notice that the air filter is clogged or dirty, that might be the cause of the problem. Simply install a new filter, wait for the system to thaw completely, and resume function. If problems persist, call a professional.

    Clean the Coils

    While this may be a task better suited for a professional technician, you can clean the evaporator coils yourself if you are a confident DIY-er.

    Step 1. Turn the AC system completely off, preferably at the panel and the breaker.

    Step 2. Locate the coils. They will be housed in the air handler near the blower fan. You may need to consult the manual or other resources if you are having trouble finding them.

    Step 3. Fill a spray bottle with a mixture of warm water and regular household cleaning detergent.

    Step 4. Spray the solution and let it sit for up to 10 minutes.

    Step 5. Gently wipe away the debris from the coils with a soft cloth.

    Call a Professional

    While there are several remedies you can perform on your own to alleviate frozen evaporator coils, you may not be aware of other issues going on with your AC unit. Trusting the job to a licensed professional not only gives you the peace of mind that the work is done correctly, but also you can be confident knowing that they will catch any surrounding issues as well.

    How Preventative Maintenance Can Help

    While regular wear and tear is part of any AC unit’s lifespan, preventative maintenance is one of the most effective ways to ensure your system is working properly. This includes changing your air filters regularly (every 60-90 days, as a general guide) as well as having a professional technician inspect and tuneup your system — at least annually, but we recommend having this done before the summer and before the winter months each year.

    If You Need to AC Repairs, We Can Help

    At Complete Air Mechanical, we have experienced HVAC professionals who can inspect and repair your air conditioner. We provide services in Orange, Osceola, Seminole, and Volusia counties, and we offer financing options.

    Call us at (407) 915-0144 and let us make your home comfortable.

    Give us a call today to speak with one of our dedicated team members, or schedule an appointment online by clicking the button below!

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Our team at Comfortable Design regularly gets calls about frozen heat pumps. Though common, a heat pump freeze-up usually means your system’s components are not working correctly. Sometimes you can fix it yourself. But often times, you will need to call a heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) professional, like us, as the problem may require a part replacement or complex repair.

    Heat Pump Brain Freeze

    To help sort things out, here are the six usual suspects causing heat pumps to freeze up:

    1. Clogged Air Filter

    When air filters are left to collect particles for too long, they become clogged. This hinders airflow, trapping moisture. Dust, pet dander, and smoke are just a few examples of things that can clog your filter.

    The National Air Filter Association (NAFA) recommends changing your system’s filter as soon as it is loaded with dust and debris. How quickly your filter becomes clogged depends on many factors in your home. At Comfortable Design, we recommend switching to a new filter minimally every three months.

    Try replacing your air filter, then running your unit’s heat setting to melt the ice. If this does not clear the problem, contact one of our trained experts to come out to help.

    2. Low or Empty Refrigerant

    If your heat pump is low on refrigerant, it may be leaking. This can be from of a weakened solder joint, a failed valve, or unsecured fittings. Also, when a component rubs against the refrigerant tank over time, it could eventually puncture it, leading to a freeze-up.

    When the pipes start rattling, play it safe and power down your heat pump. Then contact one of our HVAC professionals for immediate inspection.

    3. Filthy Evaporator Coil

    Refrigerant flows through your heat pump’s evaporator coil. It transports heat into your Wrightsville home during cool weather and pulls it out during hot weather. When the coil becomes dirty, its ability to transfer heat is impaired. Compromised airflow can lead to a freeze-up.

    If you notice ice on your coils, power down your heat pump. Then gently pour warm water over the coils to melt the ice. If your coils freeze back up, call one of our HVAC team members.

    4. Faulty Blower Motor

    If your blower motor is not up to speed, it can wreak havoc on your system, leading to a freeze-up.

    The fan may start and stop intermittently, run at a reduced spinning cycle, or not run at all. If this is the case, have someone from Comfortable Design replace it.

    5. Dirty Fan Blades

    When the blower’s fan blades are dirty, this compromises the system’s airflow and exhaust output. Moisture may become trapped and turn into ice. If this happens, give us a call to correct it, as the fan blades are quite delicate.

    6. Wintertime Neglect

    Depending on your heat pump model and your Pennsylvania home’s geographic location, some air-source heat pumps (ASHPs) do not always operate efficiently in colder temperatures. Check with one of our experts if this is an issue for your heat pump.

    Also, the unit should be completely level with the ground; any tilting can cause moisture to get trapped and become frozen. Again, talk to our HVAC professionals if you believe your heat pump is not level.

    Finally, your unit should be away from gutter flow, as this can cause ice formation. During the winter, always check for ice accumulation around or on your unit, and clear it to prevent further issues.

    Contact Us With Any Heat Pump Issues

    Experiencing a frozen heat pump? Our Comfortable Design team of experienced HVAC professionals is just around the corner in Wrightsville, PA, to assist you. Call us today at 717-252-2078 or request service online if you need a repair or are interested in upgrading your current system.

    January 18, 2019

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    So, your heat pump switches to “AUX heat” when it’s in heating mode—and you’re wondering if it’s normal.

    First off, AUX heat refers to your heat pump’s auxiliary (backup) heat source. Auxiliary heat kicks on when your heat pump can’t produce enough heat to warm your home by itself.

    AUX heat mode is normal when:

    1. The temperature outside is below freezing
    2. Your thermostat is calling for a high temperature increase (2–4°F)
    3. The heat pump is in defrost mode

    Before we get more into when your heat pump should run in AUX heat mode, let’s go over how a heat pump heats your home.

    Is your heat pump in auxiliary mode when none of the 3 situations above apply? That usually indicates malfunction, which likely means your heat pump needs a repair.

    Call us at (512) 396-8183 or schedule an appointment online. We’ll send a tech right over.

    How a heat pump works

    To heat your home, a heat pump works like an air conditioner in reverse: it extracts heat from the air outside and sends it into your house.

    Because heat pumps only transfer heat (not generate it like a furnace), they’re a highly efficient form of heating.

    We cover heat pump operation in more detail in our blog, “Heat Pump vs Conventional Air Conditioner in San Marcos, TX”.

    How does auxiliary heating differ from normal heat pump heating?

    The answer depends on what kind of auxiliary heating your system uses. Most San Marcos homes have 1 of 2 types of auxiliary heating:

    1. Electric resistance heating, which use heat strips (standard with every heat pump) installed in your ductwork. This type of heating is highly inefficient.
    2. Gas furnace. Called a “dual-fuel system”, the gas furnace kicks on when the heat pump can no longer efficiently pull heat from the cold air outside. Dual-fuel systems are much more efficient and keep you more comfortable than electric resistance heating.

    Note that auxiliary heating is not the same thing emergency heating (displayed as “EM HEAT” or “EMER” on most thermostats). While auxiliary heating indicates that your heat pump automatically switched from normal to auxiliary heating, emergency heating is a setting that allows you to manually set your system to auxiliary heating.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    You should only use your heat pump’s emergency heating mode when it’s truly an emergency (e.g., your heat pump isn’t working in winter) because manually overriding your system means it won’t run as efficiently as it can—which will result in higher energy bills.

    Auxiliary heat is needed when…

    The temperature outside is below freezing

    Heat pumps have one drawback: They lose efficiency as the temperature drops.

    Heat pumps are highly efficient to about 32°F. Below freezing, your heat pump simply can’t draw enough heat from the cold air outside and will kick on its auxiliary heat mode to generate heat for your home.

    So, before you call a professional to diagnose a problem, check the outdoor temperature. If it’s an unusually cold day in San Marcos, don’t be surprised to see “AUX heat” on the thermostat.

    Your thermostat is calling for a high temperature increase

    When the temperature inside your home is more than 2–4°F above your thermostat’s set temperature, the auxiliary heat will turn on. (The actual temperature differential will depend on your heat pump model.)

    This happens because your system is trying to generate a lot of heat to warm your home quicker than it would with normal heat pump heating. Once the inside temperature reaches the set thermostat temperature, your system should go back to using normal heat pump heating.

    To avoid this problem, we recommend limiting how often you raise the temperature more than 2–4°F.

    The heat pump is in defrost mode

    Although we don’t get a lot of sub-freezing temperatures in San Marcos, your heat pump could enter what’s called “defrost mode”, which prevents your outdoor unit from freezing over.

    In defrost mode, your system will essentially run in cooling mode for a few minutes to allow the coils in the outdoor unit to warm up.

    You’ll know your system is in defrost mode if the outdoor fan has stopped circulating and you see puffs of steam coming from the unit. Some models even have a blinking light on the outdoor unit that indicates your unit is in defrost mode.

    During defrost mode, your system will use auxiliary heating to heat your home in the meantime. The heat pump should kick back to normal heating mode after a few minutes.

    Think your heat pump isn’t working properly? Call a San Marcos tech.

    We’ll come diagnose the problem and repair your heat pump. Learn more about what to expect when you hire us on our heat pump repair page.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Do you notice ice on your central air conditioning system? Although this may seem illogical, this is an ordinary issue. Despite it being one of the hottest days of the year, a homeowner may wake up to discover a frozen AC unit. Without the proper training and equipment, you may not know what to do next. To help you restore the flow of cold air in your home, we have summarized various ways to fix a frozen air conditioner. In addition, there are a variety of preventative measures to eliminate this issue in the future.

    Table of Contents

    Why Is My Air Conditioner Frozen?

    Clogged Air Filters

    When is the last time you cleaned or replaced your AC filters? Dirty air filters may negatively impact the airflow in your central air conditioning system. As a result, moisture in your system won’t be able to settle on the coils properly. This issue will cause the the coils in your central air conditioning system to become frozen and will negatively impact the efficiency of your system.

    How to Fix

    If your air conditioner is frozen due to contaminated air filters, you will be required to deactivate the system. This issue is likely caused by hindered airflow. Keep your air conditioner off for 1 to 24 hours to give it time to defrost. Once the system is deactivated, we recommend operating the fan for an hour. While the fan runs, change your air filter according to the directions of your unit model.

    You can also visit our site to discover the best ways to clean your air filters according to type. Once your AC filters are replaced, your air conditioner system should work properly. Of course, if you complete these directions and discover that your AC is still not working, contact an expert technician right away!

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hoursRefrigerant Leaks

    Are the coils in your air conditioner frozen? A refrigerant leak may cause the pressure in your system to drop, which triggers the refrigerant to expand and freeze. If you’re dealing with a refrigerant leak, this usually indicates a bigger issue.

    How to Fix

    The best way to fix a frozen air conditioner unit is to seek professional help. Typically, refrigerant leaks are a signal of a bigger issue such as a mechanical failure. You can attempt to fix this issue by refilling the refrigerant in your system. However, this will only temporarily solve the problem. Allow a trained technician to perform an air conditioning repair in Alexandria, VA and receive the best return from your investment.

    How to Fix a Frozen Air Conditioner Unit

    Contaminated Air Filters

    There are many reasons your air conditioner may freeze. The two main causes of frozen ac coils include clogged air filters or a refrigerant leak. If your air filters are dirty, deactivate your system for 24 hours to eliminate the buildup of ice. Next, travel to a local hardware store to purchase a new air filter for your central air conditioning system.

    Refrigerant Leaks

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    If your air conditioner is frozen due to a refrigerant leak, this indicates a bigger problem such as mechanical failure and will need to be addressed by a professional HVAC technician. Ultimately, scheduling routine maintenance will extend the life of your air conditioner unit and prevent issues from occurring.

    Prevent the Air Conditioner From Freezing in the Future

    The best way to prevent a frozen air conditioner is to clean your air conditioner continuously each year. How often you should clean your air conditioner may vary from home to home. Considering your household size, the number of pets owned, type of air filter model, and potential asthma and allergic individuals in your home—you’ll need to replace your air conditioner filters every 60 days to 90 days to prevent frozen air conditioning coils.

    To prevent a moisture issue with your air conditioner, it’s important to clean your evaporator coils once a year. Replace air filters frequently (every 60 to 90 days) and even buy air filters in bulk. Clear twigs, dust, and debris from the outdoor unit. These measures will extend the lifespan of your AC unit.

    Ultimately, to ensure your frozen air conditioning system is handled properly, contacting your local technician is the safest solution.

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hoursHeating & Air Conditioning Services

    Is your AC unit frozen and you don’t know what to do? When your air conditioning unit is causing you trouble, call the team at Snell Heating & Air Conditioning. We offer reliable HVAC services such as air conditioning repair, furnace replacement, heating system maintenance, and air conditioner tune-up. Give our team a call by phone at (703) 543-9649 to receive help with a heating or cooling issue. For reliable technicians that’ll keep your home all summer long, contact us for an appointment today!

    Have you ever heard of a situation when your AC gets freezed, if not then try and believe it? Yes, your AC can reach a point where it will get freezed and you will ponder as what to do in such a state. Our article will give you tips to first identify that your AC has frozen and what you should do to prevent it and how can it be fixed.

    Is My Air Conditioner Frozen?

    Do you see signs of Ice Buildup in your AC

    The first and foremost sign that your air conditioner has an ice build-up could be when your thermostat hasn’t reached the desired setting. If your air conditioning unit isn’t functioning properly or isn’t cooling properly then put your hand above one of the supply registers and sense the air coming out of it. If it is blowing warm air instead of cool air, then switch off the AC and open the access panel to the evaporator. Post this you might witness that the coils on the equipment are covered with ice, or there is ice on the panel itself. Another thing could also be that the system’s refrigerant may have dropped below 32 degrees, resulting in frozen AC

    What to do in such a case?

    A lot many times, you can defrost the air conditioner yourself. Ideally you should not turn on the AC if you think your AC is frozen as it can put pressure on the compressor resulting in bigger loss of the AC unit itself. Find the circuit box and switch the button off which controls power to your air conditioner. Kingroot Now just turn off the system and turn the blower on to help soften the evaporator coils. Don’t remove ice with your hands as it could damage the components. Remove any standing water that may have collected inside the equipment.

    Once the water is removed, it’s essential that you dry the coils. Now connect the thermostat control to switch on the blower or fan. You can also use your hair dryer to blow dry the system. Just remember not to put too much pressure of heat on the coils, as it could crack them possibly.

    How Do You Fix It?

    There could be many reasons for a frozen air conditioner to take place. In the best possible situation, it is advised that you hire a qualified HVAC technician and do not take the plunge of doing it yourself. Sometimes, trying your hand in everything can cause major damage to the AC unit and property. Instead of saving few bucks you will end up spending more.

    Five Air Conditioner Parts that Need Regular Maintenance
    Common Causes of Air Conditioner Condenser Problems in Singapore

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    Last Updated on 05/07/2021

    Ice on and around your air conditioner may initially catch you by surprise – especially in the middle of summer. You may quickly check the inside of your AC and found the coils covered in ice as well. It will not take you long before you understand there is a problem in your air conditioner. Of course, you should call an aircon repair service to fix the problem as soon as possible. However, it would be a good idea to check a few things on your own before you call a technician.

    Why does my air conditioner freezing up?

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    There are a number of reasons why an air conditioner freezes up. You need to identify the exact cause in your case. Insufficient air flow is one common cause. If the cool air is obstructed inside your AC, it may make the evaporative coils dirty and excessively cool, causing icing around the coils. Any leaks in the refrigerant lines may also cause freezing up. The low outdoor temperature could be a reason as well, especially when the temperature falls below 60 degrees F.

    How Will I Know My AC Froze Up?

    It’s easy to tell if your AC has frozen up because there are three clear signs. You might see ice on the unit, feel warm air coming from a vent near it or hear hissing noises that sound like escaping gas. If you notice any of these warning signals, be sure to call an AC technician as soon as possible!

    How long will it take for my AC to unfreeze?

    Your air conditioner can take anywhere from an hour to even a whole day just for the unit itself. If you catch this early enough before more damage is inflicted on your equipment- then whatever amount of time that takes (an hour or a full 24 hours) could be reduced if caught in time! The blower motor located inside pulls warm air from within the home and blows over refrigerant coils that make up an evaporator.

    Can An AC Freeze Because of A Drain Clog?

    Your AC might be freezing because of a clogged drain. A condensate line can get blocked, trapping water in the air conditioner and causing your evaporator coil to turn into ice. Drain moisture that freezes will also cause your AC to shut off!

    Can My AC Freeze Because Of A Dirty Filter?

    A dirty filter can cause your AC to freeze up. Air filters can become dirty over time, leading to poor airflow of the cold air you want. A clogged filter traps that cold inside and may even make ice start forming on your AC’s coils. Once this happens, an otherwise-working machine becomes inoperable due to a buildup of frost.

    How do you fix a frozen AC coil?

    If you notice ice on your air conditioner, you should take the following steps.

    1. Defrost the unit

    Simply start by turning off your AC unit. Make sure you place a large tray under the unit to collect the water as the ice melts. You can also run the AC in ‘fan only’ mode to let the ice thaw. Then clean the entire unit with dry clothes.

    2. Check the temperature setting

    Ice can build up in your AC if you set the temperature too low. Ideally, you should not set the temperature more than 18 degrees lower than the outdoor temperature. So check the temperature and adjust the thermostat settings accordingly.

    3. Check for any obstructions

    If there is any furniture or other obstructions in front of your air conditioner, consider removing those, so that the unit gets space to release the cool air without any problem.

    4. Clean the air filter

    You can easily remove the air filter from the unit. Check whether the filter is dirty. It is important to clean the filter and coils regularly. Without regular maintenance, your AC’s air filter may accumulate dust, dirt, and may get clogged, obstructing the air flow inside the system. Clean the filter with water and soap. If required, consider replacing the filter to improve air flow throughout the system.

    5. Clean the outside unit

    Whether you are using a window AC, a central AC, or a mini-split AC, it will have a large unit installed outside your home. You should check the outdoor unit for any blockage or obstruction in airflow. Sometimes a foreign object may block the air flow or there could be a problem with a dirty filter obstructing normal air circulation. You need to clean the outdoor unit and see whether the problem goes away.

    Watch this video if you wish to know more.

    The Bottom Line

    If the problem persists, consider calling an aircon repair service immediately. An AC technician is the best person to detect the root cause of the problem and provide you with a permanent solution.

    September 4, 2020 by Darren Beasley

    Storms are never good news. In addition to causing damage to your property, they can also lead to power outages in your area. When the power comes back on but your air conditioner remains inoperable, there’s a set of instructions you can easily follow to restart the system. Here the premier heating repair company in the area, M & M Heating & Air Conditioning Service Co. offers a short, step-by-step guide:

    How to safely defrost your air conditioner in 24 hours

    1. Switch off your AC system via the thermostat. Just like with a laptop, you’ll need to shut down your air conditioner before you can reset it. You can simply turn it off via your thermostat; just look for the system switch on that device and push it to the OFF position.

    2. Turn off the air conditioner at the circuit breaker. After turning the AC off using the thermostat, you’ll need to do it again, but at the circuit breaker this time. Find the switch for your central heating and air conditioning system at the circuit breaker and switch it OFF.

    3. Go back to the circuit breaker. Once you’ve fully shut down your air conditioning system, it’s time to turn it back on. Return to the circuit breaker and flip the AC switch back to the ON position.

    4. Wait for half an hour. After you’ve turned the system back on, it will take a bit of time for the air conditioner’s internal circuitry to reset. It usually takes about 30 minutes, so sit tight until then.

    5. Switch on the AC system at the thermostat. Once half an hour has passed, go back to the thermostat and turn your air conditioner back on. If it resets successfully, this usually means your air conditioning system didn’t suffer any damage due to the power outage. If it still won’t start, you might want to call a trusted local furnace and air conditioning company like M & M Heating & Air Conditioning Service Co. for a thorough inspection and potential repair work.

    Look no further than M & M Heating & Air Conditioning Service Co. for the highest quality HVAC solutions. We proudly serve Stockton, CA, and the nearby areas. Call us today at (209) 952-6580 or fill out this contact form to schedule your consultation.

    Exact Answer: 24 hours

    Whereas it might look counter-intuitive for your ac to freeze during the hottest months of the year, this usually does happen occasionally.

    Consequently, you end up frustrated, especially if you were unprepared and may have to deal with the discomfort of staying inside your home, albeit the hot weather.

    There, in this article, you will be taken through the steps you need to follow to defrost your frozen ac as well as why this usually happens.

    Going forward, you will be better placed to know what to do to have your frozen ac up and running efficiently.

    How long will you take to defrost a frozen ac?

    The duration your air conditioner takes to defrost depends on the extent that ice has accumulated.

    Nevertheless, the period usually lasts between one hour to more than 24 hours. Additionally, as you waiting for your ac to defrost, you need to look out for;

    Clogged condensate drain

    While the ice on the ice evaporator coil is melting, water starts to drip into the condensate drain pan, and through the condensate drain line, it flows outside.

    Occasionally, dirt accumulation along the drain typically forms a clog hence causing the backup and overflow of water.

    Overflowing drain pan

    If you have access to an indoor AC unit, you may wish to place several towels on the floor around the unit which assists in preventing water damage in case the thawing ice overflows the drain pan and begins leaking on the floor.

    Why does defrosting a frozen ac take this long?

    Defrosting a frozen ac takes between one to 24 hours because you need to follow all the steps carefully to ensure it gets to work correctly.

    Discussed below are the steps you need to follow through this entire process.

    Inspect the vent filters

    Carefully check the vent filters to confirm whether there is any clog that is restricting the flow of air.

    Air conditioners typically freeze due to dirty filters, thus whenever you notice any discoloration or dirt, replace them and observe whether this addresses the issue.

    Inspect the fins and coils: Check the cooling fins and coils surrounding the evaporator to confirm if you need to clean them.

    If cleaning is necessary, make use of a soft brush to take off any debris or dirt gently.

    Check the coolant levels

    Low levels of coolant usually affect the pressure within the air conditioner as well as the cooling efficiency thereby resulting in freezing.

    Furthermore, to correct or check the refrigerant levels, use a coolant installation kit.

    Reset the power

    After implementing the necessary steps to defrost and rectify all issues in your frozen ac, carry out tests to examine whether it is being done correctly.

    Additionally, if the breaker is switched off, restore the power and then turn on the thermostat until it reaches the cool setting.

    Consequently, you need to feel the vent blowing fresh air, and in case there still is an issue, the air will be warm, or the system cycles take long.

    Conclusion

    Having gone through this article, you now have a better understanding of the duration it takes to defrost your frozen air conditioner.

    Moreover, you also know as to why this happens and steps necessary to remedy this issue. Subsequently, you will no longer get to suffer from excess heat while in your home.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    When food needs to hit the table fast, the microwave is a go-to for quick cooking. It can take days for meat to defrost in the fridge, hours in the sink, but only minutes in the microwave. With cycles and settings designed specifically for safe, steady defrosting, don’t be afraid of this convenient option. Learn how to properly defrost meat, vegetables and fruit with this guide and get answers to common defrosting questions.

    What should I know about defrosting meat in the microwave?

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    How to defrost chicken, ground beef, steak and other meat in the microwave

    Step 1: Remove packaging and place meat in a container

    Unless directly stated, food packaging should not go in the microwave. A glass container works best for defrosting.

    Step 2: Select the defrost option

    If your microwave doesn’t have a defrost button, manually adjust the power setting to 20% or 30% using the Power Level button. If your model does have a defrost button, it may ask you what type of food you’re defrosting and its weight to calculate the defrost time. If your model doesn’t ask for information about food type and weight, input the time yourself: generally meat should defrost for 8 to 10 minutes per pound. Find the meat’s weight on the packaging or place it on a kitchen scale. Watch this video to see how to select microwave defrost settings on Maytag ® microwaves.

    Step 3: Rotate, flip or break apart the meat periodically

    If your microwave doesn’t have a turntable that rotates automatically, rotate the meat manually every few minutes to ensure even defrosting. It can also be helpful to flip large chunks of meat or break apart separate pieces that are stuck together. This will help the meat defrost faster and more consistently.

    Step 4: Cook immediately

    Cook food immediately after it’s defrosted. Leaving food too long could cause bacteria to grow, so try not to let it sit in the microwave while you prep the rest of the meal.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    More about defrosting in your microwave

    What is microwave defrosting, and how does it work?

    Many microwaves have a button labeled “Defrost” that lets you quickly thaw frozen foods. It uses standard microwave heat but reduces the power to around 30%, thawing food but being careful not to cook it. Many models also let you input the weight or type of food to calculate defrost time.

    Like all microwave settings, food is heated through electromagnetic waves created by a magnetron. Settings that use lower power levels, like Defrost, achieve this by simply cycling the magnetron on and off rather than leaving it on the whole time, which would be 100% power. Learn more in our guide about how a microwave cooks food.

    Is it safe to defrost food in the microwave?

    Yes. Using your microwave to defrost food is safe, but you must cook the food immediately after it’s done defrosting. If food is allowed to sit much longer than the appropriate defrost time of 8 to 10 minutes per pound, harmful bacteria could begin to grow. Also, don’t microwave defrost any food that has already been sitting out of the freezer for more than 20 minutes. Instead, slowly defrost it in the fridge or in a bowl of cold water.

    How long does it take to defrost food in the microwave?

    Microwave defrosting time depends on the type of food you’re defrosting as well as its weight. Generally, fruits and vegetables take 2 to 3 minutes. Meat takes 8 to10 minutes per pound. Check for instructions on the frozen food packaging to ensure you’re defrosting your food correctly.

    Dinner can be ready in an hour, even if that chicken is still in the freezer, thanks to these four recommended methods.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    We love to keep our freezer stocked with frozen chicken breasts and sausages (hello, easy weeknight dinner), well-marbled steaks, and all the ground beef and turkey you can fit for homemade meatballs or burger nights. And if you know how to defrost meat fast (and safely too!), you can achieve a home-cooked meal on a weeknight in very little time.

    The best and safest way to defrost meat is overnight in the refrigerator, until it is completely thawed. After thawing, ground meat, poultry, and seafood should keep well in the refrigerator for an extra day or two, while red meat (beef, pork, lamb, and steak) stays good for 3 to 5 more days. Plus, if you thaw meat in the refrigerator, you can freeze it again safely.

    But what if you need to defrost steak in a hurry? What if that chicken breast didn’t completely thaw overnight? What if you’re just really hungry? We’re not here to judge. There are a few methods to speed up the process and defrost any cut of meat quickly and safely. Take your pick based on how much time ‘til dinner.

    The Cold Water Method (One Hour)

    This is the best way to quickly and properly defrost meat without a microwave. Place your frozen cut of meat in a resealable plastic bag, squeezing out as much air as possible. Fill a large bowl with cold water and submerge the bag in the water. Change the water every 30 minutes to ensure that it stays cold and continues to thaw the meat. Smaller cuts of meat, poultry or seafood (about a pound) can thaw in an hour or less, larger quantities (3 to 4 pounds) may take 2–3 hours. Estimate about 30 minutes per pound for whole frozen turkeys. We don’t recommend refreezing that meat once it’s been thawed, unless you cook it first. Tip: use your thawed meat to make big batches of soups or stews!

    The Microwave Method (10 Minutes)

    Learn how to defrost meat in the microwave and you can have prepped protein in under 10 minutes — really. This method works best for smaller cuts of meat that will be cooked all the way through after thawing, like chicken breast for a stir-fry or ground beef for tacos. Read up on your microwave’s instruction manual to learn the best way to defrost a specific cut of meat according to the microwave’s settings. If your microwave doesn’t have a “defrost” setting, set it at a lower power level and run in short bursts until the meat is thawed. Be careful though, cooking at too high a heat or for too long can actually cook the meat instead of defrosting. No matter what, as soon as you’re done thawing, cook the meat right away.

    Cook Without Thawing

    When you’re really in a pinch, you don’t have to thaw frozen meat before cooking. Believe it or not, it’s safe to cook fresh-out-of-the-freezer blocks of ground turkey, solid cuts of chicken, and bricks of ice-cold steak. The meat will take longer to cook (about 50% more time), and it’s not ideal for achieving golden-crispy skin or a perfect sear. However, it’s an option that’s always there for you — even when perfectly thawed protein isn’t.

    Just avoid cooking frozen meat in the slow cooker — it can spend too much time thawing and become unsafe to eat.

    Methods to Avoid Thawing Entirely

    We get it — you need to defrost ground beef fast because it’s Taco Tuesday, or maybe you’re craving a Classic Spaghetti Bolognese. While there are sources that claim you can thaw frozen meat in hot water or simply leave it out on the counter, the USDA says this isn’t safe, and any piece of thawed meat should not be left at room temperature for more than two hours.

    Food safety is vital, especially when using the freezer. Knowing how to properly freeze items and, more importantly, defrost them, is crucial so you do not become unwell.

    When it comes to meat, the process of defrosting meat is fraught with danger due to the risks of bacteria and potential illness.

    However, Newsweek spoke to experts who gave their advice on how to thaw meats, taking the stress and complication out of food prep.

    The Food Safety and Inspection Service (FSIS) said there are three foolproof methods of defrosting: in the microwave, on the countertop in water and in the fridge.

    However, it is important to consider the best method of thawing your food and leave sufficient time to do so.

    Christine Byrne MPH, RD, a private practice dietitian in Raleigh, North Carolina, told Newsweek these methods can be used across all meat and, in fact, any other types of food.

    However, when it comes to something like fish, some methods are better than others.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    She explained: “The three methods of safe thawing work for all types of meat and fish. That said, there are some differences.

    “Fish may not thaw properly in the microwave, since its delicate flesh and a high water content might turn it mushy.

    “As long as you’re following guidelines, each of these methods of thawing is safe. That said, refrigerator thawing has the least room for error, and is guaranteed to keep your food at a safe temperature while it thaws.”

    So what are these three methods? Newsweek breaks down the best ways to defrost safely.

    Defrosting Meat in the Microwave

    Defrosting meat in the microwave is exactly as it sounds: putting your frozen meat in the microwave on the defrost setting.

    Byrne said, with this method, it is a good method if you plan to eat that meat right away, and as microwaves thaw from the inside to the outside, it may be parts of the meat are warmer than others when using this method.

    Due to this warming, it is important to cook straight away to destroy any bacteria.

    As Byrne mentioned, you should also consider what you are defrosting and whether microwaving is the best method. In the case of fish, other methods are better suited.

    Defrosting Meat in the Refrigerator

    The second method is in the refrigerator, which, according to food safety expert Jenna Brown, is the safest due to the gradual way in which the defrosting takes place.

    Brown told Newsweek: “The safest way to defrost is always overnight in the refrigerator. If defrosting in the microwave, the most important thing to note is the need to cook the food immediately. If using the cold water method, only use cold water (don’t be tempted to use hot or lukewarm water.)”

    The fridge method requires more preparation than others, as the larger the meat, the longer the defrost will take. For example, if you are defrosting your bird for Thanksgiving, that could take days in the fridge.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Byrne said: “To thaw meat in the refrigerator, transfer sealed meat from the freezer to the fridge the day before you plan to cook it. Smaller items, like chicken breasts and steaks, may thaw in about 12 hours.

    “Larger items, like whole chickens and turkeys, pork shoulders, and other big cuts of meat, will take about 24 hours for every 5 pounds.

    “Foods thawed in the fridge can be refrigerated for between one (for chicken, fish, and ground meat products) and five (for big cuts of meat like a brisket or lamb roast) days.”

    However, if you are in a pinch, the FSIS suggests an even faster way to defrost.

    Defrosting Meat in Water

    The final method is by defrosting in cold water. The FSIS suggests using a leakproof bag and placing it in cold water, which should be changed every 30 minutes until an item is defrosted.

    However, it is important not to including an tissue-like items in the bag or let the bag leak, as that can cause cross-contamination of bacteria into other foods and on surfaces.

    • FDA Warns Against Using Certain Hand Sanitizers Over Potential Cancer Link
    • How to Clean a Wooden Cutting Board and What To Chop on Them
    • How to Tell If Eggs Are Bad and The Water Fresh Test Explained

    Byrne says, like food which is defrosted in a microwave, this should be cooked straight away.

    She said: “Generally, meat will take about 30 minutes per pound to thaw in cold water. And, be sure to thaw in a sealed package, so that raw meat doesn’t contaminate your water and sink.

    “Food thawed in the sink must be cooked immediately.”

    However, one thing is important to note about this countertop method: cold water must be used.

    The FSIS says leaving something out on the countertop is not a safe way to defrost food, so if you choose to leave it out, it must be immersed in cold water using this method.

    Can I Refreeze Thawed Meat?

    This is a controversial issue. According to the FSIS, technically, you can refreeze meat, but it may compromise the quality due to the change in states and loss of moisture through the freezing and thawing process.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    As Byrne mentioned, that which has been defrosted in the microwave or in water should not be refrozen, and should be cooked immediately.

    However, so long as it has not been thawed for more than a day, meat can be refrozen even if it has not been cooked.

    Brown also said one can refreeze meat once it has been cooked, but it is important, when refreezing cooked meat or leftovers, to make sure it is completely cooled.

    She said: “It is safe to freeze raw meat, defrost, cook and freeze the leftovers again. Make sure any leftovers are cooled as quickly as possible and frozen/ chilled within two hours. When reheating cooked foods, only reheat once.”

    Can I Cook Meat From Frozen?

    According to Byrne and the FSIS, you can cook meat from frozen, but you must take the cooking time into consideration when doing so.

    As the meat is frozen, it must be removed from its packaging and, in the case of whole birds with giblets included, these must be taken apart as soon as possible to cook the giblets separately.

    Byrne said the meat may not be as tender this way, but one way of cooking gives the meat the best chance at being as good as fresh.

    She said: “If you don’t have time to thaw meat properly in cold water or the fridge, and don’t want to use a microwave, it is possible to cook meat from frozen. In an oven, your cook time will be about 50 percent longer, and the meat may not be as tender.

    “The best way to cook frozen meat is in an air fryer because the convection function wicks away moisture as it melts.”

    Ground beef is one of the most versatile ingredients to stockpile in your freezer, especially given that it only lasts a few days in the fridge. But defrosting it the wrong way can risk the growth of potentially harmful bacteria. Fortunately, we have the easiest and most efficient strategies for thawing ground beef quickly and safely:

    If you have 12 to 24 hours…

    If you know ahead of time that you want to use your ground beef, thawing it in the refrigerator is the safest way to do so. It takes about 24 hours to fully thaw one pound of ground beef in the refrigerator, but if your beef is in smaller frozen batches it will defrost faster. Be sure to place the package on a plate to catch any drippings or juice that sneaks out as the meat defrosts. The best part: If your dinner plans change, the ground beef will keep raw in the refrigerator for 1 to 2 days before it needs to be cooked.

    If you have 1 hour…

    With only an hour or so to go before supper and a pound of frozen ground beef in your hands, you can defrost it in a bowl of cold water. First, make sure the frozen beef is in a sealed and leak-proof package, then submerge it in a bowl of cold tap water—warm or hot water might seem like they would speed up the thawing process, but they will heat the outer layer of beef too quickly, risking the growth of bacteria. For this reason, you should also change the water or add a few ice cubes every 30 minutes to keep it from getting too warm. One pound of beef will take about one hour to defrost in a bowl of water, then it should be cooked right away.

    If you have 5 minutes…

    For days when what to make for dinner is the last thing on your mind, you can use the microwave to quickly defrost ground beef. Remove all packaging, then place the meat on a plate and microwave it at 50% power for 2 to 3 minutes, rotating and flipping the beef every 45 seconds, until it is fully thawed. Some of the outer parts of the meat might start to cook, which is why you should use the ground beef immediately after defrosting it in the microwave.

    Can I refreeze my thawed ground beef?

    Whether or not you can safely refreeze ground beef after thawing depends on the method you use to defrost it. If you decide not to use your ground beef after defrosting it in the refrigerator, you can stick it back in the freezer within 48 hours with no risk of bacteria growth. But if you use cold water or the microwave to defrost your meat and then decide you don’t want to use it, it’s best to cook it first before refreezing it.

    Check out our collection of Ground Beef Recipes.

    Microwave defrosting helps to jump start meal preparation, but special care is needed to be sure you are thawing your food safely.

    The convenience of a microwave is a real time saver, especially when it comes to defrosting frozen food. Remembering to take meat or a frozen meal out of the freezer and allowing adequate time to thaw in the refrigerator requires intentional pre-planning. Many busy families prefer to use their microwave to thaw food as it is the speediest method however Michigan State University Extension recommends you follow important food safety factors to ensure your meal is prepared safely.

    When you take frozen food such as meat out of the freezer, remove the store packaging, including foam trays and plastic wrap. This type of packaging is not heat resistant at high temperatures. It will likely melt or warp causing harmful chemicals to migrate into food. Place the frozen food in a microwave safe container and cover loosely. Select the defrost feature on the microwave, which is generally set at 30 percent power.

    Many microwaves automatically rotate food allowing for even thawing. If the microwave does not automatically rotate food then halfway through the thawing process open the microwave door and carefully turn the container. Defrosting will take seven to eight minutes per pound, depending on the wattage of the microwave and the size and thickness of the food item.

    As food is defrosting in the microwave, the edges of the food may begin to warm or slightly cook while the inside of the food remains frozen. Uneven thawing is the major food safety concern, which dictates why food must be immediately cooked once it is thawed. During thawing the microwave raises the temperature of food and if it enters the danger zone, 40 to 140 degrees Fahrenheit, bacteria begins to grow and multiply. Remember frozen food still contains bacteria even though they are inactive. When a food’s temperature rises, bacteria becomes active once again. Promptly cooking thawed food will kill most bacteria. It is not safe to thaw food in the microwave and then put it in the refrigerator or a cooler to cook or grill later. Always cook microwave defrosted food immediately. Be sure to use a food thermometer to make sure food reaches the proper internal temperature during cooking to prevent food borne illness.

    The microwave is truly a favorite kitchen appliance whether it is reheating, cooking or defrosting, you cannot beat the convenience. Understanding how to safely defrost food, especially different cuts of meat, using the microwave just takes a little know how on how to thaw, cook and serve delicious family favorites.

    This article was published by Michigan State University Extension. For more information, visit https://extension.msu.edu. To have a digest of information delivered straight to your email inbox, visit https://extension.msu.edu/newsletters. To contact an expert in your area, visit https://extension.msu.edu/experts, or call 888-MSUE4MI (888-678-3464).

    Did you find this article useful?

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Frozen foods are no match for your microwave. Thawing is one of the most popular uses of microwaves in households, even in commercial kitchens.

    If you have not tried thawing meat with this dependable appliance, it’s time that you do. It is proven safer than defrosting at room temperature.

    How to defrost ground beef in microwave, you ask? Scroll on for the proper method and more tips on food safety.

    How To Freeze Meat Safely

    Freezing and defrosting are not just steps in preparing food. These are methods to keep your food safe for consumption.

    If you are planning on buying frozen ground beef for a picnic on the coming weekend, head to a reputable meat shop or the meat section in the supermarket.

    Select one with a tightly-wrapped plastic package. Make sure that the package is not loose, no holes, and not torn. Then, put it in another plastic bag to prevent leaking juices to go into your other grocery products. Always separate raw meat from ready-to-cook food items.

    To store meat safely, freeze or refrigerate it immediately once you get home. You can store the meat in the freezer for two days in its original packaging if you can cook it soon.

    However, if you need to store it a little longer, you need to place it in the freezer. To store ground beef in the freezer, follow these steps:

      Remove the meat from its original packaging.

    Place the ground beef in a freezer-safe sealable plastic bag.

    Before sealing, use a rolling pin to flatten the meat. It should be half an inch thick.

    Seal and label the bag.

  • Place it in the freezer.
  • How To Thaw Ground Beef In Microwave

    Now, let us discuss the main topic of this article—how defrost ground beef in microwave. There are different ways to thaw ground beef. Among these, using the microwave is the quickest method.

      Take out the zip-top bag containing the frozen ground beef.

    Remove the beef from the plastic bag.

    Then, place it on a plate in the microwave or a microwave-safe plate.

    Then, put the plate in the microwave and heat it for two to three minutes at 50% power.

    Flip the meat every 45 seconds until thoroughly thawed.

  • Cook the ground beef immediately.
  • If you are not in a hurry and you have planned your meal ahead, you can thaw the frozen ground beef in the refrigerator. Transfer the frozen meat from the freezer to the refrigerator the night before you plan to cook it. Make sure that you put the meat in a dish to prevent leaking to other food products.

    Conclusion

    Basic knowledge of proper freezing and thawing your meat is essential to preparing safe and healthy food for your family.

    How to defrost ground beef in microwave is simple and easy. However, you should still be careful that you do it safely.

    Disclosure: We may get commissions for purchases made through links in this post.

    Have you ever had one of those moments when you asked your husband or kid to transfer the frozen beef to the fridge so you can cook it the following day? And when you’ve already prepared all the other ingredients and you ask them to give you the beef, they hand you rock-solid meat! How will you be able to defrost your beef in a short time? Will the microwave help you? How long will it take? We’ve asked the meat experts and here’s their answer.

    You can thaw your frozen beef in the microwave and it’ll be ready for cooking in a matter of minutes. Just take it out of its packaging and transfer it to a microwave-safe dish. Use the defrost setting or heat on low power for more or less 4 minutes while pausing every 45 seconds to flip it to the other side. It’ll only take you 2 to 4 minutes to defrost ground beef but if you have larger cuts of beef, it will take longer to thaw all sides evenly.

    Continue reading because we’ll tell you more about how to defrost this meat in the microwave properly. We’ll also share with you other ways to thaw your beef safely and how much time you need for each method. This is your ultimate guide to thawing beef with tips straight from the meat experts themselves!

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    How long does beef thaw in the microwave?

    The microwave is the quickest way to thaw your beef thoroughly. Depending on the weight and cut of your beef, it’ll take you between 4 and 10 minutes to defrost your meat while continuously flipping it on each side every after 45 seconds to make sure that it is thawing evenly.

    Ground beef is the fastest to defrost, needing only 2 to 4 minutes to complete the process. For larger beef cuts, they would need to be in the microwave for a longer time.

    How to thaw beef in the microwave

    It is always best to consult your microwave owner’s manual for proper defrosting instructions. But generally, these are the steps to thaw meat using the microwave:

    1. Remove all covers from the meat.
    2. Put it in a microwave-safe dish with a cover.
    3. Place at the center of the microwave while partially covered.
    4. Use the defrost settings. If your unit does not have one, use 20% to 30% power for thawing.
    5. Flip the beef on each side every after 45 seconds until it is thawed evenly all throughout.
    6. Cook immediately.

    Is it safe to defrost beef in the microwave?

    Beef takes forever to thaw in the fridge. There are times when you simply do not have days to spare until you have to use it for cooking your favorite beef recipes such as beef stroganoff, beef stew, grilled steak, and even meatloaf. Good thing there’s always the microwave to make thawing faster and safer.

    Yes, it is safe to defrost beef in the microwave, even the USDA says so. However, make sure you will cook it immediately because microwave thawing may cause some parts of the beef to start cooking. At this temperature, bacteria can begin to grow on your meat so it’s best to cook it right away to prevent food spoilage.

    How long does beef thaw in the fridge?

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    The fridge is the safest place where you can defrost your meat. However, it takes a long time to thaw it completely inside your refrigerator. It’ll take you a whole day to thaw your ground beef and lean meats fully. For larger beef cuts especially those with the bones in, it will take 2 days or even longer. The bigger the size, the longer it takes to defrost.

    Take note that thawed ground beef will stay safe inside the fridge only after a day or two. For other beef cuts, you must use them within 3 to 5 days to avoid spoilage.

    How do you thaw beef in water?

    You can thaw beef using the cold water method. Here’s how to do it:

    1. Put cold water in a deep bowl.
    2. Make sure your meat is inside a vacuum-sealed container or leak-proof bag.
    3. Place the meat in cold water.
    4. Replace the water every 30 minutes until the beef is thawed completely.

    The amount of time that it would take to fully defrost your meat will depend on its size. For your reference, it usually takes an hour to thaw 1 pound of meat so make the necessary adjustments when you need your beef for cooking.

    Does salt water thaw meat faster?

    Salt has been known to speed up thawing time. This is because salt lowers the freezing point of meat, helping defrost it faster. So if you want to thaw your meat faster, put it in a bowl of cold water with salt then put it back in the fridge. Remember to place your meat in a vacuum-sealed bag before immersing it in saltwater.

    Is it safe to thaw meat overnight on the counter?

    Some people might have this idea to just leave the meat overnight on the counter thinking that it would be ready for cooking the following day. Please do not do this. It is not safe. It is recommended that you put your meat in the fridge and give it sufficient time to thaw completely. It’ll take you overnight or a full day depending on the size. Yes, it’s a long time but you can be sure that it’s defrosting at a safe temperature that shouldn’t be higher than 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

    How to cook a frozen hamburger in the microwave?

    We know that there are times when you simply have to get the food ready in more or less 30 minutes before everyone gets hangry. This is when you’ll really be glad that you have frozen burger patties in your freezer.

    These patties are very simple to prepare to begin with. Just add some minced garlic, ground pepper, and Worcestershire sauce to your ground beef, and shape them into patties. You can lay each one on wax paper then cover everything with plastic wrap and aluminum foil. Place them in a freezer bag, label them, and put them in the freezer. You can now have a delicious hamburger during a meal emergency.

    Here’s how to cook it in the microwave:

    1. Remove the wax paper under the patty.
    2. Put a paper towel on top of a microwave-safe dish.
    3. Place your patty on top of the paper towel.
    4. Put the dish at the center of the microwave.
    5. Heat for 45 seconds then flip it to the other side.
    6. Heat again for another 45 seconds. Repeat this until the patties reach an internal temperature of 160 degrees Fahrenheit.
    7. Wait until it has cooled down properly then fix your hamburger sandwich with cheese, tomatoes, lettuce, and the rest of your favorite toppings. You have your delicious and juicy burger ready in less than 30 minutes, yum!

    Final Thoughts

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    It’s always a good thing to have a microwave on hand to make thawing beef quicker. In less than 15 minutes, you’ll be able to see its transformation from rock-solid to completely thawed and ready to use for your tasty beef recipes. But you can also defrost your beef by leaving it in the fridge or using the cold water method if you’re not in a hurry. These are all safe ways for you to prepare this meat for cooking.

    Your child called to say a friend is coming for dinner. Normally, an extra serving of casserole or two extra tacos would be no big deal. You make plenty for leftovers night as it is.

    But tonight, you had planned to cook steaks with grilled vegetables, so there’s just one problem: You are short one steak, and the clock is ticking.

    If you know how to thaw steak fast, you can still get the beef on the grill with time to spare. Thanks to this no-fail steak-thawing method, dinner is saved.

    The Fastest Way to Thaw a Steak Safely

    In all situations, the ideal way to thaw a steak is in a refrigerator. The meat will stay at a constant, cold temp while it defrosts. This keeps it at a safe temperature, and you won’t run the risk of becoming ill from bad bacteria.

    In the event you don’t have time for this lengthy process (it typically takes 24 to 36 hours), you can speed things up with this USDA-approved method:

    1. Grab a steak from your stash and place it in a zip-top bag. Squeeze out as much air as possible and seal the bag.

    2. Place the steak in a large bowl. If you’re thawing more than one steak, you can speed up the process by giving each steak its own bowl. Fill the bowl or bowls with cool water, not hot or even warm water. Cool water is safest. The higher the temperature climbs, the closer you get to the danger zone, or when bacteria growth accelerates.

    3. Leave the steak in the water for 30 minutes. Place a spatula or wooden spoon on the meat to keep it submerged. After that half-hour, check the steak. If it’s not completely thawed, empty the water, and fill the bowls with fresh cool water. Because the water’s temperature is cool, you don’t have to worry about any discoloration of the meat, and it’s not hot enough to start the cooking process.

    Plan for about 30 minutes per pound of meat. Thinner steaks will be fully thawed in 30 minutes. Thicker ribeyes or filets might need more time. You can speed up the process by separating individual pieces from each other when they’re thawed enough to pry apart.

    4. Remove the bag from the water. Open the seal and remove the steak. Season and cook the meat just as you typically do. If the center remains a bit icy, that’s OK. You can still cook the meat. Just give it a few extra minutes to reach temperature.

    Which Fast-Thawing Methods for Steak Should You Avoid?

    While your microwave has a defrost option, it’s best not to use it when you’re trying to get a steak thawed. The heat from the appliance will thaw the meat, but it can also quickly begin cooking the steak. This will affect the meat’s color (it’ll turn gray) and the texture (it could become chewy). Use this method only as a last resort.

    Certainly do not leave the steak on the counter at room temperature for any length of time. Even cool rooms like a basement or garage are far too warm. The outside portions of the meat will rapidly warm to the danger zone—40°F to 140°F—and dangerous bacterial growth may start. This could lead to food poisoning.

    Some cooks recommend placing an unwrapped steak in a bowl of water with a steady stream running into it. This will certainly help keep the water around the steak at a constant cool temperature—and prevent it from reaching the danger zone—but it also means all the juices a steak naturally releases while thawing will be lost for good. Ultimately, that could mean you have a dry, stringy piece of meat.

    Is it Safe to Cook Steak That is Still Frozen?

    Yes, if you don’t even have time to thaw steak fast in bowls of water, don’t fret. You can absolutely cook the steak from frozen. You’ll need to account for about 50 percent more cook time for the meat, so put it on the grill first if you want it to come off at the same time as the other steaks.

    How to Defrost Ground Beef in The Microwave? Defrosting ground beef in a microwave is one of the easiest things to do! Simply place the beef in a microwave-safe dish and cover it with cling wrap. Use the ‘Defrost’ option on your microwave and defrost for about 3-5 minutes per pound. There you have it – quick, perfectly defrosted ground beef!

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    If you have ground beef in the freezer that needs to be thawed, you may be wondering if it is safe to do so in the microwave. You can definitely thaw ground beef in the microwave, as long as you follow a couple of important rules.

    In this post, I will discuss how to thaw ground beef in the microwave safely and how long it will take for different-sized batches. I will also talk about whether or not it is safe to refreeze thawed ground beef.

    So, let’s get started!

    Is it safe to thaw ground beef in the microwave?

    Yes, it is perfectly safe to thaw ground beef in the microwave. However, there are a few things you need to keep in mind when using this method.

    First, make sure to thaw the beef in a microwave-safe dish.

    Secondly, cover the beef with cling wrap while it is thawing. This will help keep the moisture in and prevent the beef from drying out.

    Lastly, ensure that your beef is thawing evenly on all sides by using a meat thermometer. That’s all! It’s as safe as thawing beef in any other way.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Can I refreeze my thawed ground beef?

    Yes, you can definitely refreeze thawed ground beef. I’ve done it myself quite a few times when I’ve accidentally thawed more beef than I needed.

    However, it is important to note that the quality of the beef may not be as good after being frozen and thawed.

    Refreezing will also reduce the shelf life of the beef so don’t keep it for too long in the freezer. Ideally, use it within 3-4 days after refreezing.

    How long to defrost 1lb ground beef in microwave?

    It will take about three to five minutes per pound to thaw ground beef in the microwave. Remember to use the ‘Defrost’ setting on your microwave and flip the beef every few minutes to ensure even thawing.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    What you’ll need:
    1 lb frozen ground beef

    How to quickly thaw ground beef:

    Take the frozen ground beef out of the freezer and place it on a microwave-safe dish.

    Cover the dish tightly with cling wrap. Alternatively, you can also place the ground beef in a Ziploc bag and then place it on the microwave-safe dish. This will ensure that your meat retains all of its juices and does not dry out while thawing.

    Keep the ground beef inside the microwave and use the ‘Defrost’ option. Set the timer for 3 minutes. After 3 minutes, check to see if the beef is properly thawed. If not, you can defrost it for another 2 minutes after flipping it over.

    Use a meat thermometer to check if all parts of the thawed beef are at 40F or slightly under.

    Cook the beef immediately for the best results. If you’re not going to cook it right away, store it in the fridge for later use. It will be good for a day or two.

    Note – If your microwave does not have a defrost option, you can also heat the beef at 50% power for 2-3 minutes, flipping it every 45 seconds.

    1. Home Appliances
    2. Home Appliances

    How To Properly Defrost Items In The Microwave?

    Reliable Microwave ovens are some of the most sought-after home appliances in modern homes.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Whether you want to heat up your frozen pizza or defrost ground meat for your dinner, a microwave can often be your best friend when your short of time. This is particularly true when it comes to defrosting as it helps speed up the cooking in a safe way. Using a combination microwave can be a great choice for thawing a wide range of food items right from the freezer.

    Microwaves these days are often highly intelligent machines that can defrost any food type at the push of a button. This is particularly true for Panasonics range of intelligent inverter microwaves however with some of the older more basic microwaves around the defrost function can often leave your meals unevenly defrosted and even slightly cooked while still being half frozen. Below we’ve provided a few tips on manually defrosting food when your microwaves defrost setting just doesn’t quite cut it.

    Defrosting Food Items in the Microwave Oven

    Firstly, when looking to defrost using a microwave make sure to use a microwave safe container. You should always make sure that you are heating food properly and safely in order to ensure warm healthy meals that are safe to eat.

    If you are new to using the basic microwave oven, here are some expert tips on defrosting food items using the simple microwave oven in your kitchen.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    в—Џ Place the food item in a microwave-friendly container: to ensuring the given plate or container is microwave-friendly, you can check its bottom for the safety labels. Runny or liquid-based food items should be placed in deeper containers or bowls in order to avoid spillage.

    в—Џ Defrosting time is dependent on the size and the type of the food you are defrosting. Place the food item in the microwave oven and decrease the power to around 30-50% depending on what you are defrosting. User the lower 30%-35% settings for larger more dense food items such as large pieces of meat and the higher 45%-50% settings for smaller loose food that can be mixed throughout in order evenly distribute heat, foods like frozen vegetables.

    *When you use low power settings, it allows the food to warm gradually and evenly throughout without cooking the outside.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    ● Once the food is in and the settings have been updated set a two-minute timer and hit start. As the food is defrosting make sure to keep an eye on it and regularly check the distribution of heat as food can often be warm on the outside but cold on the inside. It’s a good idea to keep going with one to two-minute time increments as various parts of the meal or food items defrost at different rates. With larger pieces of meat and more dense foods more time is needed therefore start with five to eight minutes and then go to two-minute increments checking occasionally.

    ● Lastly, for loose foods it’s a good idea to remove the parts that are defrosted and continue microwaving the parts that are still frozen. Removing these pieces speeds up the process by allowing the microwave to focus its energy on the leftover frozen pieces and ensures the pieces that are already defrosted don’t start to cook due to being left in the for too long.

    в—Џ Once everything is defrosted make sure to cook everything properly and enjoy.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Safety Measures While Defrosting Items in a Microwave

    If you want to ensure the best outcomes for defrosting frozen food in the microwave, it is essential to follow some basic safety rules.

    в—Џ Use a thermometer for ensuring that you are defrosting the food items at the right temperature
    в—Џ Once you have defrosted a packaged food item, cook the same within one day
    в—Џ Avoid re-freezing any raw food item after defrosting the same
    в—Џ Clean the microwave oven once you are done defrosting to get rid of any lingering bacteria

    There you have it a quick guide on how to manually defrost food in a microwave. We hope you find it helpful, go forth and defrost safely.

    It’s simple to freeze and defrost beef so it retains its greatness. Not sure where to begin? Our chefs and butchers have joined forces to share their brilliant tips.

    What you need to know

    How to freeze fresh beef

    • Trim beef to ensure safe and even defrosting.
    • Separate cuts into meal-size portions.
    • Flatten butcher’s mince before packing, so it defrosts evenly.
    • Place beef in good-quality plastic bags and wrap in foil for extra protection.
    • Remove excess air and seal securely.
    • Label the bags with the cut name, weight, amount and date of packaging.
    • Freeze up to the recommended storage time for your particular cut.

    Freezer storage times for fresh beef

    Freezer

    Ideal temperature -18°C to -15°C

    Fresh beef cuts

    Cooked beef dishes

    Safety Matters!

    Freezing beef prolongs storage time because it prevents microbial growth. Follow the recommended storage times to enjoy beef at its best and safest.

    Kitchen Science

    Why freezer storage times for cooked beef dishes are shorter than fresh beef

    Certain flavours in cooked dishes, such as onion and garlic, oxidise in the freezer over time – it’s known as flavour tainting. Because many cooked beef dishes contain one or both of these ingredients, we recommend storing for no more than one month to keep the flavours tasting fresh.

    How to defrost raw beef in the fridge

    The best way to defrost beef is to leave it in the fridge until completely thawed. You’ll need to plan ahead, but the tender, juicy results are worth the wait!

    • Remove beef from freezer and separate portions.
    • Keep beef in freezer wrapping and place it on a dish.
    • Store on bottom shelf of fridge until thawed and consume within the recommended fridge storage time.

    Frozen fresh beef average thawing times

    Beef cut
    Thawing time

    How to defrost raw beef in the microwave

    Pressed for time? Defrosting beef in the microwave is a saviour when you need to speed things up.

    • Remove freezer bag or wrap. This prevents your beef from sitting in ‘drip’ and stewing while defrosting.
    • If freezer wrap doesn’t come off easily, wait a few minutes and try again.
    • Discard any Styrofoam trays – they’re not microwave safe.
    • Use the pre-programmed ‘defrost’ setting on your microwave.
    • When defrosting mince, remove outer portions from the dish as they thaw, and set aside.
    • If the edges of cuts feel warm, stop microwaving and allow beef to stand for a few minutes until the edges are cold again.
    • Cook beef immediately after defrosting. Make sure it doesn’t stand for any length of time at room temperature or in the fridge.

    Safety Matters!

    Refreezing defrosted raw beef

    Always cook defrosted beef before refreezing to ensure the greatest beef experience and avoid any microbial risk.

    Kitchen Science

    Beef cuts contain a high percentage of water. When frozen, tiny ice crystals form within the meat’s structure. These crystals rupture the fibre of the meat, causing it to leach water when defrosted. That’s why, apart from being potentially unsafe, repeated freezing causes beef to dry out.

    How to reheat cooked beef in the microwave

    Pre-prepared meals are a lifesaver when you need to get that hot meal on the table in minutes. For a fast, safe and tasty result, follow our expert tips:

    • Reheat your beef dish in individual portions.
    • Place veggies in the centre of the plate and the beef around the outside.
    • Sprinkle beef with a little water or stock to prevent it drying out.
    • Cover with a microwave lid or microwave-safe plastic wrap to trap steam and keep the meal moist.
    • Place plate towards the outside of the microwave turntable.
    • Reheat meal for 2 minutes on high, and then stand for 1 minute.
    • Feel the centre bottom of the plate to ensure meal is thoroughly heated.
    • To assist with even heating, turn plate halfway through the cooking time.
    • Take care when removing the lid or plastic wrap – the steam released can burn!

    How to reheat casseroles in the microwave

    • Place casserole in a deep-sided dish. Cover dish to speed reheating and trap moisture.
    • Position casserole dish on the outside of the turntable.
    • Reheat on a high setting. Timing will vary on the casserole quantity.
    • Stir occasionally during reheating to distribute the heat.
    • Wait until the casserole is piping hot and has bubbled for at least 2 minutes.
    • Look out for the hot steam when removing the lid!

    Safety Matters!

    Microwave reheating

    Have you noticed how you get cold spots in food when you’re cooking in the microwave? Pesky microorganisms can survive in these cold spots. Make sure you:

    • Follow microwave or ready-meal cooking instructions.
    • Trap steam by covering food with a lid or microwave-safe plastic wrap.
    • Stir food and turn large items over during cooking. Rotate the dish once or twice – even if you have a rotating turntable.
    • Cut food into similarly sized pieces or arrange thicker pieces on the outside of the dish.

    Don’t forget – food continues to cook after microwaving. Always wait 3–5 minutes, or for the recommended standing time, before tucking in.

    The Best Way to Defrost Steak and Other Meats

    A slow thaw in your refrigerator is the ideal way to defrost steaks, other cuts of beef or any meat. Our FlavorLock™ system guarantees our steaks are frozen at their peak; allowing them to thaw out slowly maintains that superior quality. Simply remove your steak from its packaging, place it on a plate to catch any liquid, and thaw in your refrigerator. For the best flavor, we recommend you cook your steaks immediately after defrosting.

    • Defrost steak, burgers and ground beef in your refrigerator for at least 24 hours
    • Defrost roasts in your refrigerator for 3 to 4 days, depending on size

    You know your steaks are ready for the grill when they “give” when you press them with your thumb.

    How to Defrost Meat Fast

    But what if you don’t have the time to thaw out meat slowly? The following techniques will get your steaks on the grill in a hurry.

    • Cold Water Defrosting. If your steaks are still in their original, sealed packaging, this is the best way to thaw meat fast. Fill a large bowl with cold water. Submerge the meat, in its packaging, in the water. Change the water periodically. Your steaks should be ready to cook in 45 minutes to 2 hours. Remember, the water should be cold; using warm water may be faster but will create an environment that’s perfect for bacteria.
    • Microwave. While not recommended, this is the fastest way to defrost meat. Follow your microwave defrosting instructions. Watch carefully – you want to thaw the steak, not cook it!

    You know your steaks are ready for the grill when they “give” when you press them with your thumb.

    We do not recommend thawing steaks or roasts on the countertop.

    How to Cook Frozen Steak or Burgers

    If you really have no time to thaw meat beforehand, you can grill or cook frozen steaks and burgers. While not ideal, we understand that sometimes it’s the only option!

    • Follow our usual instructions for how to cook steak. No matter which cooking method you choose, simply allow more time…about 50% more time. The meat will have to thaw as it cooks. Be sure to cook to the internal temperature recommended for desired doneness.

    Remove the meat from its packing and lay it on a dish. Microwave the meat at 50 percent power for 2 to 3 minutes, turning and flipping the beef every 45 seconds, until it is completely thawed and cooked through.

    – Before defrosting, remove the food from its packing. – Place the meat in a dish that can be microwaved. – Because some sections of frozen food may begin to cook during the defrosting process, it is important to prepare meat, poultry, egg casseroles, and fish soon after they have been defrosted in the microwave oven.

    How to defrost ground meat in a microwave?

    The most effective technique of defrosting ground beef in a microwave is to place the beef on a microwave-safe plate inside the microwave and begin defrosting it at a power level of 30 percent while the microwave is on.

    How long does it take to defrost ground beef?

    Putting Ground Beef in Cold Water to Defrost If you need to thaw ground beef somewhat rapidly, but not nearly as quickly as defrosting the meat in the microwave, the submersion method may be the best option for your situation.It normally takes between half an hour and two to three hours, depending on the quantity of meat, and it does not result in nearly as much loss of quality as traditional methods.

    How long do you cook frozen ground beef in the microwave?

    Microwave ground beef for 2 minutes at 50% power in a microwave-safe dish. Remove any frozen pieces of meat and continue cooking at 30 percent power, heating beef for 1 minute for every 1.5 pounds (0.68 kg) of meat, until the beef is well heated. Scrape off any parts of meat that look to have defrosted every 30 seconds or until the pan is clean.

    How do you know when meat is done defrosting?

    Keep an eye on the meat while it defrosts. You should never just ″set it and forget it″ while thawing meat in the microwave. It is possible that meat that has not been thoroughly defrosted will not cook correctly. If your microwave plate does not rotate automatically, rotate the meat each time it is flipped to ensure even cooking.

    Is it safe to defrost beef in the microwave?

    Yes, it is safe to defrost meat and poultry in a microwave oven without risking food poisoning. When thawing meat and poultry in the microwave, make sure to cook it right away since some parts of the meal may become heated and begin to cook before the rest of the food.

    How do you defrost meat in the microwave?

    Chicken, beef, pig, and fish defrosted in the microwave: a step-by-step guide.

    1. Make sure your meat is out of the freezer.
    2. Placing your meat in a microwave-safe container is recommended.
    3. Defrost your microwave by pressing the defrost button.
    4. Set the timing for the cooking process.
    5. When thawing meat in the microwave, make sure to keep an eye on it.

    How long does defrosting in the microwave take?

    Defrosting will take between seven and eight minutes per pound of food, depending on the wattage of the microwave and the size and thickness of the food item being defrosted. It is possible for the edges of food to begin to thaw or somewhat cook while the center of the meal stays frozen while defrosting in the microwave while defrosting in a conventional oven.

    How does microwave defrost work?

    Most of these ovens now offer a defrosting mode, which slowly warms the food at a low power level (usually below 350 Watts). Using an alternating pattern of wave emission and rest, the microwave oven’s defrosting program gives conduction enough time to act and the food’s temperature to become more consistent.

    How do you safely defrost beef?

    Most of these ovens now offer a defrosting mode, which gently warms food at a low power level (usually below 350 Watts). Using an alternating pattern of wave emission and rest, the microwave oven’s defrosting program gives conduction enough time to act and the food’s temperature to become consistent.

    Can I cook a steak from frozen?

    According to the culinary magazine, not only is it possible to cook a frozen steak without first thawing it, but it also tastes better that way. When the editors put science to work, it was determined that frozen steak does not develop the dreaded grey band and maintains more moisture during the cooking process.

    How do you defrost steak in a hurry?

    How? Take two metal pots or pans and set your vacuum-sealed steak flat on one of them. Turn the other over and repeat the process with the other pot or pan. Then, fill the other pot or pan halfway with water and set it on top of the steak, topside up, to steam it. Because of the weight of the water and its warmth, which is carried by the metal, thawing will be accelerated.

    Can you defrost meat in a plastic bag in the microwave?

    How?Remove the steak from the vacuum seal and set it on the bottom of one of the metal pots or pans (bottom up).Repeat with the other metal pot or pan (bottom up).Once you’ve filled the other pot or pan halfway with water, set it on top of the steak so that the water runs down the sides.Thickening will be accelerated by the weight and warmth of the water, which will be passed through the metal.

    Can you defrost meat in packaging?

    Simply set your meat on a platter in your refrigerator the night before you want to cook it, either in its original plastic wrapping or removed and wrapped in plastic wrap to keep it fresh. By using a plate, you can prevent any moisture created during the thawing process from accumulating throughout your refrigerator.

    How to defrost beef quickly?

    1. Putting it in a bath of ice water. The cold water bath provides a few of advantages over the hot water bath.
    2. It’s being melted in the microwave. The microwave is not only a quick and convenient way to defrost beef, but it is also THE quickest method.
    3. It’s just not thawing in any way. Yes, you are correct.
    4. Final comments on thawing.

    Is a longer defrost better than microwave defrosting?

    1. Spread the shrimp out evenly without overcrowding or stacking them on top of one another.
    2. Avoid purchasing frozen cocktail shrimp that are covered in ice crystals or that are smashed around the outside.
    3. The microwave, as opposed to cold water, is one of the more expedient techniques for thawing frozen foods.
    4. Cover the shrimp in the dish with a cover or plastic wrap that is safe to use in the microwave.

    Can I reheat beef in microwave?

    – Place the remaining hamburger on a platter that can be heated in the microwave. – To reheat the burger, select the reheat option from the menu. If you use a microwave, this timer will normally last between two and four minutes, depending on the model. – Finally, flip the burger halfway through to ensure that it is heated evenly.

    Of the three safe methods for thawing ground beef, defrosting meat in the microwave is by far the fastest. But be aware that it’s also the most limiting and the most damaging to the quality of your finished recipe. It’s limiting in that you must promptly cook the meat. You can’t refreeze it because when you defrost hamburger in the microwave, it starts partially cooking, making it susceptible to rapid bacteria growth. And, it’s damaging because the beef loses a significant amount of moisture, turns a little rubbery and often ends up unevenly cooked since portions get a head start during thawing.

    Thawing Meat in the Microwave

    You can freeze ground beef in its store packaging, but you can’t defrost hamburger in the microwave in it because neither plastic wrap nor foam trays are microwave safe. Unless you’ve already frozen the meat in a microwave-safe container, transfer it to a microwave-safe plate.

    The defrost function on microwaves generally aren’t all that reliable, so skip it. Instead, microwave the frozen ground beef at 50 percent power for two minutes, flipping it over once halfway through. Check it, remove thawed portions, and rearrange the remaining meat into a layer of even thickness as best as you can. Then, continue microwaving the meat at 30 percent power, checking it every 30 seconds or so and removing thawed sections until it’s defrosted.

    It’s OK if there are some small areas of meat that are mostly, but not entirely thawed. The less time in the microwave, the better. Remember, now you need to cook the meat right away.

    Defrosting Ground Beef in Cold Water

    If you need to thaw the ground beef fairly quickly, but not quite as quickly as defrosting the meat in the microwave, consider the submersion method. Depending on the quantity of meat, it typically takes between half an hour and two to three hours, and it doesn’t result in nearly as much loss of quality.

    Keep the ground beef in its airtight packaging and submerge it completely in a large bowl or pot of cold water. Dump the water out and refill with fresh, colder water every 30 minutes. Ground beef thawed in this way must still be cooked right away, and it should be fully cooked before refreezing any portion of it.

    Thawing Ground Beef in the Refrigerator

    Whenever you’re able to plan far enough ahead, defrost ground beef by putting it in the refrigerator 24 hours ahead of time. While it’s much slower than thawing meat in the microwave or submersion thawing, it results in the least loss of moisture and quality. Plus, you can keep it in the fridge for a day or two between thawing and cooking, and you can refreeze unused portions without cooking them first.

    Unsafe Defrosting of Ground Beef

    Raw meat should never be left out at room temperature for more than two hours or for one hour in an environment over 90 degrees Fahrenheit. And when meat is held between 40 and 140 F, it’s considered to be in the danger zone where bacteria multiplies rapidly. With enough time in the danger zone, bacteria can grow beyond the point where the food is rendered safe by cooking.

    This means that you can’t defrost ground beef by just letting it sit out on the kitchen counter. Another unsafe option is to use warm or hot water for the submersion method in an attempt to speed up the thawing process. Both of these methods can easily keep the meat in the danger zone for too long.

    How to defrost food safely

    Most – but not all – foods need to be defrosted before you can cook them.

    Here’s what you need to know to make sure that food is thawed safely.

    1. The safest way to defrost food is in the fridge

    • Allow at least 24 hours for every 2-2.5 kg (4-5 lbs).
    • Once the food has thawed, cook or eat it within 24 hours. Do not refreeze it.
    • It is not safe to defrost at room temperature.

    2. Defrost food in the microwave only if you are going to cook and eat it straight away

    • When you defrost food in the microwave it can get warm enough to allow harmful bacteria to grow. Cooking the food immediately will kill any bacteria, but if you leave it the bacteria will continue to multiply.
    • Be sure to check the microwave setting and time in your microwave manual.

    3. Check the package before defrosting

    • Some food is best cooked from frozen. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions on pre-packed foods.

    4. Make sure poultry is completely thawed before you cook it

    • If poultry is still partly frozen when you start to cook, it will cook more slowly and might not reach a high enough temperature to kill harmful bacteria.
    • Check whether the meat feels frozen by using a fork or skewer.
    • When defrosting a whole bird, make sure there are no ice crystals in the cavity.

    5. Defrost meat on the bottom shelf of the fridge

    • Put it on a plate away from other foods. When meat thaws, lots of liquid can come out, which can spread bacteria to any food, plates or surfaces that it touches. Keep the meat covered so that it can’t touch or drip onto other foods
    • Only defrost meat in the microwave if you’re going to cook and eat it straight away.
    • Cook the raw meat within 24 hours of defrosting.
    • If you defrost raw meat and then cook it, you can freeze it again. Never reheat foods more than once.

    6. Do not refreeze food that has defrosted

    • You should never refreeze food that has defrosted.

    ​7. Always cook frozen berries before using

    • Imported frozen berries should be boiled for 1 minute before eating them or adding them to smoothies. This is because they have been associated with outbreaks of norovirus and hepatitis A across Europe in recent years.
    • This is particularly important when serving them to vulnerable people.

    Sign up for our latest healthy eating and recipe updates.

    • About us
    • Accessibility
    • Events
    • Cookie notice
    • Data Protection statement
    • Looking for the NI site?
    • Media centre
    • Blog
    • Sitemap
    • Contact us
    • News
    • Events
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Twitter
    • Youtube
    • Pinterest
    • Linkedin

    The site content is redirecting to the NI version.

    3 Ways to Defrost Food Safely

    You can hardly wait. The juicy rib-eye steaks you picked up a few weeks ago have been sitting in your freezer, just waiting to be grilled. Tonight, you plan to fire up the barbeque and do just that.

    But first, you’ve got to defrost the steaks. And you need to take special care: Some approaches to thawing food, like leaving it on the counter all day, are unsafe and can cause illness.

    You’ve got 3 choices for safely thawing any type of food. Here’s what you need to know about each:

    1. Refrigerator Thawing

    This is certainly the easiest method for defrosting frozen food — just stick it in the fridge and wait until it’s thawed.

    But you may be waiting longer than you thought. It usually takes an entire day to thaw even a small amount of frozen food, such as a pound of ground meat or boneless chicken breasts. For large items, like a whole turkey or ham, it’ll take about 24 hours of defrosting time for every 5 pounds of food.

    All that waiting does have a payoff, though. A major advantage of refrigerator thawing is that you don’t have to cook the defrosted food right away — especially helpful if you’re faced with a last-minute change in plans.

    Poultry, fish and ground meat that’s been defrosted in the fridge can be kept for an additional 1 to 2 days in the refrigerator before cooking. Beef, pork, lamb or veal (roasts, steaks or chops) will keep refrigerated for another 3 to 5 days after thawing.

    Another plus: If you decide not to cook the thawed food, you can safely refreeze it within these same time limits.

    2. Cold Water Thawing

    The upside to this approach is that it’s much faster than refrigerator thawing. The downside is that it requires a lot more attention on your behalf.

    To thaw the food, submerge the bag in cold tap water. Never use hot water, as that can cause the outer layer of the food to heat up to a temperature where harmful bacteria begins to multiply . You’ll need to change the water every 30 minutes to ensure that it stays sufficiently cold.

    Using this thawing method, small packages of frozen meat or poultry (about a pound) can defrost in one hour or less. For larger items, you should estimate about 30 minutes of defrosting time per pound of food.

    Once the food is thawed completely, you’ll need to cook it immediately . If you have a change in plans, you can safely refreeze the food once you’ve cooked it thoroughly.

    3. Microwave Thawing

    The microwave, as you might expect, offers the speediest method of defrosting food.

    Set your microwave to the “defrost” or “50 percent power” setting while thawing to ensure that the outer edges of the food don’t become cooked while the remainder is still frozen. If you’re defrosting a package of meat, poultry or fish that is in pieces, separate them as the food thaws.

    If you use the microwave thawing method, you’ll need to cook the food immediately after it’s thawed. Once you’ve cooked the food, you can safely refreeze it if you like.

    How Not to Thaw Food

    It may be tempting to just leave your frozen food out on the cupboard to thaw — it’s easy and it’s fast. Don’t do it. Nor should you thaw food in hot water.

    The problem with both of those methods is that the outer layer of the food can sit between the bacteria-breeding temperatures of 40°F and 140 °F for far too long to be safe.

    For more information on safe defrosting, visit the U.S. Department of Agriculture’s Food Safety and Inspection Service Web site.

    Information on freezing dairy products, egg and other foods for best results. Garden-Robinson FN-616; FN616; food; nutrition; safety; dairy; eggs; freezing; preservation; NDSU; NDSU Extension Service 11.9999

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    The Spruce / Cara Cormack

    Did you forget to take the meat out of the freezer for dinner? When you need to thaw meat quickly, there are a few options. In about an hour, smaller cuts of meat can defrost in cold water, while a microwave makes the process even faster. You can also safely cook frozen meat. With any of these methods, a few tips and tricks will ensure the meat remains safe to eat.

    Refrigerator Thawing

    Though it may be too late for tonight’s dinner, it’s good to remember that the safest way to thaw meat is in the refrigerator. In an ideal world, everyone would plan ahead and set tomorrow’s dinner in the fridge overnight. The constant temperature allows the meat to defrost slowly and evenly, producing a better texture and taste when cooked. The cold also keeps it out of the “danger zone” for bacterial growth (between 40 F and 140 F).

    Depending on the size of the meat you need to thaw, this method may take a full day or longer. The U.S. Department of Agriculture’s (USDA) food safety guidelines state that a whole turkey requires a full day for every 5 pounds, while 1 pound of ground beef typically thaws in one day. Also, keep in mind that food stored in a chest freezer may take longer to thaw.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Cold Water Thawing Method

    When you need food on the table tonight and don’t have or want to use a microwave, the cold water approach is the best option. This method works best for small cuts of meat such as steaks, chicken breasts, ground beef, pork loin, etc. It’s not effective for whole birds and large roasts.

    1. Remove the meat from its packaging, and place it in a clean plastic sealable bag.
    2. Check the bag for leaks and press out as much air as possible before sealing—excess air will cause the bag to float, and the meat will not thaw as quickly.
    3. Submerge the bag in a bowl of cold water.
    4. Change the water every 30 minutes, until the meat has thawed.

    One pound of meat will often thaw in 30 minutes and shouldn’t take much more than an hour. To speed the process along, separate the individual pieces or cuts of meat as soon as they are thawed out enough to pull apart. If you are thawing more than a pound of meat, divide it up between multiple bowls of cold water, if possible.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Microwave Thawing Method

    Use the defrost setting (50 percent power) on your microwave to thaw meat in a matter of minutes. Most microwaves allow you to enter how many pounds of meat you need to thaw and will automatically calculate the recommended defrost time. If your microwave does not have a defrost mode, use the lowest power setting and heat the meat in short increments until thawed.

    When using this method, keep a close eye on things because defrosting can quickly cross over to cooking. You may need to interrupt the cycle to reposition the meat to get more even thawing.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Cooking Meat Without Thawing

    If you have a whole turkey, chicken, ham, or roast that you need to get on the table posthaste, your best bet is to cook it from a frozen state. It’s perfectly safe to cook frozen meat, but it will take about 50 percent longer. That’s a pretty good deal when you consider that it typically takes two days to thaw out a 10-pound bird in the fridge.

    Use a meat thermometer to determine when the meat has reached a safe internal temperature:

    • Chicken: 165 F
    • Turkey: 165 F
    • Beef, Pork, Veal, Lamb: 145 F
    • Ground Meat: 160 F
    • Cooked Ham: 140 F
    • Uncooked Ham: 145 F

    Do not cook frozen meat in a slow cooker. It thaws the meat too slowly and increases the chance of introducing bacteria, making it unsafe to eat.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Do Not Use These Thawing Methods

    Never thaw your meat at room temperature or in a cool area such as outdoors, garage, or basement. Don’t use hot water to thaw meat or leave defrosted meat at room temperature for more than two hours—refrigerate it immediately.

    Bacteria that can cause food poisoning will begin to multiply on meat that is above refrigerator temperature. The exterior may reach the danger zone while the interior remains frozen. You don’t want your meal or feast to result in misery, or even worse, so it’s always best to practice safe thawing methods.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    1. Home
    2. Cook
    3. How to Do It
    1. Home
    2. Cook
    3. How to Do It

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Microwaves sure do come in handy when we’re in a hurry to eat. Oatmeal can be made in two minutes. Soups can be reheated in two minutes. Even chicken dinners can be heated in just a couple minutes. But can microwaves safely thaw raw food?

    According to the USDA, microwaving is one of the three safe ways you can thaw your food to avoid foodborne illnesses. The other two methods considered OK are submerging in cold water and defrosting in the refrigerator for about 24 hours.

    While there are some foods you should never freeze, raw meat is a common freezer item and an integral ingredient in meals made completely from the freezer. But if you don’t have the time to thaw in the fridge or in cold water, then make sure you thaw safely in the microwave without ruining your meat.

    In order to safely thaw it in your microwave, you should first remove it from the packaging or plastic wrap it’s in.

    Put the raw meat on a microwave-safe plate and use the defrost button on your microwave. If you don’t have a rotating plate in your microwave, pause the microwave halfway through to rotate the plate yourself. This will ensure that every angle of the meat gets an even amount of heat.

    If your microwave doesn’t have a defrost button, turn the power level down to 30% and cook for about five to nine minutes depending on how thick the meat is.

    The important part of defrosting your meat this way is that you are prepared to cook immediately following this process. This is because the raw meat will have started cooking in the microwave, and to get it to a safe temperature to kill bacteria, you’ll need to keep cooking it through.

    Raw meats are just a few items that require proper defrosting. Wondering what else you’ve been defrosting incorrectly? Here’s how to thaw your foods the right way.

    It’s almost dinner time, and your ground beef is still in the freezer. Before you can get cooking, the beef has to be completely defrosted. Raw meat has to be thawed safely, to prevent the growth of harmful bacteria. We’ll share with you 4 safe and easy ways to defrost frozen ground beef.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Ground beef is a super versatile and inexpensive meat that can be used to create delicious meals your entire family will love. Whether you’re making casseroles, pastas, burgers or tacos, ground beef is a great ingredient to keep in your freezer for a quick and easy dinner.

    Best Ways to Defrost Ground Beef

    Method 1: Thaw the ground beef in the Refrigerator

    This is a foolproof method of safely defrosting ground beef. Simply move the meat from the freezer to the fridge. Let it thaw overnight. By keeping the meat cold while it’s defrosting, you can prevent the growth of bacteria.

    Method 2: Thaw it in the microwave

    When you’re in a time crunch, there’s nothing more convenient than using a microwave for defrosting. Most microwaves have a pre-programmed defrosting option that makes it super easy. Time should be adjusted based on the weight of the beef and the wattage of your microwave.

    Method 3: Defrost in the cold water

    This is a safe and easy method of defrosting that allows the meat to stay cool, thus preventing the growth of bacteria. Place the meat in a watertight plastic bag and fully submerge it in a bowl of cold water. Change the water every 30 minutes until the beef is completely thawed.

    Method 4: Use sous vide to defrost ground beef

    If you have a sous vide cooker, you can use it to defrost ground beef and other meats. Set the thermostat to a low temperature of around 35°F and allow the cool water to gradually and safely defrost the meat.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    How to Defrost Ground Beef Fast?

    When you’re pressed for time, the microwave is your best bet for defrosting ground beef. For best results try to break the frozen meat into smaller chunks, which will allow it to deforest more evenly and quickly. Go ahead and use the pre-programmed defrost button, and be sure to adjust the timing based on the weight of the beef.

    How to Quickly Defrost Ground Beef in a Microwave?

    The microwave is a quick and easy way to defrost meat if you forgot to take it out of the freezer before dinner time. It’s important to note that if you use the microwave, you should be ready to cook the beef right away, since some of the meat may actually begin cooking during the defrosting process. Use your microwave’s built-in defrost feature to remove the guesswork.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    How Long to Defrost Ground Beef?

    How long it takes to defrost ground beef will depend on the weight of the weight and the method you’re using to defrost. For a 1 pound package of ground beef, it takes about 24 hours in the refrigerator, while using a microwave will take about 3 minutes. When defrosting ground beef in a bowl of water, you will need about 90 minutes.

    How to Thaw Hamburger Meat?

    Hamburger meat can be thawed using the same methods used to defrost ground beef. You can use the refrigerator, sous vide, microwave or a bowl of cold water.

    Ground Beef Temperature

    Ground beef should be stored at freezing temperatures and ideally no higher than 40°F. For safe, fully cooked meat, ground beef needs to reach a temperature of 160°F.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    How to Cook Frozen Ground Beef Directly in an Instant Pot?

    When using an Instant Pot, you can cook ground beef without any prior thawing, making it a convenient option for busy weeknights. Add a cup of water to the Instant Pot and assemble the trivet or steamer insert. Add the frozen beef, close the lid and cook on high pressure for about 20 minutes. Allow an additional five minutes for the pressure to release naturally. If the meat is not fully cooked, discard the liquid from the pot and wipe the pot clean. Add some oil and use the sauté function to cook the beef until browned.

    How Long Does Ground Beef Last in the Fridge?

    If you have leftover ground beef, be sure to package and refrigerate it as soon as it’s cooled. Cooked ground beef can be stored in the fridge for up to 4 days, making it an ideal option for meal prep and large families.

    Can you defrost frozen cooked meat in the microwave? Why You Shouldn’t Defrost Meat in the Microwave
    The USDA says that thawing in the microwave is safe, but because it can quickly bring meat into the “danger zone” where bacteria multiply most rapidly, meat defrosted that way should be cooked immediately as soon as it’s thawed.

    How do you defrost cooked food in the microwave? To thaw out food in the microwave, remove the food from any store wrapping (foam trays or plastic wrap) that may release chemicals into food. Thaw on low heat for 6 to 8 minutes per pound of food. Once the food is defrosted, you can reheat it on high heat.

    How do you defrost precooked meat? Place the frozen cooked beef on the lowest shelf in the refrigerator. Segregating the beef from other foods prevents cross contamination. Allow approximately 30 minutes of defrosting time for every pound of frozen cooked beef. Cooked beef has less moisture than raw beef, which leads to shorter thawing time.

    How do you defrost something that is already cooked? It is recommended that you defrost ready-cooked foods in the fridge overnight or use the ‘defrost’ setting on a microwave. When freezing cooked food, freeze it in smaller portions to reduce the amount of time it will take to thaw. Defrost cooked foods separately from raw meat to reduce the risk of contamination.

    Can you defrost frozen cooked meat in the microwave? – Related Questions

    Is it safe to defrost cooked meat in the microwave?

    Yes, it is safe to thaw meat and poultry in a microwave oven. When microwave-thawing meat and poultry, plan to cook it immediately because some areas of the food may become warm and begin to cook. Foods thawed in the microwave may be refrozen after they are cooked.

    Can you microwave food from frozen?

    As food is defrosting in the microwave, the edges of the food may begin to warm or slightly cook while the inside of the food remains frozen. It is not safe to thaw food in the microwave and then put it in the refrigerator or a cooler to cook or grill later. Always cook microwave defrosted food immediately.

    Can you refreeze cooked meat that was previously frozen?

    You can cook frozen meat and fish once defrosted, and then refreeze them. You can refreeze cooked meat and fish once, as long as they have been cooled before going into the freezer. If in doubt, do not refreeze.

    Can you eat frozen cooked meat without reheating?

    It’s safer than eating cooked meat than has been stored in the refrigerator. More bacteria grows in the refrigerator than the freezer. You can eat it without any food safety concern with proper defrosting/thawing of course.

    Do you have to defrost cooked meat before reheating?

    Make sure they’re thoroughly defrosted before heating, by leaving them in the fridge or using a microwave. Reheat food until piping hot throughout.

    How do you unfreeze meat?

    The absolute best way to thaw frozen meats is by leaving it in the fridge until it’s completely thawed. If you’re crunched for time, take the meat out of it’s package, put it on a plate, and place it under cool RUNNING water.

    Can you reheat cooked chicken from frozen?

    The general rule is – one reheat after cooking. So the fact that you thawed it before cooking is not relevant. You can cook it and eat it, cook it and freeze it again or cook it, let it cool then reheat it. One you’ve reheated it once, you shouldn’t reheat it a second time – that CAN lead to food poisoning.

    Can you reheat stock from frozen?

    Once the stock has finished its cooking time it should be strained immediately. The stock can also be frozen for up to 3 months for later use, but again it is safest to reheat it only once after thawing.

    What meat can you defrost in a microwave?

    Press the defrost button on your microwave. If you don’t have a defrost button, set your microwave to cook at 20-30 percent of its full power. Set the cooking timer. Keep in mind that most meats, such as chicken, beef or pork must defrost for 8 – 10 minutes per pound.

    How do you defrost meat without a microwave?

    The Cold Water Method (One Hour)

    This is the best way to quickly and properly defrost meat without a microwave. Place your frozen cut of meat in a resealable plastic bag, squeezing out as much air as possible. Fill a large bowl with cold water and submerge the bag in the water.

    How do I cook frozen food?

    Preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Remove the food from the packaging and put it in an oven-safe container. Cover the container with foil so the food doesn’t dry out. Once the oven is up to temperature, bake for about 30 minutes or until the bowl reaches an internal temperature of 170 degrees.

    Is it bad to defrost chicken in the microwave?

    Why You Shouldn’t Defrost Meat in the Microwave

    The USDA says that thawing in the microwave is safe, but because it can quickly bring meat into the “danger zone” where bacteria multiply most rapidly, meat defrosted that way should be cooked immediately as soon as it’s thawed.

    Why can t you freeze meat twice?

    The effects of thawing and refreezing meat. Refreezing meat can be done safely, but the quality of the meat may be affected. For example, freezing and thawing meat more than one time might cause color and odor changes, moisture loss, and increased oxidation of its fat and protein ( 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 ).

    What is the only acceptable way to thaw food products?

    When thawing frozen food, it’s best to plan ahead and thaw in the refrigerator where it will remain at a safe, constant temperature — at 40 °F or below. There are three safe ways to thaw food: in the refrigerator, in cold water, and in the microwave.

    Is it safe to eat frozen food that has thawed and refrozen?

    You can safely refreeze frozen food that has thawed—raw or cooked, although there may be a loss of quality due to the moisture lost through thawing. To safely refreeze, the thawed product must have been kept cold at 40 degrees or below for no more than 3-4 days.

    Can you eat frozen meat without cooking?

    of Agriculture (USDA) advises: Once food is thawed in the refrigerator, it is safe to refreeze it without cooking, although there may be a loss of quality due to the moisture lost through thawing. After cooking raw foods which were previously frozen, it is safe to freeze the cooked foods.

    Can you cook pre cooked frozen chicken?

    According to the USDA, yes, you can safely cook your frozen chicken, as long as you follow a couple general guidelines. In order to skip the thawing step and turn your frozen chicken into a fully-cooked, safe-to-eat dinner, use your oven or stove top and simply increase your cooking time by at least 50%.

    Can you eat frozen food without cooking?

    Although frozen products might appear to be precooked or browned, they should be handled and prepared no differently than raw products and must be cooked. Even if you are preparing a cold salad, frozen produce must be cooked first. Check that frozen food in your freezer has not been recalled.

    Can you cook cooked meat from frozen?

    Yes! It is perfectly safe to cook meats from frozen. Cooking time will be approximately 50% longer than the recommended time for fully thawed or fresh meat and poultry. For more information on thawing, visit the USDA website.

    Does meat thaw faster in cold water?

    Thawing in cold water, 40 degrees or below, is safe and much faster — water transfers heat far more efficiently than air — but it can still take hours. All you need is hot water.

    What meat can you cook from frozen?

    A: Yes. It is perfectly safe to cook beef from frozen. As well as frozen steak, other beef cuts and joints. Whole cuts of meat, such as steaks and joints, only ever have bacteria on the outside surface of the meat.

    There is a microwave oven in just about every household. It has become a precious commodity around the world. You can do so many things in a microwave, such as cooking and reheating food! You can even fix cooking mistakes with a microwave! It seriously is a multitasking machine of amazingness! One of the things that a microwave can also do is help you when you’ve forgotten to thaw your meat the night before. That’s right! If you ever forget to thaw out meat in time to cook it, you can have peace of mind knowing that your microwave can save the day! Microwaves are made with a defrost button. This defrost button was designed to do exactly what it says. It defrosts frozen items! You can defrost different kinds of foods, including different kinds of raw meat! Do you want to know how to defrost meat in microwave ovens? Just use the defrost button! It is very easy, but let’s learn about safe and unsafe defrost methods first.

    Dangerous Ways to Defrost Your Meat

    It is very important to know the proper ways to defrost meat and how some ways can be dangerous. First of all, meat can go into something called a “danger zone.” This is when the meat falls within a range of temperature that promotes bacterial growth. This bacterial growth can make the meat toxic and make you sick when you eat it. The key to proper defrosting is to avoid the meat going into the danger zone. Let’s learn what methods forces meat into the danger zone that makes it an unsafe method to defrost.

    Don’t ever defrost your meat in hot water. It might sound like a great idea to thaw out your meat in a bowl of hot water to speed up the process; unfortunately, this is a foolproof method of making your meat toxic by putting it in a danger zone. The other unsafe method, that many people are tempted to do, is sitting your meat on your countertop at room temperature. If you need to cook the meat that evening, you might be tempted to sit it on top of your kitchen counter and let it slowly thaw out throughout the day. As easy and simple as this sounds, it too can put meat in the danger zone. You definitely don’t want to spoil your meat from unsafe defrost methods; so learn the many different safe ways that meat can be defrosted.

    Safe Ways to Defrost Your Meat

    There are several different ways to safely thaw out your meat without it going through the danger zone. It’s easy to keep your meat from encouraging bacterial growth, and one of those methods requires water. It is not using hot water though; because we’ve learned this method is dangerous. One of the ways you can thaw your meat using water is by placing it in a bowl of cold water. Hot water spikes the meat temperature into the danger zone, but cold water doesn’t. It keeps the meat in safe temperatures, while it also begins the thawing out process. It takes longer than hot water would, but that’s the point. It needs to slowly thaw to be safe. Make sure to never thaw your meat in hot water, but remember cold water is safe.

    The other safe and very popular method of defrosting your meat is simply sitting it in the fridge overnight. You just take the meat out of the freezer and sit it in the fridge. This gives the meat time to thaw out slowly and in safe temperatures. It won’t put the meat through the danger zone, and it will be ready to be cooked the next day. You plan ahead what you’re going to cook so that you get the meat ready to thaw out in the fridge the night before. Life happens! I know that things happen, and you might forget to thaw the meat overnight. That’s okay! Because the other popular method of thawing out meat is using that amazing little defrost button on your microwave.

    How Does Microwave Defrost Work and How to Use It

    The microwave defrost setting is a very popular way of defrosting your meat. You might be wondering how to defrost meat in microwave ovens without cooking the meat on the outside? Well, the way it works is that the defrost setting puts the microwave at a lower power. It is usually around 30%-50% of the full power. The lower power setting helps to start thawing out the center of the meat without cooking the outside. The microwave defrosts it for as many minutes as the meat’s weight; which is why it usually requests for you to input the weight of the meat when you go to defrost.

    If you want to thaw out meat in the microwave, you simply place the meat on a microwave-safe plate, sit it in the microwave, push the defrost button, input the weight of the meat, and hit start. Easy peasy! It’ll be thawed out and ready to cook with a few minutes. If you have an older microwave, and it doesn’t have a defrost button; you can still thaw out your meat in it. All you need to do is set the power setting of your microwave between 30% and 50%. Then microwave it for 8-10 minutes for each pound of meat you have. That is it! Microwaving meat to defrost is super easy! The only contingency to defrosting your meat in the microwave is that you have to cook it immediately!

    No More Stressing About Frozen Meat

    Now that you know how to defrost meat in microwave ovens, you no longer have to stress about your meat still being frozen when you go to cook it. Having to cook all the time, serve yourself and/or your family, washing dishes, and cleaning up is enough to worry about. Who can remember every single thing that needs to be done in a day anyway? If you don’t want to thaw your meat in the fridge overnight or if you forget to, you can just pop it in the microwave to defrost it. Microwaves continue to be essential in the family. You can reheat and cook in them, and now you know that you can defrost frozen meat in them as well! There are endless possibilities for microwaves these days. They’ve even started making microwaves that work like convection ovens as well. It is amazing! The next time you need to make you and your family a meal, remember that your microwave is indeed your friend.

    Defrosting meat can be done safely and easily with one of these four methods: refrigerator thaw, cold-water, microwave or cook meat frozen. When you need to get dinner on the table quickly, you need the fastest way to thaw meat.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Let’s talk about defrosting meat. This isn’t a very glamorous topic, but it’s an essential nuts-and-bolts topic that every home cook needs to know. If you’ve ever had questions like how to defrost ground beef, how to thaw steak fast, or can you thaw and re-freeze meat, this post is for you.

    One of the big benefits of buying beef in bulk from a farmer is having a freezer stocked with ground beef, well marbled steaks, and roasts. If you know how to thaw and defrost meat quickly, it makes it even easier to throw together a quick weeknight meal. However, when you do purchase farm-fresh beef, it is usually frozen due to USDA safety guidelines. That means you’ll need to thaw it.

    How to defrost meat safely:

    Please note, all of these recommendations come from the USDA’s Food Safety & Inspection Services.

    #1. Refrigerator thawing (the best method)

    Refrigerator thawing is our go-to method for defrosting meat. It does require a little advance planning, but it’s the safest way to thaw. Plus, if you change your mind about cooking the thawed meat, it is safe to rethaw with this method (note: it’s not safe to rethaw with any other defrosting method)

    With refrigerator thawin, you simple place the beef in the refrigerator until it’s thawed. Be sure to place the package on a plate to catch any drippings or juice that sneaks out as the meat defrosts.

    As you would expect, the amount of time it takes to thaw in the refrigerator is dependent upon the refrigerator’s temperature. Food will thaw faster in a refrigerator set a 40 °F, compared to 35 °F.

    Smaller cuts like a pound of hamburger or steak will take about 8-9 hours to thaw in a refrigerator. Larger items like roast and brisket will take a full 24 hours, maye longer.

    #2. Cold-water thawing

    This is our second favorite method of thawing beef. We use cold-water thawing whenever we haven’t planned ahead and don’t have time to do refrigerator thawing. Thankfully, cold-water thawing is very easy to do.

    Simply, place cold water in a bowl or pan and submerge your beef in the water until it’s thawed. Make sure the water is cold, not hot.

    In order to make sure the water stays cold while the beef is thawing, you can place the bowl under a faucet and let cold water trickle on it as it thaws.

    If you don’t like the idea of leaving your facuet on, you can also change the the cold water bath every 30 minutes so that the water remains cold and the meat keeps thawing.

    Make sure that the water stays cold. You don’t want to thaw beef in warm water. Although it would thaw faster in warm water, it also makes it more likely to get bacteria on the outer layer of beef.

    One pound of beef will take about one hour to defrost in a bowl of water, then it should be cooked right away.

    You should not refreeze meat that has been thawed using the cold-water method.

    #3. Microwave thawing

    This is our least favorite method since the beef usually starts to cook a little while you’re trying to thaw it. Only use this method if it’s a must.

    That said, thawing with a microwave does get points for being the fastest method. Simply press the defrost button and monitor your meat closely so that it doesn’t start to cook.

    Also, make sure you plan to cook the beef immediately after microwaving for food safety reasons. Unlike the refrigerator thawing method, you cannot refreeze meat that has been thawed in a microwave.

    #4. Cook it frozen

    Yes, you can cook frozen meat! You’ll love the results. We do it all the time with just about every cut of beef.

    In fact, some studies show that grilling steaks from frozen can be even better than traditional cooking methods.

    The biggest thing to remember if you do this is that the cooking time will take approximately 50% longer.

    Since the timing will be different than what you’re used to, be sure to closely monitor the temperature with an instant read thermometer so that you don’t overcook or undercook the meat.

    Is it ok to leave meat out to defrost?

    No! It is not safe to thaw meat on the counter. Do not thaw meat at room temperature.

    According to the USDA, “perishable foods should never be thawed on the counter, or in hot water and must not be left at room temperature for more than two hours.

    Even though the center of the package may still be frozen as it thaws on the counter, the outer layer of the food could be in the “Danger Zone, between 40 and 140 °F — temperatures where bacteria multiply rapidly.”

    Can defrosted meat be refrozen?

    Did you change your mind on what you’re having for dinner, and you want to refreeze the meat? You can only refreeze the meat if you used the regrigerator thawing method, and it’s important to note you may loose some of the meat’s quality.

    All other methods, you should cook the beef before refreezing to ensure that harmful bacteria doesn’t occur. , depending on how you thawed the meat.

    Why is it bad to thaw and refreeze meat?

    Although you can refreeze meat after you’ve thawed it in a refrigerator, there are two reasons it’s not ideal.

    First, have you ever noticed that frozen foods don’t taste quite as good as their fresh counterpart? That’s because freezing ruptures some of the cell walls, which leaches out moisture and slightly changes the product.

    Second, freezing and thawing foods has a lot of government safety guidelines (for restaurants and any industry dealing with food) because of harmful bacteria. In short, whenever food goes between frozen to thawed, it passes through the USDA and FSIS’s “Danger Zone,” between 40 and 140 °F.

    A cook’s overall goal is to reduce the amount of time spent in the Danger Zone AND minimize the number of times food passes through this danger zone so that there’s less chance for bacteria to develop. When you thaw and refreeze, or reheat and cool, food repeatedly, the food moves through the danger zone multiple times, which can lead to harmful bacteria.

    One more thing!

    Did you know we have an entire ebook about beef that goes through purchasing and preparing beef from a farmers perspective. Get it here.

    If you’d like to keep up with our farm, we have a weekly e-newsletter where we share about farm happenings, beef recipes, and when our next beef will be available to order. When you sign up, you’ll get a cheat sheet with 9-must-ask questions before buying beef directly from a farmer.

    Yes. Using your microwave to defrost food is safe, but you must cook the food immediately after it’s done defrosting. … Also, don’t microwave defrost any food that has already been sitting out of the freezer for more than 20 minutes. Instead, slowly defrost it in the fridge or in a bowl of cold water.

    How do you defrost cooked meat?

    Place the frozen cooked beef on the lowest shelf in the refrigerator. Segregating the beef from other foods prevents cross contamination. Allow approximately 30 minutes of defrosting time for every pound of frozen cooked beef. Cooked beef has less moisture than raw beef, which leads to shorter thawing time.

    Can you defrost frozen cooked meat in the microwave?

    Yes, it is safe to thaw meat and poultry in a microwave oven. When microwave-thawing meat and poultry, plan to cook it immediately because some areas of the food may become warm and begin to cook. … Foods thawed in the microwave may be refrozen after they are cooked.

    How do you defrost something that is already cooked?

    It is recommended that you defrost ready-cooked foods in the fridge overnight or use the ‘defrost’ setting on a microwave. When freezing cooked food, freeze it in smaller portions to reduce the amount of time it will take to thaw. Defrost cooked foods separately from raw meat to reduce the risk of contamination.

    Does defrosting meat in the microwave make it tough?

    Microwave ovens have a tough time thawing evenly, even at reduced power levels, so quickly repositioning the food makes a big difference. For raw meat, you want it to be thawed but still cold throughout. If only a small portion is still icy, stop thawing and start cooking.

    Can you defrost cooked meat in the oven?

    And finally, Meatsafety.org declares: “It is safe to cook frozen meat or poultry in the oven, on the stove, or grill without defrosting it first; the cooking time may be about 50 percent longer.

    Do you have to defrost cooked meat before reheating?

    Make sure they’re thoroughly defrosted before heating, by leaving them in the fridge or using a microwave. Reheat food until piping hot throughout.

    How do you reheat frozen cooked meat?

    To reheat frozen meat, do so in a 350F degree oven, covered so it doesn’t dry out. Insert a knife into the thickest part of the meat and if it’s hot to the touch you’ll know the inside is too. Freeze meat right in its marinade and let it soak up the flavour as it defrosts.

    Most microwave ovens have an Auto (sometimes called Weight) Defrost feature. Auto Defrost or Weight Defrost is a quick and easy way to defrost foods. You can use Auto Defrost or Weight Defrost for meat, poultry and fish up to 6 pounds in weight. Auto Defrost or Weight Defrost automatically sets the defrosting times and power levels to give even defrosting results for meats, poultry and fish.

    Depending upon the age and design of the microwave, there are several different ways to set up the Auto Defrost or Weight Defrost feature. See the Owner’s Manual for model specific instructions for using this feature on your microwave.

    Some models with Auto Defrost will allow you to select the type and weight of the item to be defrosted.

    The following steps are typical of this type of Auto Defrost:

    Touch the AUTO DEFROST pad.

    Enter the proper code (one for meat, two for poultry or three for seafood).

    Enter the weight ( .1 pounds to 6 pounds) per the weight listed on the food’s packaging.

    Press the START/PAUSE pad.

    The oven will signal as a reminder to turn or stir the food midway through the cycle. After turning or stirring the food, close the door and press the START/PAUSE pad again.

    Some models with Weight Defrost only have you enter the weight of the item to be defrosted.

    The following steps are typical of this type of Weight Defrost:

    Touch the WEIGHT DEFROST pad.

    Enter the food weight per the weight listed on the food’s packaging. Some models have you enter the weight in pounds and other models have a conversion chart that have you enter the weight in pounds and ounces.

    Press the START/PAUSE pad.

    There are also some older models that use six different codes for the Auto Defrost function. As mentioned, you should check the Owner’s Manual for your specific model for instructions on using the Auto Defrost or Weight Defrost feature.

    The Auto or Weight Defrost feature is a great way to defrost meat, poultry or fish quickly so you can then prepare it for a meal.

    Do you need advices on how to use or maintain your appliances? Are you looking for a tip for choosing the best product according to your needs? Write to us and we will answer your questions.

    If you need technical support, please contact the Service online.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Freezing and defrosting meat

    The Covid-19 pandemic has changed lots of our habits, and grocery shopping is no exception. In order to avoid stores and to shop less frequently, we now tend to stockpile meat, and the freezer has become our best friend in the kitchen. This is why it’s important to know how to defrost food items at best and safely in a microwave, another kitchen must-have.

    Keep reading to discover more.

    Defrost function

    Pork chops, hamburger, chicken legs, veal roast. All types of meat can be easily frozen, but what about the defrosting process? It is as easy and quick as putting something in the freezer: just follow our suggestions. First of all, make sure that your microwave comes with the Defrost function: usually, you can find the defrost symbol (a snowflake or a snowflake with a drop) on the control panel. Then, take your piece of meat out of the freezer and place it in a microwave-safe container. After that, set the dedicated settings. Candy microwaves, for example, let you choose between two options:

    • Defrosting by weight. Select the weight of your produce (from 100 g to 2 kg) and the appropriate defrosting is automatically set;
    • Defrosting by time. You can choose the defrosting time from 10 up to 95 min.

    Steam defrosting

    Have you ever tried to steam defrost your meat? If not, you should.

    Thanks to the steam accessory suitable for microwaves, you can get amazing defrosting results. In fact, this process guarantees a very uniform thawing, as well as the preservation of your meat nutrients.

    Here are the detailed instructions to defrost meat at best with the Candy microwaves:

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    *Results tested with Candy COOKinAPP steam edition.

    Precious tips

    We have just learned the basics of meat microwave thawing. Here’ a roundup of useful tips that can ease and improve the defrosting process:

    • cook the meat immediately after defrosting it in the microwave;
    • refreeze microwave thawed food only after cooking it.;
    • use only containers, lids and wraps that are clearly marked as microwave-safe;
    • before defrosting, remove the food from unsafe packaging, such as polystyrene trays, plastic wraps that touch the food, and freezer carton boxes.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    Although defrosting meat in the refrigerator is the preferred and safest method, if your stew beef is frozen and you are in a hurry to use it, you can use the microwave to defrost your meat. Stew beef chunks have the advantage of being easier and faster to defrost than large, single pieces of meat and are less likely to develop overcooked areas. Once you defrost the stew beef, use it immediately to prepare your favorite stew.

    Video of the Day

    Step 1

    Remove the frozen stew beef from its wrapper. You may need to briefly dip the package in cold water to loosen the frozen mass from the wrapper.

    Step 2

    Place the frozen stew beef in a microwave-safe dish and place it in the microwave. If your microwave has a special defrost shelf, insert the defrost shelf into the microwave before putting the dish on it.

    Step 3

    Press the “Defrost” button. Enter a weight amount, a defrost time or both. Each microwave is different, so consult your microwave instructions for the exact procedure. If your microwave offers a list of suggested defrost times, enter one minute less than the suggested time to make sure you do not cook the stew beef. A pound of beef may take five to seven minutes to defrost in an 1800 watt microwave oven.

    Step 4

    Pause the microwave halfway through the defrost cycle and separate the pieces of meat, turning them over and moving them around, so that each piece is evenly defrosted. Turn the dish 180 degrees if your microwave does not have a carousel. Continue defrosting until the pieces are soft but still cold. It is okay if some pieces still have a few ice crystals.

    Step 5

    Remove the stew beef from the microwave and let stand for about five minutes on the counter. Use the stew beef immediately.

    Err on the side of having slightly frozen pieces rather than partially cooked pieces. Check the meat every minute and be prepared to pull your beef out before the cycle is complete.

    Once cooked, you can freeze the stew, but do not refreeze defrosted raw meat.

    Warning

    Never defrost meat on the counter as this can lead to the growth of bacteria.

    How to defrost meat in the microwave

    I grew up quickly defrosting meat — without a microwave. In fact, I’ve almost never used a microwave to defrost meat.

    That’s because my method is often faster than a microwave and defrosts the meat more evenly.

    Nothing’s more annoying when it’s time to cook dinner than discovering your “defrosted” meat has a frozen center and cooked edges. Am I right?

    With this method, you won’t have that problem again.

    Wouldn’t fresh, never-frozen meat be better?

    There’s no way around it. I keep a freezer full of meat from grass-fed and pasture-raised animals in my garage.

    Every year, we buy a heritage breed hog from one of our friends, buy half a cow from a local rancher whose cattle are grass-fed, and buy however many pasture-raised hens we have room for.

    They’re all processed by a local butcher and stored out in our freezer.

    This is the only way to keep the meat affordable (I’m usually paying less than $3/lb for these beauties).

    So, while I’d love to have “fresh, never frozen” meat, that’s just not Real Life.

    I know I’m not alone in this.

    Don’t have a local grass-based farmer to buy bulk meat from?

    I recommend buying online from the folks at US Wellness Meats. I’ve been recommending them to readers for going on a decade now, and they’ve never failed to provide outstanding customer service and receive glowing reviews.

    They’ve got everything from grass-fed, sugar-free, nitrate-free hot dogs to pasture-raised chickens to your basic grass-fed ground beef.

    (Click here to check out US Wellness Meats!)

    Are there really only two ways to defrost meat?

    Any time I share a Facebook post about kicking your microwave to the curb, I inevitably get a comment like this one:

    “I really want to do this. But how do you defrost meat quickly without a microwave?”

    Many of my readers seem to think that defrosting is something that can only be done one of two ways:

    1. Meat is moved from the freezer to the refrigerator, where it slowly defrosts over the next 24 hours.

    2. Meat is defrosted in the microwave.

    I don’t use either method.

    That’s because option #1 requires planning ahead, and I’m really terrible at that.

    And option #2 usually defrosts unevenly (plus I hate microwaves).

    So, what’s the big trick?

    How do I defrost meat quickly?

    I use hot water.

    Perhaps you’ve heard that quickly defrosting meat this way isn’t safe. That’s simply not true.

    USDA researches have tested various methods for defrosting meat using 200 one inch thick beef steaks:

    Air-thawing in the refrigerator took 18 to 20 hours, while the room-temperature water bath thawed the steaks in about 20 minutes, and the hot-summer-day bath in 11 minutes. These water-bath times are so short that any bacterial growth would remain within safe limits.
    (source)

    Notice that the warmer the water was, the quicker the defrost time.

    In fact researchers at Utah State took it a step further, defrosting chicken breasts in 140F degree water.

    That temperature is hot enough to eventually cook the breasts to medium-rare, but if you remove them when they’re defrosted (usually within 3-5 minutes), they’ll show no signs of cooking (source).

    I usually opt for a middle ground.

    I use the hottest water available from my kitchen sink tap. In my case, that’s 118F because that’s the temperature we’ve set our hot water heater to.

    Defrosting meat quickly using hot water: step-by-step instructions.

    It’s super simple, really.

    • STEP ONE: Run kitchen tap water until it’s as hot as it can get.
    • STEP TWO: Plug the drain and fill your sink about half full with hot water.
    • STEP THREE: Submerge your frozen meat in the hot water to defrost.

    The length of defrost time will vary based on a few factors:

    1. How thick the cut of meat is. As a general rule of thumb, meat that’s an inch thick takes about 10 minutes to defrost this way. If it’s half an inch thick, it takes half that time. If it’s a couple inches thick, it takes twice that time.

    2. How the meat is packaged. If it’s got insulating layers of plastic or paper wrap around it, it will take slightly longer to defrost. If it’s at all possible, I generally remove the packaging and place the frozen meat directly in the hot water bath.

    3. The volume & movement of the water. The more hot water you have, and whether or not you occasionally stir your defrosting meat can also impact length of defrost time. That’s because the frozen meat can form a “cool spot” in the water. So if you stir the water and meat every couple minutes, you’ll help displace the cool spot and keep your meat defrosting more quickly.

    Do you ever feel guilty eating meat? Don’t!

    Did you know that your brain needs saturated fat to function? And that multiple studies show that saturated fat does not cause heart disease like we used to think?

    How to conduct a simulation analysis

    The Basic Steps of a Simulation Study
    The application of simulation involves specific steps in order for the simulation study to be successful. Regardless of the type of problem and the objective of the study, the process by which the simulation is performed remains constant. The following briefly describes the basic steps in the simulation process [6, 7]:

      Problem Definition
      The initial step involves defining the goals of the study and determing what needs to be solved. The problem is further defined through objective observations of the process to be studied. Care should be taken to determine if simulation is the appropriate tool for the problem under investigation.

    Project Planning
    The tasks for completing the project are broken down into work packages with a responsible party assigned to each package. Milestones are indicated for tracking progress. This schedule is necessary to determine if sufficient time and resources are available for completion.

    System Definition
    This step involves identifying the system components to be modeled and the preformance measures to be analyzed. Often the system is very complex, thus defining the system requires an experienced simulator who can find the appropriate level of detail and flexibility.

    Model Formulation
    Understanding how the actual system behaves and determining the basic requirements of the model are necessary in developing the right model. Creating a flow chart of how the system operates facilitates the understanding of what variables are involved and how these variables interact.

    Input Data Collection & Analysis
    After formulating the model, the type of data to collect is determined. New data is collected and/or existing data is gathered. Data is fitted to theoretical distributions. For example, the arrival rate of a specific part to the manufacturing plant may follow a normal distribution curve.

    Model Translation
    The model is translated into programming language. Choices range from general purpose languages such as fortran or simulation programs such as Arena.

    Verification & Validation
    Verification is the process of ensuring that the model behaves as intended, usually by debugging or through animation. Verification is necessary but not sufficient for validation, that is a model may be verified but not valid. Validation ensures that no significant difference exists between the model and the real system and that the model reflects reality. Validation can be achieved through statistical analysis. Additionally, face validity may be obtained by having the model reviewed and supported by an expert.

    Experimentation & Analysis
    Experimentation involves developing the alternative model(s), executing the simulation runs, and statistically comparing the alternative(s) system performance with that of the real system.

  • Documentation & Implementation
    Documentation consists of the written report and/or presentation. The results and implications of the study are discussed. The best course of action is identified, recommended, and justified.
  • Decisions for Simulating
    Completing the required steps of a simulation study establishes the likelihood of the study’s success. Although knowing the basic steps in the simulation study is important, it is equally important to realize that not every problem should be solved using simulation. In the past, simulation required the specialized training of programmers and analysts dedicated to very large and complex projects. Now, due to the large number of software available, simulation at times is used inappropriately by individuals lacking the sufficient training and experience. When simulation is applied inappropriately, the study will not produce meaningful results. The failure to achieve the desired goals of the simulation study may induce blaming the simulation approach itself when in fact the cause of the failure lies in the inappropriate application of simulation [8].

    To recognize if simulation is the correct approach to solving a particular problem, four items should be evaluated before deciding to conduct the study:

    1. Type of Problem
    2. Availability of Resources
    3. Costs
    4. Availability of Data

    Type of Problem: If a problem can be solved by common sense or analytically, the use of simulation is unnecessary. Additionally, using algorithms and mathematical equations may be faster and less expensive than simulating. Also, if the problem can be solved by performing direct experiments on the system to be evaluated, then conducting direct experiments may be more desirable than simulating. To illustrate, recently the UH Transportation Department conducted field studies on expanding the campus shuttle system. The department used their own personnel and vehicles to perform the experiment during the weekend. In contrast, developing the simulation model for the shuttle system took one student several weeks to complete. However, one factor to consider when performing directing experiments is the degree in which the real system will be disturbed. If a high degree of disruption to the real system will occur, then another approach may be necessary.The real system itself plays another factor in deciding to simulate. If the system is too complex, cannot be defined, and not understandable then simulation will not produce meaningful results. This situation often occurs when human behavior is involved.

    Availability of Resources: People and time are the determining resources for conducting a simulation study. An experienced analyst is the most important resource since such a person has the ability and experience to determine both the model’s appropriate level of detail and how to verify and validate the model. Without a trained simulator, the wrong model may be developed which produces unreliable results. Additionally, the allocation of time should not be so limited so as to force the simulator to take shortcuts in designing the model. The schedule should allow enough time for the implementation of any necessary changes and for verification and validation to take place if the results are to be meaningful.

    Costs: Cost considerations should be given for each step in the simulation process, purchasing simulation software if not already available, and computer resources. Obviously if these costs exceed the potential savings in altering the current system, then simulation should not be pursued.

    Availability of Data: The necessary data should be identified and located, and if the data does not exist, then the data should be collectible. If the data does not exist and cannot be collected, then continuing with the simulation study will eventually yield unreliable and useless results. The simulation output cannot be compared to the real system’s performance, which is vital for verifying and validating the model.

    The basic steps and decisions for a simulation study are incorporated into a flowchart as shown below:

    Steps and Decisions for Conducting a Simulation Study

    Once simulation has been identified as the preferred approach to solving a particular problem, the decision to implement the course of action suggested by the simulation study’s results does not necessarily signify the end of the study, as indicated in the flowchart above. The model may be maintained to check the system’s response to variabilities experienced by the real system. However, the extent to which the model may be maintained largely depends on the model’s flexibility and what questions the model was originally designed to address.

    Get full access to Quantitative Techniques: Theory and Problems and 60K+ other titles, with free 10-day trial of O’Reilly.

    There’s also live online events, interactive content, certification prep materials, and more.

    STEPS IN THE SIMULTATION PROCESS

    Although simulations vary in complexity from situation to situation, in general one would have to go through the following steps:

    Step 1→ Define the problem or system you intended to simulate.
    Step 2→ Formulate the model you intend to use.
    Step 3→ Test the model; compare its behaviour with the behaviour of the actual problem.
    Step 4→ Identify and collect the data needed to test the model.
    Step 5→ Run the simulation
    Step 6→ Analyze the results of the simulation and, if desired, change the solution you are evaluating.
    Step 7→ Rerun the simulation to test the new solution.
    Step 8→ Validate the simulation; this involves increasing the chances of the inferences you may draw about the real situation .

    Get Quantitative Techniques: Theory and Problems now with the O’Reilly learning platform.

    O’Reilly members experience live online training, plus books, videos, and digital content from nearly 200 publishers.

    Averill M. Law & Associates, Inc., Tucson, AZ

    Averill M. Law & Associates, Inc., Tucson, AZ

      10 citation 687 Downloads

    New Citation Alert added!

    This alert has been successfully added and will be sent to:

    You will be notified whenever a record that you have chosen has been cited.

    To manage your alert preferences, click on the button below.

    New Citation Alert!

    Save to Binder
    • Cancel Create
    WSC ’03: Proceedings of the 35th conference on Winter simulation: driving innovation

    ABSTRACT

    In this tutorial we give a definitive and comprehensive seven-step approach for conducting a successful simulation study. Topics to be discussed include problem formulation, collection and analysis of data, developing a valid and credible model, modeling sources of system randomness, design and analysis of simulation experiments, and project management.

    Get full access to this Publication

    Purchase, subscribe or recommend this publication to your librarian.

    Already a Subscriber?Sign In

    References

    1. Banks, J., J. S. Carson, B. L. Nelson, and D. M. Nicol. 2001. Discrete-Event System Simulation, Third Edition, Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle River, N.J. Google Scholar
    2. Law, A. M. and W. D. Kelton. 2000. Simulation Modeling and Analysis, Third Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York. Google Scholar

    Comments

    Login options

    Check if you have access through your login credentials or your institution to get full access on this article.

    Full Access

    • Information
    • Contributors
    • Published in

      • General Chair:
      • David Ferrin

      ,

    • Program Chair:
    • Douglas J. Morrice

      The University of Texas at Austin, Austin, TX

      You are here

      • Home
      • Simulation Methods

      Simulation

      Simulation is a flexible methodology we can use to analyze the behavior of a present or proposed business activity, new product, manufacturing line or plant expansion, and so on (analysts call this the ‘system’ under study). By performing simulations and analyzing the results, we can gain an understanding of how a present system operates, and what would happen if we changed it — or we can estimate how a proposed new system would behave. Often — but not always — a simulation deals with uncertainty, in the system itself, or in the world around it.

      Simulation Applications

      Simulation is one of the most widely used quantitative methods — because it is so flexible and can yield so many useful results. Here’s just a sample of the applications where simulation is used:

      • Choosing drilling projects for oil and natural gas
      • Evaluating environmental impacts of a new highway or industrial plant
      • Setting stock levels to meet fluctuating demand at retail stores
      • Forecasting sales and production requirements for a new drug
      • Planning aircraft sorties and ship movements in the military
      • Planning for retirement, given expenses and investment performance
      • Deciding on reservations and overbooking policies for an airline
      • Selecting projects with uncertain payoffs in capital budgeting

      Simulation Models

      In a simulation, we perform experiments on a model of the real system, rather than the real system itself. We do this because it is faster, cheaper, or safer to perform experiments on the model. While simulations can be performed using physical models — such as a scale model of an airplane — our focus here is on simulations carried out on a computer.

      Computer simulations use a mathematical model of the real system. In such a model we use variables to represent key numerical measures of the inputs and outputs of the system, and we use formulas, programming statements, or other means to express mathematical relationships between the inputs and outputs. When the simulation deals with uncertainty, the model will include uncertain variables — whose values are not under our control — as well as decision variables or parameters that we can control. The uncertain variables are represented by random number generators that return sample values from a representative distribution of possible values for each uncertain element in each experimental trial or replication of the model. A simulation run includes many hundreds or thousands of trials.

      Our simulation model — often called a risk model — will calculate the impact of the uncertain variables and the decisions we make on outcomes that we care about, such as profit and loss, investment returns, environmental consequences, and the like. As part of our model design, we must choose how numerical values for the uncertain variables will be sampled on each trial.

      Simulation Methods

      Complex manufacturing and logistics systems often call for discrete event simulation, where there are “flows” of materials or parts, people, etc. through the system, and many steps or stages with complex interrelationships. Special simulation modeling languages are often used for these applications.

      But a great many situations — including almost all of the examples above — have been successfully handled with simulation models created in a spreadsheet using Microsoft Excel. This minimizes the learning curve, since you can apply your spreadsheet skills to create the model. Simple steps or stages, such as inventory levels in different periods, are easy to represent in columns of a spreadsheet model. You can solve a wide range of problems with Monte Carlo simulation of models created in Excel, or in a programming language such as Visual Basic, C++ or C#.

      Running a simulation generates a great deal of statistical data, that must be analyzed with appropriate tools. Professional simulation software, such as Frontline Systems’ Risk Solver, allows you to easily create charts and graphs, a wide range of statistics and risk measures, perform sensitivity analysis and parameterized simulations, and use advanced methods for simulation optimization.

      Monte Carlo Simulation

      Monte Carlo simulation — named after the city in Monaco famed for its casinos and games of chance — is a powerful method for studying the behavior of a system, as expressed in a mathematical model on a computer. As the name implies, Monte Carlo methods rely on random sampling of values for uncertain variables, that are “plugged into” the simulation model and used to calculate outcomes of interest. With the aid of software, we can obtain statistics and view charts and graphs of the results. To learn more, consult our Monte Carlo simulation tutorial.

      Monte Carlo simulation is especially helpful when there are several different sources of uncertainty that interact to produce an outcome. For example, if we’re dealing with uncertain market demand, competitors’ pricing, and variable production and raw materials costs at the same time, it can be very difficult to estimate the impacts of these factors — in combination — on Net Profit. Monte Carlo simulation can quickly analyze thousands of ‘what-if’ scenarios, often yielding surprising insights into what can go right, what can go wrong, and what we can do about it.

      Simulation modeling solves real-world problems safely and efficiently. It provides an important method of analysis which is easily verified, communicated, and understood. Across industries and disciplines, simulation modeling provides valuable solutions by giving clear insights into complex systems.

      Bits not atoms. Simulation enables experimentation on a valid digital representation of a system. Unlike physical modeling, such as making a scale copy of a building, simulation modeling is computer based and uses algorithms and equations. Simulation software provides a dynamic environment for the analysis of computer models while they are running, including the possibility to view them in 2D or 3D.

      The uses of simulation in business are varied and it is often utilized when conducting experiments on a real system is impossible or impractical, often because of cost or time.

      The ability to analyze the model as it runs sets simulation modeling apart from other methods, such as those using Excel or linear programming. By being able to inspect processes and interact with a simulation model in action, both understanding and trust are quickly built.

      To learn how simulation is different from traditional mathematical modeling and check if it is applicable to your challenges, try AnyLogic yourself — download the Personal Learning Edition for free. This version is specially designed for self-learning, so you can freely explore the world of simulation!

      Alternatively, start with our white paper based on the presentation by Lyle Wallis, director at PwC. It compares different approaches for modeling and analyzing business strategies and demonstrates the commercial use of simulation with case studies from world-famous companies.

      risk-free environment

      save money and time

      visualization

      insight into dynamics

      increased accuracy

      handle uncertainty

      The Use of Simulation with an Example: Simulation Modeling for Efficient Customer Service

      This specific example may also be applicable to the more general problem of human and technical resource management, where companies naturally seek to lower the cost of underutilized resources, technical experts, or equipment, for example.

      Finding the optimum number of staff to deliver a predefined quality of service to customers visiting a bank.

      Firstly, for the bank, the level of service was defined as the average queue size. Relevant system measures were then selected to set the parameters of the simulation model – the number and frequency of customer arrivals, the time a teller takes to attend a customer, and the natural variations which can occur in all of these, in particular, lunch hour rushes and complex requests.

      A flowchart corresponding to the structure and processes of the department was then created. Simulation models only need to consider those factors which impact the problem being analyzed. For example, the availability of office services for corporate accounts, or the credit department have no effect on those for individuals, because they are physically and functionally separate.

      How to conduct a simulation analysis

      Finally, after feeding the model data, the simulation could be run and its operation seen over time, allowing refinement and analysis of the results. If the average queue size exceeded the specified limit, the number of available staff was increased and a new experiment was done. It is possible for this to happen automatically until an optimal solution is found.

      Overall, multiple scenarios may be explored very quickly by varying parameters. They can be inspected and queried while in action and compared against each other. The results of the modeling and simulation, therefore, give confidence and clarity for analysts, engineers, and managers alike.

      Simulation is the best approach for addressing business challenges

      Learn why in the white paper Developing Disruptive Business Strategies with Simulation

      The RMS simulation tool in PowerFactory can be used to analyse mid-term and long-term transients under both balanced and unbalanced conditions, incorporating a simulation scan feature. DIgSILENT Simulation Language (DSL) is used for model definition, and a large library of IEEE standard models is available. Flexible co-simulation options are also available.

      • Multi-phase AC networks, DC networks
      • Support of balanced and unbalanced grid conditions
      • Fast, fixed step size and adaptive step size algorithm
      • A-stable numerical integration algorithms supporting long-term stability simulations with integration step sizes ranging from milliseconds to minutes, individually selectable for each model
      • High precision event and interrupt handling
      • Simulation of any kind of fault or event
      • Transient motor starting (synchr./asynchr. machines)
      • Support of all protection library relays
      • Real-time simulation mode
      • Simulation scan feature, e.g. frequency scan, loss of synchronism scan, synchronous machine speed scan, voltage-/voltage recovery scan, fault ride through scan or common variable scan
      • Frequency Analysis Tool, including Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) and Prony Analysis for single point in time as well as time-range assessment
      • Frequency Response Analysis tool for dynamic models with Bode/Nyquist plots

      User-Defined Dynamic Models

      • DIgSILENT Simulation Language (DSL) for Dynamic RMS Modelling
        • Graphical editor for drawing any kind of block diagram (AVR, prime mover, relay, etc.)
        • Fully flexible signal wiring schemes having access to any grid object and their parameters via definition of Frames
        • Support of vector signals and signal multiplexing
        • Nesting of frames and model building blocks
        • Fully flexible definition of simulation functions via the DSL syntax
        • High precision built-in macros and functions
        • Automatic initialisation of complex, non-linear models
        • Configuration scripts for initialisation using DPL
        • Large built-in standard model library, including IEEE and CIM ENTSO-E models
        • Generic C interface for user-defined controller models
        • IEC61400-27-1 Ed. 1 Appendix F DLL based interface for external models
        • Automatic DSL-to-C interface converter
        • Support of model pre-compilation for improved performance
        • OPC interface 1 for real-time applications
        • IEEE C37.118 simulation interface 2 for PMU data streaming
        • DSL Encryption function 3
      • Modelica Simulation Language
        • Support of Modelica Simulation Language for discrete-time models
      • Integration of external models using FMI (Functional Mock-up Interface)
        • Support of Functional Mock-Up Unit (FMU) import for Model Exchange
        • FMU export of Modelica models 4

      Co-Simulation Functionality

      • Single domain co-simulation (RMS balanced – RMS balanced, RMS unbalanced – RMS unbalanced)
      • Multiple domain co-simulation (RMS balanced – RMS unbalanced – EMT 5 )
      • Co-simulation with external solver 6 (e.g. third party power systems ­simulation program) using FMI 2.0 (Functional Mock-Up Interface)
      • Computing supported as built-in for increased performance
      • Both accurate (implicit) and fast (explicit) co-simulation methods ­available
      • Support of multi-port Norton/Thevenin remote network equivalents for explicit method
      • Easy to define co-simulation border using boundary objects
      • Any number of co-simulation regions can be defined
      • Co-simulation of networks split by regions depending on any criteria: localisation, voltage levels, etc.

      1 This function has to be requested separately
      2 C37 Simulation Interface licence required
      3 Licence for DPL/DSL/QDSL encryption required. Encryption Function licence. DIgSILENT does not give any express warranties or guarantees for cryptographic security of encrypted models. In particular, DIgSILENT does not guarantee that the details and functionalities of an encrypted model are secure against all means of access or attack attempts.
      4 Requires FMU Model Export licence
      5 EMT licence required
      6 Requires separate Co-Simulation Interface licence

      How to conduct a simulation analysis

      How to conduct a simulation analysis

      How to conduct a simulation analysis

      What Is a Monte Carlo Simulation?

      Monte Carlo simulations are used to model the probability of different outcomes in a process that cannot easily be predicted due to the intervention of random variables. It is a technique used to understand the impact of risk and uncertainty in prediction and forecasting models.

      A Monte Carlo simulation can be used to tackle a range of problems in virtually every field such as finance, engineering, supply chain, and science. It is also referred to as a multiple probability simulation.

      Key Takeaways

      • A Monte Carlo simulation is a model used to predict the probability of different outcomes when the intervention of random variables is present.
      • Monte Carlo simulations help to explain the impact of risk and uncertainty in prediction and forecasting models.
      • A variety of fields utilize Monte Carlo simulations, including finance, engineering, supply chain, and science.
      • The basis of a Monte Carlo simulation involves assigning multiple values to an uncertain variable to achieve multiple results and then averaging the results to obtain an estimate.
      • Monte Carlo simulations assume perfectly efficient markets.

      Monte Carlo Simulation

      Understanding Monte Carlo Simulations

      When faced with significant uncertainty in the process of making a forecast or estimation, rather than just replacing the uncertain variable with a single average number, the Monte Carlo Simulation might prove to be a better solution by using multiple values.

      Since business and finance are plagued by random variables, Monte Carlo simulations have a vast array of potential applications in these fields. They are used to estimate the probability of cost overruns in large projects and the likelihood that an asset price will move in a certain way.

      Telecoms use them to assess network performance in different scenarios, helping them to optimize the network. Analysts use them to assess the risk that an entity will default, and to analyze derivatives such as options.

      Insurers and oil well drillers also use them. Monte Carlo simulations have countless applications outside of business and finance, such as in meteorology, astronomy, and particle physics.

      Monte Carlo Simulation History

      Monte Carlo simulations are named after the popular gambling destination in Monaco, since chance and random outcomes are central to the modeling technique, much as they are to games like roulette, dice, and slot machines.

      The technique was first developed by Stanislaw Ulam, a mathematician who worked on the Manhattan Project. After the war, while recovering from brain surgery, Ulam entertained himself by playing countless games of solitaire. He became interested in plotting the outcome of each of these games in order to observe their distribution and determine the probability of winning. After he shared his idea with John Von Neumann, the two collaborated to develop the Monte Carlo simulation.

      Monte Carlo Simulation Method

      The basis of a Monte Carlo simulation is that the probability of varying outcomes cannot be determined because of random variable interference. Therefore, a Monte Carlo simulation focuses on constantly repeating random samples to achieve certain results.

      A Monte Carlo simulation takes the variable that has uncertainty and assigns it a random value. The model is then run and a result is provided. This process is repeated again and again while assigning the variable in question with many different values. Once the simulation is complete, the results are averaged together to provide an estimate.

      Calculating a Monte Carlo Simulation in Excel

      One way to employ a Monte Carlo simulation is to model possible movements of asset prices using Excel or a similar program. There are two components to an asset’s price movement: drift, which is a constant directional movement, and a random input, which represents market volatility.

      By analyzing historical price data, you can determine the drift, standard deviation, variance, and average price movement of a security. These are the building blocks of a Monte Carlo simulation.

      To project one possible price trajectory, use the historical price data of the asset to generate a series of periodic daily returns using the natural logarithm (note that this equation differs from the usual percentage change formula):

      Next use the AVERAGE, STDEV.P, and VAR.P functions on the entire resulting series to obtain the average daily return, standard deviation, and variance inputs, respectively. The drift is equal to:

      Alternatively, drift can be set to 0; this choice reflects a certain theoretical orientation, but the difference will not be huge, at least for shorter time frames.

      Next, obtain a random input:

      The equation for the following day’s price is:

      To take e to a given power x in Excel, use the EXP function: EXP(x). Repeat this calculation the desired number of times (each repetition represents one day) to obtain a simulation of future price movement. By generating an arbitrary number of simulations, you can assess the probability that a security’s price will follow a given trajectory.

      Special Considerations

      The frequencies of different outcomes generated by this simulation will form a normal distribution, that is, a bell curve. The most likely return is in the middle of the curve, meaning there is an equal chance that the actual return will be higher or lower than that value.

      The probability that the actual return will be within one standard deviation of the most probable (“expected”) rate is 68%, while the probability that it will be within two standard deviations is 95%, and that it will be within three standard deviations 99.7%. Still, there is no guarantee that the most expected outcome will occur, or that actual movements will not exceed the wildest projections.

      Crucially, Monte Carlo simulations ignore everything that is not built into the price movement (macro trends, company leadership, hype, cyclical factors); in other words, they assume perfectly efficient markets.

      Book a place

      • We don’t have a date for this course yet. Please contact CPD Administrator to register your interest.

      Overview

      Simulation studies are an important tool for statistical research. They help statisticians and researchers understand the properties of statistical methods and compare different methods.

      This two-day course will help you understand how simulation studies work, so you can critique published simulation studies and design one yourself.

      You’ll learn how to plan, code, analyse and interpret simulation studies using Stata or R (data analysis and statistical software).

      This course is run by the Institute of Clinical Trials and Methodology at UCL.

      Course content and structure

      Topics covered by the course include the following:

      • Planning a simulation study
      • Coding a simulation study
      • Analysing simulation studies
      • Analysing your simulation study and feeding back results
      • Reporting simulation studies

      The course involves a series of lectures and computer practicals, where you can use Stata or R.

      Examples will be taken from the lecturers’ experiences, primarily relating to medical statistics. The principles for simulation studies in other applied areas are the same, but the examples may be less relevant.

      Who this course is for

      This course is suitable for:

      • methodological or applied statisticians who need to evaluate the statistical properties of one or more methods
      • PhD students who use simulation studies
      • readers of methodology articles that evaluate methods by simulation

      Entry requirements

      You should already be familiar with Stata or R and know, for example, how to generate data, run a regression command and produce simple graphs.

      You’ll need to bring your own laptop with Stata (version 12 or later) or a recent version of R installed.

      Learning outcomes

      By the end of this course you’ll be able to:

      • critically read and evaluate simulation studies in the statistical literature
      • conduct a simulation study
      • explain the rationale for simulation
      • understand the importance of careful planning
      • code and debug simple simulation studies in Stata
      • analyse simulation studies producing estimates of uncertainty
      • present methods and results for publication

      Cost and concessions

      • standard – £270
      • UCL staff and students – £150
      • staff and students based at the ICTM – free

      Course team

      How to conduct a simulation analysis

      Dr Tim Morris

      Tim is a statistician interested in practical methods for improving the design and analysis of randomised trials and observational studies. He’s based at the MRC Clinical Trials Unit at UCL, part of the Institute of Clinical Trials and Methodology.

      How to conduct a simulation analysis

      Professor Ian White

      Ian is a medical statistician with an interest in developing new methodology for design and analysis of clinical trials, meta-analysis and observational studies. He joined the MRC Clinical Trials Unit at UCL in 2017 after spending 16 years as a programme leader at the Medical Research Council’s Biostatistics Unit in Cambridge.

      How to conduct a simulation analysis

      Dr Michael J. Crowther

      Michael is Associate Professor of Biostatistics in the Biostatistics Research Group at the University of Leicester. He’s a Section Editor for the Journal of Statistical Software and an Associate Editor for the Stata Journal. His main research interests include survival analysis, multilevel and mixed effects models, and statistical software development.

      “Despite having run simulation studies in the past I learned so much. Thank you.”

      “Tutors were really helpful during practicals. It was good that we had the opportunity to think about and develop simulations from scratch with cheat-sheets available if required.”

      Book a place

      • We don’t have a date for this course yet. Please contact CPD Administrator to register your interest.

      Course information last modified: 1 Nov 2021, 15:16

      It allows organizations in the manufacturing industry to analyze and experiment with their processes in a virtual environment, reducing the time and cost requirements associated with physical testing.

      What is manufacturing simulation?

      It’s the computer-based modeling of a real production system. Inventory, assembly, transportation and production can all be considered within a simulation model, resulting in decisions that can maintain or improve efficiency at the lowest possible cost.

      How to conduct a simulation analysis

      What is FlexSim?

      FlexSim is a powerful yet easy-to-use software package for simulation modeling. A fast and accurate simulation engine is hidden behind drag and drop controls, drop-down lists, and many other intuitive features that make it accessible for anyone to build a model. All simulation models are created to scale and are presented using 3D visuals, so it becomes easy to view and recognize bottlenecks in the production line or other deficiencies within the system. FlexSim also gives decision makers the data to confirm their observations, with impressive data reporting and analysis built right into the software.

      Why simulate manufacturing?

      The need for efficiency in the manufacturing industry has never been greater, with material, transportation and labor costs continuing to rise each year. Successful companies need to ensure that the costs associated with time, equipment and other investments are being considered and optimized. At its core, manufacturing simulation is an inexpensive, risk-free way to test anything from simple revisions to complete redesigns, always with the purpose of meeting production goals at the lowest possible cost. Simulation also provides a way to test and implement principles of Lean manufacturing and Six Sigma. And unlike spreadsheet-based analysis and forecasting, manufacturing simulation offers a quick and efficient method to adjust parameters and get faster results.

      How to conduct a simulation analysis

      Why simulate with FlexSim?

      Answer important questions – Manufacturing simulation with FlexSim can answer important questions that decision makers face every day. Just a few examples:

      • Would adding equipment in the manufacturing plant increase throughput or create an unforeseen bottleneck?
      • Can we add a new product line and still meet production goals?
      • Can we identify and minimize the causes of defects?

      Full 3D simulation – What do 3D visuals really add to a simulation model? How about an immersive experience that helps you and your colleagues truly understand what’s going on! FlexSim brings a visual experience to simulation modeling, providing rich 3D objects and enhanced realism. 3D simulation modeling brings the model to life, and aids in communication and discourse for staff members at all levels.

      Easy to use, yet powerful – FlexSim contains user-friendly tools like drop-down menus and drag and drop functionality that allow beginners to build and test models in just minutes, with no background in computer coding. And our newest logic-building feature makes it easier when things start to get complex. Simply map out the process using activities in this powerful flowcharting tool—no need for coding.

      In This Topic

      • What is a sensitivity analysis?
      • Perform a sensitivity analysis
      • Examine the results
      • Edit the model

      What is a sensitivity analysis?

      Sensitivity analysis often follows parameter optimization, which focuses on finding optimal settings for the inputs. For more information, go to Perform a parameter optimization.

      Perform a sensitivity analysis

      Use the sensitivity analysis to evaluate the effects of the input variation on the output variation.

      1. Choose Simulation > Sensitivity Analysis .
      2. If you have more than one output, a drop-down list appears so that you can choose the output that you want to examine.
      3. Examine the graph.
        • Look for inputs that have sloped lines. Consider the relationship between changes to the standard deviation of the input and the % out-of-specification.
        • Look for inputs with flat lines. These inputs have little effect on the variability so you may be able to reduce the tolerances. You can bring this information back to your engineering team for consideration.

        If the lines are close together, you can isolate an input line by choosing it from the graph legend, which helps you to select and evaluate changes.

      If you prefer to evaluate the standard deviation rather than the % out-of-specification, select Standard Deviation on the y-axis label. % Out of Spec is only available when you have specification limits.

      Examine the results

      Engage displays the results of the sensitivity analysis, assumptions, and guidance for next steps.

      1. View the results in the workspace. You can switch between the model view and the results view of the simulation.

      Each time you repeat the simulation, the results will vary because the simulation is based on randomly selected values for the inputs.

      Edit the model

      After you analyze the results, you may want to return to the model and change inputs or outputs, then rerun it. This lets you test several possible scenarios so that you can get insight into the behavior of your system and make better decisions.

      Start learning from our course Library of 7,500+ on-demand video tutorials in the top engineering design software and methods.

      • SOLIDWORKS
      • Inventor
      • AutoCAD
      • Revit
      • Fusion 360
      • SketchUp
      • Mastercam
      • CAMWorks
      • MATLAB
      • ANSYS
      • CATIA
      • Solid Edge
      • Meshmixer
      • Rhino
      • Onshape
      • DraftSight
      • Abaqus
      • Civil 3D
      • Bluebeam
      • Construction Cloud

      SolidProfessor for Business

      Upskill your design team with our industry-trusted engineering training platform. Get full access to 7,500+ video tutorials, skills assessments, and progress tracking.

      SolidProfessor for Schools

      Educate the next generation of engineers, architects, and manufacturers. Our expert-guided online lessons help you get students certified and prepped for college and career.

      Keep your engineering design, management, and teaching skills sharp with the help of our free resources.

      We’re the go-to resource for on-demand, self-paced design training for professionals, design teams, and educators. We know engineering and architectural design software inside and out!

      Solutions for brain researchers to conduct sustainable simulation studies and share their results

      Forschungszentrum JГјlich / SBC Lehmann

      Aix-Marseille UniversitГ© / Viktor Jirsa

      Morphologies:Markram, H.,et al. (2016). Zenodo. doi: 10.5281/zenodo.57082; Mercer A, Thomson AM. Front. Neuroanat. doi:10.3389/fnana.2017.00083; Morphologies and model: Migliore et al. (2018). PLoS Comput Biol; doi:10.1371/journal.pcbi.1006423

      In research, simulation acts as the main conduit for interchange between experiment and theory. It is a powerful instrument in our endeavour to understand the human brain, which is a complex dynamic system with a multi-scale architecture, further complicated by significant differences between one person’s brain and another’s. The complexity and versatility of the brain, and the variations from one brain to another, are major scientific challenges, driving the development of simulation technology

      Neuroscientists have different views on how to best tackle the intricacy of complex systems.

      Neuroscientists have different views on how to best tackle the intricacy of such complex systems, advocating approaches that range from holistic to minimalistic, from the notion that only realistic models can account for the inner workings of our brains, to the assumption that only systematic model simplification will allow us to uncover fundamental principles. Likewise, brain models differ in size, complexity and level of detail. EBRAINS Simulation services offer technical solutions for brain researchers to conduct sustainable simulation studies and build upon prior work, and the means to share their results. The services provide integrated workflows for model creation, simulation and validation, including data analysis and visualisation. The simulation engines cover the entire spectrum of levels of description ranging from cellular to network to whole brain level.

      Simulation

      Services

        • Simulation

        Risk analysis is part of every decision we make. We are constantly faced with uncertainty, ambiguity, and variability. And even though we have unprecedented access to information, we can’t accurately predict the future. Monte Carlo simulation (also known as the Monte Carlo Method) lets you see all the possible outcomes of your decisions and assess the impact of risk, allowing for better decision making under uncertainty.

        What is Monte Carlo Simulation?

        Monte Carlo simulation is a computerized mathematical technique that allows people to account for risk in quantitative analysis and decision making. The technique is used by professionals in such widely disparate fields as finance, project management, energy, manufacturing, engineering, research and development, insurance, oil & gas, transportation, and the environment.

        Monte Carlo simulation furnishes the decision-maker with a range of possible outcomes and the probabilities they will occur for any choice of action. It shows the extreme possibilities—the outcomes of going for broke and for the most conservative decision—along with all possible consequences for middle-of-the-road decisions.

        The technique was first used by scientists working on the atom bomb; it was named for Monte Carlo, the Monaco resort town renowned for its casinos. Since its introduction in World War II, Monte Carlo simulation has been used to model a variety of physical and conceptual systems.

        How Monte Carlo Simulation Works

        Monte Carlo simulation performs risk analysis by building models of possible results by substituting a range of values—a probability distribution—for any factor that has inherent uncertainty. It then calculates results over and over, each time using a different set of random values from the probability functions. Depending upon the number of uncertainties and the ranges specified for them, a Monte Carlo simulation could involve thousands or tens of thousands of recalculations before it is complete. Monte Carlo simulation produces distributions of possible outcome values.

        By using probability distributions, variables can have different probabilities of different outcomes occurring. Probability distributions are a much more realistic way of describing uncertainty in variables of a risk analysis.

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Common probability distributions include:

        Or “bell curve.” The user simply defines the mean or expected value and a standard deviation to describe the variation about the mean. Values in the middle near the mean are most likely to occur. It is symmetric and describes many natural phenomena such as people’s heights. Examples of variables described by normal distributions include inflation rates and energy prices.

        Values are positively skewed, not symmetric like a normal distribution. It is used to represent values that don’t go below zero but have unlimited positive potential. Examples of variables described by lognormal distributions include real estate property values, stock prices, and oil reserves.

        All values have an equal chance of occurring, and the user simply defines the minimum and maximum. Examples of variables that could be uniformly distributed include manufacturing costs or future sales revenues for a new product.

        The user defines the minimum, most likely, and maximum values. Values around the most likely are more likely to occur. Variables that could be described by a triangular distribution include past sales history per unit of time and inventory levels.

        The user defines the minimum, most likely, and maximum values, just like the triangular distribution. Values around the most likely are more likely to occur. However values between the most likely and extremes are more likely to occur than the triangular; that is, the extremes are not as emphasized. An example of the use of a PERT distribution is to describe the duration of a task in a project management model.

        The user defines specific values that may occur and the likelihood of each. An example might be the results of a lawsuit: 20% chance of positive verdict, 30% change of negative verdict, 40% chance of settlement, and 10% chance of mistrial.

        During a Monte Carlo simulation, values are sampled at random from the input probability distributions. Each set of samples is called an iteration, and the resulting outcome from that sample is recorded. Monte Carlo simulation does this hundreds or thousands of times, and the result is a probability distribution of possible outcomes. In this way, Monte Carlo simulation provides a much more comprehensive view of what may happen. It tells you not only what could happen, but how likely it is to happen.

        Monte Carlo simulation provides a number of advantages over deterministic, or “single-point estimate” analysis:

        • Probabilistic Results. Results show not only what could happen, but how likely each outcome is.
        • Graphical Results. Because of the data a Monte Carlo simulation generates, it’s easy to create graphs of different outcomes and their chances of occurrence. This is important for communicating findings to other stakeholders.
        • Sensitivity Analysis. With just a few cases, deterministic analysis makes it difficult to see which variables impact the outcome the most. In Monte Carlo simulation, it’s easy to see which inputs had the biggest effect on bottom-line results.
        • Scenario Analysis: In deterministic models, it’s very difficult to model different combinations of values for different inputs to see the effects of truly different scenarios. Using Monte Carlo simulation, analysts can see exactly which inputs had which values together when certain outcomes occurred. This is invaluable for pursuing further analysis.
        • Correlation of Inputs. In Monte Carlo simulation, it’s possible to model interdependent relationships between input variables. It’s important for accuracy to represent how, in reality, when some factors goes up, others go up or down accordingly.

        An enhancement to Monte Carlo simulation is the use of Latin Hypercube sampling, which samples more accurately from the entire range of distribution functions.

        Monte Carlo Simulation with Palisade

        The advent of spreadsheet applications for personal computers provided an opportunity for professionals to use Monte Carlo simulation in everyday analysis work. Microsoft Excel is the dominant spreadsheet analysis tool and Palisade’s @RISK is the leading Monte Carlo simulation add-in for Excel. First introduced for Lotus 1-2-3 for DOS in 1987, @RISK has a long-established reputation for computational accuracy, modeling flexibility, and ease of use.

        Welcome to the future of design validation. Easily test performance, optimize durability, and improve efficiency.

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        One platform, many possibilities

        CFD, FEA, and thermal simulation software transformed from a desktop application into an online platform

        Works with your standard CAD tool

        SimScale supports all standard 3D files so you can continue using the CAD system you are familiar with.

        Integrations

        Use the SimScale add-ons to make your workflow as simple as possible.

        Simple yet extremely powerful

        At SimScale, we value your time. That’s why we reinvented the simulation software workflow with the goal of reducing your time-to-result from weeks to minutes.

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Easy Setup

        Most simulation software tools are complex and difficult to understand. SimScale uses a lean simulation workflow that guides you through the process step-by-step. And with the help of ready-to-use simulation templates, you never have to start from scratch.

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        World-class support

        Your success is our priority. Our experienced team of engineers is there to answer any of your questions in real time via email, phone, or chat directly from within the platform. This way you can take advantage of simulation technology independent of your expertise level.

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        From weeks to minutes

        With SimScale, you can test multiple design versions in parallel and quickly identify the best-performing one. Even in the case of large or complex designs, access to up to 96 cores and real-time simulation allows you to get your results faster than ever before.

        Zero hardware and software footprint

        With SimScale, investing in expensive high-performance computing hardware and caring for simulation software installation and maintenance are a thing of the past.

        Zero hardware or maintenance investment

        By leveraging the power of the cloud, SimScale helps you save on average $30,000 by cutting the cost of expensive hardware and software maintenance fees.

        No installation. No maintenance

        All you need is Internet connection to run demanding simulations on a laptop or PC of your choice. We take care of software updates for you in the background.

        Seamless collaboration

        With SimScale, globally distributed design and engineering teams can easily share and collaborate on their projects in real time. No more hassle with data exchange or expanding the usage of CAE software across your organization.

        Supported by over 250,000 users

        Engineers. Designers. Scientists.

        Explore the community

        “Thanks to the platform’s ease of use, the professional support of SimScale engineers and the perfect communication with them, we were able to efficiently perform simulations and sort out our design problems. It’s hard to imagine how much physical prototyping time and measures we saved.”

        CEO at CRYO Science

        “The nice thing about SimScale is that you can essentially run an unlimited number of simulations simultaneously with no reduction in computational resources, because SimScale opens up each simulation on independent nodes. This is a huge advantage for us”

        CAE Engineer at Johnson Screens – Aqseptence Group

        “SimScale moves complex simulations to the next level. We are thrilled about the user-friendly interface, great customer support, and computing power, which enables us to handle our projects more efficiently.”

        Civil Engineer at Ingenieurbüro Hausladen GmbH

        “I loved the fact that I could do what I need to do in a browser. I started working without installing any software. Using any computer I could upload the model and start the analysis. That was the big “wow” moment.”

        President at Custom Machines

        How to conduct a simulation analysis How to conduct a simulation analysis How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Latest from SimScale

        Your hub for everything you need to know about our
        simulation software and the world of CAE

        • What is Monte Carlo Simulation?
        • How does Monte Carlo Simulation work?
        • How to use Monte Carlo methods
        • Monte Carlo Simulations and IBM

        What is Monte Carlo Simulation?

        Monte Carlo Simulation, also known as the Monte Carlo Method or a multiple probability simulation, is a mathematical technique, which is used to estimate the possible outcomes of an uncertain event. The Monte Carlo Method was invented by John von Neumann and Stanislaw Ulam during World War II to improve decision making under uncertain conditions. It was named after a well-known casino town, called Monaco, since the element of chance is core to the modeling approach, similar to a game of roulette.

        Since its introduction, Monte Carlo Simulations have assessed the impact of risk in many real-life scenarios, such as in artificial intelligence, stock prices, sales forecasting, project management, and pricing. They also provide a number of advantages over predictive models with fixed inputs, such as the ability to conduct sensitivity analysis or calculate the correlation of inputs. Sensitivity analysis allows decision-makers to see the impact of individual inputs on a given outcome and correlation allows them to understand relationships between any input variables.

        How does Monte Carlo Simulation work?

        Unlike a normal forecasting model, Monte Carlo Simulation predicts a set of outcomes based on an estimated range of values versus a set of fixed input values. In other words, a Monte Carlo Simulation builds a model of possible results by leveraging a probability distribution, such as a uniform or normal distribution, for any variable that has inherent uncertainty. It, then, recalculates the results over and over, each time using a different set of random numbers between the minimum and maximum values. In a typical Monte Carlo experiment, this exercise can be repeated thousands of times to produce a large number of likely outcomes.

        Monte Carlo Simulations are also utilized for long-term predictions due to their accuracy. As the number of inputs increase, the number of forecasts also grows, allowing you to project outcomes farther out in time with more accuracy. When a Monte Carlo Simulation is complete, it yields a range of possible outcomes with the probability of each result occurring.

        One simple example of a Monte Carlo Simulation is to consider calculating the probability of rolling two standard dice. There are 36 combinations of dice rolls. Based on this, you can manually compute the probability of a particular outcome. Using a Monte Carlo Simulation, you can simulate rolling the dice 10,000 times (or more) to achieve more accurate predictions.

        How to use Monte Carlo methods

        Regardless of what tool you use, Monte Carlo techniques involves three basic steps:

        1. Set up the predictive model, identifying both the dependent variable to be predicted and the independent variables (also known as the input, risk or predictor variables) that will drive the prediction.
        2. Specify probability distributions of the independent variables. Use historical data and/or the analyst’s subjective judgment to define a range of likely values and assign probability weights for each.
        3. Run simulations repeatedly, generating random values of the independent variables. Do this until enough results are gathered to make up a representative sample of the near infinite number of possible combinations.

        You can run as many Monte Carlo Simulations as you wish by modifying the underlying parameters you use to simulate the data. However, you’ll also want to compute the range of variation within a sample by calculating the variance and standard deviation, which are commonly used measures of spread. Variance of given variable is the expected value of the squared difference between the variable and its expected value. Standard deviation is the square root of variance. Typically, smaller variances are considered better.

        Read more about how to conduct a Monte Carlo simulation here (link resides outside IBM)

        Monte Carlo Simulations and IBM

        Although you can perform Monte Carlo Simulations with a number of tools, like Microsoft Excel, it’s best to have a sophisticated statistical software program, such as IBM SPSS Statistics, which is optimized for risk analysis and Monte Carlo simulations. IBM SPSS Statistics is a powerful statistical software platform that delivers a robust set of features that lets your organization extract actionable insights from its data.

        With SPSS Statistics you can:

        • Analyze and better understand your data and solve complex business and research problems through a user-friendly interface.
        • More quickly understand large and complex data sets with advanced statistical procedures that help ensure high accuracy and quality decision making.
        • Use extensions, Python, and R programming language code to integrate with open-source software.
        • More easily select and manage your software with flexible deployment options.

        Using the simulation module in SPSS Statistics, you can, for example, simulate various advertising budget amounts and see how that affects total sales. Based on the outcome of the simulation, you might decide to spend more on advertising to meet your total sales goal. Read more about how to use IBM SPSS Statistics for Monte Carlo simulations here (link resides outside IBM).

        IBM Cloud Functions can also assist in Monte Carlo Simulations. IBM Cloud Functions is a serverless functions-as-a-service platform that executes code in response to incoming events. Using IBM Cloud functions, an entire Monte Carlo Simulation was completed in just 90 seconds with 1,000 concurrent invocations. Read more about how to conduct a Monte Carlo Simulation using IBM tooling, here.

        For more information on Monte Carlo Simulations, sign up for the IBMid and create your IBM Cloud account.

        Bringing real and simulated data together

        JAS-mine is a Java platform that aims to provide a unique simulation tool for discrete-event simulations, including agent-based and microsimulation models

        Key Benefits

        In developing large-scale, data-driven models, JAS-mine aims to use standard, open-source tools already available in the software development community whenever possible

        Embedded RDBMS (relational database management systems) tools and automatic CSV table creation

        Facilitates the design of experiments (DOE)

        Complete separation of regression specifications from the code, and permit uncertainty analysis of the model outcome by bootstrapping the estimated coefficients across different simulation runs

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Key Features

        JAS-mine allows the separation of data representation and management, which is automatically taken care of by the simulation engine, from the implementation of processes and behavioural algorithms, which should be the primary concern of the modeler. This results in quicker, more robust and more transparent model building.

        • A discrete-event simulation engine, allowing for both discrete-time and continuous-time simulation modelling
        • A Model-Collector-Observer structure
        • Interactive (GUI based) batch and multi-run execution modes, the latter allowing for detailed design of experiments (DOE)
        • A library implementing a number of different matching methods, to match different lists of agents
        • A library implementing a number of different alignment methods (including binary and multiple choice alignment), to force the microsimulation outcomes meeting some exogenous aggregate targets
        • A Regression library implementing a number of common econometric models, from continuous response linear regression models to binomial and multinomial logit and probit models, which includes automatic bootstrapping of the coefficients for uncertainty analysis of the model outcomes
        • A statistical package based on the cern.jet libraries
        • Embedded H2 database
        • Export to .CSV files as a faster alternative to database persistence
        • MS Excel I/O communication tools
        • Automatic GUI creation for parameters by using Java annotation
        • Automatic output database creation
        • Automatic agents’ sampling and recording
        • Powerful probes for real-time statistical analysis and data collection
        • A rich graphical library for real-time plotting of simulation outcomes
        • Eclipse plugin, which allows to create a JAS-mine project in just a few clicks, with template classes organised in the JAS-mine standard package and folder structure
        • Maven version control

        Next steps

        Learn how to obtain and install JAS-mine, work through a sample project, and discover all classes and methods available in the API

        Download

        Download the latest version of the software from our repository

        Learn

        Learn more about the documentation, including the cookbook and tutorials

        Discover

        Work through the step-by-step demo models, starting with the Demo07 sample model.

        Create

        Create your own model, using classes and methods available in the API.

        Sign up

        Institute for Social and Economic Research
        University of Essex, Wivenhoe Park,
        Colchester, Essex, CO4 3SQ UK
        +44 (0)1206 872957

        • Accessibility
        • Information Security
        • Cookie Policy
        • Privacy Policy

        Institutional member of the International Microsimulation Association

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        TSIS-CORSIM 2022 Release

        TSIS-CORSIM 2022 is now available with Bing Maps background option to your simulation network and redesigned interface for an enhanced user experience.

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        TSIS-CORSIM 2022 Release

        TSIS-CORSIM 2022 is now available with Bing Maps background option to your simulation network and redesigned interface for an enhanced user experience.

        Traffic Software Integrated System – Corridor Simulation

        TSIS is an integrated modeling environment that enables users to conduct traffic operations analysis. Built using a component architecture, TSIS is a toolbox that allows the user to define and manage traffic analysis projects, model traffic networks, create inputs for traffic simulation analysis, run traffic simulation, and interpret the results of those models.

        CORSIM is a microscopic traffic simulation capable of modeling surface streets, freeways, highways, and integrated networks, including segments, weaves, merge/diverges, and intersection:stop/yield sign, traffic signals. It simulates traffic and traffic control systems using research-backed and established vehicle and driver behavior models.

        According to the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), TSIS-CORSIM has been used by FHWA for conducting research and applied by thousands of practitioners and researchers worldwide over the past 30 years, embodying a wealth of experience and maturity. Volume 4 of the Traffic Analysis Toolbox (CORSIM Application Guidelines) is available on the FHWA traffic analysis tools home page

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Examples of TSIS-CORSIM Applications

        TSIS-CORSIM can model facilities and networks beyond the scope of the Highway Capacity Manual procedures, including:

        • Urban street grid
        • Spatial and temporal effects of congestion
        • Interactions between freeways and urban streets
        • Alternative intersections
        • Routing (dynamic traffic assignment – DTA)
        • Interruptions to traffic flow (e.g., rail crossing)
        • Effects of incidents on traffic flow
        • Work zones and lane closures on freeways and arterials
        • Active Traffic Management analyses for arterials and freeways (e.g., ramp metering)
        • Managed lanes including High Occupancy Vehicles (HOV) and High Occupancy Toll (HOT) lanes
        • Signal Timing Optimization assessment and testing in conjunction with TRANSYT-7F (included in TSIS) and HCS and algorithms

        Microscopic Traffic Simulation

        CORSIM is a microscopic traffic simulation tool, which replicates driver behavior and the interaction between vehicles individually in small time steps within a model network. In a microsimulation tool, many parameters are stochastic and realistic, and the tool can simulate the interaction between different network elements, such as urban arterials and freeways.

        Monte Carlo Analysis is a risk management technique used to conduct a quantitative analysis of risks. This mathematical technique was developed in 1940 by an atomic nuclear scientist named Stanislaw Ulam and is used to analyze the impact of risks on your project — in other words, if this risk occurs, how will it affect the schedule or the cost of the project? Monte Carlo gives you a range of possible outcomes and probabilities to allow you to consider the likelihood of different scenarios.

        For example, let’s say you don’t know how long your project will take. You have a rough estimate of the duration of each project task. Using this, you develop a best-case scenario (optimistic) and worst-case scenario (pessimistic) duration for each task.

        You can then use Monte Carlo to analyze all the potential combinations and give you probabilities of when the project will complete.

        The results would look something like this:

        • 2% chance of completing the project in 12 months (if every task finished by the optimistic timeline)
        • 15% chance of completion within 13 months
        • 55% chance of completion within 14 months
        • 95% chance of completion within 15 months
        • 100% chance of completion within 16 months (If everything takes as long as the pessimistic estimates)

        Using this information, you can now better estimate your timeline and plan your project.

        Benefits of Monte Carlo analysis in project management

        The primary benefits of using Monte Carlo analysis on your projects are:

        • Provides early inducation of how likely you are to meet project milestones and deadlines
        • Can be used to create a more realistic budget and schedule
        • Predicts the likelihood of schedule and cost overruns
        • Quantifies risks to assess impacts
        • Provides objective data for decision making

        Limitations of Monte Carlo analysis in project management

        There are some challenges to using the Monte Carlo analysis. These include:

        • You must provide three estimates for every activity or factor being analyzed
        • The analysis is only as good as the estimates provided
        • The Monte Carlo simulation shows the overall probability for the entire project or a large subset (such as a phase). It can’t be used to analyze individual activities or risks.

        Definition: Monte Carlo Simulation is a mathematical technique that generates random variables for modelling risk or uncertainty of a certain system.

        The random variables or inputs are modelled on the basis of probability distributions such as normal, log normal, etc. Different iterations or simulations are run for generating paths and the outcome is arrived at by using suitable numerical computations.

        Monte Carlo Simulation is the most tenable method used when a model has uncertain parameters or a dynamic complex system needs to be analysed. It is a probabilistic method for modelling risk in a system.

        The method is used extensively in a wide variety of fields such as physical science, computational biology, statistics, artificial intelligence, and quantitative finance. It is pertinent to note that Monte Carlo Simulation provides a probabilistic estimate of the uncertainty in a model. It is never deterministic. However, given the uncertainty or risk ingrained in a system, it is a useful tool for approximation of realty.

        Description: The Monte Carlo Simulation technique was introduced during the World War II. Today, it is used extensively for modelling uncertain situations.

        Although we have a profusion of information at our disposal, it is difficult to predict the future with absolute precision and accuracy. This can be attributed to the dynamic factors that can impact the outcome of a course of action. Monte Carlo Simulation enables us to see the possible outcomes of a decision, which can thereby help us take better decisions under uncertainty. Along with the outcomes, it can also enable the decision maker see the probabilities of outcomes.

        Monte Carlo Simulation uses probability distribution for modelling a stochastic or a random variable. Different probability distributions are used for modelling input variables such as normal, lognormal, uniform, and triangular. From probability distribution of input variable, different paths of outcome are generated.

        Compared to deterministic analysis, the Monte Carlo method provides a superior simulation of risk. It gives an idea of not only what outcome to expect but also the probability of occurrence of that outcome. It is also possible to model correlated input variables.

        For instance, Monte Carlo Simulation can be used to compute the value at risk of a portfolio. This method tries to predict the worst return expected from a portfolio, given a certain confidence interval for a specified time period.

        Normally, stock prices are believed to follow a Geometric Brownian motion (GMB), which is a Markov process, which means a certain state follows a random walk and its future value is dependent on the current value.

        The generalised form of the Geometric Brownian motion is:

        The first term in the equation is called drift and the second is shock. This means the stock price is going to drift by the expected return. Shock is a product of standard deviation and random shock. Based on the model, we run a Monte Carlo Simulation to generate paths of simulated stock prices. Based on the outcome, we can compute the Value at Risk (VAR) of the stock. For a portfolio of many assets, we can generate correlated asset prices using Monte Carlo Simulation.

        I n further detail, these steps include:

        Formulate the Flow Problem

        The first step of the analysis process is to formulate the flow problem by seeking answers to the following questions:

        • what is the objective of the analysis?
        • what is the easiest way to obtain those objective?
        • what geometry should be included?
        • what are the freestream and/or operating conditions?
        • what dimensionality of the spatial model is required? (1D, quasi-1D, 2D, axisymmetric, 3D)
        • what should the flow domain look like?
        • what temporal modeling is appropriate? (steady or unsteady)
        • what is the nature of the viscous flow? (inviscid, laminar, turbulent)
        • how should the gas be modeled?

        Model the Geometry and Flow Domain

        The body about which flow is to be analyzed requires modeling. This generally involves modeling the geometry with a CAD software package. Approximations of the geometry and simplifications may be required to allow an analysis with reasonable effort. Concurrently, decisions are made as to the extent of the finite flow domain in which the flow is to be simulated. Portions of the boundary of the flow domain conicide with the surfaces of the body geometry. Other surfaces are free boundaries over which flow enters or leaves. The geometry and flow domain are modeled in such a manner as to provide input for the grid generation. Thus, the modeling often takes into account the structure and topology of the grid generation.

        Establish the Boundary and Initial Conditions

        Since a finite flow domain is specified, physical conditions are required on the boundaries of the flow domain. The simulation generally starts from an initial solution and uses an iterative method to reach a final flow field solution.

        Generate the Grid

        The flow domain is discretized into a grid. The grid generation involves defining the structure and topology and then generating a grid on that topology. Currently all cases involve multi-block, structured grids; however, the grid blocks may be abbuting, contiguous, non-contiguous, and overlapping. The grid should exhibit some minimal grid quality as defined by measures of orthogonality (especially at the boundaries), relative grid spacing (15% to 20% stretching is considered a maximum value), grid skewness, etc. Further the maximum spacings should be consistent with the desired resolution of important features. The resolution of boundary layers requires the grid to be clustered in the direction normal to the surface with the spacing of the first grid point off the wall to be well within the laminar sublayer of the boundary layer. For turbulent flows, the first point off the wall should exhibit a y+ value of less than 1.0.

        Establish the Simulation Strategy

        The strategy for performing the simulation involves determining such things as the use of space-marching or time-marching, the choice of turbulence or chemistry model, and the choice of algorithms.

        Establish the Input Parameters and Files

        A CFD codes generally requires that an input data file be created listing the values of the input parameters consisted with the desired strategy. Further the a grid file containing the grid and boundary condition information is generally required. The files for the grid and initial flow solution need to be generated.

        Perform the Simulation

        The simulation is performed with various possible with options for interactive or batch processing and distributed processing.

        Monitor the Simulation for Completion

        As the simulation proceeds, the solution is monitored to determine if a “converged” solution has been obtained, which is iterative convergence. Further discussion can be found on the page entitled Examining Iterative Convergence.

        Post-Process the Simulation to get the Results

        Post-Processing involves extracting the desired flow properties (thrust, lift, drag, etc. ) from the computed flowfield.

        Make Comparisons of the Results

        The computed flow properties are then compared to results from analytic, computational, or experimental studies to establish the validity of the computed results.

        Repeat the Process to Examine Sensitivities

        The sensitivity of the computed results should be examined to understand the possible differences in the accuracy of results and / or performance of the computation with respect to such things as:

        • dimensionality
        • flow conditions
        • initial conditions
        • marching strategy
        • algorithms
        • grid topology and density
        • turbulence model
        • chemistry model
        • flux model
        • artificial viscosity
        • boundary conditions
        • computer system

        Further information can be found on the pages entitled Verification Assessment and Validation Assessment.

        The word “simulation” implies an imitation of a real-life process in order to provide a lifelike experience in a controlled environment. It can be thought of as somewhere to learn from mistakes without doing any damage.

        What is simulation-based training?

        Simulation trainings are used as a tool to teach trainees about the skills needed in the real world. It provides a lifelike point-of-care learning experience, and has been widely applied in fields such as aviation, the military, and healthcare.

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Simulation-based training is an important part of the development and learning process of knowledge and skills.

        • 5 reasons why
        • Practical examples
        • Innovative solutions

        White paper download “The added value of simulation-based training”

        The added value of simulation-based training

        A well-constructed simulation allows trainees to answer the question, “If I do this, what happens?” It provides learners with an opportunity to test out different scenarios to see what works and to understand how they arrived at the right and wrong answers. This trial-and-error approach gives trainees the knowledge and confidence they need to apply their new skills in the real world.

        The value of simulation training is further enhanced by following up with a debriefing and coaching session. With the help of video recordings, the training sessions can be analyzed, errors identified, successes marked, and emotions or feelings that influenced the trainees can be discussed. This is when the real learning takes place.

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Five reasons why simulation training in healthcare works

        The highest goal for every healthcare worker is to improve the quality of a patient’s life and to ensure patient safety. Simulation-based training can achieve that for the following reasons:

        1. Practicing in a safe environment

        In a simulation facility, preferably in a real clinical area where the staff normally works, you can test new tools and methods, focus on crisis resource management, and develop knowledge, skills, and attitudes in a safe and secure environment. It is important for the trainees to be assured that the simulations are confidential, and that video recordings are private.

        2. Understanding human behavior

        Simulating events show us how we react in real life situations, and in some sense, show us how unconscious processes work. Since it is not occurring in real life, it enables us to learn from our mistakes. As such, it can help prevent errors and optimize responses in (critical) situations. For example, noise, a bad smell, or other disturbances can be simulated, and can give a good feel for how distraction works.

        In the experimental study conducted by Jessica Jones and her colleagues, the researchers examined the impact of clinical interruptions on simulated trainee performances during central venous catheterization (CVC). They found that interruptions during the experimental condition resulted in a number of serious procedural errors. The reduction in performance, time taken, and number of attempts made was significantly worse when the interruption occurred during a more complex part of the procedure.

        3. Improving teamwork

        Teamwork includes behaviors such as effective communication, collaboration, team leading, team building, and crisis resource management. Teamwork is not an automatic consequence of placing people together in the same room; it depends on a willingness to cooperate toward shared goals.

        In healthcare, shared goals might include maintaining a patient’s health status and avoiding errors. In a simulated environment, teamwork can be studied and significantly improved by training specific teamwork skills.

        4. Providing confidence

        Simulation training provides an opportunity to apply theory and gain experience in skills or procedures, which provides trainees with the confidence to manage similar real-life scenarios. Confidence is directly linked to competence. For example, the robust communication skills needed when interacting with patients requires being able to handle the situation with confidence.

        As trainees gain confidence, they are more comfortable in making their own decisions and exerting their autonomy. As well as confidence being essential for an individual, demonstrating confidence is important for the patients who have put a lot of trust in healthcare professionals.

        5. Giving insight into trainees’ own behavior

        In a simulation facility, you can record the training sessions on video. By expanding the video recording with an eye tracker or data acquisition system to measure eye gaze behavior or physiological responses of the trainees, even more insight into behavior can be gained. Immediately after the session, the video recordings can be shown with all other data during debriefing, giving a complete picture.

        Using realistic scenarios

        For years, simulation-based training uses mannequins, i.e. fully bodied patient simulators for safe training of technical medical skills. Adding an immersive room to a simulation-based training enhances the lifelike experience even further. By projecting a scene on three surrounding walls, it actually feels like you are in that scene. The experience is complete by adding elements such as smell and temperature.

        Transform a team of experts into an expert team

        Clearly, the major role of simulation is to educate, train, and provide rehearsal for those actually preparing for or working in the delivery of healthcare. Simulation-based training can transform a team of experts into an expert team.

        The user-friendly software suite Viso is an ideal recording solution for simulation training. With Viso, recordings are easily captured, and immediate viewing facilitates debriefing after each scenario.

        ENVI-met software allows you to create sustainable living conditions in a constantly changing environment. With the support of its interactive modules, it is possible to specify surface types and building materials, as well as vegetation on walls and roofs, to scientifically analyze the impacts of design measures on the local environment and help mitigate factors such as urban heat stress.

        The software model is used worldwide for environmental analysis and urban planning – from the tropics to polar regions. The software’s potential has been validated and its calculations verified in over 3,000 scientific publications and independent studies.

        ENVI-met World Tour

        Every day millions of people are exposed to changing climatic conditions in big cities. While sustainability is often perceived as protecting the environment at the cost of meeting people’s needs, this does not have to be the case – and we can prove it with scientifically verifiable data. On our World Tour we take you monthly around the globe to visit cities located on different continents with locally relevant challenges, conduct analysis and demonstrate possible solutions.

        “ENVI-met provides us an incredibly powerful tool for looking at a series of Environmental Quality and Outdoor Thermal Comfort criteria while we are in the design process. This was unthinkable not so long ago and will revolutionize our workflows. The integration via plugins with other tools like Sketchup puts these tools at our fingertips and gives us an agile and decentralized methodology perfectly suited to the realities of work life today.”

        Steven Velegrinis, Director
        Head of Masterplanning at AECOM in the Middle East

        “We have been using the ENVI-met software for more than 10 years to study the impact of vegetation in urban environments. We chose ENVI-met because it is one of the few softwares that realistically simulates the most important climate processes – such as the interactions between soil, plants and atmosphere – in urban environments and thus analyzes thermal comfort in cities. ENVI-met has already contributed massively to simulation scenario modelings for São Paulo and is continuing to help us model complex scenarios, including topography, faster.”

        Prof. Dr. Denise Helena Silva Duarte
        Full professor at the Faculty of Architecture and Urbanism, University of São Paulo, Brazil

        “Werner Sobek Holding has been working with the ENVI-met simulation software since 2007. We use it for numerous projects at home and abroad, especially for construction projects with challenging climatic conditions. ENVI-met takes the interactions of wind, green spaces, solar radiation, buildings and many other factors into account – and helps us to design climate-friendly and sustainable cities.”

        Prof. Dr.-Ing. Dr.-Ing. E. H. Dr. h. c. Werner Sobek
        Werner Sobek Holding, Germany

        ENVI-met UNI LAB Award 2022

        Besides our mission to help build more liveable cities for people, we are committed to raising awareness about climate change amongst students worldwide. We have therefore launched an international competition to reward student projects which demonstrate innovative solutions against this threat using the microclimatic analysis tools of ENVI-met.

        20.1 Generating Random Numbers

        Simulation is an important (and big) topic for both statistics and for a variety of other areas where there is a need to introduce randomness. Sometimes you want to implement a statistical procedure that requires random number generation or sampling (i.e. Markov chain Monte Carlo, the bootstrap, random forests, bagging) and sometimes you want to simulate a system and random number generators can be used to model random inputs.

        R comes with a set of pseuodo-random number generators that allow you to simulate from well-known probability distributions like the Normal, Poisson, and binomial. Some example functions for probability distributions in R

        • rnorm : generate random Normal variates with a given mean and standard deviation
        • dnorm : evaluate the Normal probability density (with a given mean/SD) at a point (or vector of points)
        • pnorm : evaluate the cumulative distribution function for a Normal distribution
        • rpois : generate random Poisson variates with a given rate

        For each probability distribution there are typically four functions available that start with a “r”, “d”, “p”, and “q”. The “r” function is the one that actually simulates randon numbers from that distribution. The other functions are prefixed with a

        • d for density
        • r for random number generation
        • p for cumulative distribution
        • q for quantile function (inverse cumulative distribution)

        If you’re only interested in simulating random numbers, then you will likely only need the “r” functions and not the others. However, if you intend to simulate from arbitrary probability distributions using something like rejection sampling, then you will need the other functions too.

        Probably the most common probability distribution to work with the is the Normal distribution (also known as the Gaussian). Working with the Normal distributions requires using these four functions

        Here we simulate standard Normal random numbers with mean 0 and standard deviation 1.

        We can modify the default parameters to simulate numbers with mean 20 and standard deviation 2.

        If you wanted to know what was the probability of a random Normal variable of being less than, say, 2, you could use the pnorm() function to do that calculation.

        You never know when that calculation will come in handy.

        20.2 Setting the random number seed

        When simulating any random numbers it is essential to set the random number seed. Setting the random number seed with set.seed() ensures reproducibility of the sequence of random numbers.

        For example, I can generate 5 Normal random numbers with rnorm() .

        Note that if I call rnorm() again I will of course get a different set of 5 random numbers.

        If I want to reproduce the original set of random numbers, I can just reset the seed with set.seed() .

        In general, you should always set the random number seed when conducting a simulation! Otherwise, you will not be able to reconstruct the exact numbers that you produced in an analysis.

        It is possible to generate random numbers from other probability distributions like the Poisson. The Poisson distribution is commonly used to model data that come in the form of counts.

        20.3 Simulating a Linear Model

        Simulating random numbers is useful but sometimes we want to simulate values that come from a specific model. For that we need to specify the model and then simulate from it using the functions described above.

        Suppose we want to simulate from the following linear model

        \[ y = \beta_0 + \beta_1 x + \varepsilon \]

        where \(\varepsilon\sim\mathcal(0,2^2)\) . Assume \(x\sim\mathcal(0,1^2)\) , \(\beta_0=0.5\) and \(\beta_1=2\) . The variable x might represent an important predictor of the outcome y . Here’s how we could do that in R.

        We can plot the results of the model simulation.

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        What if we wanted to simulate a predictor variable x that is binary instead of having a Normal distribution. We can use the rbinom() function to simulate binary random variables.

        Then we can procede with the rest of the model as before.

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        We can also simulate from generalized linear model where the errors are no longer from a Normal distribution but come from some other distribution. For examples, suppose we want to simulate from a Poisson log-linear model where

        \[ Y \sim Poisson(\mu) \]

        \[ \log \mu = \beta_0 + \beta_1 x \]

        and \(\beta_0=0.5\) and \(\beta_1=0.3\) . We need to use the rpois() function for this

        Now we need to compute the log mean of the model and then exponentiate it to get the mean to pass to rpois() .

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        You can build arbitrarily complex models like this by simulating more predictors or making transformations of those predictors (e.g. squaring, log transformations, etc.).

        20.4 Random Sampling

        The sample() function draws randomly from a specified set of (scalar) objects allowing you to sample from arbitrary distributions of numbers.

        To sample more complicated things, such as rows from a data frame or a list, you can sample the indices into an object rather than the elements of the object itself.

        Here’s how you can sample rows from a data frame.

        Now we just need to create the index vector indexing the rows of the data frame and sample directly from that index vector.

        Other more complex objects can be sampled in this way, as long as there’s a way to index the sub-elements of the object.

        Norbert Neumann finds out about the metaverse and its potential for defence applications such as military training.

        The idea of metaverse compels excitement in some, while making others cringe. Most of us have seen films or video games where the idea of a synthetic world comes to life, where participants can engage with each other free from the limits of reality. Like it or not, the metaverse did not elude the attention of the defence industry.

        What is the metaverse?

        There is no consensus around the definition of the metaverse, and explaining it is a bit like trying to define the internet. It is not a singular technology or even a singular concept. But for argument’s sake, this article will use a workable definition provided by War on the Rocks writers Jennifer McCardle and Caitlin Dohrman: “A metaverse is a series of interconnected and immersive virtual worlds that afford their users a sense of presence via agency and influence.”

        It is similar to virtual or augmented reality in that it provides a spectrum where the physical and digital can meet. In military settings, these platforms are mostly used for the purpose of training. Commercial metaverse technology will not satisfy the military due to the lack of dexterity. But the price of the best available equipment on the market is eye-watering, and defence departments may adopt technologies in the early stages with the aim of improving them to fit the requirements of the armed forces.

        “If there is a greater push for cheaper but higher quality haptics and cheaper things like motion capture, and investments are going into those capabilities, then it could end up yielding something important for the military in the future,” says James Crowley, business development director at immersive urban training expert 4GD. “This will both improve the technology for the civilian market, and will also make it cheaper and much more accessible.”

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        The next level of simulation training: enter the defence metaverse

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Opinion: China’s dominance of the rare earths supply chain is a geopolitical risk

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Will future wars be fought with missiles and rockets?

        Defence in the metaverse

        Militaries have been using different forms of rudimentary metaverses for training for years. The development of the first simulator networking (SIMNET), where different virtual words were stitched together, started in the 1980s by the US military. SIMNET was a wide area network with vehicle simulators and displays for real-time distributed combat simulations that included tanks, helicopters and planes on a virtual battlefield. In the past two decades, the fidelity and effectiveness of simulated training and synthetic environments have grown momentously.

        Nick Brown, defence product marketing director at distributed computing company Hadean, says: “Perhaps we can categorise the defence metaverse as an ‘industrial metaverse’. While the more familiar metaverse is focused on entertainment and social interaction of itself, industrial metaverses use the same technology in order to enhance activity in the physical world.”

        Brown believes there are three key aspects to the metaverse that make it so appealing to defence. “Firstly, the virtual worlds of the metaverse are getting increasingly better at connecting more people from disparate locations,” he says. “Secondly, they can be used to simulate physical events at a high fidelity such that greater knowledge about the ‘real world’ can be derived.”

        The third point, Brown says, is the metaverse’s ability to offer an immersive experience that would be too expensive, logistically or economically unfeasible or simply impossible to conduct physically. Combining these three aspects when placed into the concept of modern military acquisition, force development and training requirements, it is clear why defence is interested in the metaverse.

        Crowley expects continued military interest in the metaverse in the future. “There’s an area for influence and an area where we need to be conscious of disparate groups coming together, and perhaps forming either very short-term collectives or of longer-term political groupings and we need to be fairly politically live to that as organisations,” he says.

        He says if the metaverse changes the way individuals come together and the way information is exchanged, militaries and governments will need to be aligned to know how those interactions are taking place.

        The challenges of the metaverse

        It is also very important to consider the operational challenges of the metaverse. Building the computer power and infrastructure capable of running high-fidelity virtual worlds across a range of devices and handling enormous amounts of data will be equally imperative for the metaverse to exist.

        “Being able to create these kinds of simulations may be cutting edge, but they’re no good if you need a PC the size of a car seat next to you while you run it,” Brown explains. “Every participant, whose device may vary, needs to be able to view and act within the simulation.

        “This is where distributed cloud and edge computing are set to change the game. If you can dynamically scale computation across cloud and edge environments, then this vastly lowers the requirements needed by devices to run the simulation.”

        Crowley echoes the importance of computer power by saying: “This is probably the most impactful part of it. Unless you can reduce your latency to a point that it doesn’t make people ill and feels realistic, unless you can store move and communicate data across various different people in different simulators, you’re not going to provide a practical training tool.”

        Another major challenge in developing an open metaverse where militaries of different countries could engage with each other is the aspect of security.

        “Ultimately, allied operations, for example among Nato countries, will be greatly enhanced by completing training simulations together, incentivising the creation of an open defence metaverse for them,” says Brown. He could envisage an open metaverse for defence where allied forces could all plug into the same virtual version of a given strategic context.

        Crowley warns, however, that defence will have to be ruthless and extremely pragmatic when adopting certain technologies. Militaries need to ensure they do not take on new technologies just because they are the most recent on the market, but ensure they can provide the required results.

        The development and employment of various metaverses and augmented realities are no new to defence, but the industry still has a long way to go before entering the metaverse for military purposes..

        Related Companies

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Viable Power Conversion Technologies

        Rugged Custom Power Supply Solutions for Aerospace and Defense Applications

        Our editors will review what you’ve submitted and determine whether to revise the article.

        • British Broadcasting Corporation – Computer Simulation
        • h2g2 – Computer Simulation
        • University of Florida – Department of Computer And Information Science And Engineering – Simulation

        Our editors will review what you’ve submitted and determine whether to revise the article.

        • British Broadcasting Corporation – Computer Simulation
        • h2g2 – Computer Simulation
        • University of Florida – Department of Computer And Information Science And Engineering – Simulation

        computer simulation, the use of a computer to represent the dynamic responses of one system by the behaviour of another system modeled after it. A simulation uses a mathematical description, or model, of a real system in the form of a computer program. This model is composed of equations that duplicate the functional relationships within the real system. When the program is run, the resulting mathematical dynamics form an analog of the behaviour of the real system, with the results presented in the form of data. A simulation can also take the form of a computer-graphics image that represents dynamic processes in an animated sequence.

        Computer simulations are used to study the dynamic behaviour of objects or systems in response to conditions that cannot be easily or safely applied in real life. For example, a nuclear blast can be described by a mathematical model that incorporates such variables as heat, velocity, and radioactive emissions. Additional mathematical equations can then be used to adjust the model to changes in certain variables, such as the amount of fissionable material that produced the blast. Simulations are especially useful in enabling observers to measure and predict how the functioning of an entire system may be affected by altering individual components within that system.

        The simpler simulations performed by personal computers consist mainly of business models and geometric models. The former includes spreadsheet, financial, and statistical software programs that are used in business analysis and planning. Geometric models are used for numerous applications that require simple mathematical modeling of objects, such as buildings, industrial parts, and the molecular structures of chemicals. More advanced simulations, such as those that emulate weather patterns or the behaviour of macroeconomic systems, are usually performed on powerful workstations or supercomputers. In engineering, computer models of newly designed structures undergo simulated tests to determine their responses to stress and other physical variables. Simulations of river systems can be manipulated to determine the potential effects of dams and irrigation networks before any actual construction has taken place. Other examples of computer simulations include estimating the competitive responses of companies in a particular market and reproducing the movement and flight of space vehicles.

        The Editors of Encyclopaedia Britannica This article was most recently revised and updated by Erik Gregersen.

        Norbert Neumann finds out about the metaverse and its potential for defence applications such as military training.

        The idea of metaverse compels excitement in some, while making others cringe. Most of us have seen films or video games where the idea of a synthetic world comes to life, where participants can engage with each other free from the limits of reality. Like it or not, the metaverse did not elude the attention of the defence industry.

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Top Guide to the Suppliers of Antennas, Masts & Towers

        What is the metaverse?

        There is no consensus around the definition of the metaverse, and explaining it is a bit like trying to define the internet. It is not a singular technology or even a singular concept. But for argument’s sake, this article will use a workable definition provided by War on the Rocks writers Jennifer McCardle and Caitlin Dohrman: “A metaverse is a series of interconnected and immersive virtual worlds that afford their users a sense of presence via agency and influence.”

        It is similar to virtual or augmented reality in that it provides a spectrum where the physical and digital can meet. In military settings, these platforms are mostly used for the purpose of training. Commercial metaverse technology will not satisfy the military due to the lack of dexterity. But the price of the best available equipment on the market is eye-watering, and defence departments may adopt technologies in the early stages with the aim of improving them to fit the requirements of the armed forces.

        “If there is a greater push for cheaper but higher quality haptics and cheaper things like motion capture, and investments are going into those capabilities, then it could end up yielding something important for the military in the future,” says James Crowley, business development director at immersive urban training expert 4GD. “This will both improve the technology for the civilian market, and will also make it cheaper and much more accessible.”

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        The next level of simulation training: enter the defence metaverse

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Opinion: China’s dominance of the rare earths supply chain is a geopolitical risk

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Will future wars be fought with missiles and rockets?

        Defence in the metaverse

        Militaries have been using different forms of rudimentary metaverses for training for years. The development of the first simulator networking (SIMNET), where different virtual words were stitched together, started in the 1980s by the US military. SIMNET was a wide area network with vehicle simulators and displays for real-time distributed combat simulations that included tanks, helicopters and planes on a virtual battlefield. In the past two decades, the fidelity and effectiveness of simulated training and synthetic environments have grown momentously.

        Nick Brown, defence product marketing director at distributed computing company Hadean, says: “Perhaps we can categorise the defence metaverse as an ‘industrial metaverse’. While the more familiar metaverse is focused on entertainment and social interaction of itself, industrial metaverses use the same technology in order to enhance activity in the physical world.”

        Brown believes there are three key aspects to the metaverse that make it so appealing to defence. “Firstly, the virtual worlds of the metaverse are getting increasingly better at connecting more people from disparate locations,” he says. “Secondly, they can be used to simulate physical events at a high fidelity such that greater knowledge about the ‘real world’ can be derived.”

        The third point, Brown says, is the metaverse’s ability to offer an immersive experience that would be too expensive, logistically or economically unfeasible or simply impossible to conduct physically. Combining these three aspects when placed into the concept of modern military acquisition, force development and training requirements, it is clear why defence is interested in the metaverse.

        Crowley expects continued military interest in the metaverse in the future. “There’s an area for influence and an area where we need to be conscious of disparate groups coming together, and perhaps forming either very short-term collectives or of longer-term political groupings and we need to be fairly politically live to that as organisations,” he says.

        He says if the metaverse changes the way individuals come together and the way information is exchanged, militaries and governments will need to be aligned to know how those interactions are taking place.

        The challenges of the metaverse

        It is also very important to consider the operational challenges of the metaverse. Building the computer power and infrastructure capable of running high-fidelity virtual worlds across a range of devices and handling enormous amounts of data will be equally imperative for the metaverse to exist.

        “Being able to create these kinds of simulations may be cutting edge, but they’re no good if you need a PC the size of a car seat next to you while you run it,” Brown explains. “Every participant, whose device may vary, needs to be able to view and act within the simulation.

        “This is where distributed cloud and edge computing are set to change the game. If you can dynamically scale computation across cloud and edge environments, then this vastly lowers the requirements needed by devices to run the simulation.”

        Crowley echoes the importance of computer power by saying: “This is probably the most impactful part of it. Unless you can reduce your latency to a point that it doesn’t make people ill and feels realistic, unless you can store move and communicate data across various different people in different simulators, you’re not going to provide a practical training tool.”

        Another major challenge in developing an open metaverse where militaries of different countries could engage with each other is the aspect of security.

        “Ultimately, allied operations, for example among Nato countries, will be greatly enhanced by completing training simulations together, incentivising the creation of an open defence metaverse for them,” says Brown. He could envisage an open metaverse for defence where allied forces could all plug into the same virtual version of a given strategic context.

        Crowley warns, however, that defence will have to be ruthless and extremely pragmatic when adopting certain technologies. Militaries need to ensure they do not take on new technologies just because they are the most recent on the market, but ensure they can provide the required results.

        The development and employment of various metaverses and augmented realities are no new to defence, but the industry still has a long way to go before entering the metaverse for military purposes..

        How to conduct a simulation analysis

        Statistical analysis is the collection and interpretation of data in order to uncover patterns and trends. It is a component of data analytics. Statistical analysis can be used in situations like gathering research interpretations, statistical modeling or designing surveys and studies. It can also be useful for business intelligence organizations that have to work with large data volumes.

        In the context of business intelligence (BI), statistical analysis involves collecting and scrutinizing every data sample in a set of items from which samples can be drawn. A sample, in statistics, is a representative selection drawn from a total population.

        The goal of statistical analysis is to identify trends. A retail business, for example, might use statistical analysis to find patterns in unstructured and semi-structured customer data that can be used to create a more positive customer experience and increase sales.

        Statistical analysis can be broken down into five discrete steps, as follows:

        • Describe the nature of the data to be analyzed.
        • Explore the relation of the data to the underlying population.
        • Create a model to summarize an understanding of how the data relates to the underlying population.
        • Prove (or disprove) the validity of the model.
        • Employ predictive analytics to run scenarios that will help guide future actions.

        Software for statistical analysis will typically allow users to do more complex analyses by including additional tools for organization and interpretation of data sets, as well as for the presentation of that data. IBM SPSS Statistics, RMP and Stata are some examples of statistical analysis software. For example, IBM SPSS Statistics covers much of the analytical process. From data preparation and data management to analysis and reporting. The software includes a customizable interface, and even though it may be hard form someone to use, it is relatively easy for those experienced in how it works.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Today’s recipe for The Queen’s Chocolate Biscuit Cake is a variation on one I’ve been making for years, without realising that it was the Queen’s favourite cake.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    A Favourite Royal Recipe from ROYAL TEA: SEASONAL RECIPES FROM BUCKINGHAM PALACE

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Today’s recipe today for The Queen’s Chocolate Biscuit Cake is a variation on one I have been making for years, without realising that it was Her Majesty the Queen’s favourite cake. It was a favourite for birthday parties and the cake tin, with my daughter taking a small square to school in her lunch box sometimes.

    Apparently, Her Majesty is so fond of this recipe for The Queen’s Chocolate Biscuit Cake, that she has it daily in the afternoon with a cuppa, and will enjoy a slice every day until it is all gone. I love this idea that The Queen is a bit of a chocoholic, and enjoys a simple no-bake cake above other more complex cakes.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    She’s so fond of it, that any leftovers of the cake is transported in a biscuit tin with her, when she moves from Buckingham, Palace to Windsor Castle, according to her chef Darren McGrady, The Royal Chef and former personal chef to Queen Elizabeth II, see below:

    “I remember as a young chef travelling from Paddington to Windsor one Friday morning with a half-eaten chocolate biscuit cake packed neatly and tightly in a biscuit tin, and wrapped in Clingfilm, perched on my knee with the fear of God in me that I would lose or drop the thing! It was her favourite.”

    Chef Darren McGrady, The Royal Chef and former personal chef to Queen Elizabeth II

    And, she’s not the only Royal who is a fan of this Chocolate Biscuit Cake, Prince William is also known to be a fan of this simple cake too. So much so, that he had one made for his wedding to Catherine Middleton, as a “Groom’s Cake”.

    I can see why it is so popular with The Queen, it is a simple cake insofar as it only has 5 main ingredients in it, namely chocolate, butter, sugar, cream and Rich Tea biscuits. I love Rich Tea biscuits which are essential as a “dunking” biscuit in a cup of tea.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    The humble Rich Tea biscuit has a long and interesting history. Originally called “Tea Biscuits”, they were developed in Yorkshire (England) during the 17th century, as a light snack for the gentry to enjoy between meals.

    The Queen’s Chocolate Biscuit Cake is a cake often known as Tiffin, these no-bake cakes were very popular in a little café I used to work in Cornwall, in the school holidays; there the cake was called “Wicked Cake”. It comprised melted chocolate, butter and cream, mixed with leftover cakes and biscuits. Served in squares, it was the most popular cake on the menu.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    I hope you enjoy this cake if you make it, it’s very easy and the children can get involved too. The Queen’s cake, as seen on the Royal website, is decorated with chocolate curls and scrolls, but I’ve just added a sprinkling of cocoa nibs and some grated chocolate on top of mine.

    You can be as inventive as you like with decorating this cake, although it’s simply divine with just its chocolate ganache coating. Just look at how this simple cake has been decorated in the Royal Kitchens below:

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

  • Print
  • Ingredients

    • 1/2 teaspoon butter, for greasing the pan
    • 8 ounces Rich tea biscuits or sweet cookies
    • 4 ounces unsalted butter, softened
    • 4 ounces granulated sugar
    • 4 ounces dark chocolate
    • 1 egg
    • 8 ounces dark chocolate, for coating
    • 1 ounce chocolate, for decoration

    Chef notes

    “This chocolate biscuit cake is Her Royal Majesty the Queen’s favorite afternoon tea cake by far,” chef Darren McGrady, The Royal Chef and former personal chef to Queen Elizabeth II, told TODAY Food. “This cake is probably the only one that is sent into the royal dining room again and again until it has all gone.”

    “It is her favorite cake that she eats until it is all gone,” says McCrady. “If there is anything left when she has it at Buckingham Palace, it then goes to Windsor Castle so she can finish it there. I use to travel on the train from London to Windsor Castle with the biscuit cake in a tin on my knee. It was half eaten.”

    There’s another member of the royal family who is a fan of this cake too: “This chocolate biscuit cake was Prince William’s groom’s cake at his wedding. The reason he chose it is that he used to go to tea with the Queen and he got a taste for it. That is when he started liking it.”

    The rich dark chocolate cake has a lovely crunchy texture thanks to the addition of classic English cookies called Rich tea biscuits. A layer of decadent chocolate frosting is the perfect finishing touch.

    Preparation

    Lightly grease a 6-inch-by-2½-inch cake ring with the butter and place on a tray on a sheet of parchment paper.

    Break each of the biscuits into almond size pieces by hand and set aside.

    In a large bowl, combine the butter and sugar until the mixture starts to lighten.

    Melt the 4 ounces of the dark chocolate and add to the butter mixture, stirring constantly.

    Add the egg and beat to combine.

    Fold in the biscuit pieces until they are all coated with the chocolate mixture.

    Spoon the mixture into the prepared cake ring. Try to fill all of the gaps on the bottom of the ring because this will be the top when it is un-molded.

    Chill the cake in the refrigerator for at least 3 hours.

    Remove the cake from the refrigerator and let it stand.

    Meanwhile, melt the 8 ounces of dark chocolate in a double boiler or saucepan on the stove top over low heat. Slide the ring off the cake and turn it upside down onto a cake wire.

    Pour the melted chocolate over the cake and smooth the top and sides using a palette knife.

    Allow the chocolate to set at room temperature.

    Carefully run a knife around the bottom of the cake where the chocolate has stuck it to the cake wire and lift it onto a tea plate.

    Melt the remaining 1 ounce of chocolate and use to decorate the top of the cake.

    Courtesy of Chef Darren McGrady, The Royal Chef.

    Posted on Published: February 14, 2021 – Last updated: August 31, 2021

    This Chocolate Biscuit Cake is a beautiful, easy-to-make European dessert that is good for the entire family. It looks great as a cake for a fancier occasion but equally delicious if shaped like a “salami” log, the traditional way of making it.

    PIN THIS FOR LATER:

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    What is a Chocolate Biscuit Cake?

    Chocolate Biscuit Cake is a classic European dessert made with sweet cookies (biscuits), like Maria cookies, or graham crackers as a base of the recipe., sometimes dried or candied fruit, nuts, all tossed in a syrup made out of cocoa powder, chocolate, butter, and flavors.

    Originally, the mixture is molded as a log or a “salami,” as we like to call it, based on the shape and look. It is refrigerated, then sliced, and served as a dessert or a snack.

    In Romanian, because of its salami shape, it is called Salam de biscuiti, or Biscuits Salami.

    This is one popular dessert in Europe. Some say that it is a truly Italian recipe, others think it’s coming from Portugal, while others think it is an international recipe.

    I say that many countries in Europe have at least one version of it.

    If it came from Italy or not, I don’t know, but what I can say is that I grew up with this recipe back in Romania as it was a cheap, economical way to put a dessert on the table.

    The recipe is passed from generation to generation and it makes a delicious dessert for any day of the week.

    Also, I just learned that in Malaysia they make a similar cake called “Batik Cake,” which they serve on special occasions.

    Prince William’s And Queen Elizabeth’s Favorite Cake:

    The recipe is so famous that even Queen Elizabeth and Prince William are known to enjoy the cake quite often. In fact, Prince William had this cake made for his wedding.

    How cool is that?

    This time, though, I decided to shape the mixture into a cake because I needed an easy, no-bake dessert that looked fancier. And it really looked very pretty, don’t you think?

    As you can see in the picture below, it really resembles a “salami” inside. The biscuits, the nuts, and the dried fruit have different textures that make this dessert really amazing.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    What kind of ingredients go into this easy chocolate biscuit cake:

    The cake:

    • Digestive biscuits/Maria cookies/graham crackers/tea biscuit
    • Toasted walnuts
    • Optional:Dried or candied fruits

    Chocolate syrup:

    • Granulated sugar
    • Unsweetened cocoa powder
    • Cold water
    • Unsalted butter at room temperature
    • Vanilla extract
    • Rum flavor– if you don’t have the flavor, you can replace it with rum. However, keep in mind that you will not be able to serve it to children. The rum flavor is used in many Romanian recipes, and we do have this flavor in the pantry at all times.

    Chocolate Ganache:

    • Heavy cream
    • Semi-sweet chocolate
    • Shaved chocolate for decor– this could be any kind of chocolate you like. Milk chocolate, dark chocolate, semi-sweet chocolate, or a mixture of them are totally accepted. If you want to skip this step and not decorate the cake at all, that is OK.

    A few words about biscuits/cookies used in this recipe:

    The No Bake Chocolate Biscuit Cake uses digestive biscuits, which are very popular overseas. If you cannot find them, you can use regular graham crackers or Marias cookies.

    Some people use crushed biscotti or animal crackers or simple sugar cookies. I prefer digestive cookies or Marias cookies because of their simple flavor and availability in stores.

    There are different European brands that can be easily found in the stores.

    No matter where you go in the world, you will find a variation of the Marias cookie. In Spain, they even serve it over pudding or natilla.

    The bottom line is that you can use whatever sweet, simple cookie, biscuit, or cracker you like. This makes the recipe flexible and easy to put together using ingredients from the pantry.

    Besides that, there is no baking involved, which is awesome if you are not that good of a baker. You just have to follow the recipe, and you should be safe.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Bonus: Another No bake dessert- This No Bake Cheesecake with Berries

    My version of this recipe is flavored with rum, a very popular flavor used in Romanian desserts. If you don’t like that flavor, use vanilla, almond flavor, or anything else you like.

    What kind of nuts would be good in this recipe?

    I used walnuts because they are the Romanian traditional nut, but if you don’t like them or have them, replace them with hazelnuts or crushed almonds. Dried or candied fruits work really well in this recipe.

    How To Toast The Walnuts:

    You can toast nuts on the stove, in a skillet, or in the oven.

    On The Stove:

    I do it on the stove if I have a small amount of nuts that I want to toast. The time to toast nuts on the stove is always shorter than the time the nuts require in the oven.

    Place a medium skillet on medium heat. Heat walnuts until browned and fragrant, stirring constantly, so they don’t burn. In about 2-5 minutes, they should be done. Please keep an eye on the nuts because they tend to burn fast if unattended.

    Remove from the pan, chop and use them for the recipe.

    In The Oven:

    Preheat oven to 350F/180C.

    Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and place the nuts on it in a single layer. You can also use aluminum foil.

    Toast until fragrant and slightly browned for about 7 minutes. Remove from oven and allow them to cool. Use them in the recipe as needed.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Tips:

    If the mixture looks a little dry after mixing the biscuits/crackers/Maria cookies with the syrup, do not add more liquid.

    The ratio between dry and wet ingredients is perfect for getting the right consistency after refrigeration for a few hours.

    The biscuits will have time to absorb the flavors and become soft. The perfect pan for me was a springform pan because I find it easier to remove the cake before serving.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    I don’t have a springform pan. What else can I use?

    You could use a regular cake pan that has been lined with plastic wrap or parchment paper for easy removal. If you do not want to make this dessert into a cake, the traditional way is to shape the mixture into a cylinder, like a salami, using plastic wrap.

    Published: Sep 5, 2020 · Modified: Apr 22, 2021 by Pavani . This post may contain affiliate links. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases. 18 Comments

    Sharing is caring!

    • 69
    • 70

    Chocolate Biscuit Cake

    This Chocolate biscuit cake is one of the easiest and delicious cakes which you can prepare with just 4 ingredients. You can prepare this cake even without an oven. To make this beautiful cake you only need biscuits, milk, Eno and cocoa powder.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    INGREDIENTS REQUIRED FOR MAKING THIS CHOCOLATE CAKE:

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    A SHORT VIDEO TO MAKE BISCUIT CAKE

    SHHH COOKING SECRETLY CHALLENGE

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    This time I came again with another recipe for the Facebook group Shhh Cooking Secretly Challenge. This month the theme is the Chocolate which is suggested by my one of my blogger friend Mayuri Patel who blogs at Mayuri’s Jikoni and her recipe for this theme is Chilli Avocado Chocolate Cake. My partner for this month Challenge is Priya Satheesh who blogs at Priya’s Menu. Do check her site for a healthy and wonderful recipe like Healthy Chicken Kurma, Rosappu Chutney. Priya gave Milk and Eno as my secret ingredients and I gave her are Fennel seeds and Cinnamon and using them she prepared a delicious Mexican dish ChickenMole

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    CHOCOLATE BISCUIT CAKE WITH STEP WISE INSTRUCTIONS:

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    1CUP – 235ML

    Ingredients:

    • Milk digestive biscuits-300grams
    • Milk – 1cup
    • Cocoa powder – 2tbsp
    • Unflavoured fruit salt (ENO) – 1tsp

    Preparation:

    • Place a wire stand inside the pan and preheat the pan on a medium flame for 10 minutes.
    • In a blender add the biscuits and make into a fine powder without any lumps.
    • Transfer the powdered biscuit mixture into a mixing bowl.
    • Then add 2tbsp of cocoa powder to the mixture and combine everything well.
    • Next, slowly add the milk to the biscuit mixture and mix well into a smooth batter with the help of a whisk, without lumps.
    • Now add the unflavoured fruit salt (ENO) to the batter and add little milk on the salt and give a really quick mix everything.
    • Immediately pour the batter into the prepared cake tin and place the cake tin in the preheated pan and cover it.
    • Cook it for 30-45 minutes on low flame or bake in an oven at 180-degree Celsius for 30- 35 mints.
    • Once cook time is done, check by inserting a toothpick.
    • If its toothpick comes clean remove the tin from the pan and allow it to cool. Otherwise, cook for another 2-3 minutes.
    • Next, unmould the cake into a plate.
    • Optionally you can decorate the cake with some melted chocolate.
    • Slice a piece of cake and enjoy!

    Posted on Published: April 28, 2011

    Prince William’s Chocolate Biscuit Cake. In honour of the royal wedding here’s a favourite of the entire British royal family and was chosen by the Prince as his grooms cake for the wedding.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Prince William’s Chocolate Biscuit Cake

    Prince William’s Chocolate Biscuit Cake

    The inspiration for this chocolate biscuit cake came when I went for a stroll downtown with the kids a couple of days ago. We came up with the idea to make Prince William’s groom’s cake which he has requested be served at the wedding reception.

    Apparently, this easy no-bake refrigerator cake is a childhood indulgence of his and a particular favourite of the entire royal family. With this idea in mind, we dropped into Fat Nanny’s grocery store on Duckworth Street.

    There, I procured the necessary Lyle’s golden syrup and a large sleeve of McVities original digestive biscuits. Both Lyle’s and McVities are venerable brands in the UK, which adds a little extra authenticity to the recipe on this occasion.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    I use good quality dark chocolate chips at about 50% cocoa in this recipe but semisweet chips can also be used.

    Golden syrup is a little difficult to come by in these parts, so I would use dark corn syrup as a substitute. Any brand of digestive biscuits will do.

    Dark chocolate is the way to go with this recipe but you can mix semisweet and dark chocolate if you like the chocolate flavour to be a little lighter.

    I’ve also read numerous versions of this recipe online that include such ingredients as dried cherries, and roasted nuts. I even saw one ingredient I might just try the next time I make this; broken Crunchie bars!

    There’s lots of room for experimentation with this recipe, so go discover your own favourite version.

    2019 update

    We have now downsized this large recipe to be made as Chocolate Biscuit Cookie Bars . Now you have two delicious opens depending upon your needs.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Looking for more cake inspiration?

    Love homemade cakes from scratch? We’ve put together a collection of the 25 Most Baked Cakes of the last 12 years on Rock Recipes. You are sure to find several to love.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Like this Chocolate Biscuit Cake recipe?

    You’ll find hundreds of other sweet ideas in our Cakes & Pies Category and even more in our Desserts Category.

    It’s easy to keep up with the latest home style cooking & baking ideas from Rock Recipes. Be sure to follow Rock Recipes Facebook Page and follow us on Instagram .

    Plus you’ll see daily recipe suggestions from decadent desserts to quick delicious weekday meals too.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    You can also sign up for our FREE newsletter to know immediately when we add new recipes. You’ll also get weekly suggestions for great family friendly meals and desserts too!

    This delicious cake is really easy … and requires no baking! It’s famous for being one of two royal wedding cakes made to celebrate the marriage of the Duke and Duchess of Cambridge in 2011. With a mix of chocolate, biscuits and a shiny chocolate covering (called a ‘ganache’), it makes for a decadent treat!

    Serves 8; children should have adult supervision when cooking

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Ingredients

    225g Rich Tea biscuits

    115g softened unsalted butter

    115g unrefined caster sugar

    115g chopped dark chocolate (minimum 53% cocoa solids)

    2 tablespoons warm water

    For the chocolate ganache

    125g dark chocolate, chopped

    125g whipping cream

    Equipment

    15cm metal cake ring

    Method

    1. Prepare the metal cake ring by greasing with butter and lining the sides and the bottom with baking paper. Place the lined ring on to a flat tray and leave to one side until required.

    2. Break the biscuits into small pieces, around 1–2cm in size. Do not place into a processor – the biscuits should not become crumbs.

    3. Place the softened butter and the sugar into a bowl and cream together until light and fluffy.

    Melt the chocolate either in the microwave or over a simmering saucepan of water.

    Once melted, pour the chocolate on to the butter and sugar and mix thoroughly.

    Finally, add the water and then the broken biscuit pieces. Stir well to make sure that all the biscuit pieces are coated with the chocolate mix.

    7. Place the mixture into the lined cake ring and carefully but firmly push it down to create an even texture. Place the cake into the fridge to chill until the chocolate becomes firm. This could take up to 30 minutes.

    For the chocolate ganache

    1. To prepare the ganache for the cake covering, place the chopped chocolate into a bowl and pour the whipping cream into a saucepan.

    2. Bring the cream to a simmer and then pour over the chopped chocolate. Carefully stir until the chocolate has completely melted and the ganache is smoothly blended.

    3. Remove the chocolate biscuit cake from the fridge and from the cake ring. Place on to a wire rack with a tray beneath to collect the excess ganache.

    4. Carefully coat the chocolate biscuit cake with the warm ganache, making sure that all of the cake is evenly coated. Allow to set fully before moving to your service plate and decorating as desired.

    less than 30 mins

    less than 10 mins

    Makes 12 squares

    A no-bake fridge cake that’s perfect for making with children. You can also pick and mix the fillings to suit your taste.

    less than 30 mins

    less than 10 mins

    Makes 12 squares

    Ingredients

    • 250g/8oz digestive biscuits
    • 150g/5oz milk chocolate
    • 150g/5oz dark chocolate
    • 100g/3½oz unsalted butter
    • 150g/5oz golden syrup
    • 100g/3½oz dried apricots, chopped
    • 75g/2½oz raisins
    • 60g/2oz pecans, chopped (optional)

    Method

    Use cling film to line a 20cm (8in) shallow, square-shaped tin. Leave extra cling film hanging over the sides.

    Bash the biscuits into pieces using a rolling pin. (Put them in a plastic bag first so they don’t go everywhere!)

    Melt chocolate, butter and golden syrup in a heatproof bowl set over a pan of simmering water. Stir occasionally.

    Remove the bowl from the heat and stir in the broken biscuits, apricots, raisins and pecans (optional).

    Spoon the mixture into the tin. Level the surface by pressing it down with a potato masher.

    Leave to cool, then put the chocolate mixture in the fridge for 1-2 hours to set.

    Turn out the cake and peel off the cling film. Cut the cake into 12 squares and enjoy!

    Recipe Tips

    Marshmallows, honeycomb and meringues all work well as alternative fillings to this biscuit cake – just chop them into small chunks and mix in with the melted chocolate mixture. Use gluten-free biscuits, and it’s a gluten-free fridge cake!

    The Best Chocolate Biscuit Cake. We love a good chocolate biscuit cake, don’t You? They are so easy to make AND No-Bake; Our two requirements for a simple dessert. This biscuit cake we made with crunchie bars and marshmallows. It is so good.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Oh my word, I wish chocolate biscuit cakes were something we could be making every single week. We’ve practically been dreaming of this cake ever since we made it for SKC.

    Regrettably biscuit cakes are not the healthiest in the world (I mean it is a dessert) but that just means when we bring them out for Christmas and other celebrations of the like, we can enjoy every bite that much more.

    So lets dive into everything you need to know about chocolate biscuit cakes.

    How to make chocolate biscuit cake

    As you may know there are so many ways you can make a biscuit cake…. so many delicious options.

    With ours we’ve used a variation of milk and dark chocolate, butter, golden syrup, digestives, raisins, mini marshmallows and Crunchie bars. 🤤

    Crunchie Bar Replacement: You can use 1 packet of Maltesers in replacement of the Crunchie bars if you would like.

    Gluten-Free Chocolate Biscuit Cake? Yes you can make our biscuit cake gluten-free and actually really easily with one swap. The digestives. Use gluten-free digestives instead and everything else is gluten-free friendly, even the crunchie bars!

    Pan Size for Biscuit Cake: We personally used a 9inch round for our recipe but if you have a 10 Inch round on hand there is no reason to go out and buy another. Just keep in mind that the size of the cake result will be different.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to decorate a chocolate biscuit cake

    The options are seriously endless with this cake. So we’ll go through what we did and other options.

    Chocolate Ganache. Oohhhhhhh the ganache might be my favorite. It’s rather simple to make. We’ll share a ‘formal’ recipe on here but in the meantime. It’s roughly..

    1 Part Chocolate to 1 Part Double Cream. So a 1:1 ratio.

    Here is one that you can use if you are out of double cream and just want to use milk instead.

    We then adding some lindt chocolate truffle and melted white chocolate chips for the drizzle.

    Other topping options: Maltesers, fondant icing, smarties, or mini mallows

    How far in advance can you make chocolate biscuit cake

    The cake can be made around 2 days in advance. If you are going to make it any further in advance see below on how to freeze a biscuit cake, as you will want to properly store it to keep it’s freshness. See how to properly store the cake below.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to store chocolate biscuit cake

    The cake will keep in the fridge up to two weeks. On the counter for about two days. Either way you’ll want to wrap the cake in parchment paper and then cling film to properly store it. Or keep it in an airtight container.

    Can I freeze a biscuit cake

    Now if you for some reason can’t finish the cake within two weeks or you want to make it and save it for a future celebration you can freeze it.

    To freeze you’ll want to wrap it well in parchment paper, then cling film and then foil. Biscuit Cake will keep in the freezer up to 3 months.

    We truthfully have not ever tried the end result of a biscuit cake, they’ve never last long enough for us to try! But we are told it can be done. Let us know if you have before and the results!

    We’d love to have afternoon tea with Her Majesty

    The Queen likes to tuck into her favourite chocolate biscuit cake during high tea at Buckingham Palace – and reportedly eats a slice of it every single day! The delicious-looking cake is also loved by her grandson Prince William, who even served it as a second cake at his wedding to Kate Middleton.

    If you’re looking for the perfect treat to bake for Afternoon Tea Week, we’ve uncovered the Queen’s exact recipe from former royal chef Darren McGrady.

    Darren previously told HELLO! that the monarch is such a huge fan of chocolate biscuit cake, leftovers were known to be packaged up and sent to Windsor Castle so she could tuck into them over a weekend!

    WATCH: Incredible woven cakes from self-taught baker

    Darren revealed: “The royal chefs send a whole cake up to Her Majesty every day for tea. She will sometimes take a slice and then it is never seen at the royal table again. [The cake is sent to the staff for their afternoon tea.]

    “The chocolate biscuit cake is the only cake that goes up to the royal table every day until it has all gone – sometimes this means it following her to Windsor Castle for the weekend,” Darren said.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    The Queen’s favourite teatime cake looks divine

    “I remember as a young chef travelling from Paddington to Windsor one Friday morning with a half-eaten chocolate biscuit cake packed neatly and tightly in a biscuit tin, and wrapped in Clingfilm, perched on my knee with the fear of God in me that I would lose or drop the thing!

    “It was her favourite. And when Prince William first tried it, he loved it and then requested it as his groom’s cake [at the Royal wedding in 2011].”

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    The delicious chocolate biscuit cake

    On Darren’s website, theroyalchef.com, he reveals that the ‘rich dark chocolate cake has a lovely crunchy texture thanks to the addition of classic English cookies called Rich tea biscuits’. The cake is finished off with a layer of chocolate frosting.

    Follow Darren McGrady’s recipe below to recreate the Queen’s choccie cake…

    October 22

    Jam-packed full of biscuits, chocolate, Malteasers and cherries, this makes the ultimate birthday cake.

    • 40mins
    • Serves 8
    Method
    1. Line a 15 cm/6″ round cake tin with baking parchment.
    2. Melt the butter, syrup and chocolate in a pan over a low heat. Stir to make sure all the ingredients are well mixed together.
    3. Add the biscuits, malteasers and cherries, stir well.
    4. Transfer to the prepared tin. Level it on top and press down well to avoid air bubbles. Cover and leave in the fridge until solid and set.
    5. Melt the chocolate and butter in a small pot, when melted, remove from the heat, whisk in the icing sugar and the cream.
    6. Allow to cool until the mixture becomes thick enough to leave a figure of eight on the surface. Pour over the cake leave to set before cutting.

    Rate this recipe

    Average rating 3.7 / 5. Vote count: 345

    No votes so far! Be the first to rate this recipe.

    • Recipes
    • Spring
    • Summer
    • Autumn
    • Winter
    • Family
    • Snacks
    • chocolate recipe
    • Cake Recipe
    • Chocolate Cake Recipe
    • No Bake Recipe
    • Dessert Recipe
    • Birthday Cake Recipe
    Ingredients
    • US
    • METRIC

    2 1/2 sticks butter

    1/2 cup golden syrup

    8 oz dark chocolate (good quality, at least 60% cocoa)

    7 oz digestive biscuits, roughly crushed

    7 oz rich tea biscuits, roughly crushed

    1.5 oz malteasers

    Handful of cherries (optional)

    For the glaze:

    3.5 oz dark chocolate

    1/2 cup icing sugar, sifted

    1/3 cup double cream

    Hundreds and thousands to decorate (optional)

    150ml golden syrup

    225g dark chocolate (good quality, at least 60% cocoa)

    200g digestive biscuits, roughly crushed

    200g rich tea biscuits, roughly crushed

    75g cherries (optional)

    For the glaze:

    100g dark chocolate

    50g icing sugar, sifted

    75ml double cream

    Hundreds and thousands to decorate (optional)

    You’ll Need

    15cm/6″ round cake tin

    You May Also

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    desserts-baking

    Affogato al Caffe with Dark Chocolate & Hazelnut Biscotti

    June 02

    Affogato is good at any time of year and it is an incredibly easy dessert to prepare. Choose the best vanilla ice cream you can find and make sure you use good, strong espresso (regular brewed coffee will not work here). The recipe for the biscotti makes about 30 but they keep very well in an airtight container.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    desserts-baking

    Banana Bread with Almond Butter & Chocolate Chips

    June 30

    These mini banana bread loaves are deliciously moist and are extremely easy to throw together. I’ve added some chocolate chips to this recipe but you could use some toasted chopped nuts instead if you prefer. This recipe will also fill a 900ml loaf tin and will take about 50 minutes to cook in the oven.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    christmas

    Black Forest Brownie Trifle

    December 22

    This recipe might look a little complicated but in fact it’s incredibly easy. If you’re very short of time use shop-bought brownies, a carton of ready made custard that you stir the melted chocolate into and a couple of posh jars of cherries in kirsch. Whatever way you decide to do it always use the best quality dark chocolate you can afford. It’s best to leave the final part of the assembly to the last minute for the most spectacular impact…

    • How to make a chocolate biscuit cake
    • Share
    • Facebook
    • Twitter
    • Google+
    • Pinterest
    • ShareThis

    Instructions

    Ingredients

    2 Tropical Cups Biscuits (broken)

    1 Tropical Cup Heavy cream

    1 Tropical Cup Chocolate, cut into small chunks

    4 tbsp Unsalted Butter

    1 tsp Vanilla Extract

    Cocoa Powder for dusting

    10 – 12 Strawberries (sliced)

    Duration

    Difficulty level

    Average Cost

    Instructions

    • Using Inspire Series Frying Pan heat heavy cream on low flame (stir and scrape sides with a spatula every few minutes).
    • Add the chocolate, vanilla extract, honey and butter. Mix till chocolate melts.
    • Mix the broken biscuits with the melted chocolate.
    • Pour mixture into Silicone Heart Mould. Press down and smoothen the top with Spatula. Refrigerate for 3-4 hours or until the cake is set and thoroughly chilled.
    • De-mold and garnish with strawberries and mint.

    Shop @ Tupperware® online

    Explore Tupperware® products online at https://shoptupperware.in

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    May Consumer Brochure

    Explore the freedom of choice in our latest promotions and offers

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Delicious and Healthy Recipes

    Coocking like a pro becomes easy with Tupperware® Products

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    I LOVE Chocolate Biscuit Cake! It was a childhood favourite of mine, so simple yet so delicious! This healthier version is just as simple to make and tastes so good. Like a traditional biscuit cake it takes a bit of time to set but it’s totally worth the wait.

    Serves 1 cake

    Cooks in 30+ Minutes

    Ingredients

    • 100g oats
    • 2 tbsp. maple syrup
    • 50g coconut oil
    • 40g ground almond
    • 250g medjool dates or regular dates (soaked in boiling water for 20 minutes then drained)
    • 400g dark chocolate
    • 6 tbsp. almond milk

    Method

    1. Preheat the oven to 180°C.
    2. For the biscuit, mix all ingredients in a bowl and combine well. Place the biscuit mix on a tray and press to flatten. Bake in the oven for 12 minutes at 180°C.
    3. Once baked, leave to one side to cool.
    4. Next, melt the chocolate.
    5. In a mixing bowl add the soaked medjool dates, melted chocolate and almond milk. Blend until smooth (there will be small traces of date and that’s ok).
    6. Break up the biscuit into large chunks.
    7. Line a bread tin with parchment paper.
    8. Pour in the chocolate mix in sections adding the biscuit chunks and layering until the all the chocolate and biscuit is used.
    9. Place in the fridge or freezer to set, approx. 90 minutes.

    ← Buffalo Cauliflower Wings

    Semolina with Blackberry Chia Jam →

    Newsletter

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake How to make a chocolate biscuit cake How to make a chocolate biscuit cake How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    • Home
    • About
    • Shop
    • Contact
    • Privacy Policy

    By continuing to use the site, you agree to the use of cookies. more information

    Share this article

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    As our Bistro team prepares to invite customers back to their outside seating area (please keep an eye on our news page for more details) we thought we would gift you with another of their special sweet treat recipes.

    Throughout lockdowns, Tsvety, Front of House Manager and the Bistro team have been busy at the Hospice providing fresh and daily food for our patients and their visitors – as well as refreshments for our colleagues who have been working at the Hospice providing essential care services.

    In February the Bistro team kindly shared their delicious Fruits of the forest brownie recipe and now they have taken a moment out of their day to share their yummy Chocolate biscuit cake:

    Chocolate biscuit cake

    Ingredients:

    250g chocolate chips

    Method:

    1. Gently melt the butter and sugar together in a saucepan, until the sugar dissolves.
    2. Take it off the heat while you whisk the eggs.
    3. Then add the eggs into the butter and sugar.
    4. Add the melted chocolate to the mix.
    5. Fold in the broken biscuits.
    6. Pour into a greased tray.
    7. (Now the hardest part) Leave for 6 hours in a fridge to set, before cutting into portions.

    Enjoy!

    Do let us know how you get on and look out for our next recipe, which will be the famous millionaire shortbread. 😊

    Related articles

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Bistro Buddies … ‘Something to look forward to’

    ‘Bistro Buddies’ share how their strong and supportive friendships bloomed from a ‘very sad situation’

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    You’ve got to be in it to ……taste it!

    Find out how YOU can make our very scrumptious Millionaire Shortbread

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    A paler shade of green…

    Volunteer gardener Mick lets us into the secret of his special grass mowing (and tell us how he’s been made.

    COVID-19: overview wider Hospice services

    Update on Bistro, Salon, Arthur’s Shed, Education & Conference Centre and wider Hospice services

    Sign up to receive our news and keep in touch!

    We support people in Cambridgeshire living with an advanced serious illness or other life-limiting condition and those who need end-of-life care.

    Love chocolate? Well, this cake is good news for you. In every bite, there’s a soft, buttery crunch from the cookie alongside a layer of melt-in-your-mouth chocolate. What we love most about this indulgent dessert is that it’s super easy, yet looks and tastes like it was quite the project. This is a chocolate masterpiece that is sure to impress your next crowd.

    Gallery

    Recipe Summary

    Ingredients

    Prepare the Biscuit Cake: Line an 8-inch springform pan or cake pan with plastic wrap, extending 4 inches over the sides (to use as handles).

    Pour water to a depth of 1 inch into bottom of a medium size heavy-duty saucepan; bring to a boil over high. Reduce heat to medium. Place semisweet chocolate, butter, and honey in a medium-size ovenproof bowl; place bowl on top of pan over simmering water. Cook, stirring often, until chocolate is melted, 6 to 8 minutes. Whisk in cream and vanilla until combined. Remove from heat. Gently stir cookies into chocolate mixture, and pour into prepared pan. Using the back of a spoon, press gently to make sure mixture is even. Cover with plastic wrap. Chill until set, 2 to 24 hours.

    Prepare the Rich Ganache: Place bittersweet chocolate in a medium bowl. Heat cream in a small saucepan over medium just until cream begins to boil; pour over chocolate, and stir until smooth. Stir in honey, vanilla, and salt. Let stand until spreading consistency, 10 to 20 minutes.

    Remove plastic wrap from cake. Transfer cake from pan to a wire rack set in a baking sheet lined with parchment paper. Slowly pour warm Rich Ganache over cake, spreading to edges and on sides. Chill 1 hour before serving. Store any leftovers covered in refrigerator.

    Nadia January 25, 2021 Cakes, Chocolate, Cookies, dairy free, Desserts, gluten free, Sweet Snacks, Vegan, Vegetarian Leave a Comment

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    *This post is sponsored by The Raw Chocolate Company*

    Delicious and crunchy no-bake chocolate biscuit cake that you can make using only 6 ingredients!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    If there are two things I love most in the food world, it has to be chocolate and biscuits. If I could, I would live on them! That and tea 😛 So why not make a treat the combines those 2 beautiful creations and make something that’s even more delicious!

    This biscuit cake, aka fridge cake, is no bake and you only need a handful of ingredients to make it. The crunchy biscuits and smooth chocolate mixture go so well hand in hand. The recipe is vegan and can easily be made gluten-free if you use gluten-free digestive biscuits.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    I created this recipe for The Raw Chocolate Company – they produce the most delicious range of vegan products including raw chocolates, cacao butter, cacao powder and coconut blossom sugar. They also sell a range of yummy healthier snacks like chocolate covered nuts and berries. If you haven’t tried their chocolate covered mulberries you’re really missing out! Great movie night snack.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    All The Raw Chocolate Company products are vegan. They use minimal additional ingredients to make the products as pure and simple as possible and to allow the taste of the cacao to shine. Most of their products are organic too!

    To make this no-bake chocolate biscuit cake, I used a combination of The Raw Chocolate Company cacao butter, coconut blossom sugar and cacao powder. The result is a smooth, fudgy chocolate base for the biscuit cake. You can go all out and top the cake with things like melted chocolate, nuts, dried fruit or whatever else you fancy! But to be honest, I do think in this that simple is best.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    No-Bake Vegan Chocolate Biscuit Cake

    Serves: 8-10

    Ingredients

    100g The Raw Chocolate Co cacao butter
    300g dark chocolate
    140g smooth almond butter
    2 tbsp The Raw Chocolate Co coconut sugar
    4 tbsp The Raw Chocolate Co cacao powder
    200g digestive biscuits – use gluten-free digestives for a gluten-free recipe

    Method

    Add all the ingredients apart from the biscuits to a large heat-proof bowl.
    Place over a saucepan of simmering water ensuring the bottom of the bowl doesn’t touch the water. Mix until everything is melted and you’re left with a smooth glossy mixture.
    Break up the biscuits into another bowl, then pour the chocolate mixture on top.
    Transfer into a cake tin (I used a 22×12 cm loaf tin).
    Allow to cool slightly, then transfer into the fridge and leave to set for around 4 hours.
    Slice and enjoy!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    No bake chocolate biscuit cake also known as chocolate fridge cake is a must-try treat. Turn digestive biscuits & chocolate into this easy homemade dessert!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Guys, if you crave something sweet that also has chocolate in it, then I highly recommend having a go at this no bake chocolate biscuit cake. It’s a simple 4 ingredient dessert and as the title says – there is no baking whatsoever. Now who wouldn’t like that, right?

    Especially now that the summer is fast approaching easy no bake desserts are the heroes of warm season. Raspberry Icebox Cake, Irish Cream Cheesecake or Banoffee Pie are one of those sweet treats that are easy to prepare and always please a crowd!

    If you are wondering how to make a cake from biscuits, read on. It is a simple recipe so anyone can do it. In fact, if you are looking for kids-friendly baking project, then this one is it!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to make no bake chocolate biscuit cake

    Break the biscuits into small pieces. Now you can also use a rolling pin and zip-lock bag to do it but I’d say you will be faster just doing it by hand. Kids will definitely love helping you with this step. Don’t break the biscuits too much though. You don’t want to end up with crumbs.

    The following step involves melting chocolate and butter. I always do it over a pan of simmering water but you can also use a microwave. Just make sure you don’t burn the chocolate. When the chocolate has melted, stir in condensed milk.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Pour chocolate mixture over the biscuit pieces and mix until you see that every single piece is covered with chocolate. All you have to do now is fill a loaf tin with this mixture, press down and pop it into the fridge overnight.

    The following day you can enjoy a few slices of this chocolate deliciousness.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Note: It does not really matter whether you start off with breaking the biscuits or melting the chocolate.

    There is usually a lot of chocolate left in the bowl (after you’ve poured it over biscuits) so I simply use a spatula to scrape it and spread/pour this over the biscuit cake.

    Store it in the fridge before serving (especially in summer).

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    This chocolate biscuit cake can be made ahead and stored in a freezer. You could slice it, wrap it individually and keep in a zip-lock bag. E very time you crave a slice you simply take it out from the freezer and wait a while until it is defrosted.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    This Biscoff Chocolate Biscuit Cake is such a delicious no bake treat! You just need a handful of ingredients to make this chocolate fridge cake – just beware, it is highly addictive 🙂

    You will also love… my Easy Biscoff Cheesecake and Biscoff Layer Cake!

    Post may contain affiliate links. For more information, check my disclosure

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    I have a soft spot in my heart for Chocolate Biscuit Cake – it was a treat my mom often made in the summer when I was little.

    In Greece where I grew up, this treat is known as Mosaic Cake and it is JUST the ticket when you crave something sweet and chocolatey.

    Versions of this cake exist around the world – it also goes by Chocolate Lazy Cake, Cake Batik (Malaysia), Kalter Hund (Germany) and Arretjescake (Netherlands).

    Would love to know if you too grew up with some local incarnation of this no bake chocolate biscuit cake!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    This humble cake is actually a favourite among the British Royal family… Apparently, both Prince William and Queen Elisabeth love a slice! Frankly who can blame them, the combination of biscuits and rich chocolate is hard to beat.

    Traditionally, this cake is made with butter or digestive biscuits but since I am currently OBSESSED with Lotus Biscoff biscuits you KNOW I had to make a Biscoff Chocolate Biscuit Cake. If you are a Biscoff lover you must add this to your must make list.

    HOW TO MAKE CHOCOLATE BISCUIT CAKE

    This is such a simple recipe that kids can make it unaided – a great kid friendly ‘baking’ project only there’s no actual baking involved!

    Full measurements and instructions can be found on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the page. Please take a look at the steps and video before attempting this recipe!

    Break the biscuits up into a bowl. You want smallish pieces, but not so small that you end up with crumbs. Your little helpers will love getting involved here… just watch they don’t eat half of the pieces tho.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Put the chocolate and butter in a bowl and microwave for 30 second bursts until the butter melts. Alternatively you can do it over a pan of barely simmering water (double boiler method).

    Leave to stand for a couple of minutes, then stir until the chocolate is melted and smooth.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Stir in the condensed milk.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Pour the melted chocolate over the biscuit pieces then stir gently until they are combined.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Transfer the chocolate biscuit mixture into a small lined loaf tin and press down firmly so that it’s level and packed into the tin.

    Scrape any chocolate still in the bowl over the top and level. Place it in the fridge overnight so that the biscuit cake sets.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    The following day, lift the cake out of the tin using the overhanging paper and transfer to a plate.

    Microwave four tablespoons of smooth Biscoff Spread for 30 seconds and stir. Drizzle this over the cake, letting it drip down the sides. Decorate with Lotus Biscoff biscuits (this step is optional).

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Run a sharp knife under hot water and cut thin slices of the cake to serve.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Storing and Freezing

    This fridge cake will keep for up to a week or longer in the fridge. It’s not suitable for storing at room temperature, especially on a hot day.

    Simply cut a small slice whenever you fancy a treat! I have to warn you that this is a very rich dessert – best enjoyed sparingly!

    You can also freeze the cake, whole or in slices if you like. It will keep for up to three months in the freezer. Thaw overnight in the fridge before slicing and serving, or take out of freezer and leave at room temperature until soft enough to slice.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    HAVE YOU MADE MY BISCOFF CHOCOLATE BISCUIT CAKE RECIPE? Post a photo on my Facebook page, share it on Instagram, or save it to Pinterest with the tag #supergoldenbakes and make my day!

    Chocolate Fridge Cake: This No-Bake Chocolate Biscuit Cake is an easy, fun, no-fuss treat and a perfect Kids Friendly recipe!

    Give your leftover easter egg chocolates a makeover and turn them into this exciting No-bake refrigerator cake!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    CHOCOLATE BISCUIT FRIDGE CAKE RECIPE

    You only need 4 essential ingredients – Chocolates, Biscuits, Butter and Condensed milk for this fridge cake. All other ingredients can be an add-on. Apart from melting the chocolates, the rest of the recipe is a no-cook recipe! Simply mix the ingredients together, place it on a lined baking tray and allow it to refrigerate until set.

    The recipe is as simple and easy as that!

    FACT: Did you know Prince William actually chose Chocolate Biscuit Cake as his groom’s cake for his Wedding? This easy no-bake fridge cake is a childhood indulgence of Prince William and a favorite of the entire royal family.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    IDEA BEHIND THE CHOCOLATE FRIDGE CAKE

    We had about 25 Easter Eggs of all sizes, left from our Easter Egg Hunt. With so many Chocolate Eggs at hand, we were thinking of making so many yummy treats like a brownie, cookies and cakes. But finally settled for this super easy No-bake Chocolate Fridge Cake with Condensed Milk.

    We prepared a mini shopping list along with the kids and went handpicking the ingredients to the Aldi. The whole process of picking the ingredients and making it together with kids is a fantastic holiday activity and a dessert they can be proud of.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    CHOCOLATE FRIDGE CAKE INGREDIENTS

    This genius no-bake fridge cake has got all the fun ingredients one can imagine and it’s easily customizable.

    Digestive Biscuits – Biscuits are the key to making this cake. Any brand digestives should do the job.

    Condensed Milk – As the recipe doesn’t have added sugar, Condensed Milk is another important ingredient. For caramel flavor, you could use Caramel Condensed milk too. Either of them works great in this no-bake dessert.

    Chocolates – I have used Milk Chocolates, for this recipe, as my kids love them. But dark chocolate also works really well.

    Butter – Unsalted Butter lends a creamy buttery flavor. So please do not skip this ingredient.

    All the other exciting ingredients such as Maltesers, Easter Eggs, etc are customizable. How about adding some Popcorn, marshmallows, or maybe dried fruits like figs or some nuts to this refrigerator quick biscuit cake recipe.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    HOW TO MAKE CHOCOLATE BISCUIT CAKE ?

    Digestive Biscuit Chocolate Cake is an Eggless & Flourless Dessert that is absolutely possible to make with kids. In fact, I highly recommend making this fun kids-friendly dessert cake with them.

    The first and foremost step to make this eggless chocolate fridge cake is gently breaking the digestive biscuits and chocolates with a rolling pin. Remember not to crush them into a fine powder.

    Melt the chocolate & butter using the double boiler method. Stir in the condensed milk until well combined.

    Next, stir melted chocolate into the digestive biscuits & chocolate eggs mixture until coated.

    Stir in any of the remaining ingredients like Maltesers or any of your choice.

    Carefully transfer this prepared no-bake chocolate biscuit cake into the lined baking tin.

    Meanwhile, melt the chocolate for coating using the double boiler method and carefully spoon them over the biscuit chocolate cake dessert until completely covered.

    Allow the dessert to set in the refrigerator for 2-3 hours.

    TIPS TO MAKE THE BEST NO-BAKE CHOCOLATE BISCUIT CAKE

    Always gather your ingredients before you start making this chocolate fridge cake.

    Use the Double Boiler method to melt the chocolate.

    Remember to keep the moisture away and use dry hands while handling chocolate.

    It’s preferable to use a sharp knife to obtain neat slices of the cake, instead of a butter knife.

    Allow the no-bake refrigerator cake to set completely, before slicing.

    SERVING SUGGESTIONS

    This Easy Peasy Chocolate Fridge Cake makes an excellent treat for birthday parties and after-school treats. They make excellent edible gifts for friends and family.

    EASY CHOCOLATE RECIPES TO INSPIRE YOU

    HAVE YOU MADE THIS RECIPE?

    Be sure to leave a comment and/or give this recipe a ★ rating!

    Post a photo of your creation on my Facebook page, share it on Instagram, or save it to Pinterest with the tag #sandhyaskitchen. I would love to see your pictures!

    INGREDIENTS
    • 500g Digestive biscuits/crackers
    • 150g Walnuts/hazelnuts/almonds, roasted (optional)
    • 3/4 cup (150g) Sugar
    • 2/3 cup (150g) Butter
    • 1/2 cup (50g) Cocoa powder
    • 1 cup (240ml) Water/coffee

    For the ganache:

    • 120g Dark chocolate
    • 1/2 cup (120ml) Heavy cream
    DIRECTIONS
    1. Crush/ break the biscuits into small pieces. Place them in a large bowl. if you are using nuts, crush them as well and add to the bowl. set aside.
    2. In a saucepan combined sugar, butter, cocoa powder and water/coffee. Place the saucepan over medium heat and bring to a boil. Cook for 5-6 minutes, stirring constantly.
    3. Pour chocolate syrup over the biscuits and stir until well coated.
    4. Transfer the mixture into a 9-inch (23cm) pan. Press firmly to create flat surface cake. Refrigerate while making the ganache.
    5. Make chocolate ganache: chop the chocolate and place in a heatproof bowl. In a small saucepan heat the cream, when starts to simmer remove from heat and pour over the chocolate. Let sit for 1-2 minutes and stir until melted and smooth.
    6. Pour the ganache over the cake and refrigerate for at least 2-3 hours before serving.
    7. Decorate with nuts.

    Share it with us on Instagram and tag @thecookingfoodie so we can see your cooking adventures!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Lots of Chocolate, Colourful Eggs, and Chicks – this Easter Nest Chocolate Biscuit Cake recipe has all you need to to help you celebrate Easter!

    Ingredients

    Ingredients

    For the recipe Easter Nest Chocolate Biscuit Cake

    For the biscuit cake:

    400 g Unsalted butter
    230 ml Golden Syrup
    170 g Dr. Oetker 35% Milk Chocolate
    170 g Dr. Oetker 72% Extra Dark Chocolate
    100 g Dr. Oetker Heart Marshmallows ,roughly chopped
    350 g Digestive Biscuits ,roughly crushed
    200 g Digestive Biscuits ,roughly crushed

    For the nest:

    300 g Dr. Oetker 35% Milk Chocolate
    180 g Shredded Wheat

    preparation

    Preparation

    Method

    Line a deep 18cm round tin with non-stick parchment paper.

    In a large pot, add the unsalted butter and golden syrup. Allow to melt slowly over a low-medium heat.

    In a bowl, break the Dr. Oetker Milk and Dark Chocolate into squares. Once the butter and golden syrup has melted together, remove from the heat. Add in the chocolate and stir until the chocolate has melted.

    In a large bowl, add the crushed biscuits and chopped Dr. Oetker Heart Marshmallows. Pour over the chocolate mix and stir until combined.

    Pour the mix into the prepared tin, using a spatula to level out the top. Allow the cake to set in the fridge for a few hours or overnight.

    To make the nest, in a large bowl melt the Dr. Oetker Milk Chocolate in the microwave in 30 second bursts, until the chocolate is fully melted. Add in the crushed shredded wheat and stir until just combined.

    Remove the set biscuit cake from the tin and remove the tin and parchment paper. Spoon on the shredded wheat mix while it is still wet, on top of the cake. Spread the mix over the top and sides of the cake. Use the back of the spoon to make a small hole in the top of the cake for the eggs to sit in.

    Refrigerate the cake until the chocolate has set. Once set, add the colourful wrapped chocolate eggs, a few yellow chicks and tie a ribbon around the cake.

    Nutritional Information for the recipe Easter Nest Chocolate Biscuit Cake

    Per Serving Per 100 g / ml
    Energy 3609 kJ
    862 kcal
    2257 kJ
    539 kcal
    Fat 59.73 g 37.33 g
    Carbohydrate 75.47 g 47.17 g
    Protein 8.02 g 5.01 g

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    1. White Chocolate and Pistachio Cake
    2. Mini Egg Brownie
    3. Easter Cookies
    4. St. Patricks Day Chocolate Bark
    5. St. Patricks Day Mint Chocolate Fudge
    6. Japanese Pancakes
    7. Easter Egg Cheesecakes
    8. Mint Chocolate Mousse Pots
    9. Chocolate, Sweets and Leftover Treats Ice Cream
    10. Valentine’s Marshmallow Stuffed Cookies
    • Career
    • Privacy
    • Compliance
    • Legal
    • Sitemap
    • Tracking consent

    back Tracking consent

    We would be happy if you agreed that we and our partners use cookies and similar technologies to understand how you use our website. This enables us to better understand your user behaviour and adapt our website accordingly. Furthermore, we and our partners would like to use this data for personalised offers on their platforms. If you agree to this, please click on “Agree”. Please refer to our privacy policy for detailed information. You can change your mind at any time.

    We need these cookies and similar technologies to enable the basic functions of our website. This includes, for example, saving these settings. This is strictly necessary so that you cannot switch this off.

    In addition, we would like to learn more about how you use our website in order to optimise it for you and other users. To this end, we use cookies and similar technologies that map user behaviour and thus help us to improve our offer for you.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Hello everyone! Crunchie Chocolate Biscuit Cake recipe for you today! A simple recipe that only uses a handful of ingredients. Its absolutely delicious and it can be made in any mold or tin you like! Super Versatile!

    I made mine in a 8×8 square tin, this gave me 16 big chunks! Feel free to use what you have. If you want to half or double this recipe go for it! You will just need to alter the chill time. You could make this recipe in a round cake tin and use it as a birthday cake covered in fondant or buttercream! Its so so versatile. If you want to only make a small amount you could half the recipe and make it in a loaf tin, then cut up into slices! This would be so nice!

    With this Chocolate Biscuit Cake recipe you can change up the ingredients to whatever you have. Stick with the dark & milk chocolate, condensed milk and butter then add in anything else. This is what I love so much about the recipe. You can change up the biscuits to your favourites or change up the other treats for anything you like. Just stick to the same quantities of what I have in the recipe.

    Biscuit ideas– Biscoff, Gingernut, Oreo, Cookies, Shortbread, Caramel digestives, Bourbon creams.

    Treat ideas– M&M’s, Kinder bars, Smarties, Ferrero Rocher, Cadburys bars (Caramel would be amazing) Aero bubbles, Toblerone, Reeses, Fudge.

    When portioning up your biscuit cake please use a knife warmed up in hot water. This will make it so much easier for you! You will get much cleaner slices.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    If you have any questions Dm me on Instagram. Happy Baking!

    Write reviews, comment on stories and enter competitions.

    List your restaurant

    Create and manage a listing for your restaurant.

    Claim your restaurant

    Manage an existing listing.

    Browse by location

    • Login
    • Sign up now
    Login to Eat Out
    Join our community

    Write reviews, comment on stories and enter competitions.

    List your restaurant

    Create and manage a listing for your restaurant.

    Claim your restaurant

    Manage an existing listing.

    Newsletter sign up

    Get the latest restaurant and food news delivered to your inbox every week!

    Recipes

    • Home
    • Recipes
    • Chocolate biscuit cake

    Chocolate biscuit cake

    • Tweet
    • Facebook
    • Pin It

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    This decadent chocolate biscuit cake was a firm favourite in the royal nursery and was even used as Prince William’s groom’s cake. The recipe is courtesy of The Royal Touch by Carolyn Robb who is the personal chef to the Prince and Princess of Wales, Prince William and Prince Harry.

    • baking
    • biscuit
    • cake
    • chocolate

    Ingredients

    Method

    1. Melt the butter with the golden syrup in a heavy based pan. Do not let it boil.
    2. Remove from the heat and add the cocoa powder, dark chocolate and vanilla extract.
    3. Stir until you have a very smooth, glossy mixture.
    4. Add the pistachios, figs and crushed biscuits to the chocolate mixture and stir well.
    5. Line the base and sides of the cake tin with baking parchment or plastic wrap.
    6. Place the mixture into a 20 cm cake tin and press it down. (If you are using a square tin, make sure you press it down well into the corners.)
    7. Leave to cool at room temperature before covering and chilling in the fridge. It will take about 2 hours to set completely firm.
    8. When set, remove from the tin and place it on a cooling rack.
    9. Melt the dark chocolate and white chocolate separately.
    10. Spread the dark chocolate all over the cake.
    11. Decorate with the Maltesers before the chocolate sets, so that they stick to the cake. Position chocolate sticks as desired and drizzle with the white chocolate.
    12. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
    13. Keeps for up 2 weeks, although it seldom lasts that long, once people know that it is there.
    • You can replace the pistachios with pecans, toasted almonds or macadamia nuts.
    • You can replace the figs with raisins, sultanas or dried cherries.
    • For a festive holiday treat, use glacé cherries and dried apricots that have been soaked in cherry brandy.
    • For a children’s party cake, decorate with Smarties or M&M’s.

    This recipe is courtesy of, The Royal Touch by Carolyn Robb, published by ACC Editions.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    • Dessert
    • easy
    • 10
    • 30 minutes

    This decadent treat is a chocoholic’s dream. With chunks of crunchy honeycomb, broken biscuits and pecans, this cake is perfect to make in advance to surprise guests for afternoon tea.

    • Chocolate Recipes
    • Valentine’s Day Recipes
    • Easy vegetarian Recipes
    • Italian dessert Recipes
    • Italian cake Recipes
    • show more
    • hide more

    Related recipes

    Related recipes

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    My big brother Max has always loved cooking. When we were both very young, he was given a book called Keep Out of the Kitchen Mum and together we spent hours recreating recipes from its pages without any adult interference.

    One of the recipes was for chocolate refrigerator cake: a simple, no-bake cake made from chocolate, biscuits and butter. As children, we’d triple the recipe to fill a giant rabbit-shaped birthday cake mould and serve it on a ‘field’ of wobbly green jelly. For everyday eating, this loaf-shaped cake is a little more practical.

    This recipe is from Kate’s new book Homemade Memories: Childhood Treats with a Twist published by Orion, 2015.

    Today’s serving is my interpretation of Queen Elizabeth II’s favourite cake – chocolate biscuit cake! As a hobbyist baker, my favourite type of desserts of those that require the least effort but have the biggest payoff and this biscuit cake is no exception. This dairy-free , nut-free and completely vegan dessert comes together within a couple hours and requires only 6 ingredients !

    If you’re not a fan of chocolate then not to fret – check out my other recipes here! Alternatively, check out my chocolate archives here if this biscuit cake doesn’t tickle your fancy!

    Baking tips:

    This vegan chocolate biscuit cake is fairly foolproof as it requires no baking, no difficult tools or techniques and can be whipped up in 2 hours! However, I know I’ve made some silly mistakes on easy recipes before so here are some tips and tricks to make sure your cake is picture perfect!

    1. Do follow the recipe as described! It’s a very simple recipe but it can become a sticky mess if you don’t do the steps in the right order. A good example is mixing the cocoa powder with the plant milk; if you throw it all together the cocoa powder will clump and it will be hard to make smooth.

    2. Try to use a good quality vegan butter and chocolate. The ideal butter has at least 75% fat. The butter here is mainly here for flavour but if it’s too “light” it will affect the final texture. I use Naturli or Flora baking b lock.

    3. Don’t skip the sea salt. I know it seems odd adding salt to desserts but when all the elements are sweet, you need a pinch of salt for balance.

    4. I used Rich tea biscuits for this recipe which is the classic choice for a biscuit cake. This however results in a soft texture as the biscuits are very dry and they absorb a lot of the moisture. If you want more of a crunch or unique flavour profile then go for gingernut biscuits or digestives! If you are outside the UK reading this, graham crackers will work too. Rich tea biscuits are often vegan but do check the label before you buy them!

    5. Do use a baking tin with a removable bottom. This can be a spring-form pan or a loose-bottom. It is *possible* to use a regular cake tin but you’ll have to turn it upside down and careful drop onto a plate which could cause breakage.

    6. The cake will be fairly tricky to remove from the cake tin so I use a blowtorch to warm up the edges. You could also use a warm tea towel wrapped around the tin.

    7. The higher the cocoa % in the chocolate the firmer the cake and ganache will set. I use a bar with around

    55% cocoa solids.

    If you’re in the UK, I’ve provided a list below with some of the key ingredients I’ve used…

    Ingredients:

    • For the golden syrup I use the Silver spoon brand. If you’re outside the UK, golden syrup can be swapped for corn syrup or any inverted sugar syrup.
    • My go-to vegan block butter is the one from Naturli.
    • For the plant milk , I used Alpro soy milk but you can use another other of the plant milks such as oat or rice if you need to be soy/nut free!
    • As mentioned above, I used Rich tea biscuits for this recipe. Do check the label before you buy them as not all of them are vegan.

    For this recipe you’ll need:

    • 8-inch springform/loose-bottom cake tin

    Published: Oct 21, 2021 · Modified: Oct 21, 2021 by Farah Abumaizar · 12 Comments

    This easy chocolate tiffin is a no bake chocolate biscuit cake that takes 5 minutes to make, a handful of ingredients and is so versatile and yummy!

    What is chocolate tiffin?

    Chocolate tiffin is a dessert (originating from Britain!) that’s a no bake easy dessert made of crushed biscuits mixed with a melted chocolate mixture and pressed into a tin, then chilled until set.

    A traditional chocolate tiffin usually has raisins in it, but I can’t stand raisins in desserts so I left them out (and replaced with some extra yummy mix-ins!). The cocoa powder is usually also sweetened with golden syrup, a British inverted sugar syrup, but I replaced this with sweetened condensed milk. It’s a lot easier to find and really creamy and delicious.

    Chocolate tiffin often has an additional chocolate ganache layer on top, but I don’t find this necessary at all so I eliminated that extra step.

    What’s so good about this tiffin recipe?

    This is my tried and tested recipe for a smooth, just sweet enough chocolate. That’s the base of the recipe, and this is a really easy chocolate mix made from just cocoa powder, melted butter and sweetened condensed milk.

    The combination of biscuits and chocolates is absolutely addictive. This is a very versatile recipe, use whatever biscuits you have on hand. I often use Marie biscuits to make this into a Marie biscuit cake , but you can use anything really!

    This is probably the easiest dessert you’ll ever make. Just mix the melted chocolate mix with biscuits and any other add ins, pour into a pan and chill. That’s it!

    Chocolate tiffin is a lot of fun to make with kids. Since it’s a no bake dessert they can get be present with every step, and you can get them involved in deciding what to mix in, and breaking up the biscuit pieces.

    Because I add a lot of chopped candy to this recipe, it’s the perfect bar recipe for leftover Halloween candy!

    What ingredients do I need for chocolate tiffin?

    For the chocolate: Cocoa powder (either natural or dutch processed work), sweetened condensed milk, and melted butter.

    You could substitute the sweetened condensed milk for golden syrup (which is more traditional for tiffin) or use icing sugar to sweeten instead. Try it this way though! It’s delicious.

    For the biscuits: Any biscuits you like! Digestive biscuits would be great, as well as graham crackers. You can use Marie biscuits and have a Marie biscuit cake. My kids chose a mix of digestive biscuits and Oreos.

    For the mix-ins: I think this is the perfect leftover halloween candy recipe! You can use a big handful of any chopped candy bars, M&Ms, gummy bears, anything you like to make this more fun. You can of course go the traditional route and eliminate any extra candy altogether, and make this just a chocolate biscuit cake.

    Steps to making a chocolate biscuit cake:

    There’s barely anything to it!

    1. Prepare your 8×8 inch pan (20cm) by lightly greasing and lining with parchment paper.
    2. Break up the biscuits you’ll use into large chunks and set them aside. Chop up any candy that needs chopping if using.
    3. Melt the butter, then stir in the cocoa powder and condensed milk until nice and smooth.
    4. Add the biscuit pieces and chopped candy/chocolate if using, and fold them in gently until combined.
    5. Spread mixture into prepared pan, press any extra chocolate pieces or biscuits on top for decoration, then place in the freezer for a couple hours until set. You can also place it in the fridge, but I like freezing for a faster set and cleaner cut.
    6. Slice and enjoy!

    Can I make this gluten free? Absolutely! It all depends on the biscuits you use. Use gluten free biscuits and this’ll turn into a gluten free dessert.

    Can I make this more/less sweet? Yes! As this recipe uses cocoa powder, the sweetness is all controlled through the sweetened condensed milk. Add a little less if you like, taste, and adjust. If you added the full can and still want it sweeter, add some more! This is a very forgiving recipe.

    What are more ideas for things to mix in? You can add raisins like the traditional recipes, dried cranberries or cherries, shredded coconut. Try honeycomb, chopped nuts, cornflakes, you can really add anything you like!

    Can I make a smaller recipe? Yes, if you halve the recipe, it works perfectly to fit a 9×5 inch loaf pan. Alternately, you can double and make a 13×9 inch pan

    Tips and tricks for success:

    Make sure that the mixture is set before you try cutting it, or it’ll be a very messy process. Be patient until the chocolate has hardened

    Once the chocolate has hardened use a very sharp knife to cut into squares, it may take a little muscle especially when cutting through biscuits or chewy candies.

    Don’t crush your biscuits too much, you want big chunks that’ll give you texture and a nice bite as opposed to fine crumbs.

    Mix it up! Add your favorite mix ins and make this your own.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    • Pin
    • Share
    • Email

    This easy yet visually stunning chocolate cake has cookies mixed into the batter and a fluffy meringue topping.

    Notes:

    • I used two (7-ounce) packages Goya brand Galletas María (María Cookies) which can be found in the Latin American aisle of most supermarkets.
    • Break the cookies into approximately 6 pieces—they don’t have to be perfect.
    • This recipe uses raw egg yolks; dip the eggs in boiling water for 5 to 10 seconds and pat dry prior to cracking and separating the eggs.
    • This recipe calls for 6 egg yolks and 3 egg whites: If you decide to make the meringue topping, reserve the whites while separating the eggs and save the rest for another use.
    • If you don’t want to frost the turrón, serve it with a generous dollop of lightly sweetened whipped cream.

    Ingredients

    • For the Turrón:
    • 3 sticks (12 ounces) plus 1 tablespoon unsalted butter, at room temperature
    • 1 pound confectioners’ sugar
    • 3/4 cup unsweetened cocoa powder
    • 6 large egg yolks (See Notes)
    • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • 1/2 teaspoon salt
    • 14 ounces Galletas María, broken into pieces (See Notes)
    • For the meringue: (optional, see notes)
    • 1 cup sugar
    • 1/2 cup water
    • 3 egg whites (see notes)
    • 1/2 teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • Pinch salt

    Directions

    Grease 9-inch springform pan with 1 tablespoon butter.

    With whisk attachment, mix remaining 3 sticks butter and confectioners’ sugar in large bowl on low speed until incorporated, about 30 seconds. Increase speed to medium-high and whip until light and fluffy, about 2 minutes.

    Reduce speed to low, add cocoa powder, and mix until incorporated, about 30 seconds. Increase speed to medium-high and whip until cocoa is fully incorporated and mixture is light and fluffy, about 2 minutes, scraping down sides and bottom of bowl with rubber spatula as needed.

    Add egg yolks, one at a time, whipping well after each addition. Add vanilla and salt and whip just to combine.

    Add cookie pieces and, with rubber spatula, gently fold in until cookie pieces are covered in chocolate mixture.

    Scrape mixture into prepared pan, pressing down gently. Cover turrón with plastic wrap and freeze at least 4 hours

    When turrón is frozen and ready to serve, stir sugar and water in heavy-bottomed medium saucepan over medium-low heat until sugar dissolves. Increase heat to medium-high and boil syrup until it registers 240°F on candy thermometer, 5 to 7 minutes.

    While syrup is boiling, with whisk attachment, beat whites and salt on medium speed until loosened, about 1 minute. Increase speed to medium-high and whisk until soft peaks form, 2 to 3 minutes.

    With mixer running on medium-high speed, slowly and carefully add syrup to egg whites. Beat until outside of bowl is cool to the touch and whites are thick and glossy, about 7 minutes.

    Release frozen turrón from pan and place on serving platter. Spread meringue decoratively on top and sides. Allow to sit at room temperature about 10 minutes before cutting with a serrated knife.

    Special equipment

    9-inch springform pan, electric mixer, heavy-bottomed medium saucepan, candy thermometer

    This No Bake Chocolate Biscuit Cake Recipe is one of the most delicious desserts. The cake takes no time at all to whip up, is so simple and easy to make and doesn’t require an oven which makes it perfect to get kids involved. Add your own spin with nuts or fruit or keep it as is!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    225g / 2 Sticks Butter
    • No need for room temperature butter here, we’ll be melting it so straight out of the fridge is all good!
    ½ Cup / 125mls Golden Syrup
    • If you don’t have golden syrup – maple syrup, honey or corn syrup can all be used here instead.
    ½ Cup / 50g Cocoa Powder
    • Use the best quality cocoa powder you can find.
    ½ Cup / 100g Sugar
    • Other types of sugar can be substituted here.
    ¼ Cup / 60mls Water
    • Water gives the cake the perfect texture as it can get too hard in the fridge.
    800g / 23oz Digestive Biscuits (Tea Biscuits, Graham Crackers)
    • There are all sorts of different biscuits or cookies you can use in this recipe. The most common are digestive, graham crackers or simple tea biscuits.
    1 Cup / 250mls Cream
    • Heavy or whipping cream is best to use here.
    200g / 7oz 50% Dark Chocolate
    • Dark chocolate gives the best flavour for the icing on this cake but you can use milk chocolate or super dark chocolate if you would prefer.
    1 Cup / 125g Powdered Sugar
    • Powdered sugar, icing sugar and confectioners sugar are all the same ingredients, just different names depending on where you live in the world.

    Video Tutorial

    Watch the video below for step by step instructions for how to make Delicious No Bake Chocolate Biscuit Cake for Dessert!

    In a medium sized saucepan add the butter. Cut it into a few pieces just so it will melt easier.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Add in the dry ingredients, the cocoa powder and the sugar.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Pour in the water and place the saucepan over medium low heat.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Stir occasionally as the ingredients melt together. When the mixture is completely smooth remove it from the heat and set to the side.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Using a food process or just your hands break the biscuits up into small pieces. Variety is great here so keep some pieces larger and some pieces pretty small.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Pour the melted chocolate mixture into the bowl with the broken up biscuits.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Using a wooden spoon combine everything together really well until you can no longer see and dry pieces of biscuits. It’ll look like a bit of a mess but don’t worry it’ll come together into a delicious cake.
    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Add the mixture to lined 8″ or 20cm cake pan and press down really well with the back of a spoon. Place it into the fridge to set while we make the topping.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    To make the icing chop the chocolate up small and add to a small bowl. Heat the cream over medium heat until it just comes to the boil and pour over the chocolate. Leave for about 3-4 minutes to melt before adding the powdered sugar on top. Stir to combine until completely smooth.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Pour the icing over the Chocolate Biscuit Cake and place in the fridge for at least 6 hours or overnight to set.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Common Questions about this Chocolate Biscuit Cake Recipe

    What are Digestive Biscuits?

    Digestives are common in NZ, Australia and Europe. They are vary similar to Graham Crackers so use whichever you can get your hands on. Alternatively you can use another type of cookie or biscuit for your choice, I would recommend something simple and plain like tea biscuits or vanilla cookies.

    Can I make this into a log or slice?

    Yes definitely! You can pour the cake mixture into any kind of pan or tin you would like or use baking paper to shape into more of a log. You can as well halve the recipe if you would like to make a smaller amount.

    Can I add other ingredients?

    Yes, thats what makes this recipe so great! You can add anything else you would like or have on hand. Nuts and dried fruit work incredibly well in this recipe.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    This Chocolate Bourbon Biscuit Cake is just what you need to brighten up your dessert table! Make it with just 4 ingredients and bake for just 20 minutes. Decorate with chocolate cream and more biscuits. Serve during birthdays and special occasions.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Table of Contents

    About The Chocolate Bourbon Biscuit Cake Recipe

    Pull up your sleeves and get ready to make this delicious cake! It is so simple to make and only requires 4 easy-to-find ingredients. Bourbons are chocolate sandwich biscuits filled with chocolate buttercream. They are usually served as a snack or eaten with tea and kids love them.

    This recipe takes a spin on the classic biscuits and makes a tasty two-layer cake that can be served at celebrations. If you don’t fancy chocolate cream then feel free to skip it altogether and serve the cake plain instead. You can also swap brown sugar with white sugar if you don’t have any to hand.

    You can also half, double or triple the Bourbon biscuit cake recipe depending on how many people you plan to serve.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Bourbon Biscuit Cake Ingredients

    • Bourbon biscuits: These yummy biscuits are blended into crumbs and combined with other ingredients to make the cake batter.
    • Baking powder: This is leaveining agent used to help the cake rise.
    • Brown sugar: Adds sweetness to the cake.
    • Milk: Add milk to the dry ingredients to make the Bourbon biscuit cake batter.
    • Heavy cream: Combine heavy cream with other ingredients to make chocolate cream.
    • Icing sugar: This is a fine sugar that is used to make chocolate cream.
    • Vanilla extract: For extra sweetness.
    • Cocoa powder: Use good quality cocoa powder to make the chocolate cream.
    • Mascarpone: Combine mascarpone with the other ingredients for a delicious texture and flavor.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to Make Bourbon Biscuit Cake

    1. Preheat oven at 180C/360F. Then line two 7″ or 6″ baking tins with baking paper.
    2. Place the bourbon biscuits in a blender or food processor. Blend into crumbs.
    3. Add biscuit crumbs, baking powder, brown sugar and milk to a large bowl.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    4. Mix the dry ingredients well in a bowl. Pour half of the cake batter into one tin then pour the remaining batter into the second tin.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    5. Flatten the batter and bake cakes for 20-25 minutes. Check the readiness of the cakes with a wooden skewer – it should come out clean.

    Remove cakes from the oven and leave them to cool upside down on a cooling rack.

    How to make Chocolate Cream

    6. While the cakes cool get started on the chocolate cream. Whip the heavy cream and icing sugar until you get medium peaks. Then add mascarpone, vanilla extract, cocoa powder and fold gently with a spatula.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    7. Use a frosting bag with a nozzle to apply the cream to the cake. Add chocolate cream on top of the first cake layer and smooth it out. Then, place the second layer on top of the cake and spread the top cake with a thin layer of cream.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    8. Alternate between chocolate cream swirls and bourbon biscuits around the rim of the cake. Then pour bourbon biscuit crumbles into the center of the cake.

    Finally, refrigerate the cake for up to 1 hour to set the chocolate cream and serve as desired.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    10. Serve this decadent Chocolate Bourbon Cake as a delicious dessert, for birthdays and special celebrations.

    Tips and Tricks

    • Bourbon biscuit crumbs: Make sure you blend the Bourbon biscuits into fine crumbs before making the batter. This will ensure that you get a delicious fluffy biscuit cake.
    • Decoration: Feel free to get creative when decorating this chocolate bourbon biscuit cake. You can use chocolate ganache, chocolate buttercream, chocolate cream or serve it plain.

    Bourbon biscuit is a popular chocolate sandwich biscuit. It is rectangular in shape and has a chocolate buttercream filling.

    The name Bourbon comes from a combination of Bournville which is their place of origin and Bonn which is the hometown of professor Zehnloch.

    A variety of desserts can be made with Bourbon biscuits. For example, brownies, cheesecakes, milkshakes, cakes and more.

    Thanks for reading this recipe, comment below if you made this and let me know how it went! Follow @simshomekitchen on Instagram, take a photo, tag and hashtag it with @simshomekitchen.

    Stay connected and follow me for more recipes on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram for all of my latest recipes!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Crispy cake layers smothered with chocolate espresso cream

    Rediscover the classical recipe: Delicious coffee and chocolate biscuit cake.

    The Coffee and Chocolate Biscuit Cake, is a real classic! If the original recipe is also eaten by children, this variant is rather something for the adults. The delicious coffee aroma gives this stunning cake a new and fresh kick. The advantage of preparing this cake is that the cake does not have to be baked. Fast and efficient.

    Fun-Fact: The popular biscuit cake is mainly known under the name “cold dog” or “cold splendor”. But where does this term come from? On the one hand, the name derives from the box-like “hunts” (mining vehicles) in the mining sector, which were the present forms of the cake, and on the other hand, the surface of the candy is often compared with the wet snout or “cold muzzle” of a dog.

    Total time: 30min

    Prep time: 30min

    Cook time: 0min

    Difficulty: Easy

    Servings: 10 Slices

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Ingredients

    • 4 eggs
    • 200 g of sugar
    • 1 tspn vanilla powder
    • 100g dark chocolate (85%) – crushed
    • 250g of butter
    • 50g extra fine sugar
    • 300ml Espresso (Gourmesso Ristretto Blend Forte or Honduras Pura Forte)
    • 280g of tea or butter biscuits
    • Cocoa powder and icing sugar

    Directions

    For the cream:

    ➊ Beat the eggs in a heat-resistant bowl and add the 200g of sugar, vanilla powder and dark chocolate. Stir everything with a wooden spoon to a uniform mass.

    ➋ Place the bowl in a saucepan with boiling water and stir the mass evenly over the steam for about 10 minutes. Be careful that nothing sticks or solidifies.

    ➌ Place the bowl aside and allow the mass to cool to room temperature.

    ➍ Mix the butter with the extra-fine sugar for 5 minutes until a light and fluffy mass is produced. Combine with the cooled chocolate mass and stir again until everything is mixed. Let it cool down.

    For the cake:

    ➊ Dip the biscuits in the espresso and place them in an arrangement of 3 × 2 on a cake plate. Place the biscuits into the espresso for only a second, otherwise they become too soft.

    ➋ Now spread the chocolate mass on the biscuits. Make sure that the cream is not more than 5mm thick. Repeat this step until all the biscuits are pilled up. At the most – 7 layers.

    ➌ Once the cake is prepared, spread another layer of the cream as a topping over it. After that, it should be kept cool for a few hours so that everything becomes solid. If you cover the cake with a fresh foil, it will stay for a few days. Cut the slices when ready to serve.

    Tip: For decoration, use chocolate chips, powdered sugar and cocoa powder!

    Sharing is caring!

    • Share
    • Tweet
    • Pin

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Watch the Video:

    I make Greek Mosaiko every time I visit my sister in New York. The second I get there, my niece and nephew, Ellie and Evan, ask when we’re going to make “chocolate cupcakes.” We make the cupcake version because they’re fun, and the kids really like getting in there, breaking up the cookies, and eating a few pieces while we do it. However, I want to share the grown-up version I make in a springform pan. It’s so easy to make, and it looks beautiful when serving. This recipe can easily be doubled, finished in a loaf pan, and sliced for serving if you have a crowd coming over. I can’t wait for you to try it!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    This will be your go-to easy cake recipe

    • Slightly crisp toffee flavored cookie
    • So chocolatey
    • Not too sweet
    • Quick, easy no-bake chocolate cake that’s fun to make!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    No-bake Ingredients

    • Biscoff cookies or your favorite tea biscuits
    For the Chocolate Sauce:
    • Granulated sugar
    • Milk
    • Unsweetened cocoa powder
    • Semi-sweet chocolate –chopped
    • Unsalted butter –cubed
    • Pure vanilla extract
    For the Chocolate Glaze:
    • Semi-sweet chocolate, chopped
    • Heavy whipping cream
    • Pure vanilla extract
    Chocolate Cake Garnish options:
    • Berries
    • Whipped cream
    • Ground nuts (pistachios, almonds, or hazelnuts)
    • Sliced almonds
    • Sprinkles or candied beads/pearls

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    How to make Mosaiko No-bake Chocolate Biscuit Cake

    • Line the bottom of a 9-inch (23cm) springform pan with parchment paper.
    • Break the cookies and add them to a large mixing bowl.
    Prepare the chocolate sauce
    • In a saucepan, add all the sauce ingredients except for the vanilla extract and semi-sweet chocolate.
    • Cook over medium heat and whisk together.
    • Once everything has melted, turn off the heat and add the vanilla and chopped chocolate.
    • Whisk together until the chocolate melts, and pour the sauce over the biscuits.
    • Stir together until the cookie pieces are completely coated.
    • Then, pour the mixture into the prepared pan and press it down to compress.
    • Chill in the refrigerator or freezer until set –about 1 hour or overnight.
    Prepare the chocolate glaze
    • Heat the cream in a small saucepan until scalding hot.
    • Meanwhile, place the chocolate in a bowl, then pour the hot cream on top.
    • Whisk together until smooth and shiny.
    • Add the vanilla and whisk together.
    • Remove the cake from the pan and transfer it onto a serving platter/cake stand.
    • Pour the glaze on top and spread evenly.
    • Allow the glaze to set and garnish with your favorite things.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    Garnish and serve

    I had candy pearls that I found at the cake decorating shop, so I used those in my video to decorate each piece. However, the options here are unlimited. Take it to the next level by lightening it up with whip cream and berries on top or candied nuts. For a pop of color, use some ground pistachios or sprinkles. Make it your own by using your favorites, and serve it with a hot cup of coffee. Kali Orexi!

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cake

    • 1/2 tsp. butter , for greasing
    • 8 ounces Rich tea biscuits
    • 4 ounces unsalted butter , softened
    • 4 ounces granulated sugar
    • 4 ounces dark chocolate , for the cake
    • 1 egg
    • 8 ounces dark chocolate , for coating
    • 1 ounce chocolate , for decorating

    To make cake: Lightly grease a 6″ x 2 1/2″ cake ring and place on a tray on a sheet of parchment paper.

    Break each of the biscuits into almond-size pieces by hand and set aside.

    Cream the butter and sugar in a bowl until the mixture starts to lighten.

    Melt the 4 ounces of dark chocolate and add to the butter mixture while constantly stirring.

    Beat the egg into the mixture.

    Fold in the biscuit pieces until they are all coated with the chocolate mixture.

    Spoon the mixture into the prepared cake ring. Try to fill all of the gaps on the bottom of the ring because this will be the top when it is unmolded.

    Chill the cake in the refrigerator for at least 3 hours.

    To coat and decorate: Remove the cake from the refrigerator and let it stand while you melt the 8 ounces of dark chocolate.

    Slide the ring off the cake and turn it upside down onto a cake wire.

    Pour the melted chocolate over the cake and smooth the top and sides using a palette knife.

    Allow the chocolate to set at room temperature.

    Carefully run a knife around the bottom of the cake where the chocolate has stuck to the cake wire and lift it onto a tea plate.

    Melt the remaining 1 ounce of chocolate and use to decorate the top of the cake.

    January 18, 2021 By Eve 9 Comments

    A Recipe For Small Chocolate Biscuit Wedding Cake for 40-50 people

    The idea to make your own wedding cake can be tempting and daunting at the same time. However, being a baker for most of my life, I think with the right recipe and good planning, it very possible for anyone to make their own wedding cake.

    Here, I share my quick wedding cake recipe idea which I believe will be manageable for all levels.

    Tips Keep In Mind!

    Keep in mind, no cake looks perfect, and sometimes we may look for extra flaws in our own work. So level your expectations. What does a wedding cake mean to you and what are where are you willing to compromise? Also, you can easily cover up any “flaws” with decorations.

    Do a trial run. Way before you decide to make your own cake, do a trial run. You don’t have to do the full size cake but perhaps half portion. See how the sugar fondant works out for you. And which decorations you can manage to make the cake look nice.

    Start the cake 2 days before your wedding day. The cake will set overnight so it is hard for covering with sugar fondant. Once the cake is covered in fondant it is airtight and will not go soft or stale. And chocolate biscuit keeps for 2 weeks anyway…so if you want you can make it even earlier.

    Servings

    This is a small cake but since it is chocolate biscuit cake then the servings can be small so this cake is suitable for a wedding party of 20 up to 40 – 50 people. This depends on the serving size whether you go for dessert size or finger size serving.

    Why A Chocolate Biscuit Cake?

    This recipe uses chocolate biscuit cake as the cake flavour. I do this so there is no need to mess around with supporting the bottom layer.

    You see normally, when you add several tiers of cake on top of each other, the weight of the top tier can make the bottom tier sink. And thus, good supporting system is needed so that the cake holds a good structure.

    But I think if you are attempting your own wedding cake, then chocolate biscuit cake is strong and heavy, and will hold the top layer beautifully. So this makes making a wedding cake a lot easier and worry free.

    Also, chocolate biscuit cake is the most popular cake in Ireland, and it is loved by children and adults alike.

    Ingredients

    900g dark chocolate

    900g milk chocolate

    9 tablespoons golden syrup

    300ml fresh cream

    600g digestive biscuits

    600g tea biscuits

    1kg of Ready to Roll Icing (supermarket brands will work perfectly)

    Method For Chocolate Biscuit Wedding Cake

    1. Melt butter on low heat in a large pot or saucepan.

    2. Add cubed chocolate to the melted butter. Mix until all is melted and combined.

    3. Add golden syrup and fresh cream, mix again.

    4. Remove the pot from the heat.

    5. Roughly chop and crush biscuits. Add them to the chocolate mixture. Mix well until all is evenly covered in chocolate mixture. (Use a strong wooden spoon as it will be difficult to mix.)

    6. Divide the mixture in the 6 inch and 10 inch round baking tin. Press and smooth the top.

    7. Place the baking tins in a fridge to set overnight (or until its is hard and sets which can take up to 6 hours).

    8. Next day, remove tins from the fridge. To remove the cakes from the baking tins using a thin knife to slowly edge between the cake and the tin. Then the cake should come away easily.

    9. Place the larger cake on a 12″ cake board and the smaller cake on a 6″ cake board. To stick the cakes on the board you can use a teaspoon of butter to spread in the middle of the cake board where the cake will go.

    10. Roll the fondant icing thinly (about 0.5-1 cm thick) and roughly 12″x12″ size. Place this over the larger cake so that all sides are covered. Using a technique of pulling, stretching and smoothing the fondant will cover each part of the cake nicely. Here is a video to show you how to do it.

    11. Repeat the same with the smaller cake but this time roll out the icing approx. 8″x8″. As the cake board for the smaller cake is 6″, the same size as the cake, then the fondant should cover the edges of the board and make it invisible.

    12. Place the smaller cake in the middle of the larger cake and press gently.

    13. Hide the edges of the cakes with sprinkles, pearls, ribbon and pipe a little bit of buttercream in small dots as on the picture below.

    14. Cover the cake with your chosen decorations, such a fresh flowers, fondant butterflies and other decorations.

    How to make a chocolate biscuit cakeChocolate Biscuit Wedding Cake

    Reader Interactions

    Comments

    I used this really simple recipe when making part of my friend’s 3 tier wedding cake. It was absolutely phenomenal and everyone was raving about it!! Thanks so much for sharing such a delicious and easy to follow recipe. Really cannot wait to make it again

    Hi Sorcha, we are delighted it worked out so well, and well done for making your friends wedding cake! That’s a huge achievement! Bravo 😀

    Sheelagh Lyons says

    Do you need to have a layer between choc biscuit cake and the fondant icing?

    Hi Sheelagh, you can probably try to do without and see how that works. Sometimes, it helps to make is smoother and subsequently easier to apply the fondant. But it might also be a matter of preference and your own technique. Hope that answers your questions. Many thanks for your comment 🙂

    Hi, I was hoping to make a 6″ high biscuit cake. Best to layer 2 cakes for this and if so what would you put in the middle? Thanks

    Hi Wes. If you have a tall cake tin, you can do it all in one go too. But tall 6″ cake tins aren’t very widely available, at-least we haven’t seen any. So to layer the 2 cakes, you can use a bit of melted chocolate or a bit of buttercream. This seems to work well. Best of luck!

    Hi Wes. If you have a tall cake tin, you can do it all in one go too. But tall 6″ cake tins aren’t very widely available, at-least we haven’t seen any. So to layer the 2 cakes, you can use a bit of melted chocolate or a bit of buttercream.
    OR you can very briefly place on of the cakes on a heated pan for a few seconds until the chocolate starts to melt a little and then place it on top of the other cake. The chocolate will set and bind the two layers. Just be mindful with the timing, you only want the chocolate to melt a little bit, and yet enough for it to bind. Bets of luck!

    Kathy Headd says

    Hello,
    I’m making a chocolate biscuit cake for my brothers wedding and this recipe looks ideal for size. Just wondering if I want to add maltesers and crunchie pieces do I need to reduce the biscuit quantity or increase chocolate so it will all come together okay for slicing up??

    Hi Kathy, sorry for delayed response, we were on a little winter break. Yes, your approach sounds correct to reduce the biscuit ration or increase the liquid chocolate mix. You can always do a small cake to test out, and see how it goes, and you can always have some extra chocolate ready if not everything gets evenly covered. Sounds delicious with maltesers and cruncies! Best of luck x

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Whether you’re updating your walls with a fresh color or revamping an old piece of furniture, it can be difficult to know exactly how much paint you’ll need. And even if you calculated carefully to try to purchase precisely the right amount, there’s a good chance you’ll still have some leftover paint after finishing your project. Those partially empty paint cans can’t simply be tossed into the garbage, so it’s important to learn how to properly dispose of paint. The key is to make sure you’re not throwing away liquid paint, which could potentially allow toxic chemicals to contaminate the environment. It’s also important to note that some states and municipalities have specific rules about paint disposal, so check first before you begin. If you have paint leftover from past projects, some of which might have been sitting around for a long time, follow these guidelines on how to dispose of unused latex and oil-base paints.

    When to Get Rid of Old Paint

    The good news is that paint lasts a long time when it’s properly stored indoors, away from temperature extremes, and with the lid securely in place. In fact, latex paint can last up to 10 years when stored properly, and oil-base (or alkyd) paint can remain usable for up to 15 years.

    So before you get rid of old paint, pop the lid and take a whiff. If it just smells like paint, it’s likely still useable. If it smells rotten, then it’s best to dispose of the paint. Another way to tell if the paint is still usable is to check whether there are dried chunks or layers at the bottom or on the sides of the can. Remove any skin that formed on the top and give the paint a stir. Brush out a sample onto a scrap piece of cardboard and see if the color’s right and glides on smoothly.

    If everything looks (and smells) good, then consider donating the paint to an organization that can use it or resell it. Some options include schools, community theaters, shelters, or Habitat for Humanity ReStore. Always call ahead and check to make sure it’s needed before dropping it off. If you have large quantities of useable paint, consider posting on sites like Facebook Marketplace or Craigslist to see if someone in your community is interested. There are tons of creative ways to use leftover paint for new projects that you might want to consider, too.

    There’s one thing you absolutely need to do before you toss that can.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Painting is an easy way to update a room, but more often then not, afterwards you end up with half of an unused can. Since leftover paint can be hazardous, as it contains materials that can leak into the ground, cause physical injury to sanitation workers, or contaminate septic tanks, you have to be careful when throwing it away. Here’s what you need to know, and to think about, before disposing of paint.

    If you want to throw it out, you’ll want to dry it out first.

    Wet latex paint can be hazardous, so dry it up. If there’s only a small amount of paint in the bottom of your can, leaving it out in the sun should do the trick. If there’s a bit more than the sun can handle, try adding kitty litter or newspaper to help soak up the paint and speed the drying process. For larger amounts of paint, purchase a paint hardener, like Homax 3535 3 Pack Waste-Away Paint Hardener ($5, amazon.com) at a home improvement store for just a few dollars. Check your local laws, but in many locations, you can throw away dried-out paint with the rest of your household trash.

    If you can’t properly dispose of the paint curbside, let the professionals handle it.

    Companies like Habitat for Humanity and PaintCare accept leftover paint in order to recycle it. You can also search for a hazardous waste drop-off facility in your area at Earth911.com.

    If you feel bad just tossing it, try to donate it .

    If you know you won’t use the paint for your walls again, try to recycle it or use it up. Ask a friend if they need some paint or use the leftovers to dress up an old stool or bookshelf. Call your local elementary school to see if they have any big art projects coming up, or search for green building companies that might accept extra paint. Habitat for Humanities ReStores, for example, takes latex paint. Or list it on a site like FreeCycle.org to see if anyone wants to take it off your hands.

    .. or save it for later.

    If sealed correctly, latex paint can last up to 10 years and oil-based paint up to 15 years. Next time your child turns the living room wall into a canvas or a piece of furniture scrapes the paint, you’ll be glad you saved the leftovers. The EPA recommends keeping paint in its original container (never in food containers) with the original label, adding the date you opened it and room it corresponds to for good measure.

    To seal the can, place plastic wrap over the paint lid and hammer it down. Store in a cool, dry place away from sunlight and out of reach of children and pets. Once your paint is hard and lumpy, or if it has a particularly foul smell, it has probably gone bad and should be disposed.

    The next time you do a makeover, get a good estimate of how much to buy ahead of time.

    You can use Benjamin Moore’s Paint Calculator so you don’t end up with much left over.

    By Budget Dumpster Staff on November 21, 2017

    A fresh coat of paint is an easy, inexpensive way to transform a room. But buying just the right amount of paint for the job? That’s a trickier task. If you’re like most DIYers, you’ve got a growing collection of partially used paint cans gathering dust in your garage. Getting rid of them doesn’t have to be a headache. We’ve laid out all your options to dispose of old paint safely and responsibly.

    Can You Throw Away Paint?

    Let’s get the obvious question out of the way first. Whether or not you can throw away old paint depends on what kind of paint you’re talking about.

    Oil-based paints contain chemicals that can contaminate soil and water. They should NEVER be thrown in the trash. In fact, in most states, it’s illegal.

    How to Dispose of Oil-Based Paint Safely:

    • Take your old oil-based paints to your city or county’s household hazardous waste facility.
    • Stop by a local household hazardous waste drop-off event. Many cities hold these events at least once a year.
    • Visit PaintCare.org to find take-back programs if you live in one of these states: California, Colorado, Connecticut, Maine, Minnesota, Oregon, Rhode Island, Vermont or Washington D.C.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Household hazardous waste facilities will make sure your old paint is handled properly.

    Latex paints are not considered hazardous and can be thrown away in the trash if you follow a few guidelines.

    What’s the Proper Way to Dispose of Latex Paint?

    1. Remove the lid and discard separately.
    2. Allow the remaining paint to thoroughly dry out before placing the can in your trash. Pro tip: mixing cat litter into the paint can help it dry quicker.
    3. If you participate in curbside recycling, pour the remaining paint into a cardboard box and place the empty can in your recycling bin. Allow the paint to dry, then toss the box in the trash.

    *Not all municipalities accept dried latex paint for curbside pickup. Check your local regulations.

    **Not all curbside recycling programs accept paint cans. Check with your recycler.

    However, just because latex paint can be thrown away, it doesn’t mean that’s the best choice. There are plenty of other options that will allow you to get rid of your old paint while helping those in need.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Where to Donate Paint to Do the Most Good

    Your used paint can be useful again to families or charities who need a helping hand. A fresh coat of paint doesn’t just create a pleasant atmosphere—it helps protect surfaces from rust, mold and other potential hazards. So instead of getting rid of it, donate your old paint to organizations such as:

    • Habitat for Humanity Restores. Paint will be sold at low rates so even those on a tight budget can do some sprucing up.
    • Global Paint for Charity. This nonprofit collects used paints and distributes them to struggling homes, schools, hospitals and other organizations around the world.
    • Homeless or Domestic Violence Shelters. Shelters are nearly always strapped for resources and most could make good use of your donated paint.
    • Drama Clubs. Most amateur theater groups operate on a shoestring budget and would be thrilled to get a little free set dressing.
    • Children’s Charities. Many nonprofits that work with children would be happy to use your old paint for craft projects.
    • Scout Troops. Scout troops often buy materials for community service projects out of their own pockets. Your donated paint could help their budget go further.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Wherever you decide to donate your old paint, always contact the organization first to make sure they can currently use it. Otherwise, you might be saddling them with a problem rather than offering them a helping hand.

    See, Disposing of Old Paint Isn’t So Hard!

    Now that you know the right way to get rid of old paint, check out our other guides to disposing of difficult items. Know of any other organizations that would appreciate some donated paint? Speak up in the comments!

    Jan. 18 2021, Published 12:32 p.m. ET

    There are a number of household items that many Americans just don’t seem to know how to dispose of properly — for instance, many folks are unsure of the best way to dispose of paint. They think that putting it in the bottom of a black garbage bag is the easiest way to surreptitiously get sanitation to take it off their hands. Such behavior isn’t just bad for the environment, it’s also unnecessary, especially when disposing of paint the proper way is so easy.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Can you throw away paint?

    The term “throw away” carries a number of different meanings in this context. Essentially, the ability to throw paint in the garbage like so much other trash depends entirely on the type of paint in question. After reviewing several studies, TIME concluded that all paint is potentially toxic — especially oil-based paints, and especially to vulnerable groups of people, like babies, young children, pregnant people, and the elderly.

    Not only are the chemicals and metals in certain paints potentially harmful to the environment, but these compounds can also contaminate soil and water. These paints should never be thrown in the garbage and to do so, in most states, is considered illegal.

    Latex-based paints are a bit different. According to Hunker, latex-based paints are generally considered a less toxic option than oil-based paint, though they still can contain some toxic compounds.

    Because of that, latex paints are not considered hazardous and can be thrown away in the trash, provided that you follow the guidelines for their disposal. That said, throwing away paint cans isn’t always the most eco-friendly way to get rid of them. There are other options, after all.

    How to dispose of paint:

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Paint disposal techniques vary depending on the type of paint being thrown away. Here are our recommendations for disposing of both oil- and latex-based paints.

    How to dispose of oil-based paints:

    If you have oil-based paints lying around, you’re not going to be able to just toss them in the bin. You’ll need to take them down to your city or county’s household hazardous waste facility. These facilities might only accept specific items on specific days and times, so you’ll need to contact your local municipality to find out when and where this might be happening.

    How to Safely and Properly Get Rid of Leftover Paint

    How to safely dispose of paint

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Deane Biermeier is an expert contractor with nearly 30 years of experience in all types of home repair, maintenance, and remodeling. He is a certified lead carpenter and also holds a certification from the EPA. Deane is a member of The Spruce’s Home Improvement Review Board.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    • Pin
    • Share
    • Email

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Paint (and learning how to paint walls) is an inexpensive and easy way to update and add color to your home. Paint is such a versatile tool that it’s easy to inadvertently accumulate extra cans of it over the years. Unfortunately, paint isn’t easy to recycle, and you shouldn’t just throw it in the garbage for environmental reasons. The good news is, you can get rid of your growing collection of partially used paint cans and old paint safely and responsibly in just a few steps.

    Can You Throw Away Paint?

    No—improperly disposing of paint can be problematic and, in many cases, illegal. Some paint, like oil-based paints, is considered a household hazardous waste. Dumping any type of paint down the drain causes groundwater, lake, or stream pollution, and it can cause problems in your plumbing system, especially if you have a septic tank. Moreover, many garbage collection services do not allow wet paint in trash collection cans.

    How to Dispose of Paint

    The proper way to dispose of unwanted paint depends on the type of paint. There are three paint types used in household DIY projects: oil, latex, or spray paint. Before you toss out your paint, it’s important to know what type of paint it is.

    How to Determine Paint Type

    An obvious way to determine the type is from the paint label. However, if the label is missing or you have a can from a previous homeowner and the label on the can does not clearly identify the paint type, here’s an easy test you can do. Dip a paint brush into the paint, then try rinsing it in a cup of water. If the paint comes off the brush, it’s latex. If it doesn’t, it’s oil-based. Spray paint will be in an aerosol can.

    How to Dispose of Latex Paint

    Water-based latex paint is the most popular paint used in homes because it’s relatively inexpensive and very versatile. Since it’s water-based, it dries quickly, and clean-up is simple. Thankfully, latex paints are not considered hazardous and can be thrown away in the trash if you follow a few guidelines. It’s a good idea to do this in a well ventilated area and wear a pair of disposable gloves to protect your skin.

    1. Remove the lid and allow the paint to dry, then discard the lid separately in the trash. If you want to recycle the lid, rinse the paint off the lid first, let it dry, then put it into your recycle bin.
    2. Allow the remaining paint in the can to dry out, then place the can in your garbage. Paint cans less than 1/3 full can take several days to dry out. If the paint can is more than 1/3 of the way full, try pouring some of the paint into a cardboard box or in another small container such as a coffee can or ice cream bucket and let it dry. If you have a mostly full can of paint, consider donating it.
    3. Paint cans are recyclable. If you want to recycle the metal can, pour the remaining paint into a cardboard box and let it dry completely. Once dried, place the empty can in the recycling bin and toss the cardboard box in the trash. The cardboard cannot be recycled once it has paint on it.

    Mixing kitty litter or another absorbent material into the paint can absorb the leftover paint, helping it dry more quickly. Latex paint hardening products are also sold at your local home center or hardware store for this purpose.

    How to Dispose of Oil-Based Paint

    Oil-based paints and stains are considered hazardous because they contain chemicals that can contaminate soil and water. They should never be thrown in the trash. In many states, it’s illegal to do so. These paints must always be disposed of at a local Household Hazardous Waste (HHW) collection site or hazardous waste collection events. If these paints are not correctly disposed of, they can leak into the ground or contaminate septic tanks. You can find a hazardous waste drop-off facility in your area at Earth911.com or check with your local county or city waste management department.

    How to Dispose of Spray Paint

    Like latex paint, you can dispose of spray paint cans once they are empty. There are no federal regulations concerning how aerosol can waste generated in homes can be disposed of, but there are a few things you can do to keep them from ending up in landfills. Wear a respirator or work in a well ventilated area while performing this task. Additionally, it’s a good idea to wear disposable gloves to protect your skin.

    1. Empty the cans. If you have leftover paint you do not plan to use, spray the excess on a piece of cardboard until the product stops coming out and the can stops making a hissing noise.
    2. Let the paint on the cardboard dry, then discard in the trash.
    3. Remove the plastic nozzle and recycle it, along with the plastic lid.
    4. The metal can is also recyclable if your curbside or local recycling center accepts empty aerosol cans. Check with your municipal’s website to learn about what’s accepted for recycling.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Alternative Paint Disposal Options

    Tossing paint in the garbage or recycling is not the only solution for disposing of paint. Here are some environmentally friendly alternatives for using up the excess paint.

    Donate the Paint

    Ask friends, family, or even local community centers if they need paint. If not, organizations like Habitat for Humanity accept leftover paint to sell at one of their stores.

    Recycle Paint

    There are companies that accept leftover paint and recycle it. The International Paint Recycle Association lists multiple companies that will take paint for recycling. There may be shipping and other processing fees involved.

    Buy less paint! If you do not want to deal with unwanted paint at the end of a project, buy less. Buy the paint in smaller containers to ensure you do not have extra when the project is complete.

    You have to do it at some point.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    The transformative quality of painting a room or the exterior of a home is immediate. All at once, a fresh coat can make a surface look new, and a space feel different. Getting rid of paint, on the other hand, is a slog—that is, if it happens at all. It’s common for half-empty cans of paint to sit in sheds and garages for ages, slowly collecting dust as the rooms they helped change collect compliments.

    We all know not to pour paint down drains or into the ground, since its harsh chemicals can pollute the environment and endanger our health. And that’s why it’s so easy to store used cans rather than figure out how to responsibly throw them away. But here’s the thing: Disposing of paint properly is much simpler than you think, and doing so will keep your home safe. And not to mention, free of this unnecessary clutter.

    Joey Corona, a senior merchant of paint at The Home Depot, describes what to know about getting rid of paint correctly, from how to notice when it’s no longer fresh to how to clean the area where it was stored. Follow this guide, and never worry about old paint again.

    How to Notice When Paint Has Gone Bad

    It’s been around longer than a decade. “Paint can typically be stored for more than a decade before it goes bad, depending on its composition,” Corona says. “Water-based (latex) paints last approximately 10 years, while oil-based (solvent) paints last longer at around 15 years if kept in cool, dry conditions with proper can sealing.”

    It smells more pungent than paint normally smells, and is hard after stirring. “In order to tell that latex paint has gone bad, first smell it to see if it has a strong, offensive odor that is more pungent than the typical paint smell,” he adds. “Another way to tell is by looking to see if the paint is hard on the bottom or the sides of the can after stirring. If you’re unsure, try painting on a small sample surface. If the paint looks visibly rough or begins to peel quickly, that’s a sure sign that it’s ready for disposal.”

    It looks rubbery. “To tell if solvent paints like enamels, varnishes, and sealants are ready for disposal, look for finishes that have become very thick or rubbery in appearance,” Corona says. “You can also brush the substance on a piece of glass.”

    How to Dispose of Paint

    Let it dry out completely. “Before doing so, assess how much paint you have left in the can so you can dry it out appropriately,” Corona continues. “If there’s less than a quarter of a can left, it is safe to let the paint sit in the sun—in an area away from kids and pets—until the remaining liquid dries out.”

    Call a recycling center, or contact your local waste management authority. “If you have a half-can or more remaining, you can either take the paint to a recycling center (latex, not oil) or add a hardener or cat litter to solidify the paint. Then your local waste management authority can collect it—check the rules and recommendations for disposal, too,” he says. “Leftover, fresh paint is almost always welcome at nonprofit organizations or charities, and alternatively, you can call 1-800-CLEANUP for information on disposal regulations.”

    What to Do to the Area Where the Paint Was Stored

    Check the space for proper ventilation. “After your paint has been properly disposed of, be sure to check that the storage area where the paint was sitting is well ventilated and dry,” Corona says.

    Double-check the area for paint chips. “Clean all excess paint and paint chips from the surrounding area and the corresponding paint brushes,” he adds.

    Follow House Beautiful on Instagram.

    You can recycle it too!

    You’ve painted a space you love, and we couldn’t be happier. There’s just one more thing to remember before you settle into your newly-revamped room: how to store the paint you may need for touch-ups down the road, and how to dispose of paint you no longer need, safely.

    Storing Extra Paint

    Leftover paint can be kept and reused for quite a long time if stored properly. It’s best to store leftover paint in a cool, dark location free from moisture and extreme temperatures. Moisture can cause your paint can to rust, and extreme heat or cold can ruin your paint. So think twice if you were planning on storing your paint in your oven-hot Florida garage or your icy basement up in Chicago.

    Before storing, cover the opening of the can with plastic wrap, and seal the lid tightly using a rubber mallet. Avoid using a hammer, which can leave dents in the can that may allow air to seep in and shorten the paint’s shelf life.

    For ease of access later on, there’s a number of things you should mark on the outside of the paint can. Our paints come with a handy color name sticker. Where there’s room, jot down how much paint is left inside, the date, and what room you painted.

    Unopened paint has quite a long shelf life but it’s optimal to use up your paint within two to three years. Opened cans that have been exposed to the air will have a shorter shelf life which can vary depending on conditions such as temperature and whether the lid was properly sealed. Plan on disposing of those after one to two years.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Recycling Extra Paint

    If you have extra paint that can still be used, we always recommend recycling it. It’s the least wasteful option and the paint can be used to make new water-based paints or mixed together for reuse in community projects like graffiti removal.

    If you live in one of the the states with paint stewardship programs operated by PaintCare, an organization that manages local paint recycling programs. So if you’re wondering where to dispose of paint for recycling, take your leftover paint to a drop-off site, where it is sorted for reuse, recycling, energy recovery, or safe disposal.

    For those living in non-PaintCare states, you can donate unused and unopened water-based paint at a Habitat for Humanity ReStore, which sells gently-used and discounted furniture, appliances and building materials, like paint, from Habitat projects across the country.

    You can also drop off leftover paint at household hazardous waste collection sites and events nationwide. Household paint is NOT considered hazardous waste, but lots of hazardous waste sites will take it off your hands and ensure proper disposal. Find a list of sites by inputting your zip code in this recycling search tool from Earth911.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    How to Dispose of Paint, Safely

    Latex paint such as ours can be thrown into the trash only after it has been fully dried out. If you have a small amount of paint left in your can, remove the lid and allow it to dry out and solidify, then you can toss it in with your regular household trash.

    If you have a larger amount of paint to dispose of, our favorite hack is kitty litter which helps dry your paint out faster. Stir in equal parts kitty litter into your paint can (or a larger, leakproof container if needed) until it starts to thicken. Then let it sit until it’s fully dried out, usually about 24 hours. Once it’s dry, you can throw the dried paint bits in the garbage and recycle the empty paint can.

    Remember, when getting rid of paint, never pour leftovers down the drain or into the ground.

    Responsible Paint Can Disposal

    Our paint cans are made of 100% recycled high-density polyethylene resin and are 100% recyclable! However, they can only be recycled once all paint has been removed. So while you can throw your paint in the trash once the paint inside has dried out, the most responsible thing to do is to thoroughly clean your paint (the kitty litter trick is the best hack!) and recycle the can with your regular household recycling.

    Check your local regulations and visit these sites for more helpful resources on paint recycling:

    • For customers in CA, CO, CT, DC, ME, MN, OR, RI, VT, WA & DC:Paint Product Stewardship
    • For customers everywhere else:How to Recycle Paint

    Need to give your walls a touch up? Read: The Right Way to Touch Up Paint

    We make paint shopping simple with curated colors, zero VOC paint and everything you need to create a home you love, delivered.

    Whether you have extra paint left over from a project or have old paint sitting around that’s gone bad, it’s important to properly dispose of paint.

    Oil paints are hazardous materials, and improper disposal could introduce those toxins to your water sources. Additionally, states and towns have differing regulations about how to dispose of latex paint that you need to be aware of.

    Paul Stein, a professional painter of more than 20 years and CEO of Trusted House Painter, shares the proper methods for disposing of oil and latex house paint.

    When to dispose of paint

    While paint can last for years when stored properly, it can also go bad. Latex paint lasts for about 10 years, while oil paint lasts for about 15 years. After that, you may start to notice signs that your paint has expired. Common signs include:

    • A strong, noxious odor
    • Lumps in the paint
    • A skin on the paint’s surface
    • Separated paint that won’t blend back together after five minutes of mixing

    If you have paint that you no longer need, but that paint hasn’t gone bad, it can serve other purposes. Check for operations in your community that accept paint donations:

    • Nonprofits like Habitat for Humanity ReStore centers
    • High school drama clubs or other kids’ groups looking to paint sets or do arts and crafts projects

    Leftover paint can also be recycled into new paint. Recycling minimizes the amount of paint that’s discarded and gives your old paint a new life.

    Quick tip: When you store paint, wipe any excess paint away from the can’s lid to ensure a good seal. Store your paint cans upside-down so the paint also acts as an interior seal. Keep paint in a cool, dark place where temperatures don’t drop below freezing.

    How to dispose of latex paint

    If you need to dispose of latex paint, start by checking your town’s regulations about paint disposal. Some towns and states allow you to dispose of latex paint on your own, while others require that you take the paint to a specific recycling or paint collection facility. For example, Vermont has banned paint from all landfills, but in Massachusetts, you can throw out paint with your regular trash.

    If you’re able to throw out paint in your state and town, you can dry out smaller amounts of latex paint. If you have less than half a gallon of paint, add cat litter or sawdust to the can. Leave the can open and let the paint dry until it’s solid.

    If you have larger quantities of paint, pour the paint into several heavy garbage bags, then add in cat litter or sawdust until the paint dries. You can then throw out the paint can or garbage bags with the paint.

    How to dispose of oil-based paint

    Oil-based paint is household hazardous waste — meaning it contains chemicals that can pollute water sources or otherwise cause harm if disposed of improperly. Never pour it into the trash or down the drain.

    Instead, look for a hazardous waste collection site or a hazardous waste collection event in your community. Refer to these sites or collection events for specific disposal directions. Some sites may have very specific requirements that paint be in its original container, be clearly labeled, and not be leaking.

    Quick tip: If you’ve fully used a can of paint, you can leave the can open to let it air dry. (Be sure to keep kids and pets away from the can during this time.) Many towns will let you recycle the paint can, but check with your municipality just in case.

    How to find local paint disposal solutions

    Your town’s website and your state’s Department of Environmental Conservation may have information about local paint disposal resources.

    Earth911 maintains a database of recycling stations throughout North America, and you can filter results for locations that accept paint. PaintCare also operates paint recycling programs in 11 states.

    Insider’s takeaway

    Whether your paint has gone bad or you have extra that you no longer need, you can donate, recycle, or dispose of the paint. Depending on your town and state’s regulations, you may be able to dry out latex paint and just throw it away with your household trash.

    Oil paint is hazardous, though, so you’ll need to bring it to a hazardous waste collection site or event. Properly disposing of your paint can help to keep your community safe, while also finally getting rid of those paint cans cluttering up your basement or garage.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    What should you do with left over paint?

    Paint cannot be disposed of in your normal bin and it definitely should not be washed down the drain, follow our useful guide for more details on how to dispose of paint responsibly.

    Our top tips on how to dispose of paint responsibly.

    1) Touch ups

    Label the tin with which room it was used in and then store it in a cool, dry place. You’ll then be able to use it for those all-important touch ups in the future!

    2) Donate

    Talk to local community groups, schools and causes to see whether they have any need for it for craft projects, murals etc. You could also check with your local household waste recycling centre whether they have a paint donation scheme. Bear in mind this is probably only appropriate for emulsions.

    Brewers have recently donated a selection of paints to The Lewisham School of Muralism, which were used by the artists to create an extraordinary mural on the side of Lewisham Shopping Centre. Find out more here.

    3) Get crafty

    Paint a bauble, picture frame etc to match your interior.

    4) Dispose safely

    If you cannot find a way to use up all the paint then you will need to dispose of it responsibly. Liquid paint cannot be accepted by refuse centres, they will only accept it in a dried form. You can dry out your left over paint by adding sawdust or paint hardener to it and letting it dry.

    Top tip – check it is fully hardened by piercing the dried paint.

    Please note: paints that are solvent based should be treated as hazardous waste, this also includes other decorating materials such as paint thinners and white spirit. Check with your local recycling centre for local disposal options.

    Follow us on social media @brewerspaints on Facebook, Twitter and Instagram.

    One of the many activities that you can undertake to care for our environment is the safe and considerate disposal of paint, solvents and related products. When purchasing paint, remember to estimate the exact amount required for the job. Buy only what you need. Ask your your Thrifty-Link paint specialist for assistance.

    Use it All Up

    If usable latex paint is left over after your project is finished, you can:

    • Use it for touching up your work, or store it away for future fixes.
    • Mix small amounts of paint together and use it as an undercoat for future jobs.
    • Donate paint to charities (for example, Habitat for Humanity, church groups, community groups, theater groups, schools or your neighbor.
    • Contact your local recycling center to see if the cans and lids can be recycled.

    Never place liquid paint in the trash or pour it down the drain.

    Storing Paint

    Prepare the paint for storage: Label the paint can lid with the color and the location where the paint was used.

    To properly store your paint, make sure you tightly seal the can. First, wipe away any excess paint from the rim. Then cover the can opening with plastic wrap. Put the lid securely in place and tap it down with a mallet. Store the can upside down. If the can is leaking, place it in a leak-proof container.

    Store paint where temperatures are moderate. Temperature extremes can negatively affect paint and make it unusable. Never allow paint to freeze.

    Quick-reference your stored cans by brushing a small amount of paint onto the outside surface (body of can or lid) and writing the color name and number in permanent ink. You can also identify the room or wall that was painted with that color.

    You may also want to create and save a file on your computer of the paints you have placed in storage; that way, if someone tosses it by mistake you still have the information at your fingertips.

    Keep paint in a safe location, away from children and pets.

    Paint Disposal

    Proper paint disposal contributes to a more efficient use of our landfills and, ultimately, safergroundwater and soil. We recommend the following tips:

    • Check local ordinances and waste hauler regulations.
    • Read paint can instructions for proper disposal.

    Place properly dried latex in your regular household trash; however, follow these steps prior to disposal:

    • Cans with leftover paint should be left open so that the paint dries before disposal.
    • Make sure you place the drying cans in a well ventilated area.
    • Cans with less than a quarter of the paint remaining will require a few days of drying time; cans with larger amounts will take longer, about a week.
    • You can also add shredded newspaper, sand, sawdust, cat litter or paint solidifier to the paint, which will absorb the excess paint. These materials also work well in stopping paint spills from spreading on most surfaces.
    • Another solution is to punch holes in the top of the can and then place it in a dry area for a couple of weeks.
    • When the cans are ready to be thrown out, make sure the lids have been removed to let waste haulers know the paint is dry.

    NOTE: Oil-based paints, varnish or paint thinners are generally considered hazardous waste.

    Check with your municipality about any local ordinances and read label instructions before disposal — another good reason why you never want to spill paint on the back of your paint can label. Only dispose through your locally designated household hazardous waste program.

    Recycling

    The Valspar Corporation takes environmental sustainability and responsibility seriously. Our architectural paints meet or exceed national, state and local ordinances for low VOC in consumer products. In addition, we have saved over a million gallons of water usage in our latex plant operations through optimization and reuse programs.

    Recycling metal and plastic paint cans should always be considered to reduce landfill usage. Paint cans should be thoroughly clean and dry. Metal cans are recyclable. Plastic cans may be recyclable if your waste hauler accepts them. Check your local ordinances or your waste hauler to see what is allowed.

    Tool Tips

    Good painting tools can be reused many times —saving you money and time spent shopping for new tools as well as helping the environment by generating less waste.

    Rollers

    • To reuse a roller the next day, place it in a plastic bag for storage to prevent it from drying out.
    • With latex paint, partially fill a sink with warm water and roll the applicator back and forth.
    • You can also remove paint in a bucket of water. If necessary, use detergent with the water to remove difficult paint. Rinse the roller until the water is clear. Let dry.
    • For oil-based paint, roll the applicator in a paint tray containing mineral spirits (petroleum distillate) or paint thinner. Then wash the roller in soapy water. Rinse thoroughly and let dry.
    • Spin out the excess moisture and place rollers into clean plastic bags, such as food storage bags.

    Brushes

    • With latex paint, remove most of the excess in a bucket or container while the paint is still wet. It is much more difficult to remove dried paint with soap and water. Wash off the remaining paint under running water.
    • Oil-based paint should be removed in a bucket or container with mineral spirits (petroleum distillate), rinsed in tap water and then washed with soapy water. Rinse once more.
    • Moist paintbrushes can be wrapped in wax paper and sealed with a rubber band or aluminum foil to retain their shape. Hang the brush upside down to maintain its shape.

    DANGER:

    A spontaneous combustion hazard exists when cleaning up after using products that contain drying oils, such as linseed oil or tung oil. Rags, steel wool, sanding dust or waste soaked with oil-based products may spontaneously catch fire if improperly discarded. Immediately after each use, place rags, steel wool, sanding dust or waste in a sealed, water-filled metal container.

    Other Tools

    • Follow the directions on the paint label for tools used.
    • Applying the excess paint to cardboard or newspaper, or carefully scraping the tool, should remove excess paint.

    Information supplied by Wattyl (The Valspar Corporation)

    Improper disposal of household paint cans is bad for the environment, potentially dangerous for sanitation workers, and—in some localities—subject to fines. Here’s how to do it safely.

    By Bob Vila | Updated Oct 8, 2020 9:57 AM

    How to safely dispose of paint How to safely dispose of paint How to safely dispose of paint How to safely dispose of paint

    How to safely dispose of paint

    No matter what you’re painting—your home’s exterior, the living room, or the furniture you recently bought secondhand—every project seems to leave you with a frustratingly minute quantity of leftover paint, usually too little to keep for future use. So how do you get rid of it? Well, there are several ways to dispose of paint. The best method depends on the type of paint in question. Read on to learn how to dispose of paint that’s most commonly used in homes: latex, oil, and spray paints.

    Throw out leftover latex paint only after it is hardened.

    Due to environmental concerns, leftover latex paint can neither be poured down the drain nor thrown directly into the trash. DIYers do have three options for how to dispose of latex paint, depending on the amount that remains in the can.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    • If there’s really only a tiny bit left, either air-dry it or use up the remainder on some cardboard. You can then recycle the empty paint can, if not through curbside pickup, then at a local waste facility.
    • If there’s more than a little paint left, take action to harden the paint. You can try materials you have on hand, such as sawdust or scrap paper, or opt for a waste paint hardener. The latter is readily available in hardware stores or from Amazon. Simply mix the hardener into the paint, closely following the instructions provided. Let it stand for the recommended period of time, after which the paint should be hard as a rock. You can now throw the can away (but you cannot recycle a can with hardened paint).
    • Donate a nearly full can. If it’s a full or nearly full can and you simply no longer want the paint (and you cannot return it to the store where you made the purchase), call your local home resale store or a charity with an office nearby.

    Oil-based paint qualifies as hazardous household waste and should not go in the regular garbage.

    As such, it comes with limited disposal options. You may recycle a completely empty can, but things get tricky if there’s paint left. If you’re prepared to spend money to avoid a hassle, you may want to contact a hazardous household waste (HHW) facility to dispose of oil-based paint. Alternatively, consult your local government for advice, or contact the big-box home improvement store closest to where you live. In many counties, there are drop-off dates on which HHW material is accepted. A full (or nearly full) can of oil-based paint would be much easier to donate than to dispose of properly.

    Recycle spray paint cans only if completely empty.

    Half-full cans of spray paint are potentially dangerous; they can explode under heat or pressure. To be sure that you’re throwing out a can that is completely empty, spray the remaining contents on a piece of cardboard until you’re certain there’s nothing left. Once empty, add the can to your regular recycling.

    As you can see, disposing of paint properly isn’t always a breeze. One thing is certain, however: No matter the type of paint, it’s easier to deal with an empty can than with one that’s half full. So if you’re stuck with a partially full can, you’ve now got a very good reason to get started on one of these smaller painting projects using leftover paint!

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Like most DIYers, you probably have a handful of half-empty, old paint cans stored in the garage or basement from previous paint projects. While storing unused, leftover paint is a great practice, at some point, you may need to dispose of leftover paint properly. Keep reading to find out how.

    Regulations on disposal of leftover paint vary by location. Some states and municipalities require leftover paint to be taken to an approved drop-off location, while others will allow latex or water-based paint to be solidified and thrown out with the household trash. However, some household waste haulers may not pick-up latex paint even if solidified. Always check with your local authorities and your local waste disposal service provider on rules and regulations applicable to your area.

    Inventory Your Leftover Paint

    Sort through your leftover paint. There are two general categories of paint: water-based latex and oil-based/Alkyd paint. Water-based latex paints are not considered hazardous household wastes and can usually be dried-up or solidified, and where local governments allow, it can be placed out with the trash. Oil-based or alkyd paints, as well as paint thinners and other paint solvents are considered hazardous household waste and cannot be poured down drains or solidified and placed out with the trash.

    After you’ve sorted through your leftover paint, begin opening each can and examine the contents. Both latex and oil-based paints generally have a 10- to 15-year shelf life, depending on how well it was sealed, on temperature fluctuations in the storage area and other factors. Paint that has been unopened has a greater chance of still being usable even after 10 years than a can of paint that has been opened in the past.

    Helpful Tip

    Don’t use a screwdriver to open paint cans. This can bend the lid and make it harder to close. Use a paint can opener.

    Don’t worry if a “skin” has formed on the surface of the paint when you first open it — this is normal. Stir the contents of each can with a paint stirrer and brush the paint onto some newspaper or other disposable material. If the paint has clumps or has an overly thick texture, it is not usable. Organize again, by separating the usable paint from the non-usable paint. Set the non-usable paint aside for later disposal.

    Try to Use Leftover Paint or Consider Donating

    Rarely will you finish a paint project and not have leftover paint. Storing leftover paint properly will increase your chance of being able to reuse that paint at a later time for other paint projects. If you can’t find another use for the leftover paint, consider donating it to someone who can use it.

    Helpful Tips

    Before you begin your paint project, carefully measure the area to be painted (height x width = total sq. ft.) to more accurately estimate the quantity of paint you need to purchase. One gallon of paint will cover approximately 350 to 400-sq.-ft.

    Always store paint in a cool, dry location away from sunlight and temperature extremes. Wipe away any excess paint on the outside of the can. Place a piece of plastic wrap over the opening and then replace the lid, firmly sealing it with taps from a rubber mallet and then store the can upside down to prevent air from entering the container.

    Dispose of Water-Based Latex Paint

    Dispose of leftover water-based latex paint appropriately. While some local governments allow water-based latex paint to be thrown away in the trash once solidified, the paint has to be dried-out completely before disposing of it. Even if you have used all the paint from a can, always allow the empty containers to dry-out with the lid off before discarding. If there is a small amount of paint left in the can, you can let the paint dry by leaving it in a well-ventilated area until it hardens, stirring it once every few days. When setting out paint to dry-up, try filling partially empty cans with waste paint hardener, shredded newspaper or cat litter to aid in clumping up the leftover paint so that it dries up faster. Consider recycling metal and plastic paint cans to reduce landfill waste. Check with your local government to see if your city/town participates in paint can recycling.

    Safety Alert!

    When leaving paint out to dry, be sure to keep it in an area away from children, pets and open flames.

    Dispose of Oil-Based Paint

    Always check with your local authorities on how to properly dispose of leftover paint. You can also use the PaintCare Site Locator to find a place to drop-off your leftover paint.

    PaintCare Inc. is a non-profit 501(c)(3) organization established to represent paint manufacturers to plan and operate paint stewardship programs in the United States in those states that pass paint stewardship laws. Their main effort is to set up more places for people to take unwanted, leftover paint.

    Safety Alerts!

    It is not recommended to leave out numerous cans of oil-based paint to dry out because of a build-up of fumes.

    Never pour liquid paint into the trash or down drains.

    That’s it! Now you know how to dispose of old paint properly.

    Project Shopping List

    Here’s what you’ll need to complete this project successfully.

    Get information on how to dispose of your paint safely and responsibly, how to store it, and how to order the right amount in the first place!

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Buy the Right Amount

    The best time to start thinking about paint disposal is before you’ve purchased any paint. The Benjamin Moore Paint Calculator can help you determine how much paint you’ll need based on the details you provide. While your paint needs will vary depending on many factors, this tool can be a great starting point to reduce the chance that you’ll be left with too much paint.

    If you use all the paint you’ve bought, let any paint residue air-dry, and check with your local trash service or community recycling program to determine the best way to discard empty cans.

    Use this online tool to quickly calculate how much paint you’ll need.

    How to safely dispose of paint How to safely dispose of paint

    Store Your Paint

    Properly Dispose of Paint

    Paint disposal guidelines vary by region. A web search like “paint disposal near me” or “paint recycling near me” is likely to provide information on your municipality’s paint disposal policies, which will probably include regular pickup dates or drop-off sites.

    • In some states, PaintCare, a nonprofit, operates drop-off sites that you can locate using their drop-off site locator.
    • Canada has a similar nonprofit, Product Care, for paint drop-off recommendations.
    • Earth911.com offers a “Where to Recycle” database that is searchable by ZIP code.

    Latex Paint and Oil Paint Require Different Disposal Techniques

    • In general, latex paint may be discarded in the trash, but it needs to be dried out first. If you have a small amount of paint residue, you can dry it out by leaving it out in the sun. For larger quantities of paint, you can use kitty litter or a commercial paint hardener to dry it out.
    • Oil paint cannot be disposed of in the trash, so you’ll need to find a disposal or drop-off site using tools such as those provided above.

    It’s important to protect our planet by disposing of old paint properly. At Benjamin Moore, we are focused on environmental stewardship. For more information, please visit our Planet page in the Corporate Responsibility section of our website.

    Follow these easy steps to safely get rid of those old cans.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Maybe you’ve just finished freshening up your bedroom walls with a dreamy new color, or stumbled across paint cans so old that they might predate the Stone Age during your basement remodel. No matter where—or when—it came from, you probably have paint leftover from a home improvement project stashed away somewhere in your home. After all, even the handiest DIYer usually has a tough time estimating exactly how much paint it’ll take to finish a job up, which means those partially used cans of paint tend to pile up over the years. You want to get rid of them, but you’ve heard you just can’t toss ’em in the garbage. Improperly disposed of paint can harm the environment, permeating the ground and contaminating drinking water.

    So the question remains: How are you going to get rid of those paint cans?

    The answer? With care.

    How to Store Paint

    Paint stays usable a surprisingly long time—about a decade for latex and around 15 years for oil-based—especially if it’s stored correctly. To save an opened can of of paint for another day, use a rag to wipe down the grooves at the top, ridding it of any excess paint. Then stretch plastic wrap over the lid before tamping the whole thing down with a rubber mallet (hammers can damage the lid, making the can more difficult to seal). Place the can in a cool, dark place, like the basement, making sure it’s off the floor so no moisture can rust the bottom. For good measure, write the date you opened it and the room you used it in on the label.

    If the paint has gone bad, you’ll probably know it by the rancid smell it gives off when you open the can. If not, you’re most likely good to use it for fun projects, like giving new life to an old dresser. Just double check that the paint is its original color and hasn’t hardened on the bottom or sides, and there aren’t any lumps in it. You can remove that thin skin that’s likely coating the top of the paint and simply stir what’s left beneath.

    If you’re sure you won’t need the paint for touch-ups or projects, you might want to consider donating it to an organization that can put it to good use, like a local high school drama club, scouts troop or an animal shelter that needs to spiff up its facility. Habitat for Humanity ReStore accepts liquid latex paint in original containers that are five gallons or less, with the original label attached. If you can’t find any takers, you might be able to give your leftover paint away through a site like freecycle.org.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    How to Dispose of Latex Paint

    While different locales may have varying regulations regarding the disposal of latex paint, many permit cans with paint that has hardened or dried out to be included with household garbage for regular trash pick-up. If you have a can with just a little bit of paint, removing the lid and allowing it air dry, or dry in the sun, should work. Or, pour the paint onto a newspaper. Once it dries, throw the paper and can, with the lid off, away.

    If you have too much paint to air dry, add equal parts cat litter to the can, and let the amended mixture sit for an hour. Shredded newspaper also works, but if you have more than a half-can of paint, you’re going to want to pour it into another container and then add in the proper amount of paper or cat litter. Place the dried paint and can, with the lid off, in the garbage.

    If you don’t mind spending a few bucks, there are also paint hardeners available at hardware and home improvement retailers, as well as on Amazon.

    How to Dispose of Oil-Based Paint

    Oil paint, and its more modern cousin, alkyd paint, are classified as hazardous waste, which means you can’t ever dump them down a drain or throw them in the trash. Instead, check with your municipality to find out the nearest appropriate drop-off site. Or, wait for the next hazardous waste collection day. Most communities offer them annually.

    Paint is a common product that can become household hazardous waste when it is not used up. In this fact sheet, paint refers to a wide range of coating materials that can be divided into two types; latex and oil based.

    Latex Paint

    Water based paints are called latex paints. If the clean-up instructions on the paint can say that water can be used for cleanup, the paint is a latex paint.

    Oil Based Paint

    Enamels, varnishes, shellacs, lacquers, stains and sealers are all oil based paints. If the clean-up instructions on the paint can say that solvents such as paint thinner, mineral spirits or brush cleaner must be used, the paint is oil based. (Solvents can also become household hazardous waste.)

    Disposal Issues

    Paint should not be poured down the drain, dumped on the ground, or thrown in the trash. Paint contains chemicals, such as solvents and metals, that can damage the environment and endanger human health if disposed of improperly. When poured down the drain, many of the chemicals in paint will not be treated by sewage treatment or septic systems. The untreated chemicals may be discharged to lakes or streams and contaminate these waters.

    When thrown in the trash, liquid paint can also be a hazard. Eventually, most household trash is compacted, releasing the paint from the can. Sometimes this paint can leak from the garbage truck and end up splattered all over a residential street. In a landfill, as water seeps through the garbage, the paint will move with the water and may eventually contaminate ground water. As a general rule, liquids are not allowed in landfills. Full or partially full cans of liquid paint should not be placed in the trash and are not accepted by many garbage collectors.

    Proper Disposal

    Dry Out Paint

    Speeding Up the Process

    Identifying Usable Paint

    Avoid Future Leftover Paint Disposal Problems

    Be a careful consumer. Paint and varnish become a disposal problem only when the quantity purchased is not used.

    • Buy only the amount of paint you need. Measure the space you need to paint and request the assistance of hardware or paint store personnel in purchasing the correct amount.
    • Use existing paint before purchasing more.
    • Avoid purchasing exotic colors that you will not be able to use for another project.
    • Apply another coat to use up left-over paint.
    • Store cans of left-over paint lid side down. Be sure to tightly close the lid before doing this.
    • The paint will form a seal and this will prevent hardening or moisture damage. Store paint in a dry area, as well as in an area where it will not freeze.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    Some types of paint are considered hazardous waste so they need proper and safe disposal. These types of paint can contain heavy metal (or other harmful ingredients), they can be flammable and are not suitable for reuse after long storage. Also some water based paints such as varnishes, stains, sealers etc. may contain hazardous ingredients such as mercury and so therefore are classified as chemical waste.

    The use of heavy metals in paint has raised concerns due to their toxicity at high levels of exposure and since they build up in the food chain.

    Another harmful material that can be found in paint is lead. Lead is normally added to paint to speed drying, increase durability, retain a fresh appearance, and resist moisture that causes corrosion. Paint with significant lead content is still used in industry and by the military. For example, leaded paint is sometimes used to paint roadways and parking lot lines. Lead, a poisonous metal, can damage nerve connections (especially in young children) and cause blood and brain disorders. Because of lead’s low reactivity and solubility, lead poisoning usually only occurs in cases when it is dispersed, such as when sanding lead-based paint prior to repainting.

    Primer paint containing hexavalent chromium is still widely used for aerospace and automobile refinishing applications, too. Zinc chromate has been used as a pigment for artists’ paint, known as zinc yellow or yellow 36. It is highly toxic and fortunately now rarely used.

    Antifouling paint (or bottom paint) is used to protect the hulls of boats from fouling by marine organisms. Antifouling paint protects the surface from corrosion and prevents drag on the ship from any build-up of marine organisms. These paints have contained organotin compounds such as tributyltin, which are considered to be toxic chemicals with negative effects on humans and the environment. Tributyltin compounds are moderately to highly persistent organic pollutants that bioconcentrate up the marine predators’ food chain. One common example is it leaching from marine paints into the aquatic environment, causing irreversible damage to the aquatic life. Tributyltin has also been linked to obesity in humans, as it triggers genes that cause the growth of fat cells.

    The label of an oil-based paint will say “oil-based” or “alkyd,” or it will instruct you to clean brushes with mineral spirits or turpentine. Paints of this type are toxic and they can cause great damage to the environment (including humans and animals) if not disposed of properly.

    Latex or water-based paint, on the other hand, is not consider hazardous waste and it can enjoy many reincarnations after its initial use. Latex paints are those that clean up with soap and water. They’re very common for both interior and exterior painting. However, even this type of panit needs to be proper disposed of or recycled. Specifically, it is not advisable to pour latex paint into drains, onto the ground, or into creeks, streams or rivers. Disposing of paint this way introduces contaminants into the air, soil and ground water that can eventually work their way into the food chain.

    When considering how to dispose of large quantities of unused paint, always ask for professional advice. Any reputable hazardous waste disposal service will be able to assist you.

    Here are some measures you can take to reduce environmental impact of you paint consume.

    1. Choose a low VOCs paint if possible

    Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are gases emitted by various solids or liquids, many of which have short- and long-term adverse health effects. Solvents in traditional paints often contain high quantities of VOCs. Low VOC paints can improve indoor air quality and reduce urban smog. The beneficial characteristics of such paints include low odour, clean air, and safer technology, as well as excellent durability and a washable finish. Low-VOC paint types include latex (water-based), recycled latex (water-based), acrylic, and milk paint.

    The labels of paint cans can be checked for the following information:

    To be considered low-VOC, the paint should contain Avoid overbuying paint

    Each year, 10 percent of the paint sold in the UK is thrown simply because too much has been purchased for every single project. You can avoid that mistake by using an o paint calculator to help you pinpoint how much paint your project really needs.

    If stored properly, paint will last for years. In order to store it properly you should

    – Cover the opening of the paint can with plastic wrap.

    – Put the lid on securely and make sure it doesn’t leak.

    – Turn the can upside down to allow the paint to create its own seal.

    – Store the can upside down in a place that’s safe from freezing and out of reach of children and pets.

    1. Recycle your unused paint

    The best way to handle leftover paint (after avoiding over buying) is finding someone else who can reuse your leftovers. Try to be imaginative — local councils, schools, universities and art academies, they may all be happy to use some of your old paint for their projects.

    Unused paint an also be recycled it to make low-quality paint. Latex sludge can be retrieved and used as fillers in other industrial products. Waste solvents can be recovered and used as fuels for other industries. A clean paint container can be reused or sent to the local landfill.

    If your large quantity of paint can’t be reused or recycle, then it’s a good idea to call a professional chemical waste disposal service. All Waste Matters can offer your company the complete chemical waste disposal service and from collection to disposal, you can rest assured your waste is being handled safely and in-keeping with the latest legislation.

    We are a fully licensed chemical disposal company and operate our own collection vehicles and fully licensed hazardous waste recycling facility. This ensures your chemical waste collection is carried out with minimum impact to the environment and has full traceability as to its eventual disposal.

      Quick Links
    • FAQs
    • Disposal locations
    • What goes in my recycle cart?
    • Where Do I Take My?

    Programs & Resources

    • Compost collection
    • Electronics
    • Garbage
    • Hazardous waste disposal
    • Medicine return
    • Yard waste disposal
    • Construction & demolition
    • Outdoor Burning
    • Publications
    • Recycling
    • Reuse & waste prevention
    • Business waste reduction
    • Construction & demolition
    • Event planning
    • Waste Less Food
    • Solid Waste Advisory Committee
    • Volunteers
    • Youth programs

    Dispose of leftover paint

    Take unwanted oil-based paint to HazoHouse. Oil paint, stains, varnish, and thinners are toxic and flammable and should not be dumped or disposed of as trash.

    Latex paint: Dry it up, use it up, pass it on!

    How to safely dispose of paintLatex paint (also known as acrylic paint) can go in the trash. HazoHouse no longer accepts latex paint.

    All can contents MUST be dried up or solidified before being placed into the trash. Liquid latex paints and stains can spill while awaiting collection or during the collection process. Paint leaking into trucks and onto roadways poses tremendous cleanup challenges. Any liquid or soft paint will be left as unacceptable by trash collection crews. Remove lids from cans so your hauler can see that the can is empty or contents are solidified.

    If your can is 1/4 or less full:

    Simply remove the lid and place the can in a safe, well-ventilated area. The latex paint will dry in a few days and then you can place the container in the trash. Check the paint’s dryness with a stick.

    If your can is more than 1/4 full:

    Kitty litter, mulch, sawdust or shredded paper may all be used to solidify paint. Just mix it in with the paint. Some hardware and paint stores carry packets of paint solidifier that cost just a few dollars. Follow the direction on the packet. Once paint is a tacky, oatmeal-like consistency and will not spill out, it is ready for disposal.

    Small amounts of paint can be mixed with other colors or mixed together and used as a primer coat or on jobs where the final finish is not critical. Avoid creating waste at the start. Buy only what you need. One gallon of paint will cover between 250 and 350 square feet, depending on the porosity of the surface to be covered. Staff at the paint store can help you figure out how much paint you will need for your job.

    Are you spring cleaning and finding an abundance of unwanted latex paint stored in your basement or garage?

    “It’s important to properly dispose of all paint, both latex and oil-based, since paint can pollute groundwater,” according to Sarah Alessio Shea, PRC’s Collection Events Manager. “Therefore, you should never throw liquid paint products into your trash. And if the paint is usable, by all means offer it to a friend, neighbor or relative.”

    If you have latex paint in need of disposal, PRC shares a simple method for preparation at home that allows you to legally and safely dispose of latex paint in your regular trash, eliminating the need to purchase any products or drive to a household chemical collection event.

    Latex paint (water based) in a solidified form is not a hazardous waste, so follow these instructions to prepare paint for disposal with your curbside household trash:

    • Divide the paint into small amounts, 1/3-full can or less;
    • Add kitty litter, sand or shredded newspaper into liquid latex paint and mix well;
    • Leave the lid off, set aside and allow the paint to completely dry;
    • Dispose of the dried paint in the trash.

    “This method works well for a small quantity of latex paint, such as one-third of a can or less. Options for correctly disposing of larger amounts of latex paint include using packets of waste paint hardener, which is available at home improvement stores, or dropping off the paint at a household chemical collection event,” said Shea.

    Please note: Oil-based paint, stains and varnishes are hazardous in any form and always should be taken to a collection event.

    For information regarding PRC’s 2020 schedule of household chemical collection events – which accept paint products, pesticides, automotive fluids and a wide variety of products for a fee – visit the Household Chemical Collections homepage or call 412-488-7452.

    It’s almost impossible buy the exact amount of paint necessary for a paint job. And what ends up happening is you have a half-bucket of paint sitting in your closet for months on end. But what do you do when you’ve had enough of it? In this article, we answer this question. We’re telling you how to dispose of your old paint safely and effectively.

    How to Notice When Paint Has Gone Bad

    Before you dispose of your paint, you need to be sure that it’s actually gone bad. No sense disposing of perfectly useable paint. And if you can’t use it yourself, maybe give it to someone who can!

    Either way, you need to know how you can tell if your paint is good to go.

    Firstly, paint generally takes quite a long time to go bad. If it’s sealed and stored properly, it should last you a couple years at the very least, and often much longer than that. Past this point, you might have bad paint on your hands.

    There are generally a few warning signs that your paint may have gone bad. These range from obvious to subtle. Be on the lookout for these warning signs:

    • Mold: If your paint has visible mold, then it has definitely gone bad! You’ll notice the mold on the surface of the paint, and it’s often accompanied by a musty smell.
    • Inconsistent Texture: If you paint no longer looks smooth and consistent, then it may have gone bad. For example, old paint might develop “chunks”. But don’t throw it out just yet! Sometimes all it needs is a good stir. But if you try and nothing works, then it may be beyond saving.
    • Rust: Sometimes, the problem isn’t the paint itself. Rather, the rust from the can. If the can has begun to rust, and the rust has seeped into the paint, then the paint is no longer useable.
    • Dry: If the paint has dried out, it will lack the consistency to properly coat a wall. Needless to say, you can’t paint with it!

    How to safely dispose of paint

    How to Dispose of Paint

    So, you’ve examined your paint, and decided it’s no longer useable. What are your options? You can’t just throw it in the trash, and you definitely can’t pour it down the sink, so what’s next?

    There are actually a few things you can do to dispose of paint. Some of these options may depend on your location. Consider the following options to dispose of old paint:

    • Dry it Out: Depending on your local regulations, and especially if your region doesn’t offer a service for disposing of hazardous household products, it may be legal to throw away paint with the trash. To do so properly, attempt to dry out the paint first. Put it in shallow trays, and leave it in the sun for a while. Some also mix it with an absorbent substance like sawdust. This makes it a proper consistency for putting in the garbage.

    Now, it goes without saying that this far from the “greenest” option for disposing of paint. But if there are no options in your area for paint recycling, then you might not have a choice.

    • Recycling Program: Your municipality may offer a hazardous household product recycling program that offers safe paint disposal services. Do a Google search of your area to see what’s near you.

    In addition to recycling, some companies also accept donations of old paint (see list below). Although these companies will often only accept paint that is still somewhat useable (as they intend to reuse it themselves). Check to see if a paint recycling service is in your area.

    • Reuse It: You know the old saying “reduce, reuse, recycle”. So why not try to get creative and reuse your old paint? It might be too far gone to paint your walls, but it might still come in handy for a DIY art project. It might also do the trick if you’re just looking to do small touch-ups to your existing paint job.

    Paintcare, a program dedicated to informing people of where and how to safely dispose of their paint, makes it easy to recycle leftover, unwanted paint. They operate paint stewardship programs on behalf of paint manufacturers in states that have passed paint stewardship laws.

    The current states are Washington, Oregon, California, Colorado, Minnesota, New York, Vermont, Connecticut, Maine, and the District of Columbia. Although there are hundreds of retailers that offer recycling and donation programs, a few of the popular ones are Benjamin Moore, Behr, C&M Coatings, Rudd Company, Sherwin-Williams, and Timber Pro Coatings. You can find a full list of states and retailers on their website.

    Thanks for checking out our guide to paint disposal! Remember, with proper storage, paint can last a very long time. Only consider disposing of paint as a last resort. We are lucky to have so many options at our disposal!

    Responsible Storage And Disposal of Paint

    Do you have unused or old paint that you wish to store or dispose but not sure how to?

    There are responsible and safe guidelines on how to store or dispose the paint, depending on the type.

    Disposal of Water-Based Paint

    Latex, acrylic or water-based paints must not be disposed of in liquid form. Do not:

    • pour the paint into drains, onto the ground, or into sinks
    • put cans of liquid paint out for regular trash pick-up
    • try to burn paint

    Disposing of paint this way introduces contaminants into the air, soil and ground water that can eventually work their way into the food chain.

    To dry out paint that is less than 1/4 full

    • Remove the lid.
    • Allow to dry completely in a well-ventilated area away from children, pets and direct heat.
    • Paint will dry in a few days.
    • Dispose of the solid matter in the regular trash.

    To dry out paint that is more than 1/4 full

    • Brush or roll the paint onto layers of newspapers or cardboard.
    • When the paint dries, put the paper in the trash bin.
    • Alternatively, you can pour the paint into a cardboard box and mix it with shredded newspaper, cat litter, or a commercial paint hardener to speed solidification.
    • The box can go in the trash when the paint dries and the cans can be recycled.

    Note: All residual/leftover latex, acrylic and water-based paint must be hardened or dried.

    Disposal of Aerosal Spray Cans

    Aerosol containers or spray cans are pressurized products that can also start a fire or injure sanitation workers if you dispose of them in the trash where they can be punctured and explode.

    Paint and varnish are the most common household products that become household hazardous waste.

    Aerosol paint cans that still contain paint are accepted at the household hazardous waste collection events. Please see Aerosols for information on the recycling of aerosol paint cans that contain a small amount of liquid or are empty.

    Oil based paint, turpentine, paint remover, paint thinner, shellac, stains / varnishes, furniture stripper, and finisher and wall paper cement are all accepted at the household hazardous waste collection events.

    Latex paint is not considered hazardous waste and is not accepted at household hazardous waste (HHW) events. Unfortunately, latex paint does find its way to HHW events. In 2009, at HHW events, Montgomery County collected 188,000 pounds of latex paint and non-hazardous materials that cost $65,737 to dispose of. This happens for a number of different reasons:

    • Owner of paint is uneducated about the proper way to dispose of latex paint.
    • Owner of paint sees HHW events as an easier disposal alternative than the proper method.
    • Label on paint can is too old or unreadable, thus making it impossible to determine its type.
    • Owner of paint is moving and will not have time to dispose of paint properly.

    By diverting latex paint from household hazardous waste collections, Montgomery County could save valuable tax payer dollars and perhaps provide additional services or events.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    We all have them, tucked away in the garage or at the back of the shed – the half-used cans of paint that we’ll never use again, but don’t know what to do with. Even if you’ve kept that can of white gloss for touching up paintwork, the chances are you’ll never get around to it and the paint is now past its best. So, what are you going to do with all those leftovers that have dried out, dried up or simply discoloured?

    Take Unused Paint Back To The Shop

    If you’ve changed your mind about a paint colour and you still have the receipt, you may be able to take it back for a refund or exchange it for something you will use.

    Give Away Any Old Paint

    The paint on your walls is manufactured to be safe to use, but if you simply pour old paint down the drain, you’ll create a big environmental problem that results in damage and hard-to-shift blockages.

    Instead, you could find someone who needs it. There always seems to be someone who’s doing a DIY project, so why not check if any friends or family need some paint. You get rid of the cans and they get some free paint, it’s a win-win for everyone.

    Failing that, you could try giving it to a local charity project. Try advertising your paint on your local community recycling site or contact a group like Community RePaint, who match half used cans of paint with new owners.

    If your paint is completely unusable, however, you’re going to have to dispose of it.

    Dispose of Excess Paint

    Just as you can’t pour paint away, you can’t just stick old paint cans in the bin either. Like all liquid wastes, liquid paint is banned from landfill and therefore cannot be accepted by the council – you’ll need to wait for the paint to harden before you can take this non-household waste to the local recycling centre.

    To speed up the hardening process for larger amounts of paint, add some sawdust, soil or sand to the cans and leave it to solidify. For smaller amounts, pour the paint onto card or paper and leave it to dry before including it with your household waste.

    Once the paint is hard, you can take it to your local household waste and recycling centre to be disposed of appropriately.

    How To Dispose Of And Recycle Paint Tins

    Only empty metal paint cans are widely accepted for recycling at most household waste recycling centres. Currently, plastic paint cans are not widely accepted for recycling, although your local recycling facility will likely still accept them and ensure they are disposed of responsibly.

    Have a Clear-Out

    As part of your paint project, if you find yourself left with lots of leftover items, there’s never been a better time to invest in HIPPOBAGs. Choose the size that’s convenient for you, fill it with your unwanted waste and arrange a collection for rubbish removal. It’s fast, hassle-free and cost-effective, with a wide range of different HIPPOBAG sizes available. With HIPPO vehicles across the UK, waste disposal has never been so simple.

    Need a HIPPOBAG for a few old paint brushes and assorted bits of rubbish? Then a MIDIBAG will do the job. Flexible, cost-effective and convenient, HIPPOBAGs are the savvy way to deal with waste disposal after any DIY job, and they’re perfect for those empty, ragged out and dry paint cans too.

    Browse Categories

    • Allotment tips (2)
    • Grants up for grabs (56)
    • Gardening tips (19)
    • DIY Tips (37)
    • News (24)

    Archives

    • March 2022 (1)
    • February 2022 (1)
    • December 2021 (3)
    • November 2021 (1)
    • September 2021 (1)
    • August 2021 (1)
    • May 2021 (1)
    • April 2021 (1)
    • March 2021 (3)
    • February 2021 (2)
    • November 2020 (1)
    • October 2020 (1)
    • September 2020 (1)
    • August 2020 (1)
    • July 2020 (3)
    • March 2020 (3)
    • January 2020 (1)
    • November 2019 (1)
    • October 2019 (1)
    • September 2019 (2)
    • June 2019 (1)
    • May 2019 (5)
    • April 2019 (1)
    • March 2019 (1)
    • February 2019 (1)
    • January 2019 (1)
    • November 2018 (4)
    • October 2018 (2)
    • July 2018 (1)
    • June 2018 (1)
    • March 2018 (2)
    • February 2018 (1)
    • December 2017 (1)
    • November 2017 (2)
    • October 2017 (3)
    • September 2017 (3)
    • August 2017 (6)
    • July 2017 (3)
    • June 2017 (3)
    • March 2017 (2)
    • February 2017 (2)
    • January 2017 (1)
    • December 2016 (3)
    • November 2016 (1)
    • October 2016 (1)
    • September 2016 (1)
    • August 2016 (7)
    • July 2016 (9)
    • June 2016 (4)
    • May 2016 (1)
    • March 2016 (5)
    • February 2016 (1)
    • December 2015 (4)
    • November 2015 (1)
    • September 2015 (7)
    • August 2015 (11)
    • July 2015 (11)
    • June 2015 (5)
    • May 2015 (8)
    • April 2015 (8)
    • March 2015 (5)
    • February 2015 (5)
    • January 2015 (4)
    • December 2014 (3)
    • November 2014 (2)
    • October 2014 (3)
    • September 2014 (3)
    • June 2014 (1)
    • March 2014 (2)
    • February 2014 (1)
    • January 2014 (1)
    • November 2013 (1)
    • October 2013 (1)
    • August 2013 (2)
    • July 2013 (2)
    • June 2013 (1)
    • May 2013 (2)
    • April 2013 (1)
    • January 2013 (2)
    • April 2012 (1)
    • January 2012 (1)
    • August 2011 (1)
    • November 2010 (1)
    • Community
    • Charity
    • How to get rid of
    • Environment
    • Recycling
    • Tyres
    • Home Improvement
    • Green DIY
    • Grants up for grabs
    • Going green
    • Garden waste disposal
    • Garden waste
    • Gardening tips
    • Garden
    • Fly tipping
    • Flood risk
    • Energy
    • Eco-Friendly
    • DIY
    • DIY Tips
    • DIY Project
    • Rubbish Removal
    • Environmental
    0333 999 0 999
    Head office

    1000 Lakeside
    North Harbour
    Portsmouth
    Hampshire
    PO6 3EN

    • Facebook
    • Twitter
    • Blog
    • Instagram

    HIPPOBAG and HIPPO are trademarks of Waste Management Systems Ltd.
    Registered in England under 4418836. Registered address: 1000 Lakeside, North Harbour, Portsmouth, Hampshire PO6 3EN.

    Cookies on hippowaste.co.uk

    We use cookies to provide you the best online experience and service. By continuing to use our website you are agreeing to our use of cookies.

    Paint is the most common household product that becomes household hazardous waste. Paint contains harmful substances that can be dangerous to our health and the environment if not used, stored, and disposed of properly.

    The best way to dispose of paint is to use the paint. If you cannot use the paint, try giving it to someone who can, such as:

    – Theater groups
    – Church groups
    – Shelters for people in need
    – Community organizations
    – Habitat for Humanity ReStore; call for specifications. (814) 353-2390

    Storage\Disposal of Liquid Paint
    When storing paint, make sure lids are on tight. Label the top of each can with the color name and date purchased.

    Do not pour paint down household drains. Many of the chemicals in paint will not be treated by sewage treatment systems or septic systems.

    Do not throw liquid paint in the trash. There is always the possibility that the paint will be released from the can. Then the paint could be exposed to certain chemicals and cause spontaneous combustion.

    Solidify first, then dispose of paint. Paint is hazardous in its liquid form. If only a small amount of paint is left, simply remove the lid (outside, with good ventilation) and let dry. Then the can may be put out for trash disposal. If the can is empty, it may be recycled with metal cans. If you have more than which would dry, there are various ways to dispose of paint.

    Please Note: There is a difference between Latex Paint and Oil Based Paint.

    Latex Paint
    Latex paint, when dry, may be disposed of in your regular trash. If you are simply overwhelmed with latex paint, the Authority’s Transfer Station is allowed to accept up to 5 gallons of latex paint per person per day. There is a $20.00 minimum charge for this service. Please note that the Authority will not accept latex paint at our Household Hazardous Waste events.

    Oil Based Paint
    Oil based paint, when dry, may be disposed of in your regular trash. The Recycling & Refuse Authority’s Transfer Station will not accept oil based paint in liquid form. If you are simply overwhelmed with oil based paint, the Authority holds a Household Hazardous Waste Collection each spring. The Authority accepts oil based paint at this event. In addition, ReStore in Bellefonte takes unopened cans of oil-based paint for reuse. Please call for details: (814) 353-2390.

    Tips to Dry Paint
    Get a sturdy cardboard box and fill with clay-based kitty litter, pour the paint onto the kitty litter and let dry. Then dispose of this dried mixture with your trash. Some local hardware and paint stores carry a paint solidifier. Simply purchase, follow directions and when paint is dried, put out for trash collection.

    Whether you completed a whole-house painting project or just did a few touch ups in one specific room, anyone who’s ever bought paint before knows that there’s almost always some left in the can once the job is done. While you can certainly hang on to remainder paint for future projects, especially if there’s a significant amount left, some homeowners just don’t have the space or desire to house countless metal cans. For others, particularly those with young children or without a secure place to stow cans, having excess paint in the home can be a safety and fire risk.

    So, how can you safely, responsibly dispose paint? Ultimately, the best method will vary based on the type of paint you have and how much of it remains. With that being said, there are a few rules that stand across the board. Here, experts weigh in on the safest methods of disposing of every type of paint, from latex to acrylic.

    The type of paint you use matters.

    It’s important to remember that most traditional paints (like acrylic, latex, oil-based, and so on) are considered hazardous waste when disposed of improperly, which is why it’s so important to make sure you’re taking great care in the way you throw out any remnants. Otherwise, your leftover paint can have a profoundly negative impact on both human and environmental health, according to Kathleen Hetrick, LEED AP, sustainability engineer with Buro Happold in Los Angeles. When possible, Hetrick suggests consumers purchase non-toxic paints that meet GreenSeal-11 certification and contain zero volatile organic compounds (VOCs). “You can even purchase bio-based paints like Milk Paint, ($16.99, amazon.com) for [an] eco-friendly alternative to synthetic paints,” she says.

    Disposing of oil-based paints and epoxies.

    Usually, oil-based paints, epoxies, or anything that isn’t water-based requires special disposal because of potential toxins and their flammable state, Matt Kunz, president of Five Star Painting, a Neighborly company, says. This includes your painting accessories, too. “You should be careful when disposing [of] painting supplies, especially if you are using certain oil paints or even epoxies,” he says. “The instruments used, such as rags or brushes, need to be disposed of by following the product disposal instructions.” Simply put, these leftovers, and anything that has come in contact with them, need to be taken to a hazardous waste collection event or location.

    Getting rid of acrylic and latex paints.

    You should take your acrylic and latex paints to a paint recycling center, according to Cory Summerhays, founder and president of Unforgettable Coatings. “Some waste management companies have these, or local state/county agencies have also set them up,” he says. “In many areas, it is acceptable to dispose of acrylic (water-based) paint in the trash service if the paint is dried.” Additionally, you can safely dispose of these paints by spreading any leftovers out on plastic or cardboard to dry in the sun, by mixing it with kitty litter or other shredded materials and waiting for it to dry, or by purchasing a mix that is specially designed to dry out leftover paint in the can.

    Cleaning water-based paint accessories.

    If you’re looking to clean off your painting accessories like brushes, rollers, and paint trays so that you can use them again for future projects, Summerhays says you’ll need to be mindful of how you do it. “Supplies used with water-based paints are usually safe to clean with water (and detergent if needed),” he says, adding that you should never let the water run into storm drains. “After being cleaned or let dry, they are [also] safe to toss in the garbage.”

    Do your due diligence.

    While these guidelines are good for general knowledge, Summerhays says you need to be aware that there are often both state and county regulations that can vary across the country and even within a single state. “Be sure to check local regulations and suggested guidelines before disposing of any paints.”

    You have plenty of options: reuse, recycle, or dispose, for starters.

    How to safely dispose of paint

    It’s happened to the best of us: there’s a home project you’ve been dying to complete, you’ve finally found the time for it, and you head off to your local hardware store and buy far too much paint. “One bucket can’t be enough for one room, right?”

    You love DIY projects. So do we. Let’s make cool $#*% together.

    Needless to say, you probably don’t need that extra half-bucket of cerulean blue paint you used in your backyard pool area for . pretty much anything else. So, what can you do with it?

    Here, we present to you our favorite ways to reuse, recycle, or dispose of leftover paint. To make sure we’re giving you the best expert advice, we spoke with Jennifer Berry, public and strategic relations manager for Earth911, which maintains a database of recycling options for virtually every type of household product in every community in the U.S.

    💡 Pro tip: You can use Earth911’s service by clicking the “Where to Recycle” button at the top of this webpage and entering your zip code